Home

HITACHI EH150 APPLICATION MANUAL

1. EH CPU port EH VCB02 DCD 2 RxD 3 TxD P 4 DTR o 5 GND 6 DSR R 7 RTS T 8 CTS l l ee pe 21 Notifies that reception is possible gt a RS 8 1 DCD 22 Beinsaed a etis o lt DR 7 ot RxD Reception data o lt RD 6 ra an TxD P Transmission data Po gt SD 5 iE DTR PHL level monitoring PHL 4 C E GND o PNI2 3 6 DSR R PV5 2 7 RTS 28 PG5 1 8 CTS T 29 PV12 A 20 aE o 31 32 33 EH 150 port and cable connection when using LADDER EDITOR Windows for AT compatibles lt Cable EH RS05 WVCB02H for Windows gt Port No Meaning ction EH CPU port EH RSO5 H series CPU WVCB02H Notifies that reception is possible gt RS 8 1 2_ Bennscted Hem that is j4 DR 7 2 SD 2 RxD 3 Reception data o lt RD 6 X 3 RD E TxD P 4 Transmission data gt SD 5 4 RS DTR o 5 ER2 4 5 CS ae GND 6 gt ERI 3 6 6 DSR Ri 7 lt cD 2 7 DR j4 Ahi RTS 78 PGS 1 lt HHs 8 CTS 9 9 10 PG5 1 fio BA 11 12 CD 13 14 15 ee en Notifies that reception is possible gt 1 DCD connected nem tharis j4 SD 2 Reception data RD 3 p Do ra RS 4 lt CS 5 o 6 R DR 7 RTS PHL _T 8 CTS T PV12 10 PG5 OoOo 2 12 PV5 LN
2. Item number Arithmeticcommands 13 Name Logical AND AND Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpus Other than d sl AND s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Upper e e e e e OF 6 96 e 2 B Middl Command format Number of steps pias 0 4 52 e 89 amp Jcase W Condition Steps Lowet d sl AND s2 Bit word 4 case DW 18 e 77 e 79j e fay Double word 6 A Bit Word Double word v iT R TD SS WR DR amp Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT d Substitution destination OJO O 0O 0 OJO sl Comparand O O0 90 O 1O oO o o o0 O0 740 s2 Relational number O O 0 O O0 O0 O0 0 0 0 0 Function e Obtains AND of s1 and s2 and substitutes the result into d Cautionary notes e The combinations of d s1 and s2 are as follows Double word Double word Double word Program example X00111 DIF111 LD X00111 WRO102 WR0100 AND WRO10i AND DIFI11 Program description WR0102 WR0100 AND WR0101 e At the rising edge of X00111 the AND of WRO100 and WRO101 is set in WRO102 WRO100 H1234 wr0101 H5s67g When WRO102 H1230 WRO100 0001001000110100 WRO101 0101011001111000 WRO102
3. Item number Basic commands 37 Name lt Relational box lt RELATIONAL BOX Ladder format Condition code Processing time 1s Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPusas EH cpus Other than Upper See Function column DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max ee WwW o e e J 0 5 l ce Lower 50 9 91 9 100 31185 7 DW Command format Number of steps 7 5 4 LD s1 lt s2 Condition Steps indicates AND s1 lt s2 Word See Cauti tes 165194 4 o 126 7 80 6 136 2 22 228 S S or ee Cautionary notes 23 5 26 4 A A of OR OR sl lt s2 Double word See Cautionary notes Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT sl Relational number 1 oOolololiliololojlolo s2 Relational number 2 O O0 O0 oO0 0 0 0 Function Ladder format sl sl sl lt lt lt s2 s2 s2 e Compares sl and s2 as unsigned numbers and if s1 is less than s2 it enters the continuity status on and if s1 is greater than or equal to s2 enters the noncontinuity status off e When s1 and s2 are words 0 to 65 535 decimal or H0000 to HFFFF hexadecimal When s1 and s2 are double words 0 to 4 294 967 295 decimal or H00000000 to HEFFFFFFF hexadecimal Cautionary notes Number of steps wes d Double word LD AND s1 lt s2 OR s1 lt s2
4. Item number Arithmeticcommands 12 Name Logical OR OR Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpuss Other than d sl OR s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Upper e e e e e o4 e 56 e e es Middl Command format Number of steps j S 0 4 55 89 amp case W Condition Steps Lower d sl OR s2 Bit word 4 case DW 18 amp 72 amp 7 ee Double word 6 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR i Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 8 RCU CT d Substitution destination OJO O 0O 0 OJO s1 Comparand O O0 90 O 1O oO o o o oO 740 s2 Relational number O O 0 O O0 O0 O0 0 0 0 0 Function e Obtains OR of sl and s2 and substitutes the result into d Cautionary notes e The combinations of d sl and s2 are as follows Bit Bit Bit Double word Double word Double word Program example X00110 DIFI10 LD X00110 WRO102 WRO100 OR WRO101 H AND DIF110 WR0102 WR0100 OR WR0101 Program description e At the rising edge of X00110 the OR of WRO100 and WRO101 is set in WRO102 WRO100 H1234 WR0100 0001001000110100 WR0101 H5678 When WRO101 0101011001111000 WR0102 H567C WR0102 0101011001111100 5 72 Chapter 5 Command Specifications
5. Item number Basic commands 15 16 17 Name Save read clear operation result Branching of ladder Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark save R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpus Other than ORs Co Read DER ERR SD y C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max ALO L clear e e yao ace Command format Number of steps a MPS Save Condition Steps MRD Read 0 MPP Clear Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY I wL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM MIS RCU CT Function LD X00100 MPS X00100 ROO Y00001 ais ROJI l MPS OUT Y00001 MPP AND R002 OUT Y00002 MRD AND R003 OUT Y00003 MPP AND R004 OUT Y00004 e MPS stores the immediately prior operation results Push e MRD reads the results stored by the MPS and continues operation e MPP reads the results stored immediately prior by the MPS and continues operation then clears the results after operation Pull 5 29 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 18 Name Logical block series connection ANB Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ah al See Function column ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max J o o Commandformat format Number of steps i ae Woa Oef Double word word Lee TD SS Usable I O L
6. Item number Application commands 3 1 Name Swap SWAP Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu44s EH cpus Other than SWAP d DER ERR SD Vv C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 12 45 81 198 SWAP d 2 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT d_ T O to be exchanged Oo O Function e Switches the upper 8 bits and lower 8 bits contained in d Before execution d oJo o 1 1 1 o 1Jof1 1 Joli 1 ofa After execution d Cautionary notes e Use edge trigger as the startup condition for this command Program example X00000 DIFO LD X00000 1 1 SWAP WR0010 H oe DIFO SWAP WR0010 Program description e Upon rising of X00000 the upper 8 bits and lower 8 bits of WR0010 are swapped and stored in WRO010 WRO010 H1234 Before execution WRO010 H3412 After execution Note When there is no rising edge of DIFO it is executed during each scan so the upper and lower bits of WR0010 are swapped in each scan 5 118 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 32 Name FIFO initialization FIFO INITIALIZE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPu44g EH cpus Omer than FIFIT P n ERR SD V Ave Max Ave
7. Encoder C phase sv 4 CN2 Encoder location signal COIN Positioning complete 10 10 20 20 14 PROG Home position LS TORUN 0 RUN Control mode switch Manual CW M CCW Manual CCW 20 24 V DC Control power supply 4 43 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 19 Resistance Temperature Detective Input Module Name and function of each part EH PT4 Weight Approx 0 18 kg 0 4 Ib Dimensions 1 Lock button mm in 30 1 18 95 3 74 2 I O cover k EY 4 Switch A 100 3 94 3 Terminal block 1 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the fixation can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws This is the cover attached to the terminal block area o Terminal block This is the terminal block for connecting input signals The terminal block can be connected or disconnected This is to set the temperature range 2 Operation explanation The module receives input signals from outside The CPU module recognizes the status of the loaded module and when it matches the I O assignment information included in the user program input information is received according to the contents of the user program Terminal block The screws for the terminal block are M3 screws Use a crimp terminal that fits the screw diameter The maximum thickness of the
8. External view Bit Description 1 2 3 Ac Se eee O O Sets Ethernet information from the user N N program O Least significant byte of IP address Sets Ethernet information using general F Web browser F O x x O O Transmission reception test mode JONAH N LN ONT Aset 8 F O External loop back check F F O O Internal loop back check F N F O Normal operation F F Note 1 indicates that it is not dependent of the bit status 2 When the least significant byte of the IP address is to be set the switch OFF becomes 0 and ON becomes 1 3 Do not set all of the least significant bits of the IP address to OFF General specifications Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 20 to 90 RH no condensation humidity Noise proof feature e Noise voltage 1 500 Vpp noise pulse width 100 nsec 1 usec fo eve Mounted slot position 1O assignment Mounted slot position Slots 0 to 2 on the basic base up to two units can be mounted at the same time T O assignment COMM Performance specifications Specification Transfer specification Ethernet standard IEEE802 3 standard Transfer modulation Base band method Medium access method CSMA CD Transfer speed 10 Mbps Maximum inter node 4 000 m distance Maximum segment 100 m length Number of maximum 1 024 nodes total hub nodes Auto event transmission and reception function N
9. Function e Shifts the contents of d to the left toward the upper digits by n digits 1 digit is equivalent to 4 bits e 0 is set from the least significant bit to the nth digit e The digits from the most significant bit to the nth digit are discarded d n digits _____ Before execution Discarded lt After execution Most significant bit MSB Least significant bit LSB lt gt 0000 0 n digits gt Ifd is a word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 3 of the lower 2 bits b1 b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 3 decimal Ifd is a double word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 7 of the lower 3 bits b2 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 7 decimal Cautionary notes e Ifnis equal to 0 the shift is not performed Program example LD X00001 X00001 DIFI pA BSL WR0000 1 AND DIFI BSL WRO0000 1 Program description e When X00001 rises the content of WR0000 is regarded as BCD code and shifted to the left by four bits At this time the data of the lower 4 bits are deleted and 0000 is set in the upper four bits a ee 2 3 4 Before the shift H 2 3 4 After the shift 00
10. s 2 Sign 10 s 1 Higher 16 bit 543 10 107 s 4 10 10 Signs Plus H20 space s 5 10 10 Minus H2D s 6 10 10 10 ASCII code in the 10 place s 7 10 NULL The 32 bit signed binary data specified by arguments s lower and s 1 higher is converted to 10 digit decimal ASCII code and the result is stored ins 2 tos 7 If the sign is a plus it is indicated by H20 space and by H2D if it is a minus Leading zeros of the conversion result are suppressed and these digits are replaced by H20 space The remaining digits after converting to ASCII are replaced by NULL which indicates the end of a string If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Ifs 1 tos 7 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00301 X00301 DIF31 AND DIF31 DROO10 1234567 FUN 31 WR0010 DR0010 1234567 FUN 31 WR0010 Program description e The binary data 1234567 stored in WR0000 WR0010 WR0011 is converted to ASCII data e The conversion result is stored in WR0012 to WR0017 Execution results DR0010 1234567 HFFED2979 WR0012 H2020 WR0013 H2020 WR0014 H3132 WR0015 H3334 WR0016 H3536 WR0017 H3700 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 195 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from 16 bit binary to hexadecimal ASC
11. 5 104 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 18 Name Block exchange EXCHANGE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 cana XCG d1 d2 n DER ERR SD Vv c Ave Ave Ave t J e e e 44 1 2 5n 89 9 3 1n 76 0 3 1n Command format Number of steps XCG d1 d2 n 4 40 1 1 4n 123 4 1 9n 116 1 9n Double word DR Usable I O DX DY DL DM Constant Block exchange EXCHANGE Exchange source head I O Number of bits words to be exchanged The constant is set in decimal Function e Exchanges the contents of the n bits from d1 to dl n 1 and the contents between d2 and d2 n 1 e Bits are exchanged with bits and words are exchanged with words te n bits words _ pdt t d2 n 1 Ifn is a word The contents 0 to 255 of the lower 8 bits b7 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC are set to the number of bits words to be exchanged Ifn is a constant 0 to 255 decimal can be designated for the number of bits words to be exchanged Cautionary notes e Use this command so that d1 n 1 and d2 n 1 do not exceed the I O range Ifthe I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the exchange is performed up to the maximum
12. Comparing box Offline H 300 15 9 Chapter 15 Operation Examples 3 Input comparison expression and comment Comparing Box Property x 4 Click the OK button Symbol Position Row 2 Column 3 Comparing Operation S Wv10 Comparison Box property Left side Comment L Len side Comment The comment input is valid only for I O numbers In this example entering a comment for the value Right side Comment R on the right side of the expression will not generate a comment a S lt gt Gee lt ome m Operator Always enter a space between an I O number and comparison operator in this case between WY10 and as well as between a comparison operator and comparison data and 0 Example of entering a Knot 1 Specify the input position 2 Click the symbol for Knot The symbol is displayed and the cursor moves to the right Display of symbols M 4b 4t 44 11 1 01 0 0 l ee Press F1 to display Help menu Offline H 300 Example of entering a Vertical Line 1 Specify the input position 2 Click the symbol for Vertical Line The symbol is displayed on the right side of the cursor The cursor does not move Display of symbol 4 At db ha a AF KE KO KOA KOA KOA k O1 f M IEAA Eda a In case of the Horizontal Line symbol the cursor does move to the right after displaying the symbo
13. FUN2 WR0250 FUN2 WRO0300 LBL n RTI Indicates the start of the 20 ms Cycle Scan Executes FUN1 WR400 upon normal execution of FUN 0 WR403 1 By doing this an error will remain in Error Code 0 if an error occurs in FUN 0 Calculates the PID in loop 1 Calculates the PID in loop 2 Calculates the PID in loop 3 Indicates the start of the 20 ms Cycle Scan Jumps to LBL n if FUN 0 did not execute properly The commands below are executed if FUN 0 did execute properly By doing this an error will remain in Error Code 0 if an error occurs in FUN 0 Determines the loop number that will be executed in this 20ms cyclic scan Calculates the PID in loop 1 Calculates the PID in loop 2 Calculates the PID in loop 3 The command jumps to here if FUN 0 does not execute properly Please take note that INT2 is used for the EH CPU448 5 184 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Ladder format Condition code R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 Processing time us EH CPU448 EH cpug Other than R7FO left FUN 4 s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max IFR s t e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 208 370 lt 398 FUN 4 s 3 IFR s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR F Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M
14. k n bits gt Most significant bit MSB If d is a word Least significant bit LSB WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 15 decimal Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 15 of the lower 4 bits b3 to b0 of n Ifd is a double word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 31 of the lower 5 bits b4 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 31 decimal Cautionary notes e Ifnis equal to 0 the shift is not performed The previous state is retained in C Program example X00001 DIF1 a LSR WR0000 1 Program description e When X00001 rises the content of WR0000 is shifted to the right by one bit At this time 0 is set in b15 and the value of b0 immediately prior to the shift is set in R7FO 5 93 LD X00001 AND DIFI LSR WRO0000 1 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 9 Name Logical shift left LOGICAL SHIFT LEFT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPusas EH cpus Other than LSL d n DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e o o t
15. Item number Basic commands 28 Name Counter COUNTER Ladder format Condition code Processing time us oat R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpus Other than o ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max 5 e e e e 9 Command format Number of steps 3 Bit TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Constant O 0 to 511 Decimal 1 to 65 535 Decimal Counter number Set value olol lo O Function Increments the progress value by 1 each time the rising edge of the startup condition is detected and switches on the coil when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set value The coil that is switched on turns off when the counter clear CL n is switched on and the progress value is cleared to 0 The progress value is set in TC n and does not exceed 65 535 decimal If the progress value is updated while the system is running the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point If an T O is set for the set value the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I O value since the set values are updated during each scan Cautionary notes The counter can be used up to 512 points No 0 to 511 However the first 256 points No 0 to 255 will use the same area as the timer The timer numbers and counter numbers can not overlap While the counter clear CL n is on the rise of startu
16. e When DR0000 lt DR0002 R006 turns on signed 5 57 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 39 Name lt Relational box lt RELATIONAL BOX Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark x Other than R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 left Upper See Function column DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max case W e e e e e 0 5 e Lower 50 9 91 9 1100 2 185 6 case DW Command format Number of steps 7 5 LD sl lt s2 Condition Steps TART sadicates AND sl lt s2 Word See Cautionary notes 23 5 26 4 74 0 126 7 80 7 136 4 the case OR sl lt s2 Double word See Cautionary notes l of OR Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM MIS RCU CT sl Relational number 1 O O0 0 0 0 0 0 0 s2 Relational number 2 O O0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Function Ladder format sl sl sl lt lt lt s2 s2 s2 e Compares sl and s2 as unsigned numbers and if s1 is less than or equal to s2 it enters the continuity status on and if s1 is greater than s2 it enters the noncontinuity status off e When s1 and s2 are words 0 to 65 535 decimal or H0000 to HFFFF hexadecimal When s1 and s2 are double words 0 to 4 294 967 295 decimal or H00000000
17. FUN 113 s FASIN s Word Double word word e l TEE PTE i DM emn i PE PT TT LT LoL LL LT ees Function st 3 st2 st 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FASIN Real number portion Real number portion Calculates the SIN value of the real number value in radian units specified in s and s 1 as the arguments the sets the result in s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the operation result is not within the range of le 37 to le 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifstos 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed e When the value of s s 1 is greater than 1 DER is set to 1 Program example LD X00200 FOLDES DR0100 H3F800000 e AND DIFO FUN113 WRO100 DR0100 H3F800000 FUN 113 WRO100 s LE NN Program description e Ata rising edge of X0200 the SIN value of the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is calculated and the result is set in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal output setting WRO0101 H3F80 WRO100 H0000 Operation result WR0103 H3FC9 WR0102 HOFDB t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 242 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 50
18. Do not include a startup condition between FOR and NEXT If a startup condition is required create a circuit as shown below X00000 Operation description FOR 1 WM001 When X00000 is off program C is repeatedly executed for the number of WM times When X00000 is on program C is not executed since a jump is performed from JMP 1 to LBL 1 The number of repeats may be modified within the program WRO010 20 FOR 1 WRO0010 Program A ROOS m weoi H When R005 is off Program B is executed after program A is repeated 20 times When R005 is on The repeat counter WR0010 changes to 1 and since The content of WR0010 decrements by 1 and a jump is performed to FOR 1 WR0010 the NEXT 1 processing subtracts 1 from it the content of WR0010 becomes 0 Therefore the repeating of program A is terminated and program B is executed Chapter 5 Command Specifications Control commands 8 Call subroutine CALL Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU44s EH cPU3 Se CAL n Command format Number of steps CAL n Word Oef Double word word TD SS Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU RCU CT miee e EE 2 ft J osama Function If the startup condition of CAL n is on this commands executes the subroutine program the program sandwiched by SB n and RTS of the same code number If the s
19. T O refresh FUN 80 1 FUN 80 3 Program execution 2 5 224 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun eee A 34 T O refresh Input output designation Ladderformat format Condition code Processing time us Geia ewen e FUN 81 s per erR sp v c CARARE Commandformat format Number of steps Wa Double word word e Fe mi DM a e E EEE Function s HO00 Input refresh including remote H01 Output refresh including remote H02 Link refresh Depending on the I O type of the area specified by s refresh is performed with respect to I O modules only output modules only or link area only Refresh is performed by each slot assignment according to the I O assignment If the refresh processing is completed normally DER is set to 0 Cautionary notes e Ifthe I O type is other than H00 H01 or H02 DER is equal to 1 and the command will not be processed e Ifthe argument s exceeds the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and the command will not be processed Program example R000 DIFO LD R000 1 1 AND DIFO WRO0004 0 FUN 81 WR0004 ROO DIFI mmm WR0004 1 LD R001 FUN 81 WR0004 AND DIFI WR0004 1 FUN 81 WR0004 Program description e Upon rising of R000 the input module is refreshed e Upon rising of R001 the output module is refreshed 5 225 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number
20. memory capacity Assume that 640 H0280 steps are assigned as the parameter area 1 K H0400 steps as the HI FLOW memory capacity and 3 K HOCO00 steps as the HI LADDER memory capacity Request 0 0 i l i 0 k Parameter area k HI FLOW L li li jk HI LADDER _ gt A 43 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Task code Monitoring with I O number designation Classification I O control N continuous points Function Reads N continuous points words of monitor data starting with the specified I O number This task code can also be executed when the CPU is not occupied However the response task code will be H02 local station is not occupying the CPU The I O data of EH 150 outside the range returns all off 0 READ occupancy Occupancy WRITE occupancy status Not occupied T O code refer to the I O code table T O number refer to I O number decimal hexadecimal conversion chart Number of bits HO1 to HFO 1 to 240 Number of words H01 to H78 1 to 120 Response task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter Monitor data b Monitor data Bit data Number of points 8 C When the number of monitor points is less than 8 points the open bits are
21. Floating point operation calculate the TAN Calculates the TAN of the floating point number FUN 113 s FASIN s Floating point operation calculate the ARC SIN Calculates the ARC SIN of the floating point number FUN 114 s FACOS s Floating point operation calculate the ARC COS Calculates the ARC COS of the floating point number FUN 115 s FATAN s Floating point operation calculate the ARC TAN Calculates the ARC TAN of the floating point number FUN 116 s FSQR s Floating point operation calculate the square root Calculates the square root of the floating point number FUN 117 s FEXP s Floating point operation calculate the exponent Calculates the exponent of the floating point number FUN 118 s FLOG s Floating point operation logarithm Calculates the logarithm of the floating point number FUN 123 s INC s Increment Word I O Add 1 to the number specified with word I O FUN 124 s INCD s Increment Double word I O Add 1 to the number specified with double word VO FUN 125 s DEC s Decrement Word I O Subtract 1 from the number specified with word I O FUN 126 s DECD s Decrement Double word I O Subtract 1 from the number specified with double word Vo FUN 210 s LOGIT s Data logging initial
22. UNIT WY0010 WR0000 4 Program description A 4 digit BCD input display device is connected to the WY0010 and each digit displays WR0000 to WRO0003 data independently Only the lower four bits are considered valid data for WR0000 to WR0003 4 digit BCD input display device Line No Conveyor No Product type No Product No Power supply Y115 to Y112 Y111 to Y108 Y107 to Y104 Y103 to Y100 WRO0003 Line No Data 3 WROO02 Conveyor No Data 2 WROOO1 Product type No Data 7 WROO00 lt Product No Data 8 5 124 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Application commands 36 Distribute DISTRIBUTE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU44s EH CPU3 ee DIST d s n DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max t e e e J Commandformat format Number of a Steps DIST d s n Usable I O Constant Distribution result write destination head I O T O to be distributed Number of words to be O distributed Function Distributes s into 4 bit sections and sets to the lower 4 bits of the n words starting from d The upper 12 bits of the range d to d n 1 will be 0 The value of s will be retained even if DIST is executed Use this command so that s n 1 does not exceed t
23. Bit Word Double word R TD ss WR DR amp Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wWL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT d Decode destination head I O O s_ Word I O to be decoded O O0 0 0 O n Number of bits to be O 1 to 8 decimal decoded Function e Decodes the lower n bits of s to 2 and outputs 1 to the decoded bits in the bit rows between d and d 2 1 where n 1 to 8 e Ifnis 0 the command will not be executed and the contents of d to d 2 1 remain unchanged b15 b7 bd d 2 1 d B d pee a nbits n 1 to 8 2 Cautionary notes e Use this command so that d 2 1 does not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the decoding is performed at the maximum range starting from d For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table e Use to 8 forn Program example LD R100 R100 DIFI AND DIFI m DECO R000 WX0000 4 DECO R000 WX0000 4 Program description e When WX0000 HFFFF ROOF which is the 15th bit from R000 among the bits indicated by the lower four bit values of WxX0000 is set to 1 upon rising of R100 5 113 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 27 Name Encode ENCODE Ladder format Condition code Processing time
24. Counter clear Process descriptions Indicates an on delay timer operation Indicates the operation of the extended on delay timer only for the EH CPU448 Indicates a single shot operation Indicates a mono stable timer operation Indicates a integral timer operation Indicates a watchdog timer operation Indicates a counter operation Indicates a ring counter operation Indicates an up operation of up down counter Indicates a down operation of up down counter Indicates a clear operation for CU RCU CTU CTD and WDT TDO to TD255 When 0 01 s it is ible to use from TMO to TM2047 o 0 01 S SS255 0 01 s it is i o use from o MS255 0 01 s it is i o use from to TMR255 0 01 s it is i o use from WTD0 to WTD255 When 0 01 s it is possible to use from 0 to 63 CU0 to CU511 E T a a eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ae Process time us Number overlap not allowed Duplicate numbers allowed only for TM Chapter 5 Command Specifications 3 Basic commands relational box Process Process descriptions I O types used time u s Remarks Relational When s1 s2 Continuity Word When s1 s2 Noncontinuity WX WY WR WL WM Timer Counter Ladder symbol Classification Item number Command wn 9o P x i E 5 3 Double word DX DY DR DL DM gt wn Constant Signed When
25. Program description Time chart X00000 st l R123 a 7 1 scan time e Upon rising of X00000 on R123 turns on for one scan e Ifb contact is used for X00000 operation will be the same as the a contact DFN operation 5 24 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 9 Name Falling edge detection AND DFN OR DFN Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark aij DFN n R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpus Other than y U DEN DEN j DER ERR SD Vv C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max aoe YF e e e o AND Command format Number of steps 3 05 lt DFN AND DFN n Condition Steps 0 3 H 2 7 2 9 Lower R DEN AND DEN 1 came O n n 3 3 10 DFN OR DFN n 4 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM MIS RCU CT n Number O 0to 511 Decimal Function e Detects the fall of an input signal and retains the operation result for one scan indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e DFN number may not be overlapped However no error is generated even if overlapped numbers are used e DFN cannot use the b contact Program example X00000 DFNO R124 LD X00000 m A AND DFNO OUT R124 Program
26. w Internal circuit Z Z Z Z fon i l l i i Hh fee 29S 4 45 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 20 Ethernet Module Name and function of each part EH ETH i Ay 0 15 kg 0 33 Ib 5 Lock button Weight pprox g b Dimensions mm in 1 LED cover 30 1 18 95 3 74 jk lt __ _ _ __ gt 3 Reset switch 2 Dip switch 100 3 94 4 Ethernet connector i tion eeann aiea ile Sestieopentcnmeds O O OO EO oe OOOO 5 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the attachment can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws Explanation of LED display diagram Indicates the Ethernet line connection status Tx Rx Indicates the data transmission and Sending or receiving reception status R Indicates Ethernet information setting Error present No error LERR ERR STATUS POW Tx Rx error Indicates whether or not a Error present No error transmission or reception error has occurred STATUS Indicates whether or not a hardware Error present No error error has occurred flashes 1 Displays the type of a hardware error by the illumination color and flash count For details refer to the Ethernet Module Application Manual NJI 361 X 4 46 Chapter 4 System Equipment Operation mode setting
27. Leading zero suppressed digit e If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 e Signed data must be in the range from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 201 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Cautionary notes e Ifthe sign is other than H20 and H2D and other digits are other than H30 to H39 0 to 9 DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed However this does not apply to HOO and H20 NULL and space of leading zero suppressed digits e If data is outside the range from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed e Ifs 1tos 7 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example X00307 DIF37 FA WR0060 H2D32 WR0061 H3134 WR0062 H3734 WR0063 H3833 WR0064 H3634 WR0065 H3800 FUN 37 WR0060 LD X00307 AND DIF37 WRO0060 H2D32 WRO0061 H3134 WR0062 H3734 WR0063 H3833 WR0064 H3634 WR0065 H3800 FUN 37 WR0060 Program description e The ASCII data 2 1 4 7 4 8 3 6 4 8 stored in WR0060 to WR0065 is converted to binary data e The conversion result is stored in WR0067 higher and WR0066 lower Execution results WR0060 H2D32 WR0061 H3134 WR0062 H3734 WR0063 H3833 WR0064 H3634 WR0065 H
28. Stopping the CPU during operation causes the motor to decelerate and come to a stop The maximum travel per single movement is 2 147 483 647 pulses When an operation was attempted to move beyond the maximum travel the motor decelerates and stops at the maximum travel position 4 42 Chapter 4 System Equipment I O interface specifications Pulse chain CW CCW output 1 Open collector output Photocoupler insulation 30 V DC maximum 30 mA Clock direction signal resistive load CK direction Pulse output 2 Lone driver output Photocoupler insulation 5 V DC Maximum leakage current 100 u A or less Maximum voltage drop at ON 0 8 V maximum at output current 30 mA Input Input voltage 10 8 to 30 V DC Input impedance Approximately 2 2 k Q Approximately 10mA Q4VDO SSSSOSOSOSOSCSCS Operation Minimum ON 9V voltage voltage Maximum OFF 6 voltage Input lag oon a OFF 1 ms or less OFF gt OFF gt ON 1 ms or less Polarity Only the encoder signal input uses the plus common inside the module Other Ae e asasan do not specify polarity Insulation method Photocoupler ee A Positioner connector CN1 Conforms to RS 422 Terminal layout No Signal Signal name Internal ladder diagram 1 Do Driver output 7 i Internal HRY GND p7 5svV A Positioner SV DC Pulse output power supply Open collector pulse output Line driver Internal circuit vA pulse output
29. When exchanging while the basic base unit power turned off perform steps 4 5 and 6 in less than one minute Precautions when handling the battery Be careful when replacing the battery since false replacement may cause the battery to explode Use LIBAT H for new batteries Batteries that have been replaced should be individually placed in a suitable plastic bag to prevent shorting and a disposal company should be requested to dispose of them At this time do not short the batteries throw them in the fire dismantle them exert external force expose them to water charge them or cut the lead wires since doing so leads to the risk that the batteries will ignite explosion or burn up 16 3 Chapter 16 Daily and Periodic Inspection 16 4 Appendix 1 Cable Connection Diagram Appendix 1 Cable Connection Diagram EH 150 port and cable connection when using LADDER EDITOR for PC9801 HL PC3 lt Cable EH RS05 PCCBO2H gt EH CPU port EH RSOS H series CPU computer 25P RS 8 1 DR 7 RD 6 SD 5 ER2 4 ERI 3 CD 2 PGS 1 RS 8 Pal ee DR 7 2 TxD 23 RD 6 3 RxD 24 Transmission data SD 5 4 RTS 25 PHL level monitoring PHL 4 5 CTS 26 PN12 3 6 DSR 27 PV5 2 F PG5 1 8 DCD 9 PG5 20 DTR EH 150 port and cable connection when using LADDER EDITOR for Windows
30. a Response task code HOO when executed normally b Version 4 digit BCD This is the version of the system software ROM for CPU 4 Read error code subcommand H03 a Response task code HOO when executed normally b CPU error code 2 digit hexadecimal This is the same code as the contents of special internal output WRFOO0 5 Read CPU name subcommand H04 Response task code H00 when executed normally CPU name 16 ASCII code characters If it is less than 16 characters Null H20 are added until 16 characters are reached A 20 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications 1 CPU status 4 digits b area details response to the subcommand H00 15 14 13 bit 11 to 8 CPU type bit 0 Run stop flag bit 1 Halt status flag bit 3 Error status Flag 1 These flags are turned on off by peripheral devices bit 7 Battery error flag bitl1 to 8 CPU type flag 0011 EH CPU104 208 308 3 16 448 bitO Run stop flag Displays the run stop status of CPU 1 Run 0 Stop Halt status flag Displays whether or not the CPU is halted 1 Halted 0 Not halted Unused 0 Error status flag Displays whether or not the CPU is in the error status 1 Error 0 Normal When this flag is 1 error details may be determined by reading the CPU error code refer to 4 Unused 0 Unused 0 Unused 0 Battery error flag Disp
31. e Are there any warps in the power supply waveform e Are there any excessive noises in the power supply e Is power supplied for all basic and expansion modules e Is the capacity of the power supply module greater than the total of module consumption current b CPU related items e Are the initial settings CPU initialization I O assignment parameter settings etc proper e Are there any error codes that are output to the special internal output e Is the RUN switch in the proper location e Are batteries mounted properly Is the battery life still remaining e Are the CPU connectors properly connected to the base connectors c Input module related items e Is the input voltage within the specifications for the module e Is there any noise or chattering in the input e Do the I O assignment numbers in the program match e Is the wiring done properly d Output module related items e Do the module and the load power supply type DC AC match e Do the load voltage and current match the module specifications e Is there any noise or chattering in the output waveform e Is the wiring done properly e Do the I O assignment numbers in the program match e Are there any unintentional overlaps in the output numbers e Wiring related items e Is the FE terminal of the power supply module grounded using class 3 dedicated grounding e Is the wiring between the expansions mixed up with other wires e Are the power supply wiring
32. e The sum of the values in WR0000 and WRO001 is substituted into WR0002 at the rising edge of input X00000 5 62 Item number Arithmeticcommands 3 Name Chapter 5 Command Specifications BCD addition BCD ADDITION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Other than left d sl B s2 ERR SD Vv Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Command format Number of steps Bit Double word 6 Word 36 82 193 lt TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT WR WY WL Constant Upper case W Lower case DW s1 B s2 d Ld Substitution destination sl Augend s2 Addend Function Adds s1 and s2 as BCD data and stores the result in d as BCD data The C flag is 1 if there is a digit increase and 0 if not The DER flag is 1 if the operation result s1 and s2 are invalid BCD data In such cases operation is not performed and the C flag retains the previous state without outputting to d If the s1 and s2 are valid BCD data the DER is set to 0 When s1 s2 are words 0000 to 9999 BCD When s1 s2 are double words 00000000 to 99999999 BCD Cautionary notes e The combinations of d s1 and s2 are as follows Double word Double word Double word Program example X00000 DIFO J J WL00
33. 100 3 94 9 Battery holder 13 Port setting toggle switch 1 RUN lamp 10 Battery 3 3 2 ERR lamp 11 Battery connector 3 Reset switch for the power failure memory protection Ehetere 8 RUN switch 12 Mode setting DIP switch Drawing of CPU module bottom RUN lamp Indicates that the CPU is running Indicates that the CPU is generating an abnormal Red Clears the area designated for power failure memory Enabled only during a stoppage Connects a programming device etc Refer to the detailed explanation Connects a programming device etc Refer to the detailed explanation This is used when operating the RUN switch or replacing the battery A Kock baton eaten aera RUN swich Used 1o control the ramming status o Banery hotder Used for putting abateryin Si 07 Battery Retains power failure memory data orclock data SCS 121 Mode setting DIP switch Sets the operating status forthe serial por ete 131 Port seting toggle switch Switches the operating status for the serial pot 14 Optional sot Memory boardissa O OO O SSS 151 Binding screw hole Fix the memory board with binding screw Chapter 4 System Equipment tem O Detailed explanation Remarks Explanation of operation Operations are performed according to the contents of the program created by the user The programming device connected to the CPU module communication port w
34. Command Classification Item number N a a Q wn wn N Logical operations Timer Counter Constant Double word g an a D 2 a x S E f B amp v Signed When sl s2 d amp 1 Relational Whensl s2 d amp 0 expression sl and s2 are compared as signed 32 bit binary d s1 lt gt s2 When s1 s2 d 0 When sl s2 d amp 1 Timer Counter Constant Double word 8 d s1 S lt gt s2 Signed lt gt When s1 s2 d 0 Double word Relational Whensl s2 d lt 1 d Y R L M expression sl and s2 are comparedas sl s2 DX DY signed 32 bit binary 9 d s1 lt s2 lt Relational When s1 lt s2 d amp 1 expression When s1 2 s2 d amp 0 d s1 S lt s2 Signed lt When sl s2 d amp 1 Double word Relational When s1 s2 d lt 0 d Y R L M expression sl and s2 are comparedas S s2 DX DY signed 32 bit binary 5 8 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Process Process descriptions I O types used Or Oc ar ox time u s Remarks benfenal so v o EH 150 lt Relational When s1 lt s2 d lt 1 When s1 gt s2 d amp 0 Ladder symbol Classification Command pS ET Item number Relational expression 22 d s1 S lt s2 Signed lt When sl lt s2 d lt 1 Double word Relational When s1 gt s2 d lt 0 d Y R L M expression s1 and s2 are compared as sl s2 DX DY signed 32 bit binary Application commands C d Pro
35. General port Dedicated port Dedicated port being connected Line check Part 1 Line status Being connected Line connection check Dedicated port being connected Line check Part 2 Line status Being connected Line connection check Call disconnection request Dedicated general switch request Call origination request Being connected Line connection check Call disconnection request Not connected 5 164 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Dedicated port Mode Dedicated port General port Dedicated port Chapter 5 Command Specifications Dedicated port being connected Call origination Line status Not connected Dedicated port Dedicated general switch request General port Call disconnection request Call origination request Dedicated port Call termination ring reception check is not performed before the AT command is issued It may result in either normal completion or abnormal completion line busy termination detected no response In case of abnormal completion retry the operation When changed from RUN to STOP The port mode is set to the dedicated port If a modem is connected using the general port the line will be placed in the disconnected status If the port is the dedicated port no status change will occur 5 165 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Error code TRNS 8 error code list Types of errors 1 Dedicated general port switch request
36. H 150 HITACHI APPLICATION MANUAL VAC ral FeINOGIRVANIVIIVIV ANES CONROE BER HITACHI PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER MIDIG E H 150 APPLICATION MANUAL NJI 281 B X Safety Precautions Read this manual and related documents thoroughly before installing operating performing preventive maintenance or performing inspection and be sure to use the unit correctly Use this product after acquiring adequate knowledge of the unit all safety information and all cautionary information Also make sure this manual enters the possession of the chief person in charge of safety maintenance Safety caution items are classified as Danger and Caution in this document Cases where if handled incorrectly a dangerous circumstance may be created resulting in lt lt DANGER Riots possible death or severe injury Cases where if handled incorrectly a dangerous circumstance may be created resulting in CAUTION possible minor to medium injury to the body or only mechanical damage However depending on the circumstances items marked with UN CAUTION may result in major accidents In any case they both contain important information so please follow them closely Icons for prohibited items and required items are shown below Indicates prohibited items items that may not be performed For example when open flames are prohibited amp is Shown Q Indicates required items items that must be performed For ex
37. H0005 Double definition of There are 2 or more INT commands with the Limit the INT command that has 2 IN same number in the program or more of the same number to 1 H0010 END undefined There is no END command prior to the INT SB Define the END command before commands the INT or SB command H0011 RTS undefined There is no RTS command corresponding to the Define the RTS command after the SB command SB command H0012 RTI undefined There is no RTI command corresponding to the Define the RTI command after the INT command INT command H0013 SB undefined There is no SB command corresponding to the Define the SB command before the RTS command RTS command H0014 INT undefined There is no INT command corresponding to the Define the INT command before RTI command the RTI command H0020 RTS area error There is an RTS command in the normal scan Define the RTS command within area or periodic scan program area the subroutine area H0021 RTI area error There is an RTI command in the normal scan area Define the RTI command within or subroutine program area the interrupt scan area H0022 END area error There is an END command in the periodic scan Define the END command at the area or subroutine program area end of the normal scan area H0023 CEND area error There is a CEND command in the periodic scan Define the CEND command within area or subroutine program area the normal scan area H0030 RTS start condition error There is a start condition in th
38. O Note FOR and NEXT duplicate definition errors will occur during operation pre processing Program R NEXT 3 FOR and NEXT must be within the same area Program head FOR 1 WR0001 FOR 2 WRO0002 END Normal scan Subroutine SB1 RTS SB2 NEXT 3 SBI NEXT 2 ii Subroutine SB2 FOR 4 WR0004 RTS INTO FOR 3 WR0003 Interrupt scan a 4 Use FOR to NEXT as a nest FOR 1 WM001 FOR 2 WM002 NEXT 1 FOR 1 WMO001 to NEXT 1 will execute normally e Nesting error When WM002 0 Since FOR 1 WM001 to NEXT 1 is prioritized jump will not be performed over NEXT 1 from FOR 2 to NEXT 2 At this time NEXT 2 generates a FOR 2 undefined error When WMO002 0 FOR 2 will not do anything Therefore NEXT 2 will generate a FOR 2 undefined error Program NEXT 2 5 6 5 136 Chapter 5 Command Specifications It is possible to escape from a FOR to NEXT loop using a jump command FOR 1 WMO001 The FOR 1 to NEXT 1 loop is escaped when X00000 turns on before the loop has been repeated for the set number of CJIMP 10 x00000 repeats content of WM001 NEXT 1 LBL10 FOR to NEXT may be nested up to 5 levels When a subroutine is included the FOR to NEXT within the subroutine is counted FOR 1 WR0001 FOR 2 WR0002 FOR 3 WR0003 FOR 4 WR0004 FOR 5 WR0005 FOR 6 WR0006 e Nesting overflow error NEXT 6 NEXTS5 NEXT 4 NEXT 3 NEXT 2 NEXT 1
39. R100 DIF45 Program description WM000 H3031 WMO001 H3233 WM002 H3435 WM003 H3600 ADRIO WM020 WM000 ADRIO WM021 WMO010 FUN 45 WM020 Y00000 M0220 Y00001 M0221 Y00002 M0222 LD R7E3 WM000 H3031 WM001 H3233 WM002 H3435 WM003 H3600 LD R100 AND DIF45 ADRIO WM020 WMO000 ADRIO WM021 WM010 FUN 45 WM020 Y00000 M0220 Y00001 M0221 Y00002 M0222 1 The compared data is stored in WMO000 and succeeding areas by special internal output R7E3 single scan ON after RUN start 2 At a rising edge of R100 the data beginning from WMO000 and the data beginning from WM010 are compared 3 Depending on the comparison result Y00000 to Y00002 turn on 5 214 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from word units to byte units Item number Fun commands 27 Name CONVERSION WORDS TO BYTES Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee FUN 46 s 5 words WTOB s to 10 bytes Command format Number of steps word 3 FUN 46 s WTOB s Wa O Double word word TD ON Usable I O Y l WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU p CT Word dataheadVONo _ Actual addresses are set ins ands 1 s 1 Byte conversion data eee RANNA ey sa nooremas 1 lef TTT Function Constant Word unit data Byte
40. R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU44s EH CPU3 Sme hap UNIT d s n DER ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max t e e Command format Number of s Condition UNIT d s n Usable I O Constant Unity result write destination I O Unity destination head I O Numbers of words to be united Function e Sets the values in the lower 4 bits of each of the n 1 to 4 words starting from s to the lower 4 bits of each word in d e Ifnis 1 to 3 the bits not set in d will be 0 e The data stored in s to s n 1 will be retained even if UNIT is executed Use this command so that s n 1 does not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the lower 4 bits within the range between s and I O will be set in d For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table Upper digits Lower digits When n is 0 B1 to B4 of d are 0 Tol a TT When n is 1 B2 to B4 of d are 0 B4 When n is 2 B3 to B4 of d are 0 f When n is 3 B4 of dis 0 Ignored Cautionary notes e When n 0 DER 0 and 0 will be set in the write destination I O e When n gt 5 nothing is executed 5 123 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example X00001 DIFO 1 1 UNIT WY0010 WR0000 4 H LD X00001 AND DIFO
41. SEINIEN EA ntl Te el Avie ae es 5 4 3 2 1 0 rec Ifd is a word Designates the bit location depending on the contents 0 to 15 of the lower 4 bits b3 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 15 decimal Ifd is a double word Designates the bit location depending on the contents 0 to 31 of the lower 5 bits b4 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 31 decimal Program example X00200 DIF200 LD X00200 BSET DR0100 WX0000 t AND DIF200 BRES DR0102 WX0000 BTS DR0104 WX0000 BSET DR0100 WX0000 R000 RIFO BRES DR0102 WX0000 BTS DR0104 WX0000 R000 R7F0 5 85 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program description When WX0000 H1234 at the rising edge of X00200 WX0000 0001001000110100 UY 20 decimal If DRO100 H00000000 DRO102 HFFFFFFFF and DR0104 H5555AAAA are set the 20th bit of DRO100 is set to 1 by the BSET at the rising edge of X00200 b31 b20 bO DR0100 00000000000000000000000000000000 This bit is set to 1 Also the 20th bit of DR0102 is reset to 0 by BRES b31 b20 b0 DR0102 11111111111111111111111111111111 This bit is set to 0 Also the 20th bit of DR0104 is checked by BTS b31 b20 b0 DR0104 01010101010
42. Stores the absolute value of s in d and the sign value of s in carry R7F0 0 Positive 1 Negative If the value of carry R7FO is 0 the value is stored in d and if it is 1 two s complement of the s is stored in d Copies the sign bit value of s to all bits in the upper word of d and stores the value of s in the lower word of d Converts the value of s into BCD and stores it in I O number d If there the value of s is erroneous DER R7F4 is set Converts the value of s into binary and stores it in I O number d If there the value of s is erroneous DER R7F4 is set Decodes the value indicated by the least significant n bits of s and sets the bit that corresponds to the decoding result of the bit row starting from I O number d to 1 Encodes the bit location in which 1 is set within the bit row which starts with I O number s and lasts for the amount of nth power of 2 and stores it in I O number d If multiple bits that contain 1 exist the one with the upper bit locations will be encoded Coverts the value of s as a 1 digit 4 bit value to a 4 digit 7 segment display code and stores it in d Double word DY DR DL DM WY WR WL WM Double word DY DR DL DM Double word d DY DR DL DM s DX DY DR DL DM Constant s WX WY WR WL WM TC Constant Double word d DY DR DL DM s DX DY DR DL DM Constant d R L M s WX WY WR WL WM
43. The periodical system interrupt is executed by interrupts at every 10 ms regardless of whether or not there is a periodical scan The congestion check time can be Normal scan time normal scan only set to 20 ms to 2 550 ms using peripheral devices by the users Congestion check time yl Figure 8 9 Congestion error at normal scan a b When both a normal scan program and a periodical scan program are used The congestion check time was exceeded because the periodical scan program was executed and the normal scan time became longer Figure 8 10 shows an example of operation by CPUs other than the EH CPU448 Periodical Periodical system lt 10 ms processing 9 sesse Periodical program Normal END scan processing E E ra Ura E eon scan Program execution scan Scan time Congestion check time Figure 8 10 Congestion error at normal scan b 3 Continuation of operation after a congestion error occurred When the special internal output R7CO which specifies whether the operation should continue after a congestion error occurred is turned on the normal scan executes the scan until the end regardless of the congestion check time and after ae the END scan Proce executes the normal scan from the beginning again Normal END scan processing scan Program execution Scan time Congestion check time yl Figure 8 11 Operation when operation continuation at congestion er
44. WMO00 Example When WM000 H0010 and WMO001 H0015 it holds the same meaning as WR0010 WR0015 5 61 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 2 Name Binary addition BINARY ADDITION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH cPU3 meee d sl s2 ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max J J 0 4 56 Command format Number of s Condition d sl s2 Word P Double word Bit ZS 1S TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Constant a Substitution destination Function e Adds sl and s2 as binary data and substitutes the result into d as binary data e The C flag is 0 if the operation result is within the range of H0000 to HFFFF for word and H00000000 to HFFFFFFFF for double word It is 1 otherwise C slm s2m slm dm s2m dm e The V flag is 1 if the operation result is meaningless as signed binary data and 0 if it is meaningful Poste a 0 C Negine Postve Negatv Posive 0 E oe e 0 V s1m s2m dm sIm gt s2m dm Cautionary notes e The combinations of d sl and s2 are as follows aep a Double word Double word Double word Program example X00000 DIFO LD X00000 1 f WRO0002 WR0000 WRO001 AND DIFO WR0002 WR0000 WR0001 Program description
45. WY10 WY10 1 00011 00012 Subroutine 0 Turn on the reception execution flag Turn off the reception normal completion flag 00013 RECV 0 WX0 WRO R200 SS 00014 10 12 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 10 4 Modem Control Function EH CPU208 308 316 448 is equipped with a modem control function The modem control function can be controlled using task codes To use this function the mode setting switch must be set For setting switches refer to P4 6 EH CPU104 does not have this function Connecting the two operating modems may be difficult if there is a large difference between them in communication speeds Match to eliminate any difference in communication speeds i04 Configuration Modem E EH CPU RS 232C MAX 38 400 bps Personal Modem computer Commercial line 10 4 2 Connection specifications Transmission speed 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps Communication speed between the modem and PLC depends on the setting for the special internal output WRF01A Communication Full duplex communication program is half duplex control system Synchronization Start stop synchronization system Transmission system Serial transmission bit serial transmission Transmission code ASCII code Transmission code Start bit 1 bit Parity bit 1 bit configuration Stop bit 1 bit Data 7 bit Even parity Transmission code Sent out from the lowest bit
46. Y102 1 Process c processing Y101 0 cc jrs m 5 186 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Cautionary notes notes Set the actual R L and M address for the parameters s through s 2 using the ADRIO command If the areas designated by s to s 2 overlap if s 1 s 2 or s 3 falls out of range DER will be equal to 1 and the command will not be processed Do not designate the same I O for arguments of different processes since the action of the current process is levelled by the previous process Each process requires at least one scan time M0967 X00000 M400 X00001 M401 X00002 M402 Process a M400 Process b M401 Process c M402 t One scan time is necessary In the program example described previously the external I O X Y are used as switch signals of a process thus the time for performing I O refresh i e at least one scan period is required for each process 5 187 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than FUN 10 s DER ERR SD v C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max SIN s t e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 39 87 amp 105 lt FUN 10 s 3 SIN s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR F Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX
47. a Check the program Is there disconnection wrong wiring or loose screw on the terminal block Perform rewiring Is the relay drive power supply connected Supply 24 V DC power Is the voltage meeting the specification in the terminal block Change the voltage and polarity to satisfy the specifications There is an abnormal or damage on the connector of the basic or extension base unit Replace the base unit Are there any abnormals in internal contactors of the terminal block Replace the terminal block Replace the corresponding module 14 13 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting T O assignment error is generated but output is normal 7 Is OPEN 16 assigned to open slots in the I O assignment Is there consistency between the program and T O assignment Correct the inconsistency Are there any abnormals or damages in the connector of the basic or extension base unit Replace the base unit Replace the corresponding module f Peripheral devices abnormal Peripheral devices cannot be connected wy Is it a serious CPU failure Replace the CPU module Are the connection cable type continuity and connector connections normal Check the connector Replace the cable Is the communication baud rate setting of the CPU Correct the setting module
48. b Head address absolute address in the CPU module c Number of steps HO1 to H3C 60 steps maximum Response a Ist step Nth step a Response task code H00 For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter b Program contents Description Request Head address Number of steps User memory Response HOO H31 Ist step 2nd step 3rd step s Ist step Number of on 2nd step 3rd step ee N A 38 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Reads three steps starting with address H1ABO Request 1 A B O O0O 3 I Head address Number of steps Response Ist step 3rd step A 39 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Function Returns the circuit number head address and the number of steps of the final circuit HI LADDER only Execution condition CPU status READ occupancy Occupancy WRITE occupancy status Request H33 Response a a Response task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter b Circuit number 4 digit hexadecimal c Head address 4 digit hexadecimal d Number of steps 4 digit hexadecimal Note When there is no program b Cir
49. for PC9801 No Meaning EH CPU port EH RS05 H series CPU computer 25P 1 Notifies that reception is possible RS 8 1 lt lt ___________ _ _ gt 9 Slanis of fhe itera thal ts DR 7 2 SD me a 3 Reception data RD 6 A 3 RD 3 RxD Transmission data SD 5 4 RS 4 RTS ER2 4 5 CS E y CIS ERI 3 6 6 DSR CD 2 7 DR 7 GND PGS 1 lt H s 8 DCD ee T 11 12 CD ae 14 15 20 DTR 21 Notifies that reception is possible 1 lt lt lt 1 22 Bonmscred tem that is TxD Reception data 3 RxD 24 Transmission data 4 RTS PHL level monitoring S CTS 6 DSR 7 8 DCD 9 PG5 20 DTR lt Cable EH RS05 WPCB02H gt Personal Personal The pin numbers 1 to 8 of the EH CPU port have been changed beginning with this manual NJI 281B X For the correspondence between pin numbers and connectors see the figure in Chapter 10 Communication Specifications of this manual A 1 Appendix 1 Cable Connection Diagram EH 150 port and cable connection when using LADDER EDITOR HL AT3E for AT compatibles lt Cable EH VCB02 gt
50. output shuts off Scanning stops at scan END Transfer to operation HALT time execution memory Scan resumes Transfer to FLASH memory E Figure 8 15 Internal processing for an online change in RUN 8 8 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 8 2 2 HALT time When performing online change in RUN the program to be written to the CPU is checked if there are no errors then the CPU is halted temporarily RUN HALT The program of the modified area is written to the CPU while it is halted and the CPU is set to operate HALT gt RUN again At this time the approximate time the CPU is halted will is obtained in the equation below it is not necessarily the maximum value HALT time ms 45 x Program capacity ks 20 EH CPU104 208 38 x Program capacity ks 10 EH CPU308 316 29 x Program capacity ks 60 EH CPU448 An example of a calculation of the HALT time using the above equation is shown below Program HALT time ms capacity ks EH CPU104 EH CPU208 EH CPU308 EH CPU316 EH CPU448 8 9 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 8 3 Instantaneous Power Failure What happens when the power supply to the EH 150 shuts off is shown below Internal 5 V DC Internal reset 24 V DC ON RUN OFE_ EH 150 operation l l i Instantaneous power failure o l RUN status STOP status Starts operation p Reset
51. s 5 s 4 Real number portion Real number portion 15 0 15 0 f hz Real number portion Real number portion FDIV 33 342 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion Divides real number s s 1 by real number s 2 s 3 then sets the result in s 4 s 5 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes n m 2 er o x g e When the operation result is not within the range of le 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifs to s 5 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00200 e DIFO DRO100 143488000 AND DIFO DE0102 H42C88000 FUN107 WRO0100 DR0100 H43488000 DR0102 H42C88000 FUN 107 WR0100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is divided by the real number specified in DRO102 WR0102 WRO0103 and the result is set in DRO104 WRO0104 WRO105 Internal output setting WRO0101 H4348 WRO100 H8000 WRO103 H42C8 WR0102 H8000 Operation result WR0105 H4000 WR0104 H0000 1 The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 236 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 44 Floating Point Operation Angle to Radian Conversion Ladder format Condition code
52. then sets the result in s 4 s 5 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes FUN 106 s e When the operation result is not within the range of le 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifs to s 5 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00200 cate DIFO DRO100 H43488000 AND DIFO DE0102 H42C90000 FUN106 WRO100 DR0100 H43488000 DR0102 H42C90000 FUN 106 WR0100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is multiplied by the real number specified in DRO102 WR0102 WRO0103 and the result is set in DRO104 WR0104 WRO105 Internal output setting WRO0101 H4348 WRO100 H8000 WRO103 H42C9 WR0102 H0000 Operation result WRO105 H469D WR0104 H6C80 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 235 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 43 Floating Point Operation Division Ladder format Condition code Processing time us eriu ere OetTRan FUN 107 s DER per err sp v c_ ZEON EOE IRARS Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 107 s FDIV s Word Double word word e l TEE PTE DM ain CEEE CLEE a E Function s 1 15 015 i 0
53. 00010010001 10000 5 73 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 14 Name Exclusive OR EXCLUSIVE OR Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpuss Other than d sl XOR s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Upper e e e e e o4 e sel lige e 2B Middl Command format Number of steps PES 0 4 52 e 89 Jease W a Condition Steps Lower A d sl XOR s2 Bit word 4 case DW gt 18 e 7 e amp 79 e rs Double word 6 F Bit Word Double word N pe R TD SS WR DR Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT d Substitution destination OJO O O0O 0 OJO sl Comparand O O0 0 O 1Oo O o oO O0 O0 74 0 s2 Relational number O O0 0 O O o0 o0 0 0 0 0 Function e Obtains exclusive OR XOR of s1 and s2 and substitutes the result into d Cautionary notes e The combinations of d s1 and s2 are as follows Bit Bit Bit Double word Double word Double word Program example X00112 DIF112 LD X00112 WRO102 WRO100 XOR WRO101 H AND DIF112 WR0102 WR0100 XOR WR0101 Program description e At the rising edge of X00112 the XOR of WRO100 and WRO101 is set in WRO102 WRO100 H1234 Wh W
54. 4 5 stored in WR0050 to WR0052 is converted to binary data e The conversion result is stored in WR0053 Execution results WROO50 H3 132 WRO0051 H3334 WRO052 H3500 WR0053 12345 H3039 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 200 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from 10 digit signed decimal ASCII to 32 bit binary data Item number Funcommands 18 Name DOUBLE DECIMAL ASCII TO BINARY Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee DDABIN s FUN 37 s Wa O Double word word TD a Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL Other TMR CU RCU CT Ps remenase fff fot P Sees nan ora E acces a ee ae UD AE Se s 5 Argument ASCII code H20 and H30 to H39 s uses up tos 7 Signed decimal ASCII data 32 bit signed binary data Constant s 6 Lower 16 bit stl 108 10 s 7 Higher 16 bit s 2 10 10 s 3 10 10 Signs Plus H20 space s 4 10 10 Minus H2D s 5 10 i H00 10 ASCII code in the 10 place e The 10 digit signed decimal ASCII data specified by arguments s to s 6 is converted to 32 bit binary data and the result is stored in s 7 higher and s 6 lower e Arguments will be combinations of H00 H20 H30 to H39 and H2D e Higher digit s HOO and H20 NULL and space are processed as H30 0
55. 5 230 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 38 Floating Point Operation Integer Word to Real Number Conversion Ladder format Condition code Processing time us rtu en oruer Oran FUN 102 s per err sp v c_ FLOAT s eae areease Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 102 s FLOAT s Word Double word word e l TEE PTE DM Ps awe PE TT LT LoL LL LT eea Function st2 s 1 s 15 0 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion lt FLOAT e Converts the integer word data s to a real number then sets the result in s 1 and s 2 e Ifthe calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 e The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e An integer value in the range of 32 768 to 32 767 can be set for s and s 1 e Ifs to s 2 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example 7 LD X00200 X00209 WRO0100 H7FFF 1 Tf FUN102 WR0100 DRO100 H7FFF FUN 102 WR0100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the integer specified in WRO100 is converted to a real number and the result is set in DRO101 WRO101 WRO102 Internal output setting WR0100 H7FFF Operation result WR0102 H46FF WRO101 HFEOO The EH CPU104 208 are not s
56. 5 254 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Fun commands 62 Expand bit data to word data Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than FUN 127 s DER ERR SD y C Ave max Ave Max Ave Max BITTOW s t e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 139 lt FUN 127 s 3 BITTOW s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DN amp RCU CT DM s Bit header I O No O Specify with actual address Note s 1 No of bits O 0 to 16 s 2 Word I O No O Specify with actual address Note Function e The number of bits s 1 from the bit header I O number s will be set in the specified word I O number s 2 starting with the lowest bit e Ifthe number of bits set in s 1 is less than 16 between 1 and 15 the upper level bit of the word I O number specified in s 2 will be set to 0 S st s 2 Cautionary notes e Set the actual I O addresses using the ADRIO command for the s and s 2 parameters If the actual addresses are not specified DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed e Ifs through s 2 or the areas specified by them overlap DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed e Ifs through s 2
57. 6 2 amp m s2 WL WM wA 7 Upper s2 Timer Counter i 3 case W m Double word AND DX DY DR DL 0 5 sl s1 lt DM J 2 19 4 Lower Lo s2 Constant ADW case OR 75 sl lt 52 26 5 LD Signed lt When s1 lt s2 Continuity DX DY DR DL je o o 19 4 5 2 sl Relational When s1 s2 Noncontinuity DM 6 S lt box sl and s2 are compared as 7 s2 signed 32 bit binary Constant 8 1 AND 19 4 5 sl s2 s2 OR 26 4 R3 sl 7 sl S lt _ S lt s2 s2 When s1 lt s2 Continuity When s1 gt s2 Noncontinuity a gt S 2 N D wn Signed lt When s1 lt s2 Continuity DX DY DR DL Relational When s1 gt s2 Noncontinuity DM box sl and s2 are compared as signed 32 bit binary o P In the case of word it requires five steps for LD s10s2 and AND s1082 and six steps for OR s10s2 2 In the case of double word for LD s10s2 and AND s1082 it requires five steps when the combination of s1 and s2 is I O and I O six steps when the combination is either I O and constant or constant and I O and seven steps when the combination is constant and constant For OR s1Os2 1 step is added respectively 5 6 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 4 Arithmetic command Command Ladder symbol name Process descriptions Item number Classification Command symbol Substitution d lt s s
58. AND 61659 OR I lt Program example WR0000 R005 LD WR0000 lt WR0002 lt OUT R005 WR0002 Program description e When WR0000 lt WR0002 R005 turns on 5 56 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 38 Name Signed lt Relational box SIGNED lt RELATIONAL BOX Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH CPU3 arias See Function column ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max J o J s1 S lt s2 s1 S lt s2 Command format Number of steps LD s1 S lt s2 Condition Steps AND s1 S lt s2 Double word See Cautionary notes OR s1 S lt s2 AND s1 S lt s2 ED OR Word WR Usable I O WY WL WM Constant Relational number 1 Relational number 2 Function Ladder format s sl sl S lt S lt s s2 s2 b31 e Compares sl and s2 as signed double word numbers and if s1 is less than s2 it enters the continuity status on and if s1 is greater than or equal to s2 enters the noncontinuity status L Sign bit 0 Positive 1 Negative off e sl s2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal Cautionary notes Number of steps Program example DR0000 R006 LD DR0000 S lt DR0002 S lt o OUT R006 DR0002 Program description
59. AND DIFO NOT WR0000 NOT WRO0000 Program description e When R000 rises the content of WR0000 is reversed Example If WR0000 is H1234 WR0000 HEDCB after the command is executed WRO0000 H1234 when executed again 5 106 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 20 Name Two s complement NEGATE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU44s EH cpu3 Other than left NEG d DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e o o J e 12 45 80 Command format Number of steps Bit TD SS WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Usable I O Constant d_ I O to take complement Function Calculates two s complements of d Reverses each bit contained in d and adds 1 However C R7F0 remains unchanged Before execution After execution ojoh fs fofo Cautionary notes e Use edge trigger as the startup condition for this command Program example LD R000 R000 DIFO AND DIEO H NEG WR0000 H NEG WR0000 Program description e When R000 rises 2 s complement of the content of WR0000 is obtained Example If WR0000 is H1234 WR0000 HEDCC after the command is executed WRO0000 H1234 when executed again 5 107 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number App
60. Basic commands Arithmetic commands Application commands Control commands High function module transfer commands FUN commands The classification of the processing time column in each command table is shown in the table below Description in the table Classification EH CPU448 EH CPU448 EH CPU3 EH CPU308 316 of ROM Ver 04 or later Other than left EH CPU104 208 and EH CPU308 316 of ROM Ver 03 or earlier Depending on the CPU model all of the commands may not be supported For the commands that are supported by each CPU see the explanation of each command or Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart 5 19 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 1 2 Name Logical operation start LD LDI Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Ly R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpu3 Other than ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Command format Number of s 1 1 LD n Condition Usable I O Constant T O number Function n Starts the a contact logical operation Enters the continuity state when input is on LDn n Starts the b contact logical operation Enters the continuity state when input is off LDI n Cautionary notes e L and WL become the internal output when link modules are not used Program exampl
61. CPU is running Abnormal task code H03 Occupancy code mismatch Fron aor CPU is running HOB Undefined H04 to Abnormal task code H01 Undefined subcommand H02 HFF None Abnormal task code H01 H05 steps words Occupancy code H03 mismatch H07 HOB Write to HI LADDER Not executable area 01 03 07 Write to parameter area B Abnormal address 04 Abnormal number of steps words Memory over Not executable H09 H07 Abnormal number of Not executable Not occupied CPU is running Undefined HO1 to Abnormal task code H01 Undefined subcommand H02 HFF Eo ike Abnormal task code H01 Abnormal number of Ea steps words End of parameter H02 Fixed change Not executable Occupancy code mismatch CPU is running HOB H01 H02 Change set value of Undefined subcommand Abnormal address H05 timer counter Abnormal task code Abnormal number of steps words Abnormal I O code H06 Abnormal I O number H07 Not executable Occupancy code H03 mismatch A 59 CPU is running and modify during RUN mode is not set Transfer address is outside the designated range of parameter area B Number of transfer steps are outside the designated range Address number of steps exceeds the parameter area Local station is READ occupying CPU Local station is not occupying CPU CPU is running and modify during RUN mode is not set Undefined subcommand is set Only th
62. Check the connection of the connector cable timeout Check to see if there are any sources of noise near the cable 6A Port 1 transmission error Verify the protocol designations evaluate the host computer processing and correct any errors eaten Port 1 transmission error Z lecese 71 Battery error Replace the battery with a new one O Se eaeoe eaen come O v Perform the following procedures to erase the error display a When CPU is stopped Turn the CPU RUN switch to STOP then to RUN again If the cause of the error has been corrected the ERR lamp turns off However the error information remains in the error special internal output which stores the CPU error types and details This makes it possible to analyze the error after recovery To reset the error information perform the procedures shown in b or press the reset switch for the power failure memory protection R CL SW b When the CPU is still running 1 Clear the ERR lamp only Set 1 in the special internal output R7EB 2 Clear the ERR lamp display and error special internal output Set 1 in the special internal output R7EC 14 4 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting 14 2 Checklist when Abnormal Occur If an error is generated in the EH 150 system check the following items If there are no problems in the following items contact our service department a Power supply related items e Is the power voltage correct 85 to 264 V AC
63. FUN 34 s BCD decimal ASCII conversion 16 bit BCDDA s FUN 35 s BCD decimal ASCII conversion 32 bit DBCDDA s FUN 36 s Without signed 5 digit DABIN s Decimal ASCII conversion binary conversion 20 FUN 37 s Signed 10 digit x x x DDABIN s Decimal ASCII conversion binary conversion HABIN s conversion DHABIN s conversion FUN 40 s 4 digit decimal ASCII BCD conversion DABCD s FUN 41 s 8 digit decimal ASCII BCD conversion DDABCD s 25 FUN 42 s Hexadecimal binary ASCII conversion ASC s digit designation 26 FUN 43 s Hexadecimal ASCII binary conversion HEX s digit designation FUN 44 s ASDD s FUN 45 s SCMP s FUN 46 s WTOB s FUN 47 s WTOW s 1 FUN 48 s BSHR s FUN 49 s BSHL s FUN 50 s TRSET s FUN 51 s TRACE s FUN 52 s TRRES s 6 FUN 60 s BSQR s FUN 61 s PGEN s 38 FUN 70 s High speed counter mode set 39 FUN 71 s High speed counter process value read x O Supported x Not supported The EH CPU448 is supported The EH CPU308 316 and 448 are supported oo O N w oo N o nn XQ A 9 Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart FUN commands 3 5 Command H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 H4010 format to H 20 43 FUN 80 ALREF do FUN 82 VO refresh Any slot x
64. High 38 400 bps 19 200 bps PHL Low 4 800 bps OFF 38 400 bps PHL High 19 200 bps Conforms to RS 232C RS 422 RS 485 Conforms to RS 232C Max cable length 15m 500 m 15m Connection mode max 1 1 1 N 32 units 1 N 32 units connected units Half duplex Start stop synchronization One sided startup using the host side command Serial transmission bit serial transmission ASCII Transmission code ASCII 7 bit data 1 start 1 stop even number parity configuration Transmission code Sent out from the lowest bit in character units outgoing sequence Vertical parity check sum check overrun check framing check Message unit variable length Maximum message 503 bytes 3 including control characters length Control procedure H series dedicated procedure high protocol Z SW4 n W oN O O x 7 O a x ojo olo ki 2 rj rj Standard procedure 1 transmission control procedure 1 simplified procedure transmission control procedure 2 2 Connector used CPU side TM5RJ3 88 8 pin modular connector Hirose Partner side Comparable to TM10P 88P Hirose 1 When the port selector switch is set to programmer connection the PHL signal may be set to HIGH However 12 V DC is output from the connector pin 5 of port 2 simultaneously so exercise caution 2 The communication interfaces of RS 422 and RS 485 and transmission control procedure 2 are supported only by the EH CPU448 3 When H series
65. M0000 to M3FFF MCS0 to MCS49 Number overlap allowed MCRO to MCR49 Number overlap allowed Ladder symbol Classification Sequence command ari n 9 us fo 5 2 T Q i result push Operation result read z Command 6 symbol zZ 3 Operation result pull Logical block series connection Logical block parallel connection Processing end Relational box start and process box Chapter 5 Command Specifications Process descriptions I O types used Saves the operation result immediately prior Reads the saved operation result and continues operation Reads the saved operation result continues operation and clears the saved result Indicates series connection between two logical blocks Indicates parallel connection between two logical blocks Indicates start and end of a Indicates start and end of a Process time us box start and comparison box end PT se ef af s a Item number lt 2 Se O cO z Basic commands timer counter Ladder symbol TD w TM F S M M W N S S R DT CU CU 3 Q E 3 Z 2 Counter N Koj Command symbol On delay timer Extended on delay timer Single shot Mono stable timer Integral timer Watchdog timer Counter Ring counter Up of up down counter Down of up down counter
66. Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 217 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example X00408 DIF48 LD X00408 WRO100 4 AND DIF48 ADRIQ WRO101 WM100 FUN 48 WRO100 WRO100 4 WM100 WM100 OR H0200 ADRIO WRO101 WM100 FUN 48 WR0100 WM100 WM100 OR H0200 Program description Four bytes of transmission data is stored in WM100 and succeeding areas Communication control code H02 STX is added to the head of this data Execution results 5 218 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Fun commands 30 Byte left shift t BYTE LEFT SHIFT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us EH CPU448 EH cpu3 Other than eo e ieee BSHL s cakes eCRera FUN 49 s 3 BSHL s Word Double word word a E TD SS Usable I O L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU No of shifted bytes Actual address is set s 1 Smif daa nea vono _ ee Function 6 s No n of shifted bytes 5 S s 1 Shift data head T O No a B gt l 5 aa Lost E l 15 8 7 0 aj da2 83 2 C gt fej 7 3 n 3 eo 2 dn 1 gin n 1 sa at 2 HOO An 1 e The data given by the number of bytes specified by argument s is shifted one byte to the left beginning from the head I O specified by argument s 1 e An HOO is inserted in an area that became empty after the shift Note that the
67. R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH CPU3 See See Function column ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max J o o s1 S s2 s1 S s2 AND s1 S s2 LD OR Command format Number of steps LD s1 S s2 Condition Steps AND s1 S s2 Double word See Cautionary notes OR s1 S s2 Word WR Usable I O WY WL WM Constant O Relational number 1 O Relational number 2 Function Ladder format Compares s1 and s2 as signed double word numbers and if s1 is equals to s2 it enters the continuity status on and Sign bit 0 Positive 1 Negative if s1 is not equal to s2 enters the noncontinuity status off sl s2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal Cautionary notes Number of steps LD AND s1S s2 OR s1S s2 Program example DR0000 R002 LD DR0000 S DR0002 ae o OUT R002 DR0002 Program description e When DR0000 DR0002 R002 turns on signed 5 53 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 35 Name lt gt Relational box lt gt RELATIONAL BOX Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark Other than R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 left Upper See Function column ERR SD V C Ave Ave Max Ave Max case W e e
68. Routing information Network address Subnet mask Gateway Network address Subnet mask Gateway Network address Subnet mask Gateway Network address Subnet mask Gateway Network address Subnet mask Gateway Network address Subnet mask Ethernet information setup page using a Web browser 4 48 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 21 DeviceNet Master Module Name and function of each part EH RMD Weight Approx 0 15 kg 0 33 1b a 5 Lock button Dimensions mm in 1 LED cover 30 1 18 95 3 74 jk lt __ _ _ __ gt 3 Reset switch 2 Dip switch 100 3 94 4 DeviceNet connector e ee __ e LED cover This is the cover for the LED that displays the network status and error information Dip switch Sets the node address and baud rate Po HL Reset switch Resets the module Po DeviceNet connector Connects to the network P 5 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the attachment can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws General specifications Item Specification Current consumption 5 V DC 450 mA Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Storage ambient temperature 10 to 75 C Operating ambient humidity 20 to 90 RH no condensation Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation Usage environment No corrosi
69. Since the minimum cycle of the periodical scans being used is 20 ms a congestion error occurs if the total scan time of each periodical scan exceeds 20 ms 3 Continuation of operation after the occurrence of a congestion error In the same way as in CPUs other than the EH CPU448 the special internal output bit R7C1 which specifies whether the operation should continue after a congestion error has occurred can be turned on In this case if a periodical scan congestion error occurs the execution of the periodical scan is suspended and executed from the beginning again 4 Cautions when using 5 ms periodical scan The congestion check time for the 5 ms periodical scan is approximately 3 ms A congestion error occurs if the total scan time of each periodical scan and system periodical scan exceeds 3 ms 8 7 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 2 2 Online Change in RUN The user program can be modified during operation while retaining the output status as is This is called the online change in RUN function Modifying the user program requires programming software specifically for this or a programmer Refer to the individual manuals on how to do this Online change in RUN cannot be done in the following situations Perform this operation after completing the conditions Table 8 4 Conditions for performing online change in RUN Conditions under which online Specific situation How to satisfy the conditions change in RUN cannot
70. TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 6 RCU CT s Argument O s uses up to s 2 fractional portion s 1 Argument O integer portion Function s 2 s 1 s 15 0 15 015 0 0 to 90 180 to 270 lt SIN Integer portion Fractional portion e Calculates the SIN value using the unsigned binary value designated by s fractional portion and s 1 integer portion as the argument and outputs s 2 e The SIN value is described in degrees in the range of 0 to 90 and 180 to 270 e Ifthe calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 e The fractional data is the value obtained by multiplying the actual value by 65 535 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the argument s l s gt 1 DER is equal to 1 and operation will not be performed e When s 1 and s 2 exceed the maximum value for the I O number DER is equal to 1 and operation will not be performed Program example LD X00103 AND DIF3 DR0010 H0000A48E FUN 13 WR0010 X00103 DIF3 m DR0010 HOOOOA48E FUN 13 WRO010 Program description e Set data in DROO10 WRO010 WROO11 e SIN operation is performs at the leading edge of X00103 and the result is set in WROO12 as a binary value Execution results WR0012 H0028 WR0011 H0000 WRO0010 HA48E 5 191 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Ladder format Condition code Processing time
71. TMR CU WM pm S RCU CT s Argument O s uses up to s 3 s 3 is used by the system Function e When the I O designated by s previous process switches on the s 1 process set switches on and the state is retained The previous process condition is triggered by edge e When the I O designated by s 2 next process switches on the s 1 process set is switched off The next process is triggered by level e When s previous process and s 2 next process are both on the s 2 next process has the priority e The user should designate output for each process if necessary indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used 5 185 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example _ example Process a M400 Previous process condition Process a ADRIO WRO100 MO ADRIO WRO101 M400 ADRIO WRO102 M401 FUN 04 WR0100 M401 ae ia Process b Previous process condition ADRIO WR0200 M1 ADRIO WR0201 M401 ADRIO WR0202 M402 FUN 04 WRO0200 XI 2 i M401 X1 i M402 i Process c Previous process condition ADRIO WR0300 M2 i ADRIO WR0301 M402 ADRIO WR0302 M400 FUN 04 WRO0300 Process a processing Y100 1 Y102 0 RTS sB 1 Y101 1 E eas Y102 0 Tocess D processing RTS sB 2
72. Watchdog timer GSD file File name Hital1004 gsd Please contact our sales department Configurator HMS Fieldbus configuration software made by AB is used Please contact our sales department regarding the purchase Note 1 Among 1024 words only 512 words are used Do not use the remaining area 4 55 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 24 PROFIBUS Slave Module Name and function of each part EH IOCP Weight Approx 0 16 kg 0 35 1b Dimensions mm in 1 Lock button 5 Dip switch 3 Rotary switches 4 Network connector 6 Reset switch 7 Terminal end switch 1 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the attachment can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws 2 LED Displays the communication and other statuses of the module ES O 3 Sets the node address when connected Exercise caution when handling the connector 4 Network connector A connector for connecting to a network The temperature gets high D sub 9 pin female Reset switch Resets the unit when the module is malfunctioning 7 Terminal end switch Turns on when this module is at the end of a network O 5 Dip switch Specifies the output data for the output module when the network is abnormal 7 General specifications Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55
73. bo 10 End code 1 L l H80 lt Startcode H00 to HFF bl5 bl4 b0 0 Any data b Designation by the start and end codes i Receiving data structure Receiving data within the area size gt co Start code om End code Parameter settings S 10 8 Receiving data length Arbitrary length the number of receiving data must be within the area size S 11 9 Start code eles 15_b14 b8 b7 0 S 12 10 End code 1 H80 H00 to HFF 15_b14 b8 b7 b0 l H80 lt End code H00 to HFF c Designation by the end code G Receiving data structure lt Receiving data within the area size E End code When receiving data by specifying a start code the receive buffer may overflow if data with a different start code is sent from the connected device If this occurs the data reception will not be executed Make sure the specified start code is the same as the one used at the connected device 5 145 Chapter 5 Command Specifications ii Parameter settings 8 Receiving data length __ Arbitrary length the number of receiving data must be within the area size 9 Start code bl5 b14 b0 10 End code 0 Any data bl5 bl4 b8 _b7 pe a Li H80 lt End code H00 to HFF d Designation by recei
74. is performed Program example LD R7E3 WRO0100 H1234 WR0101 H5678 WRO100 H1234 WR0102 H9ABC WR0101 H5678 WR0103 HDEFO WR0102 H9ABC X00402 DIF42 WR0103 HDEFO H WR0000 15 ADRIQ WRO001 WRO100 LD X00402 AND DIF42 ADRIO WR0002 WM000 FUN 42 WR0000 n WR0000 15 ADRIO WR0001 WR0100 ADRIO WR0002 WM000 FUN 42 WR0000 Program description 1 The result is stored in the data table from WR0100 by special internal output R7E3 single scan ON after RUN start 2 At a rising edge of X00402 the hexadecimal binary data is converted to hexadecimal ASCII data and the converted data is stored from WM000 Execution results WR0100 H1234 WM000 H3132 WM001 H3334 WR0101 H5678 WM002 H3536 WM003 H3738 WRO102 H9ABC WM004 H3941 WM005 H4243 WRO103 HDEFO WM006 H4445 WM007 H4620 20 is a space 5 208 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from hexadecimal ASCII to hexadecimal binary data Item number Fun commands 24 Name ASCII TO BINARY Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee FUN 43 s HEX s Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 43 s HEX s Wa O Double word word TD ON E Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT No of converted s uses up to s 2 characters ASCII head I O No Actual address i
75. or when a TRANS 0 command and a RECV 0 command are started simultaneously This forces the communication to terminate The TRNS 0 command resets 7 through 12 to 0 during initialization or when the TRNS 0 command is started Description of the transmitting data area This is the area to store the data to be transmitted by the TRNS 0 command Set the data to be transmitted according to the following structure 1 When even number of bytes 2 When odd number of bytes are transmitted are transmitted Number of bytes to be transmitted N Number of bytes to be transmitted N Ist byte 2nd byte Ist byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 3rd byte 4th byte Sth byte 6th byte Sth byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 7th byte 8th byte Transmitting data area N 2th byte N 1th byte N 1th byte Nth byte Nth byte Invalid data 9 Description of the receiving data area This is the area to store the response with respect to the data transmitted by the TRNS 0 command The received data is set according to the following structure 1 When even number of bytes 2 When odd number of bytes are received are received Number of bytes to be received N Number of bytes to be received N Ist byte 2nd byte Ist byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 3rd byte 4th byte Sth byte 6th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 7th byte 8th byte Receiving data area s N 2th byte N
76. points used U Control 32 bit RISC processor specifications Processing method Stored program cyclic method Processing Basic commands 1 0 us command speed Application commands Several 10 Us command 4 k steps FLASH MEMORY 8 k steps FLASH MEMORY Operation Basic commands 39 types such as LD LDI AND ANI OR ORI ANB ORB OUT MPS processing MRD MPP specifications Arithmetic command 59 types such as arithmetic x etc jump subroutine division Application commands extraction etc Ladder Basic commands 39 types suchas H F H F 4h 4 F He H E oy Arithmetic command 59 types such as arithmetic X etc jump subroutine division Application commands extraction etc I O processing External T O processing method Refresh processing WRO to WRFFF WRO to WRIFFF Special Bit 64 points R7CO to R7FF 512 words WRFO000 to WRF1FF CPU link 16 384 points 1 024 words x 2 loops LO to L3FFF L10000 to L13FFF WLO to WL3FF WL1000 to WL13FF counter Timer set value 0 to 65 535 time base 0 01s 0 1s 1s aan eee Edge detection 512 points DIFO to DIF511 decimal pee e moworiainy O devices Peripheral device Programming software LADDER EDITOR DOS version Windows version Command language programmer Portable graphic programmer Graphic input Word Ell 5 a device Maintenance Self diagnosis PC abnormal LED display microcomputer error watchdog timer error functions memory error p
77. s 0 s s 2 s 3 s 4 s 5 s 6 s 7 1 Error code 2 System area not available to user 3 Control type 4 Header of target area 5 Read write control bit I O No 6 Transfer source destination header F T O No Description of read write control bit table 1 Execute flag 2 Normal end flag 3 Abnormal end flag Description of borders User setting area User write prohibited area Chapter 5 Command Specifications 1 Error code The result of FUN 200 command execution is set Normalend 0 Abnormal end gt 0 2 System area This is used by the system processes of the FUN 200 command when the FUN 200 command is executed This area cannot be used by the user 3 Control type Specifies the control type H0001 Read request from the X area with handshaking H0002 Read request from the X area without handshaking H0003 Write request to the Y area with handshaking H0004 Forced write request to the Y area without handshaking H0005 Forced read request from the Y area without handshaking 4 Header of target area b15 bil Unit No Slot No Word location Sets the unit number 0 to 7 Sets the slot number 0 to 7 Sets the word location from 0 1 5 Read write control bit I O number Sets the actual addresses of R L and M in the read write control bit I O number using the ADRIO command 6 Transfer source destination header
78. set as the time base for a counter A counter is designated as the time base for a timer Modification of second set value was specified as the modification code when other than WDT Timer is not programmed in the designated user address designation program Fixed Abnormal task code al a SS Designated address exceeds the capacity of installed memory Abnormal number of Number of read steps is outside the range ii ee eel to 60 Not Not occupied Ho Not Not occupied H07 Local station is not occupying CPU station is not occupying CPU j Undefined cae to Abnormal task code H01 Undefined subcommand H02 Undefined subcommand is set None Normal execution execution Hoo H03 aa station is not occupying CPU Reserved subcommand H02 Do not use H04 Undefined H01 Abnormal task code H01 Undefined subcommand H02 Undefined subcommand is set H03 HOS H40 None Warning e None Normal execution execution Abnormal task code Not Not executable H03 H ain Senate _ task code H01 Abnormal number of The requested number of points is outside steps words the designated range Abnormal I O code The requested I O type code is undefined or is an T O that cannot be forced to be set Abnormal I O No The requested I O type code is undefined or is an I O that cannot be monitored Local station is not occupying CPU Abnormal number of The requested number of points is outside steps words the
79. subcommand 1 2 3 4 HOO Initialization of all user memory area H01 Initialization of the HI FLOW area 1 H02 Initialization of the HI LADDER area H03 Zero clear of all user memory area 1 EH 150 does not support HI FLOW Response task code H00 when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter The composition of user memory The user memory has the composition as shown in the diagram to the right Parameter area A stores the I O assignment memory assignment and other information while parameter area B stores the timer information etc Description of each function User memory Parameter area A Parameter area B f Parameter area HI FLOW area HI LADDER area 1 Initialization of all user memory areas subcommand H00 Initializes all of parameter areas A and B the HI FLOW area and the HI LADDER area If this command is executed memory are assigned as follows Also the I O assignment is erased Parameter area A B total HI FLOW area HI LADDER area Assignment capacity H0280 H0000 Load capacity 2 H0280 2 Determine the load capacity from H10 CPU status 2 user memory capacity A 30 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications When the subcommand HOO is executed using the task code H20 via the COMM remote or link module the I O assignment of the m
80. to the instruction manual of your modem ii When the initialization command is not required during dedicated general switch request Only AT can be sent by setting the transmission size to zero 5 161 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Gii For call origination Specify the telephone numbers to be dialed for call origination Multiple numbers may be specified by delimiting each number with a space H20 If two consecutive spaces are entered it is considered that no telephone numbers are present thereafter If a space is entered at the beginning no call origination will be performed To redial the same telephone number specify the same telephone number for the number of times to be called To redial different telephone numbers specify different telephone numbers Example To dial TEL 03 1111 2222 three times H30 0 H33 3 H31 1 H31 1 H31 1 H31 1 H32 2 H32 2 H32 2 H32 2 H20 H30 0 H33 3 H31 1 H31 1 H31 1 H31 1 H32 2 H32 2 H32 2 H32 2 H20 H30 0 H33 3 H31 1 H31 1 H31 1 H31 1 H32 2 H32 2 H32 2 H32 2 Use this command so that s 10 and t 13 do not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and communication will not be executed For the I O ranges see the EH CPU448 Performance Specifications Table on page 3 Control type Dedicated general switch request Switches communication from the dedicated port com
81. undefined error operation error program over etc will be displayed on the programming device For detailed error codes refer to the error code list in the programming device manual c GPCL error display The error detected by the CPU during the GPCL operation is displayed at the bottom left of the screen If the cable is disconnected or the power to ON LINE PROGRAMMING 4448 CPUSTATUS eee 44408 PCSTATUS Hee eee ee the master unit is turned off during the GPCL operation CPU CONNECTION ERROR is displayed to indicate a connection error CPU TYPE H 300 STATUS STOP CPU TYPE H 300 MEMORY CAPA 0192 S MEMORY TYPE RAM FLOW ols 0192 S LADDER 7552 S FLOW ols 2048 W LADDER 7552 S DATA 2048 W MEMORY STATUS NOT BATTERY OK CASSETE TYPE CAPA IS CONTROL NO BATTERY PREV 10 10mSEC PRINT PORT CENTRO BUZZER PORT FON CPU PORT HOME CPU STATUS STOP MOD6 SELECT NO 7 CPU ONLINE H 300 CPU SET SYSTEM INITIALIZE UTILITY CPU PORT HOME PORT SET PROGRAMMING CPU CONNECT ERROR Error display For the details of error codes see the list of error codes in the GPCL manual d Setting in the special internal output An error code is set in the special internal output area such as WRF000 The smaller the error code value the more serious the error is When two or more errors occur the smaller number is set For example if 71 battery error and 31 user memory error occur simultaneousl
82. us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU44s EH cPus Other than Upper case ENCO d s n DER ERR SD V C Ave Ave Ave Bit position t J e J t of less than 33 1 4x2 84 1 6x2 84 1 6x2 higher 16 Command format Number of steps bits Condition Steps Lower case ENCO d s n 4 84 0 1x2 170 0 2 2 170 0 2x2 Other than the above Bit Word Double word R 1D s WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WwDT MS WX WY wWL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT d Decode destination head I O OJO s_ Word I O to be encoded O n Number of bits to be O 1 to 8 decimal encoded Function e Encodes the bit location 2 in the range between s and s 2 1 where the bit is 1 and outputs the result to d n 1 to 8 Upper bits 16 n of d are set to 0 e Ifnis 0 the command will not be executed and the contents of d retain the original values e If there are more than one bits that are set to 1 between s and s 2 1 the upper bit location will be encoded e Ifall the bits from s to s 2 1 are 0 0 is output to d and C R7FO is equal to 1 In other cases C R7FO is set to 0 s 2 1 s B s b15 b7 bO 0 1 00 d HOB b 2n n bits 1 to 8 Cautionary notes e Use this command so that s 2 1 does not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is set to 1 and the encoding is performed at the maximum ra
83. 0 READ occupancy Occupancy WRITE occupancy status Not occupied Ist point word Nth point word I c a Number of bits number of words HO1 to H3F 1 to 60 b T O code c TO number Refer to the task code H40 Response Monitor data 1st point 1st word Monitor data Nth point Nth word I b b a Response task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter b Monitor data refer to below for details 0 0 or 1 1 point Bit data Word data H0000 to HFFFF A 48 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications A When the I O code is bit Request Data memory Response Nth point The CPU detects the head of the monitor data according to the requested I O code and I O number then in response returns the monitor data for the number of bits requested gt Bit B When the I O code is word Request 44 N points Data memory Response TT Nth Word Ist Word Nth Word The CPU detects the head of the monitor data according to the requested I O code and I O number then in response returns the monitor data for the number of words requested
84. 0 by the system after setting is complete Transmission control procedure 0 Transmission control procedure 1 1 Transmission control procedure 2 Station number presence 0 No station number 1 Station number present d Not used Communication interface status display set by the system 7 Interface RS 232C RS 422 RS 485 This will not be displayed many le Cleared by the ee PCO SCtITE SCT ty crs system or by the user user Interface RS 232C Station nbmabelb Oud atta PE SRE hetiationninbemaxceeds this range the system will set 31 For more details see Chapter 10 Communication Specifications WRFO38 Setting of system 0 processing time EH User setting time 3 to 9 in 1 digit BCD If the user setting time exceeds this range the system will set 3 Current system processing time The system sets the processing time of the system currently in operation This setting becomes effective immediately after it is set For more details see Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 Setting of system processing time EH 15 8 7 CPU308 316 of ROM a User setting time 5 in BCD Ifa value other than 5 is specified the system processing time will vary Current operating time 00 System processing time varies 05 System processing time is fixed at 5 ms The current operating condition section is set by the system This setting becomes effective immediately after it is set Fo
85. 13 Special Internal Outputs No Name Meaning Description Setting Resetting condition condition R7D6 Number of I O 0 Normal Indicates whether the number of I O assigned assignment points over TO assignment points over points has exceeded the maximum number R7D7 Communication module 0 Normal Indicates whether there is an abnormal in the ott eyenwhen power failure abnormal Abnormal communication module Abnormal slot number output to WRFO004 R7D8 System bus abnormal 0 Normal Indicates whether there is an abnormal when Abnormal the system bus is accessed R7D9 Battery error 0 Normal Indicates whether battery voltage is low Turned off by Turned on by memory is the system cleared Abnormal the system R7DB Self diagnostic error 0 Normal Indicates whether there is a self diagnostic Turned off by Error error Detailed information output to WRFO00 the user or Turned on by turned off even the system when power failure memory is cleared Rc Undefined oos SSCS S Indicates whether the communication module Turned off by assignment over 1 Error assignment exceeds the maximum value the user or R7DE Link module abnormal 0 Normal Indicates whether there is an abnormal in the Turned on by turned off when 1 Abnormal link module Abnormal slot number displayed the system the power in WRF007 detailed information output to failure memory WRFOEO to WRF19F is cleared RIDF Undefined Donne SSS S R7EO Operatio
86. 1th byte N 1th byte Nth byte Nth byte Invalid data Cautionary notes e The TRNS 0 command initializes the internal work area with one scan ON If there are startup conditions before the TRNS 0 command the system software may not be able to execute initialization processing normally Therefore do not specify startup conditions Set 1 Communication execution bit of the TRNS 0 command at the second scan or later Use this command so that s 14 and t 11 do not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and communication will not be executed For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table When there is an error in the parameters set by s to there may be cases in which the CPU module error 52 is set in special internal output WRFOO0 5 147 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example The following shows a sample program that performs data output from the CPU module s general purpose port to external devices using the TRNS 0 command 1 Mounting the module Mount a 16 point output module in slot 1 of the basic base Therefore the T O assignment of the output module is WY0010 Specify the d parameter of the TRNS 0 command as WY0010 The WY is used as a dummy in the TRNS 0 command so this could by any WY CPU module Power supply 16 point output 2 Assigning internal outputs The sample progr
87. 2 General dedicated port switch request 3 Call origination request 4 Call disconnection request 5 Line connection check Return code Error name Description Type of error 21h Range check error The s parameter and or t parameter exceeded the I O 1 2 3 4 5 range 22h Transmission area The starting address setting of the transmission area is 1 2 setting error incorrect 23h Transmission area The transmission area exceeded the I O range 1 2 range error 26h Transmission data The transmission data length is longer than the 1 2 length error transmission area 28h Area overlap The s parameter t parameter and transmission area are 1 2 3 4 5 overlapped 41h Parity error A parity error occurred during result reception 1 2 42h Framing error A framing error occurred during result reception 1 2 43h Overrun error An overrun error occurred during result reception 1 2 44h Contention error More than one TRNS 8 command were started 1 2 3 4 5 simultaneously The TRNS 8 command was started with the TRNS 0 command simultaneously The TRNS 8 command was started with the RECV 0 command simultaneously 45h Parameter error The setting values of the baud rate transmission format 1 when abnormal and control type are incorrect type 46h Port specification The DIP switches are not set for modem connection 1 2 3 4 5 error 50h Dial busy Busy during call origi
88. 2 0 in character units outgoing sequence Vertical parity check overrun check framing check 10 13 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications Table 10 11 List of port 1 signals when a modem is connected abbreviation CPU Modem Carrier receive in progress notification signal Connected to CD in the modem gt Communication enabled signal of the terminal eee o Data sent by the CPU i Connected to SD in the modem Data received by the CPU Communication enabled signal of the modem Transmission request signal Connected to RS in the modem EH 150 CPU Modem Port 1 25 pin socket Figure 10 8 Cable connection between a modem 25 pin socket and port 1 10 4 3 Additional task codes The existing task codes are supported and ladder disconnection processing is supported as an additional function The specification is the same as the current post communication destination processing ladder disconnection processing except for the NCU control Line disconnection task code Line disconnection request HIC Response normal response only H00 HIC 10 14 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 10 4 4 AT commands In AT commands an instruction sent to the modem from the host is called a command and the character string in response to the command returned to the host from the modem is called a result code AT commands always begin with the character string AT and a return code is input at the
89. 2 kbps Transmission format 8 bit even parity 1 stop bit 00003 00004 Enable the 5th circuit through 7th circuit only when the TRNS 0 instruction has been completed successfully or during the first scan after RUN 00005 WLO station number lt Set the reception data 00006 Return the station number to the head when the maximum number of stations has been reached 00007 Set the reception data Update the station number Number of bytes transmitted 3 bytes Set the start code and station number Set the end code Turn on the start flag 00008 00009 Ols 2 00010 Start the TRNS 0 after 20 ms has elapsed Set to continued reception after the transmission is completed R7E3 R301 DIFO 4 N R7E3 R201 DIF1 P R100 WRF036 H 9 WR4001 2 WLO WR4001 WR4001 WM3 H0 WM4 HC WMS H200 WM6 32 WM7 HC WM8 H300 WM9 32 WMA HO WMB H8002 WMC H800D WMD H6 WME H6 RECV 0 WX0 WMO R200 WR3 HO WR4 HA WRS H200 WR6 32 WR7 HA WR8 H300 WR9 32 WRA HO WRB H8002 WRC H800D WRD H6 WRE H6 TRNS 0 WY 10 WRO R300 WR4000 WM301 AND HFF R100 WR4000 WR4001 CJMP 0 R100 CALO LBLO R201 0 WR200 5 WR201 H200 OR WR4001 WR202 WLO WR4001 WR203 HD00 R400 1 R100 0 10 11 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications b Program on the slave station side slave station number 2 00001 Gene
90. 3 i 4 R Read word 1 Log information word table 1 Set the actual address WR WL WM of the word head I O number that is used as the table into the data logging management table 4 using the ADRIO command 2 The table consists of 2 through 4 and the size is 5 words Make sure the maximum value for the word I O number is not exceeded If the maximum value is exceeded H0003 will be set to the error code in the data logging management table 2 Number of logs allowed 1 Indicates the number of logs currently allowed 2 The value calculated by the formula shown below is set Number of logs allowed 384 k 393216 words 3 Log size Round off below the decimal point 3 Log size words log Indicates the number of words Total number of words of respective log groups per data groups written for a single log 4 Number of logs The number of logs that have been written at present is set The number does not include the log whose data is currently being written The count is increased by 1 when all data for that log has been written O io N z 5 UL 5 273 Z N Ni jo g Chapter 5 Command Specifications Management table details c Explanation of log write parameter word table nx2 0 Log groups n head I O number nx2 1 Log groups n size Y 1 2 3 4 1 Log write parameter word table 0 Log write control bit I O number 2 s 2 e 4 F
91. 4 master stations counter Timer set value 0 to 65 535 time base 0 01s 0 1s 1s eee etieewemeimiecaste sy Edge detection 512 points DIFO to DIF511 decimal a E devices Peripheral device Programming software LADDER EDITOR DOS version Windows version Command language programmer Portable graphic programmer Graphic input device Maintenance Self diagnosis PC abnormal LED display microcomputer error watchdog timer error functions memory error program error system ROM RAM error scan time monitoring battery under voltage detection and others Additional Memory board For program transfer for data logger functions PID commands data logging commands RS 422 RS 485 Port 1 switching 1 The same numbers cannot be shared by the time and the counter TD is 0 to 255 2 Only timers numbered 0 to 63 can use 0 01s for their time base 3 7 Model Number of I O points Control specifications Operation processing specifications T O processing specifications Peripheral devices Maintenance functions Extended functions Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications EH CPU448 At the time 64 points I O module is 1 024 points maximum used Processing 0 1 us command speed Several 10 us command 48 k steps FLASH MEMORY 39 types such as LD LDI AND ANI OR ORI ANB ORB OUT MPS MRD MPP Arithmetic command 113 types such as arithmetic x etc jump subroutine division A
92. 66 amp Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 X Y L WDT Ms WX WY WL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT olojo O O O O0 0 0 The constant is set in decimal Designates the bit location depending on the contents 0 to 15 of the lower 4 bits b3 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 15 decimal Designates the bit location depending on the contents 0 to 31 of the lower 5 bits b4 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 31 decimal 5 83 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 2 Name Bit reset BIT RESET Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu44s EH cpu3 Other than left BRES d n DER ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e J o 13 50 86 Command format Number of s Condition BRES d n Usable I O Constant a 1O to be set the bit Bit location to be reset O The constant is set in decimal Function e Sets the nth bit in the I O word or double word specified by d to 0 e Other bit contents are unaltered L Reset to 0 Ifd is a word Designates the bit location depending on the contents 0 to 15 of the low
93. 74 lt __ _ gt 4 External wiring connector LED cover This is the cover for the LED that displays the input status When the input signal turns on the LED for the relevant number lights up The LED only lights when the module is energized 100 3 94 3 LED display switch This is a switch used to toggle between the LED s for the upper level 16 points and the LED s for the lower level 16 points of the input display When the switch is toggled to the left side towards the silk screened L on the surface the lower level 16 points 0 through 15 will be displayed When the switch is toggled to the right side towards the silk screened H on the surface the upper level 16 points 16 through 31 will be displayed 4 External wiring connector A connector for input signals Applicable connectors Caution Please refer to the Remarks column and purchase the appropriate Manufacturer Fujitsu e Approximately 120 mm connector separately Takamizawa 4 72 in of space will be e Solder type required in the front of Socket FCN 361J040 AU O 1 2 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the fixation can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws the module for the Cover FCN 360C040 E connector and cable Crimp type Please choose ns Housing FCN 363J040 installation locat
94. Ave Max e e t 21 59 95 Command format Number of steps Bit TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Constant T O to be rotated Number of bits to be The constant is set in rotated decimal Function Rotates the contents of d to the left toward the upper digits by n bits The content of C R7FO is set in the nth bit from the least significant bit The content of the nth bit from the least significant bit is set in C R7FO Before execution C R7F0 After execution B T B2 B3 Bn l i n bits Most significant bit MSB Least significant bit LSB Ifd is a word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 15 of the lower 4 bits b3 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 15 decimal Ifd is a double word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 31 of the lower 5 bits b4 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 31 decimal Cautionary notes e Ifn is equal to 0 the rotation is not performed The previous state is retained in C 5 91 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example X00001 DIFI LD X00001 R7F0 0 ROL DR0000 1 ANDS DIET
95. B The maximum capacity per write is 60 steps For the designated data and program use the data and program read using task code H31 read program with address designation If an invalid data or program is written the CPU module may stop due to an error A 33 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Writes the memory assignment information Execution condition CPU status HALT ERROR STOP E Request Subcommand fixed to H00 Memory capacity of the parameter area fixed to H00000280 Memory capacity of the HI FLOW area designated in 8 digit hexadecimal 1 Memory capacity of the HI LADDER area designated in 8 digit hexadecimal 1 EH 150 does not support HI FLOW Response a Response task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter Request Parameter area HI FLOW user HI LADDER user memory capacity memory capacity memory capacity Memory assignment table Parameter area memory capacity HI FLOW user memory capacity HI LADDER user memory capacity After this task code is executed always execute task code H27 parameter modification completion when the memory write processing is complete A 34 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Parameter modification completion Classification Function Notifies the C
96. C Storage ambient temperature 10 to 75 C Operating ambient humidity 20 to 90 RH no condensation storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation 5 V DC 600 mA Cooling method Natural air cooling 4 56 Chapter 4 System Equipment Functional specifications Item Specification No of installed I O modules 16 units EH IOCP use the EH IOC to install 9 and more units Node address setting range 1 to 99 Input output capacity 208 words Data update time 5 ms Transmission speed Segment length 9 6 kbps 1 200 m 19 2 kbps 1 200 m 93 75 kbps 1 200 m 187 5 kbps 1 000 m 500 kbps 400 m 1 500 kbps 200 m 3 Mbps 100 m 6 Mbps 100 m 12 Mbps 100 m Self diagnostics System ROM RAM check Watchdog timer GSD file File name Hital1004 gsd Please contact our sales department Supported 1 O list The I O modules that are supported by the EH IOCP are as follows Type Input size word Output size word EH XD8 EH XD16 1 0 EH XA16 EH XAHI16 EH XD32 2 0 EH XD64 4 0 EH PT4 4 0 EH AX44 EH AX8V 8 0 EH AX8H EH YT8 EH YT16 EH YTP8 EH YTP16 0 1 EH YTP16S EH YS4 EH YR12 EH YT32 0 2 EH YTP32 EH YT64 0 4 EH YTP64 EH AY22 EH AY2H 0 8 EH AY4V EH AY4H EH POS 4 4 EH CU 5 3 EH CUE 8 0 0 8 EH UNW 4 4 6 2 2 6 4 57 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 25 Conversion Cable for
97. DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal output setting WR0101 H0002 WRO100 H0001 Operation result WR0103 H4800 WRO102 H0040 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 232 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 40 Floating Point Operation Addition Ladder format Condition code Processing time us enee enor OSTA FUN 104 s r m sp v c AAO e e Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 104 s FADD s Wa Double word word Usable I O xX Y L Wx WL TC DX DY DL DM s Argument CEE LPP ee PL PL ess Function 15 stl 015 s 0 s 5 Real number portion Real number portion 15 0 15 ee Real number portion Real number portion FADD PE 342 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion Adds the real number s 2 s 3 to the real number s s 1 then sets the result in s 4 s 5 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes FUN 104 s e When the operation result is not within the range of le 37 to le 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifstost S exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00200 cate DIFO DRO100 H42C90000 AND DIFO DE0102 143488000 FUN104 WRO10
98. EH CPU448 1 Definition and operation In addition to the conventional periodical scan a 5 ms periodical scan is now available in the EH CPU448 The basic operations such as normal operation and operations at congestion errors are the same as the operations available at the periodic scan described in Section 8 1 5 However the EH CPU448 uses INTO which is the interrupt label for the 10 ms periodical scan in CPUs other than the EH CPU448 as the interrupt label for the 5 ms periodical scan and increases the following label numbers one by one Please be careful when you use this function The following table lists the interrupt labels and startup cycles of the EH CPU448 Table 8 3 Interrupt labels and startup cycles of the EH CPU448 Interrupt label Startup cycle EH CPU448 Other than EH CPU448 Every 5 ms Every 10 ms Every 10 ms Every 20 ms Every 20 ms Every 40 ms Every 40 ms 2 Causes of congestion errors at periodical scan In the same way as in CPUs other than the EH CPU448 a congestion error occurs when the execution time of the periodic scan exceeds the minimum cycle time of periodical program steps used in the program Example 1 If all the interrupt labels INTO to INT3 are used Since the minimum cycle of the periodical scans being used is 5 ms a congestion error occurs if the total scan time of each periodical scan exceeds 5 ms Example 2 When INT2 and INT3 are used
99. FUN 125 WR0100 ODEI FUN 125 s FUN 125 WR0100 Program description e At arising edge of X0200 the WR0100 is decremented by 1 1 Internal output setting WR0100 HFFFF Operation result WR0100 HFFFE t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 253 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Double Word Decrement t DECD EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Other than FUN 126 s per ERR sp v c DECD s KAA ARAIRE Condition 3 FUN 126 s DECD s Wa Double word word Usable I O xX Y L Wx WL TC DX DY DL DM Ps Amer fol LL swesupost e Replaces the specified I O in WR WL or WM with the double word I O in DR DL or DM and decrements the double word I O by 1 1 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the area specified by s exceeds the maximum value of I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed e When 00000000H is decreased by 1 1 the result will be FFFFFFFFH Program example X00200 DIFO LD X00200 AND DIFO DRO100 HFFFFFFFF i WR0100 HFFFFFFFF LD X00200 FUN 126 WR0100 AND DIF1 FUN 126 WR0100 s 921 NNA Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the DRO100 is decremented by 1 1 Internal output setting DR0100 HFFFFFFFF Operation result DRO100 HFFFFFFFE ts The EH CPU104 208 are not supported
100. Fun B 35 T O Refresh Any slot Ladderformat format Condition code Processing time us FUN 8245 Pore ere so v lt Eecieeeiie nar ikos Commandformat format Number of steps FUN 82 s Word Double word word 2 Usable I O X Y IL wx WL TC DX DY DL M DM ae Remote s 1 and Slot location number slot beyond location Constant Number of points to be refreshed Refresh Slot location mumber Refresh slot location number is designated by unit and slot number Refresh slot location number Refresh slot location number Performs refresh of the designated module for the number of points designated by s starting with area s 1 Refresh is performed by slot The slot location numbers stored in areas s 1 and beyond are designated by the unit number and slot number The maximum number of points to be refreshed n is 64 points The points exceeding 64 points are not refreshed If refresh processing is completed normally DER is equal to 0 Program example R000 DIFO LD R000 1 1 WR0000 H0002 AND DIFO WR0001 H0000 WR0002 H0012 WR0000 H0002 FUN 82 WR0000 WR0001 H0000 WR0002 H0012 FUN 82 WR0000 Program description e Upon rising of R000 the two slots designated after WR0001 unit 0 slot 0 and unit 1 slot 2 are refreshed 5 226 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Cautionary notes e Set the u
101. Function e Obtains the actual address of the I O designated by s and sets the result in d Program example LD X00200 X00200 DIFO Se ORO p m ADRIO WR0100 WR0000 ADRIO WR0100 WR0000 Program description e Upon X00200 rise the actual address of WROO00 H3C00 is set in WRO100 After command execution WR0100 becomes H3C00 5 127 Chapter 5 Command Specifications DER N commands 1 Normal scan end END Ladderformat format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpua Other than Commandformat format Number of steps END Woa Oef Double word word TD SS Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Function Indicates the end of a normal scan program The execution of this command returns to the beginning of the program and a normal scan is executed This command is not necessary when there are no subroutine programs or interrupt scan programs If there is a subroutine program or interrupting program write this command at the end of the normal scan program This command is used only once in a program Do not use any startup conditions Cautionary notes e The END command is checked prior to the execution and if there is an error the following error codes are set in the special internal output WRFOO1 Also the CPU error code 34 is set to special inter
102. If an initialization request is issued during transmission communication is terminated forcibly Initialization end This bit is set to 1 when the initialization of the TRNS 0 command is completed normally At this time 4 initialization request is reset to 0 Continuation This bit is set to 1 when receiving data immediately after transmission is complete After the communication the TRNS 0 command resets this bit to 0 Parity error This bit is set to 1 when a party error occurs during communication Framing error This bit is set to 1 when a framing error occurs during communication Supplement e When the CPU receives data from a connected device after reception in your system if reception is executed with the RECV 0 command after the completion of transmission with the TRNS 0 command the reception data may not completely be received depending on the timing In such systems it is recommended that you set 6 Continuation bit to 1 and specify the reception mode after transmission 5 146 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Overrun error This bit is set to 1 when an overrun error occurs during communication Timeout This bit is set to 1 when a communication times out Input buffer full This bit is set to 1 when the receiving buffer is full Conflict error This bit is set to 1 when multiple TRANS 0 commands are started simultaneously in the user program
103. Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee FUN 40 s DABCD s Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 40 s DABCD s Wa O Double word word TD ON E Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU RCU CT Argument ASCH data f E ey H20 and H30 toH39 fenas TPP te E Function Decimal ASCII data 16 bit unsigned BCD data S 1 10 s 2 10 10 10 10 Shy 1o f 10 10 ASCII code in the 10 place 10 BCD code in the 10 place e The 4 digit decimal ASCII data specified by arguments s to s 1 is converted to 16 bit BCD data and the result is stored in s 2 e Higher digit s HOO and H20 NULL and space are processed as H30 0 Leading zero suppressed digit e Arguments will be combinations of H30 to H39 0 to 9 e If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used If the 4 digit ASCII code stored in s to s 1 is other than H30 to H39 0 to 9 DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed However this does not apply to HOO and H20 NULL and space of leading zero suppressed digits Ifs 1 tos 2 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example X00400 DIF40 LD X00400 WR0090 H2020 AND DIF40 WRO0091 H3031 FUN 40 WR0090 WR0090
104. M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws Expansion cable connector Connector used to connect the expansion cable Po tem Detailed explanation Comments Explanation of operation The I O controller is a module that outputs the output signals from the CPU It is possible to use when module to the output module mounted on the expansion base unit and sends EH CPU208 308 the input signals of the expansion base unit to the CPU module 316 448 is used 100 3 94 It is attached adjacent to the power supply module of the expansion base unit on the right side 4 30 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 13 Analog I O Module Name and function of each part EH AX44 EH AX8V EH AX8H EH AY22 EH AY2H EH AY4V EH AY4H Weight Approx 0 18 kg 0 41 Ib Dimensions mm in 1 Lock button 2 T O cover 95 3 74 100 3 94 3 Terminal block 1 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the fixation can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws This is the cover attached to the terminal block area Po 3 Terminal block This is the terminal block for connecting output signals The terminal block can be connected or disconnected Explanation of Analog Input Module When the CPU module operation The CPU module verifies the status of the installed module and if the I O is an EH CPU104 208 as
105. MS DOS Memory setting Specify RAM 08H 8 k memory EH CPU308 Specify RAM 08H 8 k memory EH CPU316 Specify RAM 16H 16 k memory EH eea Specify RAM 48H 48 k e Cable Cable EH 150 side 150 side EH OoOO R5 O Cable EH VCB02 PCCB02H personal computer side upos setting swith 3 Je H Eae se Tor E Serial port 1 setting erp fi a tet SS arapa SHES s ee e ee S Sta Sanao EE e ee E Restart the power supply after the mode setting switch has been adjusted The settings that are made while the power is on will not be effective until the power is restarted Note Refer to the manual that comes with each software on how to install the software LADDER EDITOR 7 2 Chapter 7 User Program Table 7 4 List of procedures for creating a program Select off line Select off line Select on line Initialize GPC Regenerate from FD etc Transfer program CPU gt PLC CPU type Specify H 302 1 When utilizing a program Initialize the CPU when Specii memori tyne created in another H series running it for the first time Sal di Lada FIP CPU type Specify H 302 1 right after purchase etc Eee ea Specify memory type Transfer program Conduct test operation k Create I O assignment eee Modify I O assignment Modify program Create program Modify program modify during RUN etc CPU error check Operation procedure summary Operatio
106. Name Batch shift right BCD SHIFT RIGHT BLOCK Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPus4s EH cpus Other than WBSR d n DER ERR SD V C Ave Ave Ave t e e e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 23 6 1 3n 64 6 1 3n 57 5 1 3n WBSR d n 3 Bit Word Double word R TD ss WR DR amp Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT d Head I O to be shifted O n Number of words to be O O0 0 0 O The constant is set in shifted decimal Function e Shifts n words between d and d n 1 to the right toward smaller I O number by one digit 1 digit is equivalent to 4 bits as BCD data e 0 is set to the most significant digit of d n 1 e The content of the least significant digit of d is discarded R Before execution n bits words dtn 1 Shift width k d After Pe o R E d n 1 gt k d Ifnisaword The contents 0 to 255 of the lower 8 bits b7 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC are set to the number of shifted words Ifn is a constant 0 to 255 decimal can be designated for the number of words to be shifted Cautionary notes e Use this command so that d n 1 does not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the shift is performed at the maximum range For I
107. O Double word word TD Ce Usable I O Y gt WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Be data head I O Actual addresses are set ins ands 1 No Heee 1 fel 11 Function Byte unit data Word unit data Byte unit data head I O No al Converted word unit data head I O No a2 No n of converted bytes e A byte data string is combined into word units beginning from the head I O specified by argument s for the number of bytes specified by argument s 2 and the result is stored in the head I O area specified by s 1 e The higher byte of the byte unit data is ignored e If the number of converted bytes is odd the lower 8 bits at the end of the output destination is set to H00 e Use the ADRIO command to set the actual addresses in the head I Os of s and s 1 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used The ADRIO command should be used to set the actual addresses in s and s 1 If not DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by them overlap DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by s to s 2 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed t Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 216 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Fun commands 29 Byte right shift BYTE RIGHT SHIFT Ladder format Condition code P
108. O hi Actual address is set E E e a S s 3 System area Cannot be used by aeee EEE EE EE EE e Table Relationship between number of scans and pulse activation s Number of scans Pulse activation s 1 s 2 Pulse output turns OFF s 3 s 4 Pulse output turns ON Pulse output turns ON for n1 scans and turns OFF for n2 scans Startup condition Pulse output nl scans n2 scans nl scans n2 scans nl scans n2 scans e The following operation is repeated Turns ON the bit internal output specified by argument s 2 for the number of scans specified by argument s and turns it OFF for the number of scans specified by argument s 1 e Ifthis command is executed several times within one scan the internal bit output turns ON and OFF according to the number of executions e Ifboths ands 1 are 0 the output stays OFF e Ifthe startup condition turns OFF the output as well as the progress values in s 3 and s 4 are retained e Boths 3 ands 4 should be cleared at initialization otherwise the pulse width of the first cycle may change e Use the ADRIO command to store an actual address in the pulse output I O ADRIO s 2 bit internal output e Ifthe operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used t Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 222 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Cautionary notes The pulse activation may at mo
109. RUN begins 10 The program name is set using the programming device and is stored together with the program 1 Refer to the peripheral device manual for details Note e Comment data that has been created with peripheral device is not stored in the CPU e Save the user program to a separate floppy disk or other media in case a mishap should occur 7 2 Programming Method The following methods are allowed for creating the user program Table 7 2 Programming methods Programming device used Operation concept 1 Personal computer software For off line on line operation e When each EH 150 module LADDER EDITOR etc The I O assignment table created program to be created is loaded to the base unit the is input and transfered to the EH 150 CPU T O assignment information Dedicated programming For direct operation can be read console GPCLO1H etc As the programs are input one by one the program input Initialize the EH 150 CPU to the CPU is directly written to the CPU each time when using it for the first Portable graphic programmer As the programs are input one by one the program input time after it is unpacked or PGM GPH to the CPU is directly written to the CPU each time when a battery error occurs Do not use an option box 4 Ccommand language programmer PGM CHH 7 1 Chapter 7 User Program The system configuration and procedure for creating a user program when using personal computer so
110. Shifts BCD to righ digits 0 Shifts BCD to left by n digits Shifts n bits or words starting with I O number d to the right by 1 bit or word Shifts n bits or words starting with I O number d to the left by 1 bit or word Shifts n digits of BCD starting with I O number d to the right by 1 digit Shifts n digits of BCD starting with I O number d to the left by 1 digit Transfers copies n bits or words of data starting with T O number s to the n bit or word range starting with I O number s Copies the bit or word data of I O number s to the n bit or word range starting with T O number d WM TC Constant Exchanges the n bit or word range starting with I O n 0 255 WX WY number d1 and the n bit or WR WL WM TC word range starting with I O number d2 5 10 Process time u s amia aia a s0 ao ao Remarks Classification Negation Two s complement Sign Conversion 3 tem number Ladder symbol Command s 24 BCD d s ia s T s n i s n SEG d s Processing time when n 1 Command name i NEG d T s SGET d s Two s complement Sign expansion Binary gt BCD conversion BCD gt Binary conversion Decode Encode 7 segment decode Process descriptions Reverses the bit for the I O number d value Stores two s complement of the value stored in I O number d in d
111. Specifications Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than FUN 11 s DER ERR SD y c Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max COS s t e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 40 89 amp 108 lt FUN 11 s 3 COS s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR F Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM M S RCU CT s Argument O s uses up to s 2 Function s 2 s 1 s 15 015 0 15 0 Integer portion Fractional portion COS 0 to 360 e Calculates the COS value using the unsigned binary value designated by s as the argument and sets the integer and fractional portions of the result in s 2 and s 1 respectively e The COS value is indicated in a binary value and negative values are indicated in two s complements e Ifthe calculation is performed normally DER is equal to 0 e The fractional data is the value obtained by multiplying the actual value by 65 535 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e The argument is given in degrees in the range 0 lt s lt 360 Any other value will equal DER to 1 and the operation will not be performed e Ifs 1 and s 2 exceed the maximum value for the I O number DER is equal to 1 and the operation will not be performed Program
112. TC Constant n Constant 1 8 d WY WR WL WM s R L M n Constant 1 8 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Process time u s Command Process descriptions name I O types used Command Ladder symbol 0 BCU d s Bit count aaa 2 FIFIT P n FIFO Classification Pp 8 Item number Koj n Q x B Qa n 2 Calculates the square root of d WY WR WL the value of s 8 digit BCD WM and stores it in d 4 digit BCD DL DM Constant Word d WY WR WL 3 Among the contents of s word double word stores the number of bits that are set to 1 in I O number d Application commands Double word d WY WR WL WM s DX DY DR DL DM Constant 3 Swaps the upper 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the value word for I O number d 3 Stores the value of n in the FIFO size area P and stores 0 in the FIFO used number area P 1 Stores the value of I O number s in the FIFO write P WR WL WM n Constant 0 255 initialization 3 FIFWR P s f FIFO write 4 FIFRD P d FIFO read location and adds 1 to the FIFO used number area P 1 Reads data from the FIFO read location and stores it in d then shifts the data in the FIFO by one data item and subtracts 1 from the value of Constant 3 3 d WY WR WL WM TC the FIFO usage number area P 1 Stores the lower 4 bit values of the n words starting with s in the lower 4 bits each of d word d
113. Test Operation Chapter 9 PLC Installation Loading Wiring 9 1 to 9 8 97T Installation seniai anA ET AEE A Sd case Bha yes E AE A AEE AAE E O EAER 9 1 O RA Loading E TAINA KONS IBU ARENE E A TAE E A T A EA 9 2 9 3 Wiring Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 10 1 to 10 20 10B AR CAUUT OS aara a a Ea e E A OE EE AEE E EN 10 1 10 1 1 Communication port functions 0 ccc eeeseeseneeeesseesessesseeseeececseesessessessesacesesaseaeeseeseesateneeaeeaes 10 1 LOe1 2 Port 1 setup method Egs iieaoe aeee EEEa A AE NAAA EEEE E E E AA AEE ORTEN 10 1 10 2 Dedicated Pott iane ani E E E A AE E AEEA EAN hO 3 lt Greneral PULpOSe POL eA e hs ee eh A T E AAE E A E A 10 3 1 RS 232C interface 10 3 3 1 N communication RS 485 raosi eian ia a A a E Er a 10 7 10 4 Modem Control Function 10 4 1 Configurations seinieni eii as eia Ea EK iin eda ee A E eed 10 4 2 Connection specifications ccccccescceseeseceseeseseccesecesecseceseesecesecseceseesseeseceeeesecaeeaeceeeeaeeeseeeeeaeenes 10 13 10 4 3 Additional task Codes isernia aa aa EAEAP E a ERN 10 14 10 44 AT Commands tet AES S E AE A 10 15 10 5 Port and Peripheral Unit Connection 0 cccececcecessesessesseeseeseeseecseesesseesesaceecsecsessesaessessesaeeeseessesaesnesaeeaes 10 17 10 6 Connection method for RS 422 485 communication cccccessceseeeeeseeseeeseecseeseeseeseeseeeceesesnesesaeeseeaeeees 10 19 Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Functio
114. V DC from outside to the S terminal 3 Indicates the module s internal current consumption To operate a device other than the module separate current is required Diagram of internal circuit EH YTP8 EH YTP16 YTP16S i i Internal i circuit Internal circuit DIO OH OHIO QO Oe eG e Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table SSR output module Number of output points 4 points module Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit No Signal name Z Q Z Q Internal circuit Z Q X jsx jS j2 a jsx S Z Q amp z z Qala Z Q Z Z AJA Z G YIN n PRI olry Key yoyo ye ye Z io amp Z Q 4 25 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 10 32 point Output Module Name and function of each part Type EH YT32 EH YTP32 2 Lock button S Weight Approx 0 16 kg 0 32 Ib 3 LED display switch p g Dimensions mm in 1 LED cover 30 1 18 95 3 74 ko lt _ _ _ _ 4 External wiring connector l 100 3 94 1 LED cover This is the cover for the LED that displays the output status When the output signal turns on the LED for the relevant number lights up The LED only works when the module is energized 2 Lock bu
115. W AO Data logging error arning Detected an error in the memory board or log data Chapter 12 Error Code List RUN ERR Ope Related special ration internal output LED LED Word Runs t on ne Ca oM Runs 1 er R7FE WRFO7F 1 Condition prior to error occurrence is restored If operation was in progress the RUN LED turns ON if operation was stopped the RUN LED turns off 2 Depending on the run parameter setting operation can continue even when an abnormal occurs How to clear the error code Set 1 in the special internal output R7EC to clear the error code from the PLC Pressing the reset switch for the power failure memory protection R CL on the front of the CPU while the CPU is stopped also clears the error code However if the reset switch for the power failure memory protection is pressed all the power failure memory area is cleared with 0 so exercise caution 12 3 Chapter 12 Error Code List 12 2 Grammar and Assemble Error Codes Descriptions of the grammar assemble error codes are given below The error codes are output as a hexadecimal to the internal output WRFOO1 Error code Error item Description of error Corrective action LBL same number in the program or more of the same number to 1 FOR same number in the program or more of the same number to 1 NEXT same number in the program 2 or more of the same number to 1 SB number in the program or more of the same number to 1 T
116. WRO000 O Of1 1 O O 1 1 1 1 1fOfof1 1 E d d Lel e When s is a word 0 to 32 767 decimal correspond to H0000 to H7FFF hexadecimal 32 768 to 1 decimal correspond to H8000 to HFFFF hexadecimal e When s isa double word 0 to 2 147 483 647 decimal correspond to H00000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal 2 147 483 648 to 1 decimal correspond to H80000000 to HFFFFFFFF hexadecimal Cautionary notes e Use edge trigger as the startup condition for this command 5 108 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 22 Name Sign addition SIGN GET Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU44s EH cpus Other than SGET d s DER ERR SD Vv C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e o o e Upper 13 49 85 amp case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW SGET d s Word 3 16 e 69 e 70 amp Double word 4 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT d TO after absolute value is OJO OJO taken s T O before absolute value O O0 O0 O0 0 0 0 0 is taken Function e IfC R7FO is 0 The content of s is set
117. WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm S RCU CT s Argument O s uses up to s 2 Function s 2 st s 5 015 0 15 0 Integer portion Fractional portion lt SIN 0 to 360 e Calculates the SIN value using the unsigned binary value designated using s as the argument and sets the integer and fractional portions of the result in s 2 and s 1 respectively e The SIN value is indicated in a binary value and negative values are indicated in two s complements e If the calculation is performed normally DER is equal to 0 e The fractional data is the value obtained by multiplying the actual value by 65 535 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e The argument is given in degrees in the range 0 lt s lt 360 Any other value will equal DER to 1 and the operation will not be performed e Ifs 1 and s 2 exceed the maximum value for the I O number DER is equal to 1 and the operation will not be performed Program example LD X00100 x00100 H WRO100 40 AND DIFO FUN 10 WRO100 WRO100 40 FUN 10 WRO100 Program description An angle of 40 is set in WRO100 SIN operation is performed at the leading edge of X00100 and the fractional portion of the result is set in WRO101 and the whole number portion is set in WRO102 as binary values Execution results WRO102 H0000 WRO101 HA48E WRO100 H0028 5 188 Chapter 5 Command
118. WY WR WL WM s WR WL WM n Constant 0 4 d WR WL WM s WX WY WR WL WM TC Constant n Constant 0 4 Mo 6 DIST d s n 7 ADRIO d s 4 Processing time when FIFO size is n 1 3 Distribute Extracts the value of s word in 4 bit units starting with the least significant bits and sets them in the lower 4 bits of each word starting with I O number d word The upper bits are set to 0 3 T O address conversion Stores the actual address of the T O designated by s in d U n 5 12 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Process time us Chapter 5 Command Specifications 6 Classification Cntrol commands 5 6 Control commands Ladder symbol Item number Command c d Process omman ae Process descriptions I O types used time u s ZT EH 150 1 END nae scan Indicates the end of a normal None 194 scan and re executes normal scan from the head of the normal scan 2 CEND s Scan Re executes normal scan conditional from the head of the normal end scan when s 1 while the next command is executed when s 0 JMP n Unconditio Jumps to LBL n of the same n Constant 0 255 nal jump No n 4 CJMP n s Conditional jump n of the same No n when s 0 executes the next command 5 LBL n Label Indicates the jump destination of JMP or CJMP of the same No n FOR n s FOR When s 0 jumps to the n Constant 0 49 location after the NEXT n of s WY WR WL t
119. When input X00000 turns on the loop between LBL 0 and JMP 0 is escaped by jumping from CJMP1 X00000 to LBL 1 e If there is no command as CJMP 1 X00000 to escape from the loop the loop from LBL 0 to JMP 0 will continue endlessly Chapter 5 Command Specifications 6 An overlap of JMP commands with the same code number is valid JMP 5 JMP 5 CJMP 5 A startup condition can be programmed with respect to JMP commands Startup condition e If a jump is performed from JMP 0 to LBL 0 programs A B and C will not be executed Pi rogram C LBL 0 8 The CJMP command also follows the same syntax as 1 through 7 Note 1 When a JMP command jumps to LBL the status of each I O between JMP and LBL is retained However the timer progress value will be updated e If X00000 turns on after X00001 turns on the progress value of TDO will be updated even if a jump is performed from JMP 1 to LBL 1 If X00000 remains on TDO will not turn on even if its progress value exceeds 100 X00000 X00001 Note 2 If the JMP command is used in conjunction with the MCS or MCR command the following actions will result so exercise caution when programming X00000 JMP 2 Program zi X00001 When JMP 2 does not jump Y00100 will turn on when X00001 and X00002 are both on e When JMP 2 does jump if X00000 is on Y00100 will follow the on off of X00002 regardless of the on off
120. Word A 49 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Task code H45 Forced set reset with I O number designation Classification I O control N random points Designates N points words of I O numbers randomly and forcibly sets the designated data or resets the data area Execution condition CPU status o o o o waropen Request Number of bits number of words HO1 to H28 1 to 40 T O code T O number Refer to the task code H40 Data I I L Nth point Nth word gt Bit data Word data lt H0000 to HFFFF Response ae Response task code For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter The EH 150 returns H00 normal execution even for I Os that are out of range A 50 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Task code HAO Monitoring with I O number designation Classification I O control N continuous points Reads N continuous points words of monitor data starting with the designated I O number This task code can also be executed when the CPU is not occupied The I O data of EH 150 outside the range returns all off 0 READ occupancy Occupancy WRITE occupancy status Not occupied T O code T O number Number of bits HO1 to HFO 1 to 240 Number of words H01 to H78 1 to 120 Refer to the task code H40 Response T Resp
121. X00303 X00303 DIF33 AND DIF33 DR0030 H001289AB FUN 33 WR0030 DR0030 H001289AB FUN 33 WR0030 Program description e The binary data H001289AB stored in DR0030 WR0030 WR0031 is converted to ASCH data e The conversion result is stored in WR0032 to WR0036 Execution results DR0030 H001289AB WR0032 H3030 WR0033 H3 132 WR0034 H3839 WR0035 H4142 WR0036 H0000 t Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 197 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from 16 bit BCD to decimal ASCII data Item number Fun commands 15 Name BCD TO DECIMAL ASCII Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee FUN 34 s BCDDA s Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 34 s BCDDA s Wa O Double word word TD er Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Argument conversion s uses up to s 3 cel Function 16 bit BCD data Decimal ASCII data 15 12 11 7 4 3 0 15 87 0 s 10 10 10 10 s 1 10 10 s 2 10 10 10 BCD code in the 10 place 643 Soi 10 ASCII code in the 10 place e The 16 bit BCD data specified by argument s is converted to a 4 digit decimal ASCII code and the result is stored in s 1 to s 3 e Leading zeros of the conversion result are suppressed and these digits are replaced by H20 space e NULL after ASCII data indicates
122. a control command is to be included in the revisions to the program make the changes after first performing the control command change procedure in the programming device and checking for safety Until operation starts to continue with the new program a halt period occurs when the module does not run External input information is not being received during this time so leave plenty of allowance in the timing for executing a online change in RUN 10 Forced set reset Forced set and forced reset of the designated I O can be performed from the programming device connected to the CPU module 11 Forced output Output can be forced with respect to the designated I O number from the programming device connected to the CPU module For I O that are not designated outputs are shut off 12 Calendar clock The EH CPU208 308 3 16 448 has a calendar clock function function 1 The year month date day of the week hour minute and second can be set only EH CPU 208 2 There is a function for making adjustments in 30 second units 308 3 16 448 3 When a battery is not installed the calendar clock information is not retained when power goes off The calendar clock must be set again 13 Dedicated port This is a communication port with dedicated protocol for the H series The communication command called the task code is defined in the port 1 A programming device can be connected 2 The ports that can be used as dedicated ports are Por
123. after conversion BIN Olo OJO s T O before conversion O O0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BCD Function e The result of the content conversion of s from BCD to binary is output to d e Ifthe contents of s is not BCD data if an A through F is included in the data DER R7F4 is set to 1 and the conversion will not be executed d remains unchanged Before execution s 6 Pee E l opii fofifofofi ifofo ojofof BCD After execution d 1 i B L I 4 i F ofo oji fifo p i op epe p he Binary Combinations of d and s Double word Double word Cautionary notes e Ifdata is error the previous contents of d are retained Program example LD X00000 X00000 BIN WY0010 WLO00 BIN WY0010 WL000 Program description e When X00000 turns on the content of WL000 is converted from BCD to binary and output WL000 H6691 After conversion WY0010 HIB4F 5 112 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 26 Name Decode DECODE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU44s EH cPU3 ee DECO d s n DER ERR SD V C Ave Ave Ave t e e e J Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 35 141 35x2 77 141 56x2 62 1 65x2
124. and before the second set value is exceeded it is considered a normal operation so R104 WDT14 does not turn on CL14 R104 i When X00004 turns off the progress value and WDT coil WDT14 be ge output are cleared Since the startup condition turned off before the progress value exceeded the first set value the WDT coil does not Second set value 40000 N turn on and the progress value is cleared to 0 First set value 20000 i Since the watchdog clear CL14 turned on before the WDT14 progress progress value exceeded the first set value it is considered value TC14 1 2 3 1 4 5 1 67 an abnormal operation and R104 WDT14 turns on The progress value is retained as is Even if the progress value exceeded the second set value since the watchdog clear CL14 did not turn on it is considered an abnormal operation and R104 SDT14 turns on The progress value keeps being updated Even if the watchdog clear CL14 turns on after the WDT coil is turned on after the progress value exceeds the second set value it is ignored The clear is performed under the conditions set immediately prior to the execution of the WDT coil command Example using word I O as the set value When RUN is commenced the set value is set to word T O Or designate the word I O for the set value to store in the power failure memory beforehand 5 44 Chapter 5 Command Specifications
125. base unit according to the number of I O modules that are used 4 13 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 6 Input Module Name and function of each part Type EH XD8 EH XD16 EH XA16 2 Lock button EH XAH16 Weight Approx 0 16 kg 0 35 Ib EH XD eee Approx 0 18 kg 0 4 Ib EH XA Dimensions mm in 3 I O cover 30 1 18 95 3 74 k lt _ gt x 100 3 94 4 Terminal block 1 LED cover This is the cover for the LED that displays the input status When the input signal turns on the LED for the relevant number lights up The LED only lights when the module is energized 2 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the fixation can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws This is the cover attached to the terminal block area Po 4 Terminal block This is the terminal block for connecting input signals The terminal block is removable Operation explanation This module inputs digital signals The LED s light up while the corresponding digital signal is ON The CPU reads the status of the mounted modules If the status accords with actual I O configuration in the user program the CPU inputs digital signals according to the user program Terminal block The screws for the terminal block are M3 screws Use a crimp terminal that fits the screw diameter The maximum thicknes
126. be done 1 When READ occupying Other programming device is connected Change other programming devices to off line When a personal computer or panel etc is Change the personal computer or panel to off line connected and monitoring is being done When monitoring it is convenient to use the occupancy unnecessary task code END command is not executed A program that runs in an endless loop is Correct the program so that it does not run in an being executed endless loop Trying to modify a program that Doing an online change in RUN for a ladder An explanation of how to do an online change in contains control commands containing a control command may cause RUN for a ladder that contains a control command operation to stop depending on the type of is given in the programming software manual the program modification error 5 A password has been set A program protected by a password cannot Perform the revision after having the system be modified supervisor remove the password When the CPU is stopped the modification is executed without displaying a message confirming online change in RUN fe 2 1 Cautionary Items for Changing Programs in RUN The system operation of EH CPU448 is slightly different from those of EH CPU104 208 308 316 The following describes cautionary items for changing programs in RUN when using EH CPU448 1 Updating the timer elapsed value The timer elapsed value of EH CPU448 is calculated by compar
127. become 0 Logging information table I O number Write Common area Sets the word head I O number that stores the current logging information data See b Explanation of logging information word table Initialization specifications Write Sets the parameter table used 15 8 7 0 CA a b0 to b3 Open Unused b b4 to b7 Initialization of log write parameter table 0 Not initialized Other than 0 Initialized c b8 to b11 Initialization of log clear parameter table Other than 0 Initialized d b12 to b15 Open Unused 5 271 O oO N z 5 UL Chapter 5 Command Specifications Management table details a Explanation of data logging management table 2 2 6 Log write parameter I O number Write Sets the word head I O number used in the FUN 211 Log Data Write process When the write Function is not used set H0000 as a dummy argument See c Explanation of log write parameter word table Log clear parameter I O number Write Sets the bit head I O number of the parameter used in the FUN 212 Log Data Clear process When the clear function is not used set H0000 as a dummy argument See e Explanation of log clear parameter bit tables a Cc Z N Y o O 5 272 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Management table details b Explanation of log information word table 1 Log information word table 0 Number of logs allowed lower R 2 s 12 a
128. between two interrupt scans or after multiple entry points and one exit the final interrupt scan SB 1 SB2 SB 3 Program head JMP 1 JMP 1 Normal scan Subroutine 1 Subroutine area Subroutine 2 LBL 1 Interrupt scan Subroutine area Subroutine 10 Interrupt INT 2 RTI Subroutine 11 Subroutine area Program end Subroutine 12 scan 6 It is also possible to program a interrupt scan with many entry points and one exit 2 Program the subroutine start SB n and subroutine end i a a INT 0 INT 1 INT 2 RTS commands without specifying startup conditions JMP 1 JMP 1 Startup The RTS startup condition error will occur during operation pre processing 7 Nesting of subroutines is allowed up to 5 levels Ist level 2nd level 3rdlevel 4th level 5th level 3 Program the interrupt scan start INT n and scan complete RTI commands without specifying startup conditions Startup Program head END ee 1 As shown to the left the subroutine n program order and nesting order have 4 The same subroutine can be called from a normal scan SPd no relationship INT 0 RTI SB 40 CAL 1 L RTS interrupt scan or subroutine Program head Normal scan CAL 1 Ris END SB 50 SB 2 L RTS Subroutine 2 CAL 1 RTS SB1 LRTS INIO Subroutine 1 Interrupt scan CAL 1 RTI 5 142 Chapter 5 Command Specifications General purpose port transmi
129. cable should be only up to 0 75 mm Use 0 5 mm cable when two crimp terminals are attached to the same terminal The recommended crimp terminal is indicated below EXO 60 24 Recommended Care must be exercised when ECT foa handling the terminal since it may fall off if the screw is loose Unit mm in 4 44 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table Accuracy 0 5 C a 3 C 6 C 20 to 40 C 50 to 400 C 2 mA constant current system Conversion time Approx 1 second per four values Insulation Between value and Photocoupler insulation fee O No insulation 24V DC The temperature conversion data for one of the four values is H7FFF The maximum total resistance of four values is 400 Q Shielded cable Linearization Error detection The temperature conversion data at or below 51 C or at or above 410 C is H7FFF Wire breakage processing The temperature conversion data for one of the four values is H7FFF T O assignment X4W 1 The accuracy indicates the value after 10 minutes from the power up The value may become slightly higher immediately after the power up Also check the temperature measuring resistor beforehand because it is also subject to error 2 Indicates the current terminal wiring in open state When an open error occurs in the voltage terminal wiring the data becomes inconsistent 7 Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit PMU BY EH PT4 24V DC
130. can also be executed when the CPU is not occupied Execution condition CPU status T O code T O number Refer to the task code H40 Number of bits HO1 to HC8 1 to 200 Number of words HO1 to H64 1 to 100 Set reset data d Set reset data Bit data Number of points 8 When the number of set reset points is less than 8 points set 0 to the open bits Ist point 2nd point Binary image HOO to HFF Word data Word number value Nth word Binary image H0000 to HFFFF Response a Response task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list a by task code at the end of this chapter The EH 150 returns H00 normal execution even for I Os that are out of range A 53 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Task code HA4 Monitoring with I O number designation Classification I O control N random points Reads the monitor data by designating N random points words of I O numbers This task code can also be executed when the CPU is not occupied The I O data of EH 150 outside the range returns all off 0 READ occupancy Occupancy WRITE occupancy status Not occupied Ist point word Nth point word I c a Number of bits number of words HO1 to
131. change simultaneously attempted to the same the target area target area or the module was reset while reading or writing 2 An error will be generated but the read write processing will be performed within the specified range A timeout will be generated if a response is not received within 100 ms after handshake is controlled and read write operation is started A timeout will be generated if a response is not received within 5 s after software reset is started 5 267 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Fun commands 66 Data logging initialization setting LOG INITIALIZE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us FUN 210 s DER erR sp v c LOGIT s er ete Command format Number of steps Condition FUN 210 s LOGIT s Word Oef Double word word TD Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Data logging W I table Function Initializes the data logging function common area The initialization settings will be used to check and initialize the parameters for log data write and log data clear processes Always perform the initialization setting once during operation indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used For the details of the data logging management table see Management table details For the error codes that are set see Error code details Cautionary notes If an error i
132. code 34 is set to special internal output WRFO00 Instruction for use Program execution when R000 and R001 are both off Program execution when R000 is on and R001 is off CAL 0 is executed then the subroutine 0 program is executed CAL 1 is not executed the subroutine 0 program is terminated and the Subroutine 0 R001 program execution is returned to the code following the CAL 0 Subroutine 0 progr Program execution when R000 and R001 are both on CAL 0 is executed then the subroutine 0 program is executed CAL 1 is executed then the subroutine 1 program is executed The subroutine 1 program is completed and execution is returned to the code following the CAL 1 The subroutine 0 program is completed and execution is returned to the code following the CAL 0 5 139 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Control commands 11 Start interrupt scan program INTERRUPT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us pe RARER we Command format Number of steps R TD SS WR DR Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU WM DM RCU CT miem 1 1 1 11 1 1 e ow2 aimy Function This command declares the start of an interrupt scan program n 0 to 2 indicates a periodical interrupt scan It is set to the 10 ms periodic scan when n 0 20 ms periodic scan when n 1 and 40 ms periodic interrupt scan when n 2 The smaller the number n the hi
133. code as shown below If there are spare parts available replace the parts Contact our service department Error Error name Corrective action code Re inspect the fixation of the CPU module to the basic base unit and restart the power supply If the same error occurs it is a hardware error in the CPU module so replace the CPU module with a spare Make sure that there are no machines etc that generate excessive noise Pa Diane J Power shut off Check the basic and extended power supply voltage power supply error User memory error The contents of the user program is destroyed Perform initialization and transfer the program again This is displayed when the machine is stored with a worn out battery or without battery for a long period of time 33 User memory size error This may be displayed when the contents of the memory within the CPU module is unstable If the same error is generated after initialization replace the CPU module with a new one 41 1 O information Check the I O assignment emon emee mer VO niie VO sew naton aniespansoneae sion 43 Remote error Perform module settings reset etc according to the error code of the malfunctioning Oe eae 44 Overload error Change the program so that the scan time of the user program is shorter or change Women E Overload error Change the program so that the periodic interrupt program execution time is shorter Tea ee T O assignment point over Perform I O assignm
134. constant input and for PID internal calculations If the maximum WR number is exceeded error code XX05 will be written in error code 0 e 48 words are used per loop for PID constant input and for PID internal calculations If the maximum WR number is exceeded error code XX05 will be written in error code 0 Head address of the WR of the word table for loop 3 Write 2 e 48 words are used per loop for PID constant input and for PID internal calculations If the maximum WR number is exceeded error code XX05 will be written in error code 0 Head address of the WR of the word table for loop 64 Write 2 e 48 words are used per loop for PID constant input and for PID internal calculations If the maximum WR number is exceeded error code XX05 will be written in error code 0 Error codes are expressed as a four digit hexadecimal value For more information see the Error Code Details 2 The Write in the above table indicates the areas where the user enters data using a program It is also possible to read data 5 172 b Word table and bit table for each loop Chapter 5 Command Specifications If the content of xxxx 5 in a is ADRIO xxxx 5 yyyy Address Contents Specifications Notes Remarks yyyy ADRIO yyyy zzzz Sets the header address of the Uses 16 bits per loop Set the actual 11 zzzz is the header number _ bit table
135. correct Refer to the manual for each peripheral device 14 14 Chapter 15 Operation Examples Chapter 15 Operation Examples To understand the basic operation of the EH 150 this chapter explains samples of operations such as inputting simple programs and verifying operations The following programming devices can be used __ Peripheral device name Portable graphic programmer PGM GPH ROM pack for portable graphic PGMPK2H programmer Command language programmer PGM CHH 1 2 H series ladder diagram command HL PC3 language software Ladder Editor HL AT3E H series ladder diagram command HLW PC3 language software Ladder Editor for HLW PC3E Windows version The graphic input unit model name GPCLO1H can be used However the PGMIF1H cannot be used Operation verification procedures An operation is verified according to the following procedures Start Start the Ladder Editor for Windows rrsr t 777 777 1 Perform initial settings ema 2 ieee a o Check program errors freee 4 Save program ER 5 Transfer program to the CPU frrvrrrrrrrrr eno nsn reco neneene 6 Monitor verify the operation m 7 End A personal computer and Ladder Editor for Windows are used as the peripheral devices in the example For details refer to the user s manual for each peripheral device Detailed operation example The following explains an operation exa
136. corresponding to the command number n in the JMPn CJMPn commands is not programmed in the same program area CAL nesting overflow There are more than 6 levels of subroutine nesting CAL CAL undefined RTS command was executed without executing a CAL command FOR to NEXT error There is a NEXTn with the same command number n prior to the FORn command NEXT area error There is no NEXTn command with the same command number n as the FORn command in the same program area FOR to NEXT nesting The FORn and NEXTn commands are not nested FOR overflow FOR nesting overflow There are more than 6 nesting levels of FOR to NEXT H0016 H0041 H0045 H0046 12 5 Chapter 12 Error Code List 12 6 Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs The EH 150 has a special internal output area for performing status display and various other settings The special internal output area is always kept as power failure memory 13 1 Bit Special Internal Output Area Definitions of the bit special internal output area R7CO to R7FF are given below No Name Meaning Description Setting Resetting condition condition R7CO Continue when overload 0 Stop running when overload Designates continue stop running when a error occurs error occurs normal scan overload error occurs normal scan Continue running when overload error occurs Continue when overload Stop running when overload error occurs Designates continue s
137. created using the following assignments In actual cases change the I O numbers and other items according to the application No Usage Remarks 0100 to 0105 FUN 210 command Data logging management table s to S 5 See the data logging management table 0400 to 0404 Log information table See the log information table 100 to 105 Log write parameter table See the log write parameter table 100 to 103 Log write control bit table See the log write control bit table 0200 to 023F Log data groups 1 This data is logged 0300 to 033F Log data groups 2 This data is logged 0204 Sequence number Increments by 1 after each logging 0405 Save area for initialization result Only the result of the FUN 211 is set 0 Save bit for initialization result If ON it indicates normal completion execution allowed 0 Log start bit Logging interval 10 minutes monitoring start bit 10 10 minute monitoring timer Turns on when 10 minutes have elapsed FUN 211 command error code s 5 280 The error code that has been generated as a result of the log data write is set Program example Initial setting for data logging ADRIO WMO0100 R100 WMO0101 2 ADRIO WM0102 WR0200 WM0103 64 ADRIO WM0104 WR0300 WMO0105 64 DR204 H00000000 ADRIO WRO102 WR0400 WR0103 H0010 ADRIO WR0104 WM0100 WR0105 H0000 FUN 2
138. description Time chart X00000 T R124 oe 1 scan time e Upon a fall of X00000 R124 turns on for one scan e Ifb contact is used for X00000 operation will be the same as the a contact DIF operation 5 25 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 10 Name Coil output OUT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpu3 Other than n left o ERR SD Vv Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Command format Number of steps Usable I O Constant T O number Function e Switches on the coil when the operation result obtained up to that point is 1 e Switches off the coil when the operation result obtained up to that point is 0 Cautionary notes e Land WL become the internal output when link modules are not used Program example X00000 Y00110 H mama o X00000 Y00110 X00001 11 X00001 Y00111 Y00112 Program description e When input X00000 is on the operation is 1 and Y00110 turns on e When input X00001 is on the operation is 1 and Y00111 and Y00112 turn on 5 26 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 11 12 Name Set reset coil output SET RES Ladder format Condition code Processing time us ie n R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH
139. device so that each power supply is a separate system Main power supply 100 V AC to 200 V AC NF He Power for the PLC unit Transformer NF noise filter NF Power for I O signals Transformer NF Power for general equipment Figure 9 3 Example of power system diagram 2 Regarding fail safe 1 Construct an interlock circuit outside the PLC When the PLC power supply is turned on or off the lag time and difference in startup time between the PLC unit power and the external power particularly DC power supply for the PLC I O module signals may temporarily cause the I O not to operate normally Do not control the power for the EH YR12 relays to have it perform an interlock with the external load etc The relays may turn on even when power is not being supplied by an aluminum electrolytic condenser inside the module to drive the relays Also it is plausible that a fault in the external power supply or a failure in the PLC unit will lead to abnormal actions To prevent such actions from causing abnormal operation of the entire system and from the viewpoint of creating a fail safe mechanism construct ladders such as an emergency stop circuit the protect circuit and the interlock circuit for the sections that lead to a mechanical breakdown or accident from abnormal operation outside the PLC 2 Install a lightning arrester To prevent damage to equipment as a result of being struck by lightning it
140. digits are replaced by H20 space The remaining digits after converting to ASCII are replaced by NULL which indicates the end of a string If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e Ifs 1 tos 3 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00300 X00300 DIF30 AND DIF30 WR0000 12345 FUN 30 WR0000 WR0000 12345 FUN 30 WR0000 Program description e The binary data 12345 stored in WR0000 is converted to ASCII data e The conversion result is stored in WROO01 to 3 Execution results WR0000 12345 H3039 WRO001 H3132 WRO002 H3334 WRO003 H3500 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 194 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from 32 bit signed binary to decimal ASCII data Item number Fun commands 12 Name DOUBLE BINARY TO DECIMAL ASCII Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee DBINDA s w FUN 31 s Wa O Double word word TEE 3 T Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL Other TMR CU DM RCU CT Ps arwumenrcowen o ro s Argument higher S dof prse Function Constant 32 bit signed binary data Decimal ASCII data 15 87 0 s Lower 16 bit
141. e Shifts n bits words between d and d n 1 to the left toward greater I O number by one bit word e 0 H0000 is set to the bit word for d e The content of d n 1 is discarded tie Before execution T n bits words I Shift width 4 Discarded a I F After execution 0 d t d n 1 Ifnisaword The contents 0 to 255 of the lower 8 bits b7 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC are set to the number of shifted bits words Ifn is a constant 0 to 255 decimal can be designated for the number of bits words to be shifted Cautionary notes e Use this command so that d n 1 does not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the shift is performed at the maximum range from d For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table e Ifnis equal to 0 the block shift will not occur and DER R7F4 will be 0 Program example X00001 DIF1 LD X00001 1H i WSHL WR0010 3 H snp DIFI WSHL WR0010 3 1 Program description e When X00001 rises the contents of WR0010 WR0011 and WR0012 are shifted to the left by one word WRO012 WR0011 WROO10 H2 H Before the sh ift m HB Q Afer the shift Deleted Set to 0 5 98 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 14
142. e The fractional data is the value obtained by multiplying the actual value by 65 535 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e The argument is given in degrees in the 0 lt s lt 360 When s is equal to 90 or s is equal to 270 H7FFF and HFFFF are set for s 2 and s 1 respectively If s falls outside the range DER is equal to 1 and the operation will not be performed e Ifs 1 and s 2 exceed the maximum value for the I O number DER is equal to 1 and the operation will not be performed Program example LD X00102 x00102 De WR0105 45 AND DIF2 FUN 12 WRO105 WRO105 45 FUN 12 WRO105 Program description e An angle of 45 is set in WRO105 e TAN operation is performed at the leading edge of X00102 and the fractional portion of the result is set in WRO106 and the whole number portion is set in WRO107 as binary values Execution results WRO107 H0001 WRO106 H0000 WRO105 H002D 5 190 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than FUN 13 s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max ASIN s t o e e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 62 123 174 amp FUN 13 s 3 ASIN s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY wL
143. error UN cation Error name detection timing Related special internal output Nn Overload error periodic scan periodic processing aN a N VO assignment points over when power turns on when RUN starts during RUN when parameters changed T O module abnormal always checking VO transmission error when high function module is transmitting when transfer command is being executed VO inappropriate assignment check during operation 53 54 Communication module abnormal always checking 55 Communication module transmission error when a peripheral device is connected to the communication module nn Communication module I O assignment over always checking Communication module I O verify error always checking Link module abnormal always checking Port 2 parity when transmitting Port 2 framing overrun ransmission error lon ransmission error when transmitting Port 2 time out when transmitting Port 2 protocol error ransmission error 64 ransmission error when transmitting Port 2 transmission error BCC error when transmitting lon an S Port 1 transmission error parity when transmitting Port 1 transmission error framing overrun when transmitting Port 1 transmission error time out when transmitting Execution time for periodic scan exceeded the execution period Number of CPU assignment slots exce
144. exceed the maximum value of the I O number DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed e Ifthe areas specified by s through s 2 exceed the maximum I O number the data will be expanded within the specified area range but DER will be equal to 1 e Ifthe number of bits s 1 exceeds 16 DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed e Ifthe number of bits s 1 is 0 no processing will be performed DER will be equal to 1 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 255 FUN 127 s qn Cc Zz N N Q Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example _ example X00200 ADRIO WR0100 M0000 WR0101 H0004 ADRIO WR0102 WR0200 FUN 127 WR0100 Sets the bit data of M0000 through M0003 starting with the lower level bits of WR0200 in sequence All other bits will be set to 0 5 256 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 63 Compress word data to bit data Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than FUN 128 s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max WTOBIT s t e e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 145 lt FUN 128 s 3 WTOBIT s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR E Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM D
145. failure memory might be altered unintentionally due to an instantaneous power failure 8 10 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 8 4 Operation Parameter The settings of parameters which are required to perform tasks such as creating programs transferring programs to the CPU are performed The setting contents are explained below Function Description When to use the function Password O Register a password to a program in the four digit Use when protecting the hexadecimal format The program with a password will not confidentiality of the program allow program operation nor changes unless the correct password is entered so please exercise caution Caution The user will not be able to reset the password when it is forgotten so exercise sufficient caution when using a password Password is not set at the time of shipment Set the CPU name used to perform programming Always perform these settings For EH 150 set to the following when programming Set H 302 with the EH 150 However set EH 150 with the LADDER EDITOR Windows version Ver 2 0 or later Memory assignment Set the memory capacity Always perform these settings For EH 150 set to the following when programming EH CPU104 EH CPU208 308 EH CPU316 Memory type RAM 04H RAM 08H RAM 16H Memory type RAM 48H Operation mode at abnormal occurrence Set this when you wish to continue the CPU operation when the error generated by the CPU
146. for unit 1 WY10 of the sample is treated Check Ok as undefined the error is displayed as in the figure icine ennor check to the right 090993 undefined exist i ndefine lo exis If there are any errors correct the errors of the Undefined no eri t program before check the program again coe ae 15 11 Chapter 15 Operation Examples STEP 5 Saving the program Save the program and comment that has been created to a floppy disk Click File Record in the Menu bar the Ladder editor for Windows Ladder1 eee Record icon or File gt Batch Record The dialogue for Record or Batch Record is displayed Pull down menu Record Bi Specify the file type and save Batch Record Saves a program and all the comment files Record dialogue box Specify the directory to save in file name and file type Batch Record dialogue box Specify the place to save and file name Click the Save button to save Record dialogue box Box Comment boc Circuit Comment cic File name extensions are not necessary to input Record and Batch Record display the results of the EN sae save operations for one file and five files Start saving of Ladder1 respectively Completed saving The figure to the left shows an example of a result Coapleted saving o display for the Batch Record P e a Stop saving Start saving of Ladder1 No data in memory Stop saving Start saving
147. gt s2 lt gt Relational box 7 ND s1 lt gt s2 lt gt Relational box 10 LD s1 S lt gt s2 Signed lt gt Relational box 11 AND s1 S lt gt s2 Signed lt gt Relational box 2 13 R s1 S lt gt s2 Signed lt gt Relational box P ADSI 17 JANDGIS lt RIED ANGI SD Signed lt Relatonarbox O Supported x Not supported i R s1 lt gt s2 lt gt Relational box 21 22 23 24 x x x x x x x x x x x LD s1 lt s2 lt Relational box x Ea Ea 7 8 o 10 a 12 3 5 16 Ea 18 9 20 21 2 23 24 A 5 Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart Arithmetic commands Command Command name EH 150 H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 H4010 H 700 H 1002 H 300 H 702 format e EA e Substitution statement sl s2 sl B s2 Binary addition BCD addition ajaja ll n a n Ka N Binary subtraction s B s2 BCD subtraction s x s2 s1 Bx s2 s Sx s2 sl s2 10 d s1 B s2 11 d s1 S s2 12 d s1 OR s2 13 d s1 AND s2 14 d s1 XOR s2 15 d s1 s2 16 d s1 S s2 s lt gt s2 sl S lt gt s2 sl lt s2 s S lt s2 sl lt s2 d sl S lt s2 Binary multiplication D BCD multiplication Signed binary multiplication EI Ea ka EJ E Binary division BCD division Q Signed binary division Logical OR Logical AND
148. i SS11 turns off when set value gt progress value s11 X00001 is turned on at this time but the single shot startup R101 conditions are ignored because it uses edge trigger Ss u SS LNO Set value 12567 3 i SS11 is turned on at the rising edge of X00001 again and the progress value is updated Progress value of SSII TCII i When the rising edge of X00001 is detected while the progress value does not reach the set value the single shot timer is triggered again and the progress value returns to 0 then starts increasing The SS11 remains on e Example using word I O as the set value When RUN is commenced the set value is set to word I O Or designate the word I O for the set value to store in the power failure memory beforehand 5 38 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 25 Name Mono stable timer MONO STABLE TIMER Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpu3 Other than MS n left os ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Command format Number of steps Bit TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Timer number O 0 to 255 Decimal Constant Time base Ols 1s Is Set value O 1 to 65 535 Decimal Function Detects the rising edge of the startup condition starts updating progress values and
149. if MIE M109 vee J WMI11 WM10 e rje gt DM10 e gt DMI11 gt 6 4 Since internal output M WM and DM share the same area bit based operations are allowed M100 Chapter 7 User Program Chapter 7 User Program 7 1 Memory Capacity The specifications for the user program in EH 150 are given in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 User program specifications No EH CPU104 EH CPU208 EH CPU308 EH CPU316 EH CPU448 Memory SRAM Backup is possible by installing the battery specification FLASH Backup is possible by using FLASH memory Programming language H series ladder command language Created with H series programming device Program During STOP Can be done as desired by using the programming device modification During RUN Can be done by using the modification during RUN operation except control commands Control commands can be changed with special operations 1 When a change is made during RUN control operation stops while the program is being modified 7 Program protection The program cannot be changed unless with a WRITE occupancy Occupancy is automatically controlled by the programming device Password A password can be set using the programming device the program cannot be displayed when setting the password The program can be downloaded to the programming device Check function A sum check function for the program is always running An address check with the T O assignment table is done at the time
150. in d e IfC R7F0 is 1 Two s complements of the contents of s are set in d e The content of C R7FO remains unchanged e Perform with d and s as both words or both double words Example R000 DIFO m SGET WR0001 WX0000 H When C R7F0 is 0 d lt 5 R7FO wxo000 1iofo Jofofofojohififofajo 0 S R7F0 WROOOL 1 1 O Of1 1 O 0 0 O 0 1 140 1 0 0 d Cautionary notes When C R7FO0 is 1 d lt 1 R7FO WxX0000 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0j0 1 110 1 0 E S OLEE Eoo iL R7FO wrooo1 lo foo i ifitifoforfijo O d e Use edge trigger as the startup condition for this command 5 109 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 23 Name Sign expansion EXTEND Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu44s EH cpus Other than left EXT d s ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave e e e Max Command format Number of steps EXT d s TD SS WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Usable I O Constant T O after sign expansion T O before sign expansion Function e The sign bit MSB of s is extended to the upper word of d e The lower word of d is set to the contents of s Program example R000 LD R000 EXT DR0100 WX000
151. in the CPU Ladder monitor Click Mode Monitor in the Menu bar Ladder editor for Windows Ladder2 Model Pull down menu The Confirmation dialogue box for the program match check between PC and the CPU is displayed Click the Yes button Set the CPU s RUN switch to RUN to begin the CPU operation The on off status of the contact timer and current pe Ee o inea RENNIE counter value are displayed Display of ladder monitor To monitor and display the current value and progress value select comparison expression arithmetic box and coil timer counter etc with the mouse arrow I O monitor The I O monitor can be operated while in monitor mode Click Window gt I O Monitor in the Menu bar The I O Monitor dialogue box is displayed 140 Monitor l Pull down menu The I O Monitor dialogue box is displayed on the Read Edit screen at its maximum size 15 15 Chapter 15 Operation Examples The I O monitor can be specified in the following two ways 1 Click Edit I O monitor setting in the Menu bar 2 Click the Ell icon in the Symbol bar T O Monitor dialogue box e Enter the starting I O No Click the number of points to be monitored 1 0 Monitor Setting e Click on either the Add Insert or Overwrite buttons T O Monitor Setting dialogue box Monitor and display 16 points from
152. interval e Size of log data area 384 K 393 216 words e Size of log data Data between and 128 words can be specified for a single log e Write interval The table below shows the number of words in a single log and the corresponding logging interval Log data size words log 1 word per log n words per log 128 words per log Minimum write interval ms Approx 10 ms Approx 5n 5 ms Approx 645 ms In the above table n indicates an integer between 1 and 128 No new data can be logged in between the write intervals ms shown above Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function 5 Log write FUN 211 time chart The diagram below shows the relationship between the log write control bit table EXECUTE flag RUN flag WRITE flag ABNORMAL COMPLETION flag and the execution of the FUN 211 log write 1 7 EXECUTE flag RUN flag WRITE flag ABNORMAL COMPLETION flag Initialization result State in which execution of the FUN 211 is allowed FUN210 FUN211 The log write parameters are set correctly The EXECUTE flag rises 1 However since the initialization result indicates that execution of the FUN 211 is not allowed the FUN 211 turns on 2 the ABNROMAL COMPLETION flag 3 A log write parameter error is found during the processing of the FUN 210 4 As a result the initialization result does not indicate that execution of the FUN 211 is allowed The write parameters are corr
153. is not between 1 and 128 H0007 will be set to the error code in the data logging management table If this error occurs data logging will not be performed 5 The total size number of words of the selected data items must be in the range between 1 and 128 words If the above range is exceeded H0009 will be set to the error code in the data logging management table If this error occurs data logging will not be performed 5 274 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Management table details d Explanation of log write control bit table 1 2 3 4 5 1 Log write control bit table 0 EXECUTE flag W 2 1 RUN flag R 3 2 WRITE flag R 4 3 ABNORMAL COMPLETION flag R 5 W Set and read bit R Read bit Log write control bit table 1 Set the actual address R L M of the bit head I O number that is used as the table into the log write parameter table 2 using the ADRIO command 2 The table consists of 2 through 5 and the size is 4 bits Make sure the maximum value for the bit I O number is not exceeded If the maximum value is exceeded H0006 will be set to the error code in the data logging management table EXECUTE flag When the EXECUTE flag rises 0 1 the system waits for the start of data logging 2 Tf the execution ready state is achieved normally the RUN flag 3 becomes 1 If there is an error the RUN flag 3 becomes 0 3 Logging is performed while
154. is recommended that a lightning arrester be set up for each PLC power supply ladder The EH 150 detects power failures from a voltage drop of the internal 5 V DC power supply For this reason when the load in the unit s internal 5 V DC is light the 5 V DC is retained for a long time and operations may continue for more than 100 ms Therefore when using the AC input module an off delay timer for coordinating with the internal 5 V DC is necessary since the AC input signal turns off more quickly than the internal 5 V DC 3 Wiring to the power module 100 V AC to 240 V AC 4 Leak brake Power supply for sensors g Noise F filter Insulation transformer with shield Figure 9 4 Wiring power diagram a For power supply wiring use a cable of 2 mm 0 0031 in or more to prevent a voltage drop from occurring b The function ground terminal FE terminal should use cable of 2 mm 0 0031 in or more and Class D grounding 100 Q or less The appropriate distance for ground cable is within 20 m 65 62 ft 1 Shared with instrumentation panel relay panel grounding 2 Avoid joint grounding with equipment that can generate noise such as high frequency heating furnace large power panel several kW or more thyristor exchanger electric welders etc 3 Be sure to connect a noise filer NF to the power cable c The terminal screw is an M3 When wiring tighten screws with
155. maximum usable I O number is exceeded and DER is reset to 0 if it is normal The combinations of d and s are as follows Double word Step numbers and processing time are as follows Number of steps indicates DW Processing time u s Other than the above 5 60 Bt Word Double word Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example X00000 DIFO WR0000 WX0000 X00001 DIF1 a WRO0000 WMO000 W X0000 Array variables are used at the substitution destination X00002 DIF2 WR0000 WR0000 WM001 Array variables are used at the substitution source X00003 DIF3 WRO0000 WMO000 WRO000 WMO001 Array variables are used at both substitution destination and source T O assignment Program description 1 The value of WX0000 is substituted into WRO000 at the rising edge of input X00000 2 The value of WX0000 is substituted into the WR number designated by WRO000 WMO000 at the rising edge of input X00001 1 When WMO000 H0010 it holds the same meaning as WR0010 WX0000 The word number of the I O advanced by the amount designated by WR0000 WM001 due to the I O assignment is substituted into WRO0000 at the rising edge of input X0002 1 When WMO001 H0010 it hods the same meaning as WR0000 WR0010 The I O value designated by WR0000 WMO001 at the rising edge of input X00003 is substituted into the I O of the value designated by WRO000
156. numbers 0 to 255 A maximum of 256 points can be used for the timers TD SS MS TMR and WDT in total However the same area as the counter is used Timer number and counter number may not be overlapped While the clear input CL n is on the turning on of the startup condition is ignored The progress value is updated when the timer command is expected in the EH CPU448 Therefore if a program that does not scan the timer command execution section after the timer is activated is created using the JMP command or master control MCS the timer may not turn on correctly The timer does not turn on correctly when the time that does not scan the timer command execution section exceeds the time calculated by multiplying the time base by 65 535 Note that the previous progress value is also retained until the timer command is executed Program example X00003 0 1s 45678 X00003 TMR13 0 1s 45678 TMR13 R103 X00004 CL13 e Anexample of a word I O being used as the set value for the ladder shown above R7E3 WR0013 45678 I X00003 TMR13 TMR13 R103 O HO 01s WRO0013 O X00004 CL13 C O LD R7E3 WRO0013 45678 X00003 TMR13 0 1s WR0013 TMR13 R103 X00004 CL13 OUT TMR nts Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program description Time chart The progress value is updated while X00003 is on Ignored When X00003 turns off the update of the pr
157. of Ladder1 jNo data in memory Stop saving Batch Record Result dialogue box 15 12 Chapter 15 Operation Examples STEP 6 Program transfer to CPU Write the program that has been input to the CPU However verify the following The CPU and the personal computer connection cable are properly connected The CPU power is on e CPU mode switch is set to STOP 1 Switching to online mode Move to the GRS screen from the offline mode This can be done in two ways 1 Click File gt GRS in the Menu bar 2 Click x lower button on the upper right of the screen In the GRS screen click the Online item in the Menu bar The Read Edit screen of the online mode is displayed Note Verify again that the DIP switches are set to the transmission speed selected in the Environment Setting in step 2 For 10 point type it is fixed to 4 800 bps Initializing the CPU Click Utility Initialize CPU initialize in the Menu bar Pull down menu Note Please note that programs etc in the personal computer will be erased if PC initialize is selected Ladder editor for Windows Ladder1 0002 CPU Readie Crem EEN Yent Ero ense Cel Recel Send Receive VentyiH Open Cross Reference l Atlab arlat ot ot o of gt 4 1 IU GRS Onine H300 Pe Ea 16 03403m 5 Z T Ladder editor
158. of X00001 Y00100 X00002 Note 3 Do not create a circuit that jumps to outside from between MCS and MCR 5 132 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Control DERO N Label LABEL Ladderformat format Condition code Processing time us LBL n per err sp v c a oe Commandformat format Number of steps LBL n Woa Oef Double word word TD SS Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT n codenumber d o oio2ssDeimn Function e This command indicates the destination of the jump when the JMP n or CJMP n command is executed n is always used in pairs e Then in the LBL n cannot be used multiple times in the same program LBL n e This command alone does not do anything e Even if a startup condition is used for LBL n it will be ignored Cautionary notes e This command is checked prior to execution and when there is an error the following error code is set in the special internal output WRF001 Also the CPU error code 34 is set to special internal output WRFO0O De error code Special internal output Error description WREFO01 H0001 Duplicate definition of LBL Instruction for use 00001 JMP 0 H WR0000 WR0000 1 Loon BEO 00003 KET 00004 00005 WR0000 WR0000 1 H EBA 00006 e When R100 is on JMP 0 will be execute
159. point Input Module cee ececcccsessseeeeseeeseeseceseesecesecseeesecseeesececesecaeeaeceeeeseceseeseceaeeeeeaeceeeeaeceseeeeeeatense 4 17 A amp B 642point Input Modul t sian iiia E ors dbdenaee EE E Ria 4 19 49 Output Modules siscs cccciesescatisscecepes cs ccentcesecusassh evcdodeescauass conse les caseasiesasantentusscsansaresteguacsudeviagestenivbateusensueixs 4 21 4 10 32 point Output Module ic s sccccdicccsecaschecces cuebeed ete vee iaon ni E E EEEE EE EEE e 4 26 4 11 64 point Output Module 0 ce ecceceeseesseeseeeseeseceseeseceseeseceseesecesecsecesecseeeaeceeeeseceseeseceeeeaeceseceeeeaeceseeeeeaeenee 4 28 4 12 Input Output Controller o ccccc cccscacevesseasedeacescacssduacuceudeasncenseconestsnacuescnventevdacdtcencesspustsstesdessnsendesdosatdeteeces 4 30 4 t3 Ahaoe VO Module 5705 ceacacasccs cas cash tense cabs cuvassh cuts addesccusncesetse luassassdeseyidsuskexsuvacdivisncsatssdesiscrasustaseisevensaihi oaks 4 31 4 14 Dummy Module ciccccsccccccscccueccsccececuties cu acheat custbeedenscacaiahcencgndbscscunceadbvassevantendacsteescedevesacvsabueelaceb svedeatensveess 4 36 4 15 Expansion Cable z e eiten eeo Ep eE A EE EENES NEAN EEE NEETA couepuaneenenidoachentavacendeosicacebennentenvaeds RE AEE Ta 4 36 4 16 Memory Board 4 17 Counter Module 4 18 Single Axis Pulse Positioning Module 00 0 cc cececeescssseeseesecesecceeseeecesecseceaeeeeesececeseceseeaeceeeeaeeeseeeeeaeense 4 19 Resistance Temperature Detective I
160. points 8 points 1 common 16 points 1 common Insulation system Photocoupler insulation Output display LED green Removable type screw terminal block M3 Internal current consumption 5 V DC Approximately 30 mA Approximately 50 mA External power supply 2 12 24 V DC 10 15 For supplying power to the S terminal maximum 30 mA T O assignment Y16 1 The module needs to be repaired in case a load short causes a blown fuse Furthermore the fuse cannot be replaced by the user 2 It is necessary to supply 12 24 V DC from outside to the S terminal Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit No Signal name Internal circuit Internal circuit QO Oe eeeeae OG e G0 e e 8 4 23 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table transistor output module EH YTP8 EH YTP16 EH YTP16S Number of output points 8 points module 16 points module 16 points module Insulation system Photocoupler insulation Output display LED green Removable type screw terminal block M3 Internal current consumption 5 V DC Approximately 30 mA Approximately 50 mA External power supply 2 12 24 V DC 10 15 For supplying power to the S terminal maximum 30 mA 3 Short circuit protection function Not available Available 1 The module needs to be repaired in case a load short causes a blown fuse Furthermore the fuse cannot be replaced by the user 2 It is necessary to supply 12 24
161. previous operation For the content of each bit see the description of the special internal output WRF037 2 If station number H1A is specified for example in the figure below note that the system treats it as if the second digit is set to 1 and the first digit is set to HA 10 See eee ee ee i rini 10th digit First digit 10 2 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications i 0 2 Dedicated Port The designations for port 1 when set as a dedicated port and port 2 fixed to dedicated port are shown in table 10 5 Port 1 can be switched to a generic use port When setting a general purpose port or a modem connection to port 1 refer to those specifications respectively In the dedicated port a CPU program can be created or monitored from the programming device connected Also a monitoring system which uses a monitor available on the market can be constructed Moreover a variety of systems can be constructed by connecting a personal computer and creating software Adjust the connecting cables setup and setting switches to the purpose for which they are to be used and check these carefully beforehand Table 10 5 Specifications for a dedicated port Specification Transmission speed 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps except for EH CPU 104 Change the speed using the setting switch Port 1 Transmission speed setting 4 800 bps 9 600 bps Port 2 1 Transmission speed setting PHL Low 9 600 bps PHL
162. read size to 9 words ADRIO WR0015 M0010 ADRIO WR0016 WM120 Read request from the status area WR0017 H000D Set M0010 in the read control bit I O number from unit number 0 slot number 0 word location word 0 Set WM120 in the transfer source header I O number R100 M0000 Set the read size to 13 words FUN 201 WR0000 Start reading when the execution flag M0000 turns on Contact point R100 turns off when the normal end flag M0001 turns on Contact point R101 turns on when the normal end flag M0001 turns on Contact point R100 turns off when the abnormal end flag M0002 turns on After writing to the control area is completed C normally start reading from the status area FUN 201 WR0010 Start reading when the execution flag M0010 turns on R101 0 Contact point R101 turns on when the normal end flag M0011 turns on R101 0 Contact point R101 turns off when the abnormal end flag M0012 turns on M0011 M0012 5 266 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Error code details FUN200 FUN201 command error code list Corrective action 0000 Read write operation ended normally 0002 S parameter area range A i error word I O number 0004 Control bit table range The control bit table has exceeded the Change the bit header I O number of the error maximum bit I O number control bit table 0006 Control type setting error The control type setting is incorrect Set the correct value for the co
163. returned as the error code The return code for an area overlap error is H28 but when there is an area overlap as shown below the return code may not be displayed as H28 so exercise caution Parameter error The settings for TRNS 0 RECV 0 baud rate Set the valid value transmission code etc are invalid H00 H10 H21 H22 H23 H24 H25 H26 H27 H28 H30 H41 H42 H43 H44 H45 H46 H80 TRNS n d s t gt Abnormal completion bit If the head area of s and the t area are overlapped H28 is set in the head area of s but the abnormal completion bit is set to 1 at the same time making the value appear as H21 It is set for the amount of the receiving area size maximum 256 bytes While receiving the receiving data is not guaranteed 5 151 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Cone number Transfer commands 2 Name General purpose port receiving command Ladderformat format Condition code Processing time us RECV 0 d s t DR err sp v c ee ene Commandformat format Number of steps Woa Oef Double word word TD SS Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT a eee ree ae E e Head of communication t uses up to t 11 B bit Function This is a communication command for general purpose serial ports used in the CPU ladder program A WX to which an arbitrary I O is assigned is set in d s is used to
164. rewiring Check the wiring systems Change the voltage to satisfy the specifications Contact our service department Contact our service department Replace the terminal block Correct the error Replace the base unit Chapter 14 Troubleshooting e Wrong output from output module or output module will not output abnormal operation The CPU operates but output signals are not correct 4 Output LED is not lit Will not output e Forced output e Connection between the output module and base unit e T O assignment e Program e Replace the output module Output LED is lit Will not output Check output signals Output signal voltage Power supply voltage for load Terminal block wiring Terminal block connector connection Voltage between common and bit Wiring especially the S terminal of transistor output Replace the output module Disconnection of the drive power supply for the rela Output LED is not lit Will output LED failure LED replace may not be performed by the user so a repair request must be submitted Output error e Check the output power supply e Malfunction due to noise e Replace the output module e Check the output programme e Check the I O controller connection cable 14 12 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting The CPU operates but output signals are not detected
165. set in the special internal output WRF001 Also the CPU error code 34 is set to special internal output WRF000 CPU error code Special internal output Error description WRFOO1 H0023 The CEND command exists after the END command Instruction for use Program head Normal scan program CEND R000 Normal scan program CEND R001 Normal scan program When R000 is on to program head When R000 is off the next command is executed When R001 is on to program head When R001 is off the next command is executed 5 129 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Control DERS ee Unconditional jump JUMP Ladderformat format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Se JMP n Commandformat format Number of steps JMP n Woa Oef Double word word TD SS Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT n codenumber d o 0io2ssDeimn Function If the startup condition of JMP n switches on the control jumps the program from this command to the LBL n of the same code number Always use JMP n and LBL n in pairs If the startup condition is not met the next command will be executed If setting this command in conjunction with other commands in the same arithmetic operation box set this command at the end The JMP n command is valid only within the same pro
166. set the head I O number of the parameter area in which various communication parameters head and size of transmitting and receiving data area timeout value receiving data length transmission code and transmission parameter are set t is used to set the head I O number of the communication control bit area in which the start of communication control bits for initial settings and the determination as to whether or not the communication ended properly are stored The RECV 0 command is a command to perform reception after transmission Area description of s 1 Return code Return code Setin the lower 8 bits of the execution result of the RECV 0 command as follows Cannot be used by the user Normal completion 0 Abnormal completion gt 0 4 Head T O of transmitting System area Used by the system processing of the RECV 0 command when the command is executed data area This area may not be used by the user 5 Size of transmitting data area a F Timeout time Designates the timeout time from the start of 6J Head TO ofir ceiving RECV 0 command execution to completion as data area follows 7 Size of receiving data area 0 Timeout check is not performed 8 Receiving data length 0 x 10 ms timeout check is performed The 9 Start code maximum possible set value is HFFFF 10 End code _ 2 System area 11 Transmission speed 12 Transmission format al User write prohibi
167. set value When RUN is commenced the set value is set to word I O Or designate the word I O for the set value to store in the power failure memory beforehand 5 46 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 29 Name Ring counter RING COUNTER Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpus Other than RCUn eft o DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 13 4 lt 9 85 lt 14 3 16 9 OUT RCU n s 5 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR E Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT n Counter number O 0 to 511 Decimal s Set value Olojo O 1 to 65 535 Decimal Function Increments the progress value by 1 each time the rising edge of the startup condition is detected and clears the progress value to 0 when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set value The progress value becomes 0 when the counter clear CL n is switched on and the coil switches off The progress value is set in TC n and does not exceed the set value If the progress value is updated while the system is running the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point If an I O is set for the set value the set value can be changed during oper
168. task code can only be executed when the CPU is in the STOP or ERROR status and the memory is WRITE occupied Execution condition example 2 CPU status o f READ occupancy Occupancy o WAITE occupancy staus In example 2 the task code is executable if the CPU is occupied A 14 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Task code list tae Task No Classification aon cous Description Remarks number 0 02 03 05 0 Warning 6 7 Forced release of occupancy CPU control 1 1 1 1 1 Calendar time clock set read 1C Line disconnection when a modem is connected Refer to 10 4 Memory 0 Clear all write 3 Program transfer with address designation 7 Parameter modification completion T O control T O control Al not 1 1 CPU occupancy cancel 8 2 2 2 2 28 Timer counter set value modification Program read with address designation Final ladder search 31 33 35 Read memory assignment Monitoring with I O number designation N continuous points Forced set reset with I O number designation N continuous points Monitoring with I O number designation N random points Forced set reset with I O number designation N random points 40 42 44 45 0 Monitoring with I O number designation N continuous points Forced set reset with I O number designation N continuous points Monitoring with I O number designation N random points Forced set reset with I O number designati
169. that performs initial setting for logging area clear and then clears the logging area 1 Assigning internal outputs The sample program is created using the following assignments In actual cases change the I O numbers and other items according to the application No Usage Remarks 0100 to 0105 FUN 210 command See the data logging management table Data logging management table s to S 5 0400 to 0404 Log information table See the log information table 200 to 202 Log clear parameter bit table See the log clear parameter bit table 0405 Save area for initialization result Only the result of the FUN 212 is set 000 Save bit for initialization result If ON it indicates normal completion execution allowed 00001 Clear start bit Logging clear start bit 0000 FUN 212 command error code s The error code that has been generated as a result of the log data clear is set ADRIO WRO0102 WRO0400 Setting of actual address for log information table WRO103 H0100 Initialization specification for log clear WRO104 H0000 No specification for log write parameter table ADRIO WRO105 R200 Setting of actual address for log clear parameter bit table FUN 210 WRO100 Execution of initial setting for data logging WR0405 WRO101 AND HOOFO Acquisition of initialization result R000 WR0405 lt gt H0000 Creation of initialization result bit X00001 FUN 212 WR0 FUN 212 s Program description The lo
170. the EXECUTE flag is 1 RUN flag 1 When the FUN 211 detects the rise of the EXECUTE flag 2 it checks if execution is allowed and sets the result 1 Check result is normal Data logging is started 0 Check result is abnormal Data logging is not performed The EXECUTE flag 2 becomes 0 and the cause of error is set to the FUN 211 log data write error code 2 When the FUN 211 detects the fall of the EXECUTE flag 2 while the RUN flag is 1 and if the WRITE flag 4 is 1 data is being written the RUN flag will become 0 when the write is completed and the data logging will end WRITE flag This flag indicates whether or not the data that has been stored temporarily via the FUN 211 is currently being written 1 Data write is being executed 0 Data write is yet to be executed ABNORMAL COMPLETION flag This flag indicates whether or not the FUN 211 data logging write has been executed normally 1 Abnormal completion The cause of error is set to the FUN 211 log data write error code 0 Normal completion Indicates a state where no error has been generated 5 275 O jo N Pr Ww Chapter 5 Command Specifications Management table details e Explanation of log clear parameter bit table 1 Log clear parameter bit table 0 EXECUTE flag W 2 1 RUN flag R 3 2 ABNORMAL COMPLETION flag R 4 W Set and read bit R Read bit 1 Log clear parameter bit table 1 Set the actual
171. the FUN command from user programs using the EH MEMD memory board Table 11 1 shows the DIP switch settings of the EH MEMP and EH MEMD memory boards for switching to each mode The EH CPU104 208 do not support the memory board function Table 11 1 Operation modes settings with dip switch of memory board Starts up in the normal operating mode Invalid memory board F FT on From memory boario CPU rogamranfey Tow _ From GPU to memory board Propram tans Sid Program ON ON Between memory board and CPU Check program eae Ton _ Stans up inthe normal operating mode invalid meno beard gt fox PON On Pron Tow ON ON Dip switch setting error O ON Between memory board and CPU Check program f on Invalid Starts up in the normal mode Data logging command can be executed N Data logging 7 s oN ON Invalid Starts up in the normal mode Data logging command can be executed If the SW3 is ON writing to the memory board is prohibited In the case of program transfer mode the dip switch setting becomes effective only after turning on the power In the case of data logging mode SW3 becomes effective in real time However if the setting is changed while a command is being executed the new setting becomes effective upon execution of the next command 11 2 1 Program transfer function The EH CPU308 3 16 448 have the program transfer function for transferring and comparing progra
172. the PLC However do not interlock the unit to external load via relay drive power supply of the relay output module CAUTION e When performing program change forced output RUN STOP etc while the unit is running be sure to verify safety Damage to the equipment or accidents may occur due to operation error e Supply power according to the power up order Damage to the equipment or accidents may occur due to malfunctions 4 About preventive maintenance lt gt DANGER e Do not connect the O of the battery in reverse Also do not charge disassemble heat place in fire or short circuit the battery There is a risk of explosion or fire Q PROHIBITED e Do not disassemble or modify the unit These actions may result in fire malfunction or malfunction CAUTION e Turn off the power supply before removing or attaching module unit Electric shock malfunction or failure may result Revision History Description of Revision Date of Revision Manual Number Modules developed as second step were added 1999 5 Modules developed as third step and the EH CPU448 were added 2000 6 NJI 281B X O Warranty period and coverage The product warranty period will be one year after the product has been delivered to the location designated in the order If a malfunction occurs within the warranty period even though the product has been used within the range of correct cond
173. the above table corresponds to internal outputs in the following manner Examples of representation of internal output I O numbers when WR100 WR101 and DR100 are used are shown in parentheses a eT 1 Sign Bit ME 0 Real number 2 Exponent Part 3 Mantissa Part Exponent part E Two s exponential value E FF Indicates overflow value Mantissa part M The value of mantissa part M 0 1 00 00 2 1 in the integer portion of M in the above table does not appear in the format Pm Treated as 4 Mathematical Expression The floating point number F can be expressed with the following formula using the sign bit S exponent part E and mantissa part M listed above F 1 8 x 1 M x 23 x 2E7FH 1 5 x M x 22 e Range that can be expressed by floating point numbers Hexadecimal Expression F J Floating Point Expression Remark 73402823 x 10 1 175494 x 10 8 The minimum absolute value of a positive number The value in this range is treated as 0 38 H8080 H0000 1 175494 x 10 The minimum absolute value of a negative number e Example of setting in interval outputs Interval output Sign bit Exponent part Mantissa part Floating point Higher word Lower word 5 228 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Floating Point Operation Real to Integer Word Conversion EH CPU448 EH cPU3 Other than FUN 100 s per ERR sp v c INTW s K
174. the end of a string e Ifthe operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used If s is other than BCD data DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Ifs 1 tos 3 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00304 X00304 DIF34 AND DIF34 WR0030 H0123 FUN 34 WR0030 WR0030 H0123 FUN 34 WR0030 Program description e The BCD data H0123 stored in WR0030 is converted to ASCH data e The conversion result is stored in WR0031 to WR0033 Execution results WR0030 H0123 WR0031 H2031 WR0032 H3233 WR0033 H0000 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 198 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from 32 bit BCD to decimal ASCII data Item number Fun commands 16 Name DOUBLE BCD TO DECIMAL ASCII Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee DBCDDA s DBCDDA s Wa O Double word word TEE 3 T Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY DL Other TMR CU DM RCU CT o eemo o oaa feet arzumene isto PPro Foes unt 32 bit BCD data Decimal ASCII data Constant 15 12 1l 7 4 3 0 15 8 7 0 s s 2 107 10 SHl s 3 10 10 s 4 10 102 10 BCD code in the 10 place 645 10 10 st 6 NULL 10 ASCI
175. to the special internal output WRFO000 The table below shows the description of each error CPU error code Special internal output Description of error AO R7FE 1 WRFO7F H0001 Different memory board from the one previously installed H0002 to H0009 Invalid log data HOOFF Memory board cannot be accessed Corrective actions to be taken upon detection of log error When the system detects any of the log errors described in 7 take appropriate actions as shown below When H0001 occurred Reinstall the memory board previously installed and restart the system Ifa new memory board is installed clear the log data using the log data clear command FUN 212 When any of the errors between H0002 and H0009 occurred Clear the log data using the log data clear command FUN 212 and then restart the system When HOOFF occurred Check if the memory board is properly installed and then restart the system If the error persists there may be a hardware error in the memory board Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function 11 10 Chapter 12 Error Code List Chapter 12 Error Code List 12 1 Error Codes The table below indicates the self diagnostic error codes Refer to Chapter 15 Troubleshooting for corrective action Error codes are output as a hexadecimal to the special internal output WRF000 This special internal output is saved during a power failure and is retained even when the cause of the error disappea
176. us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than FUN 14 s DER ERR SD y c Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max ACOS s t e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 63 125 amp 177 lt FUN 14 s 3 ACOS s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 6 RCU CT s Argument O s uses up to s 2 fractional portion s 1 Argument O integer portion Function s 2 s 1 s 15 0 15 0 15 0 Fractional portion 0 to 180 lt cos Integer portion e Calculates the COS value using the unsigned binary value designated by s fractional portion and s 1 integer portion as the argument and outputs s 2 e The COS value is described in degrees in the range of 0 to 180 e If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 e The fractional data is the value obtained by multiplying the actual value by 65 535 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the argument s l s gt 1 DER is equal to 1 and operation will not be performed e When s 1 and s 2 exceed the maximum value for the I O number DER is equal to 1 and operation will not be performed Program example LD X00104 AND DIF4 DR0024 HFFFFA871 FUN 14 WR0024 X00104 DIF4 DR0024 HFFFFA
177. used Timer number and counter number may not be overlapped e The sl of the set value must always be less than s2 If s1 is greater than or equal to s2 the coil turns on when the progress value reaches s2 e The progress value is updated when the timer command is expected in the EH CPU448 Therefore if a program that does not scan the timer command execution section after the timer is activated is created using the JMP command or master control MCS the timer may not turn on correctly The timer does not turn on correctly when the time that does not scan the timer command execution section exceeds the time calculated by multiplying the time base by 65 535 Note that the previous progress value is also retained until the timer command is executed 5 43 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example X00004 X00004 0 1s 20 000 Set value 1 WDT14 0 1s 20000 40000 X00005 40 000 Set value 2 X00005 CL14 WDT14 R104 Il WDT14 LGM LNO e Anexample of a word I O being used as the set value for the ladder shown above LD R7E3 R7E3 WRO014 20000 WRO0015 40000 WRO0014 20000 WRO0015 40000 WDT14 O 0 1s WR0014 LD X00004 CL14 WR0015 WDT14 0 1s WR0014 WR0015 LD X00005 CL14 LD WDT14 R104 R104 Program description Time chart The progress value is updated while X00004 is on f tf tt Since watchdog clear CL14 turned on after the first set Z00004 pad ia value is exceeded
178. value between 32 767 and 32 767 xx08 The output lower limit value 18 Set the output lower limit value in loop xx is outside of range 18 to a value between 32 767 and 32 767 xx09 The initial value 19 in loop xx is_ Set the initial value 19 to a value outside of range between 32 767 and 32 767 loop xx is outside of range a value between 1 and 4 in loop xx is outside of range 24 to a value between 1 and 4 loop xx is outside of range to a value between 1 and 4 xx0A There is an error in the size Perform settings so that the output relationship between the output lower limit value 18 initial value upper limit value 17 output lower 19 output upper limit value 17 limit value 18 and initial value is met 19 0020 The FUN 1 is being executed Do not run the FUN 1 until the Set to the error code 0 specified by Note when the FUN 0 is not FUN 0 is successfully executed the S in the FUN 1 S successfully completed 0021 The S in the FUN 1 S is different Set the same WR for the S in the Set to the error code 0 specified by Note from the S in the FUN 0 S of the FUN 1 S and the S in the FUN O the S in the FUN 1 S PID management table S Note Error codes 0020 and 0021 will over write the errors generated previously 0001 to XXOD Therefore execute the FUN 1 after verifying that the FUN 0 is successfully executed 5 179 Chapter 5 Command Specifications b Error code 1 The err
179. without prior consent 2 The content of this document may be changed without notice 3 This document has been created with utmost care However if errors or questionable areas are found please contact us MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of America and other registered countries of Microsoft Corp of the United States Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Table of contents Features 1 1 to 1 2 System Configuration 2 1 to 2 2 Function and Performance Specifications 3 1 to 3 8 3 1 General Specifications siccicc cccccsescedencescecsscesevivedaccuesshsctecasecctdgnevncdcesnedudeasacutcuseuced ded S NEEE EEES EE e 3 1 3 2 Function Specifications cs ccccscacsssucossesensenscesesvecesdontavacconbige depussensevndsaasedesuas ens cnsnevedeadescessnconeisedanteseeseapassueens 3 2 3 3 Performance SpecifiCatrons vccsccsccscccceecens cashes cxadeseucneeseet dea ceustleacsnes dacducodecasdunduscd cuaesteuahavacebeen coucndntetesesvaces 3 6 System Equipment 4 1 to 4 58 4 1 List OF System Equipment asear eiin eer Ea AE E naois an Erio PRAE CESE EEP ARES EEO Eea PESA SENET 4 1 AQ CPU Modulen aai vate oes ET AA A ese eel ae EA E 4 3 AC Power Module 4 4 DC Power Module 4 50 VBASE UNI scos essa ee runes sesiensssiaas on E RE U AOA sea aaane E E A A OINA ot aaey 4 6 oput Mod l ni scctcc carci escieeen hates vad AoE A A A E EN E A S AAE ieee bce 4 7 32
180. words Not executable H03 RTC cannot be H10 Abnormal RTC or not mounting accessed Abnormal task code H01 Abnormal number of H05 Parameter length is too short steps words A 57 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications bier a Response task code Return code Error cause Code Setting the calendar Not executable HOC Abnormal set value clock RTC cannot be accessed Abnormal RTC or not mounting 30 second aS execution adjustment Not Not executable Ho RTC cannot be accessed H10 Abnormal RTC or not mounting Undefined e to Abnormal task code H01 Undefined subcommand H02 Undefined subcommand is set Nomalexecutin execution a memory area Not executable EN Occupancy code Local station is READ occupying CPU mismatch Not occupied Bo Local station is not occupying CPU RAM error HOA READ WRITE check results did not match CPU is foe CPU is A Initialize HI FLOW HO Hoo area Not executable H03 a code _ __ station is READ occupying CPU mismatch Not occupied H07 Local station is not occupying CPU Local station is not occupying CPU CPU is running HOB CPU is running and modify during RUN mode is not set area Not executable H03 Occupancy code H03 Local station is READ occupying CPU mismatch Local station is not occupying CPU CPU is running HOB CPU is running and modify during RUN ae eT is not set Zero clear all user H03 moo memory area Not executable H03 a co
181. 0 EXT DRO0100 WX0000 Program description e When R000 is turned on the content of WX0000 is extended to DRO100 When WX0000 is positive or 0 When WX0000 is negative Example WX0000 H7FFF 32767 Example WX0000 H8000 32768 L L DR0100 H00007FFF 32767 DRO100 HFFFF8000 32768 5 110 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 24 Name Binary BCD conversion BCD Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO eH cPu44s EH cPpus Other than BCD d s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max t e e e Upper 28 66 139 lt case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW BCD d s Word 3 31 86 J 191 e Double word 4 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wWL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pbM 6 RCU CT d_ I O after conversion BCD Olo OJO s T O before conversion oOolojljojolojlololo BIN Function e The result of the content conversion of s from binary to BCD is output to d e Ifthe conversion result of s exceeds the number of BCD data digits in d DER R7F4 is set to 1 and the command will not be executed e Ifsisa word set s so that H0000 lt s lt H270F 0 to 9999 e Ifsisadouble word sets so t
182. 0 DR0100 H42C90000 DRO102 H43488000 FUN 104 WR0100 Program description e At arising edge of X0200 the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is added to the real number specified in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 and the result is set in DRO104 WRO104 WRO105 Internal output setting WR0101 H42C9 WR0100 H0000 WRO103 H4348 WRO102 H8000 Operation result WRO105 H4396 WRO104 H8000 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 233 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 41 Floating Point Operation Subtraction Ladder format Condition code Processing time us ariu en oruer OetTRan FUN 105 s per err sp v c_ a AA aie a Ee Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 105 s FSUB s Wa Double word word e l TEE PTE DM s Argument PE eT ees Function 15 stl 015 s 0 s 5 Real number portion Real number portion 15 0 15 qe Real number portion Real number portion FSUB PE 32 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion Subtracts the real number s 2 s 3 from the real number s s 1 then sets the result in s 4 s 5 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes Z R jo o e When the operation resu
183. 0 mm 0 39 in screws General specifications 100 3 94 Item Specification Current consumption 5 V DC 450 mA Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Storage ambient temperature 10 to 75 C Operating ambient humidity 20 to 90 RH no condensation Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation Usage environment No corrosive gases no excessive dirt Cooling method Natural air cooling External power supply 24 V DC 10 supplied from communication connector 4 51 Performance specifications Item Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification No of installed I O modules 16 units EH IOCD Use the EH IOC to install 9 or more units Output data 256 words Input data 256 words Communication protocol DeviceNet 2 0 standard Supported connections 1 Poll I O connection 2 Bit Strobe I O connection 3 Cyclic I O connection 4 Change of state COS I O connection 5 Explicit message connection Connection mode 1 Multi drop connection 2 Multi drop connection using T branch Baud rate 500k 250k 125kbps switched by DIP switches Cable Dedicated DeviceNet cable see Note below Communication distance Communication speed Maximum network length Each sub line length Total sub line length 500 k bits s 100 m or less 6 mor less 39 m or less 250 k bits s 250 m or less 6
184. 0 o O0 0 Function e Divides s1 by s2 and substitutes the quotient into d in binary The remainder is set in the special internal output WRFO16 DRFO16 in the case of double word e The DER flag is 1 if s2 is 0 and the operation is not performed As long as s2 is not 0 the flag is 0 and the operation is performed Example WR0042 WR0040 WR0041 Example DR0047 DR0045 DR0043 DR0047 DRF016 WRFOI6 WR0048 WRo047 WREOI7 WRFO16 Lwroos Dewa WR0044 WR0043 WR0046 WR0045 E DR0043 DR0045 Cautionary notes e The combinations of d sl and s2 are as follows Double word Double word Double word Program example LD X00000 X00000 WR0042 WR0040 WR0041 WR0042 WR0040 WR0041 Program description e When input X00000 turns on the value in WR0040 is divided by the value in WRO0041 then substituted into WR0042 The remainder is substituted into special internal output WRFO16 5 69 s1 s2 d Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 10 Name BCD division BCD DIVISION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH CPU3 eee d s1 B s2 ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e Upper 50 101 236 lt case W Command format Number of steps Lower Double word 6 Bit Word TD SS WR Usa
185. 00 Program description e When input X00010 and input X00011 are both on the operation is 1 but due to 7 the calculation turns into 0 and R100 turns off e In all other cases R100 turns on 5 23 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 8 Name Rising edge detection AND DIF OR DIF Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark DIF n DIF n R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpug Other than o gt 1 t left Ea E DER ERR SD Vv C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Upper 85 mn e e e e e case AND DIF 35 Command format Number of steps 3 05 lt Lower AND DIF n Condition Steps 0 3 lt 2 7 2 9 case OR OR DIF n AND DIF n 3 3 1 lt DIF OR DIF n 4 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 86 RCU CT n Number O 0to 511 Decimal Function e Detects the rise of an input signal and retains the operation result for one scan indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e DIF number may not be overlapped However no error is generated even if overlapped numbers are used e DIF cannot use the b contact Program example X00000 DIFO R123 LD X00000 AND DIFO OUT R123
186. 01 0010 0011 0100 0010 0011 0100 0000 Deleted Set to 0 5 96 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 12 Name Batch shift right SHIFT RIGHT BLOCK Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Onea WSHR d n DER ERR SD Ave Ave Ave t e e Upper 31 3 0 08n 54 6 0 09n 45 1 0 08n case B Command format Number of s Lower Condition case W WSHR d n 23 1 0 08n 64 6 0 75n 57 0 8n Double word TD SS DR Usable I O WDT MS DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Constant Head I O to be shifted Number of bits words The constant is set in to be shifted decimal Function Shifts n bits words between d and d n 1 to the right toward smaller I O number by one bit word 0 H0000 is set to the d n 1 bit word The content of d is discarded bits ds Before execution dinl 1 piis Words M Shift width d After execution W o Discarded d Ifnisaword The contents 0 to 255 of the lower 8 bits b7 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC are set to the number of shifted bits words Ifn is a constant 0 to 255 decimal can be designated for the number of bits words to be shifted Cautionary notes e Use this command so that d n 1 does not exc
187. 01 command control area writing Parameter area S to S 7 FUN 201 command control area writing Control bit table Transfer source data area 9 words FUN 201 command status area reading Parameter area S to S 7 FUN 201 command status area reading Control bit table Transfer source data area 13 words Execution request FUN 201 execution control area writing Execution request FUN 201 execution status area reading 5 265 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example _ example 3 Data passed from the CPU to the EH ETH Using the following program example the data to be set in the transfer source data area that will be passed from the CPU to the EH ETH is described For more details see the EH ETH manual VO NO Data Description Remark WM100 HOOOF Module control register Wwatioi id eee noo T Cae i WM103 H003F Automatic transmission control WM106 H3F3F Error clear control WM108 H3F3F Error clear 3 control Perform parameter area initialization settings R7E3 WRO0003 H0003 with scan execution on WR0004 H0000 Write request to the control area ADRIO WRO0005 M0000 Set M0000 in the read control bit I O number ADRIO WR0006 WM100 from unit number 0 slot number 0 word WR0007 H0009 location word 0 Set WM100 in the transfer source header I O WR0013 H0001 number WR0014 H0000 Set the
188. 1 H AND DIFI LSL WR0000 1 Program description e When X00001 rises the content of WR0000 is shifted to the left by one bit At this time 0 is set in b0 and the value of b15 immediately prior to the shift is set in R7FO 5 94 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 10 Name BCD shift right BCD SHIFT RIGHT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu44s EH cpus Omer than ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max J J 15 52 88 Command format Number of s Condition BSR d n E TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Constant a VO to be shifted n Number of digits to be The constant is set in shifted decimal Function e Shifts the contents of d to the right toward the lower digits by n digits 1 digit is equivalent to 4 bits e 0 is set from the most significant bit to the nth digit e The digits from least significant bit to the nth digit are discarded Before execution n digits After execution gt Discarded Lo gt 0000 lt gt 0000 n digits _ 4 Most significant bit MSB Least significant bit LSB Ifd is a word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 3 of the lower 2 bits b1 b0 of n WX WY WR WL
189. 1 Transmission speed Designates the transmission speed See the TRNS 0 12 Transmission format Designates the transmission format See the TRNS 0 Designate 4 and 5 when transmitting after receiving by the RECV 0 command 1 When receiving data by specifying a start code the receive buffer may overflow if data with a different start code is sent from the connected device If this occurs the data reception will not be executed Make sure the specified start code is the same as the one used at the connected device 5 153 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 7 Area description of t t 12 11 10 2 M E Bit set by the user Communication execution This bit is set to 1 when the communication is performed using the RECV 0 command After communication is completed the RECV 0 command resets the area to 0 Normal completion This bit is set to 1 when communication started by the RECV 0 command ends normally Also the RECV 0 command resets this bit to 0 when communication is commenced Abnormal completion This bit is set to 0 when communication started by the RECV 0 command ends abnormally Also the RECV 0 command resets this bit to 0 when communication is commenced Initialisation request This bit is set to 1 when the RECV 0 command is initialised If an initialisation request is issued during transmission communication is terminated forcibly Initialisation e
190. 10 WR0100 WR405 WR101 AND HOOFO R1 WR405 lt gt H0000 RO R103 R102 TD10 X0 si ac A a R100 DIFO a WRO0200 WRFOOB WRO0201 WRFOOC WRO0202 WRFOOE WRO0203 WRFOOF DRO0204 DR0204 1 Writing of log data 5 281 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Create a write parameter in WM0100 that logs 128 words 64 words from WR200 and 64 words from WR300 upon turning ON of single scan execution Clears the sequence number to 0 Specify initial setting so that the specified item WM0100 is logged in WRO100 upon turning ON of single scan execution Sets the initialization result in ROOO after the initial setting 1S 600 Turns ON when 10 minutes have elapsed The progress value is updated while the start bit is ON but only when both the initial setting and logging have been completed normally Logging is started when TD10 is turned ON when 10 minutes have elapsed Date data year month day hour minute second and sequence number are appended to the head of log data WR200 to WR205 when the logging execution flag is turned ON R100 OFF gt ON Executes the logging Z N v N Chapter 5 Command Specifications Fun commands 68 Log data clear t LOG CLEAR Ladder format Condition code Processing time us FUN 212 9 Der ERR sb v_ c LOGCLR 9 eae ae EC Command format Number of steps Condition 164 238 443 391 3 Other than left F
191. 101011010101010101010 This bit is checked Since the 20th bit is 1 R7F0 1 is set 5 86 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 4 Name Shift right SHIFT RIGHT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 la SHR d n DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e t 17 53 90 Command format Number of steps Bit TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Constant T O to be shifted Number of bits to be shifted The constant is set in decimal Function Shifts the contents of d to the right toward the lower digits by n bits Sets n bits of SD R7F2 contents starting with the most significant bit Sets the content of the nth bit from the least significant bit in C R7FO Before execution SD SD R7F2 C R7FO After execution SD SD sp sD zal B k nbitt gt Most significant bit MSB Least significant bit LSB Ifd is a word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 15 of the lower 4 bits b3 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 15 decimal Ifd is a double word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0
192. 12 log data clear error code 0 Normal completion Indicates a state where no error has been generated 5 276 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Error code details a Explanation of log function error code Each error code is expressed as a four digit hexadecimal number eae The last 2 digits indicate the cause of error These digits indicate the log groups number If HOO it indicates that this error is not related to the log groups number If between HO1 and H80 it indicates that there is an error regarding the log groups number In the error code list the error codes in which the first 2 digits are indicated by xx have a log groups number between H01 and H80 in place of xx Numbers in brackets and O used in the table below indicate the corresponding numbers in Management table details Error code Check point output destination Initial Write Clear Read Description and cause Corrective action O x x x The FUN 210 was executed again after its re initialization had become disabled Modify the program so that the FUN 210 will not be executed after its initialization is completed O O O O The argument S exceeds the maximum value for the word I O number Change the head I O number of the argument S O The log information table a 4 exceeds the maximum value for the word I O number Change the head word I O number a 4 The lo
193. 12 Operation of periodical scan in case of INT1 2 Causes of congestion errors at periodical scan If there are periodical scans at every 10 ms as well as scans at every 20 ms or 40 ms a congestion error occurs and the scan is stopped if the periodical scan at 10 ms is started up again before all the periodical scans are completed i e the periodical system processing at INTO to INT2 does not end within 10 ms Periodical system processing Scan every 10 ms wal Periodical program f Scan every 20 ms Periodical program Scan every 40 ms Periodical program Periodical scan Normal END scan processing 7 scan Normal scan program INTO Example 1 Before the periodical scan program at Before the periodical scan program at Before the periodical scan program every 10 ms ends the periodical every 20 ms ends the periodical lat every 40 ms ends the periodical interrupt at 10 ms is started up again interrupt at 10 ms is started up again finterrupt at 10 ms is started up again Figure 8 13 Congestion error at periodical scan 10 ms Similarly when executing with a periodical scan at every 20 ms or with a combination of periodical scans at every 20 ms and 40 ms a congestion error occurs if the periodical scan at 20 ms is started up again before all the periodical scans are completed i e the periodical system processing at INT1 to INT2 does not end within 20 ms Finally when using a periodical scan at every 40
194. 2 61 TARTEARI en 16 i 46 47 38 on 54 m 6 en 2 l Internal so 40 a 56 am s ao 24 sofa a 57 an 9 an 2s sa 44 74 60 aa 12 oa 28 58 ESS EAEE 60 4 20 24V DC a i 26 4V DC 28 8V DC ON rate A x Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 9 Output Module Name and function of each part EH YT8 EH YTP8 EH YT16 EH YTP16 EH YTP16S EH YR12 EH YS4 2 Lock button Weight Approx 0 16 kg 0 35 Ib LT RED cover EH YR12 Approx 0 20 kg 0 44 Ib Po Eana Dimensions 3 I O cover mm in 30 1 18 95 3 74 k lt _____ _ _ _ gt 100 3 94 4 Terminal block 1 LED cover This is the cover for the LED that displays the output status When the output signal turns on the LED for the relevant number lights up The LED only works when the module is energized 2 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the fixation can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws This is the cover attached to the terminal block area Po 4 Terminal block This is the terminal block for connecting output signals The terminal block is removable Operation explanation This module outputs digital signals The LED s light up while the corresponding digital signal is ON The CPU reads the status o
195. 2 WL000 B WL001 Program description LD X00000 AND DIFO WL002 WL000 B WL001 e The sum of the values of WLO00 and WLO001 is substituted into WL002 as BCD data at the rising edge of input X00000 5 63 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 4 Name Binary subtraction BINARY SUBTRACTION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpuss Other than d sl s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max t t Upper 0 4 54 121 lt case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW d sl s2 Word 4 20 80 amp 96 amp Double word 6 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR E Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 8 RCU CT d Substitution destination O 0O 0 OJO s1 Minuend o olo o o ololo s2_ Subtrahend o o lo o o ololo Function e Subtracts s2 from s1 as binary data and substitutes the result into d as binary data e The C flag is 1 if there is a digit decrease and 0 if not C stm s2m stm dm s2m dm e The V flag is 1 if the operation result is a meaningless signed binary data and 0 if it has meaning Positive Positive Positive Negative za ol sim sl Negative Negativ
196. 2 0 Do not clear 1 Clear Ee Display after mode switch Link 1 Clear H0003 H00 2 Do not clear H0001 H00 1 Link 2 Clear H0030 H002 Retains the bt usnoeforaswitching H0010 H000 Selection mode User set value Undefined EH CPU104 208 RFO7F Log error code Log error code Stores the log error code Set by the Cleared by the roe eee For details see the data logging specifications RFO80 Remote master 1 error Remote error information to F097 refer to separate sheet for details RFO98 Remote master 2 error OBO Remote master 3 error to FOC7 Set by the Cleared by the WRFOC8 Remote master 4 error system system OEO Link 1 error flag Link information to F13F poner refer to separate sheet for details WRF140 Link 2 error flag W to FO7D ii 13 7 Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs 13 3 Remote Error Flag Area Details of the remote error flag error are given below 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1I 0 Slave station participation flag Slave station error flag Master station error detail information Slave station No 0 detail information Slave station No 1 detail information Slave station No 2 detail information ere a Pe fa im Po Do Pp a nantes nisin enon 06 Pea fm Po Po Pp a e Rimi tims tine 2 07 Pe fa om Po Po Pp a Mimi tts tonne 2 08 Pe fa Pm Po Po Pp a nite fis tension onas 2 09 Fo eea af betes Jndef
197. 2 Word 4 132 203 323 Double word 6 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 8 RCU CT d Substitution destination OIOIJIO OJO s1 Multiplicand oj jojololololollo s2 Multiplier O 1Oo O o o o oO 740 Function e Multiplies s1 and s2 as BCD data and substitutes the result into d 1 upper digit and d lower digit as BCD e The DER flag is 1 if s1 or s2 is an invalid BCD data In this case the operation is not performed Also if d 1 exceeds the usable I O range the DER flag is set to 1 and only the lower digit word is substituted The DER flag is 0 if s1 and s2 are valid BCD data and d 1 is within the usable I O range MSB 0 Example WR0016 WR0014 B WR0015 Example DR0022 DR0018 B DR0020 s1 WR0014 s1 WR0019 WR0018 s1 MSB 0 x DR0018 S 7 WROO15 s2 WR0021 WR0020 s2 d 1 WR0017 WROOI6 a MSB 0 n 3 DR0020 d 1 d DR0016 A aU II d 1 WR0025 WR0024 WR0023 WR0022 d DRO024 DR0022 Cautionary notes e The combinations of d sl and s2 are as follows s2 Double word Double word Double word e Since the operation results are always substituted into d and d 1 exercise caution so that the word or double word at d 1 is not used as the I O of others Program example LD X00000 X00000 WRO0016 WR0014 B
198. 231 0 7 DR0028 A d 1 d 1 Sign bit WR0034 WR0033 WR0032 WR0031 DR0033 DR0031 The sign of the operation result is entered in the most significant bit e sl s2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal Cautionary notes e The operation result is always assigned to d and d 1 Be sure not to use word or double word d 1 as the I O of other functions Program example LD X00000 X00000 f DR0031 DR0026 S DR0028 DRO0031 DR0026 S DRO028 Program description e When input X00000 turns on the product of the values in DRO026 and DR0028 is substituted into DROO31 as signed binary data 5 68 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 9 Name Binary division BINARY DIVISION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpuss Other than d sl s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e o Upper 28 72 138 lt case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW d sl s2 Word 4 32 e 95 e 111 amp Double word 6 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WwL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 8 RCU CT d Substitution destination sl Dividend O O0 O0 o0 0 0 0 0 s2 Divisor O O0O oO0 o o
199. 252 H 2000 H 2002 H4010 format to H 700 H 1002 H 20 H 300 H 702 92 FUN 213 s Log data read LOGRED s e ac GS E E E 93 FUN 254 s BOX comment BOXC s 94 FUN 255 s Memo comment MEMC s O Supported x Not supported The EH CPU448 is supported The EH CPU308 316 and 448 are supported Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Appendix 3 Task Code Specifications The EH 150 communicates with the host by issuing task codes This chapter explains the details of each task code 1 Task code function details This section explains the details of each task code function and response command function Each task code is explained using the format shown below Task code Task code Task code eee Response CPU control memory Pee Classification i Response task code number description read memory write or I O control Execution condition Shows the task code execution conditions Details are described on the next page Format of the request task code and Format of the response task code Example A 13 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications How to read the execution condition table The table indicates the CPU status in which the task code is executable and the memory occupancy status For the details of the CPU status refer to CPU status read of task code H10 1 2 Execution condition example 1 CPU status Co ed O Executable x Not executable In example 1 the
200. 3 FUN 1 detected turning on of the PID constant change flag when the execution flag was off the PID constant will be checked Since it is valid the PID constant will be changed and the PID constant OK flag will be turned on Since 25 FUN 1 detected turning on of the PID constant change flag when the execution flag was off the PID constant will be checked Since there was an error the PID constant OK flag will be turned OFF 27 FUN 1 will detect turning on of the execution flag and check the PID constant Since an error was detected the PIDRUN flag will be turned off Since 29 FUN 1 detected turning on of both the execution flag and the 32 PID constant change flag simultaneously turning on of the 32 PID constant change flag will be ignored 29 FUN 1 checks the PID constant and since it is normal the PIDRUN flag will be turned on PID calculation will be started from 33 FUN 2 30 31 Tf the execution flag turns from on to off in a timing such that the cyclic interrupt cannot detect it it will be ignored 5 177 Chapter 5 Command Specifications b Timing chart example 2 The following is an operation timing chart in respect to the S flag and R flag bumpless S flag Sets the output value to the initial value R flag Sets the output value to 0 The output value is still INIT Ones because the S flag takes priority 2 PID constant change The output value is retained flag since the execution flag is off The output va
201. 3 Name TIMER Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark i R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpus Other than 4 DER ERR SD Vv C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max o e e e o Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 15 4 lt OUT TM nts 5 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY WL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 6 RCU CT n Timer number O 0 to 2 047 Decimal t Time base Fixed at O1s s Set value Olojo O 1 to 65 535 Decimal Function e The progress value is updated while the startup condition stays on and the coil turns on when progress value becomes larger or equal to the set value e The progress value is cleared when the startup condition turns off and the coil turns off e The progress value is set in TV n and does not exceed 65 535 decimal e Ifthe progress value is updated while the system is running the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point e Ifan TO is set for the set value the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I O value since the set values are updated during each scan Cautionary notes e The time base is fixed at O1s e A maximum of 2 048 points can be used for the expansion on delay timer in addition to the TD SS MS TMR and WDT timers Since an area that is different from the counter area is use
202. 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed When the value of s s 1 is greater than 1 414847550405688000e 16 the cosine value cannot be calculated and DER is set to 1 at When the value of s s 1 is greater than 2 981568260000000000e 08 a result is obtained but the accuracy decreases so DER is set to 1 Program example X00200 DIFO LD X00200 DRO100 H3F060A92 AND DIFO FUN111 WRO100 DRO100 H3F060A92 FUN 111 WRO100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the cosine value of the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is calculated and the result is set in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal output setting WR0101 H3F06 WRO100 HOA92 Operation result WR0103 H3F5D WRO102 HB3D7 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 240 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 48 Floating Point Operation TAN Ladder format Condition code Processing time us riu ere OeTRan FUN 112 s r m sp v c rite telete Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 112 s FTAN s Word Double word word e l TEE PTE DM s Argument CEE E eE e E i ees Function s 3 s 2 s 1 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FTAN Real number portion Real number portion Calculates the tangent value of the real number
203. 3800 DR0060 2147483648 H80000000 5 202 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from 4 digit hexadecimal ASCII to 16 bit binary data Item number Fun commands 19 Name HEXA ASCII TO BINARY Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee HABIN s Command format Number of steps FUN 38 s HABIN s Wa O Double word word er TD SS Usable I O L WDT Ms WX WY WL TC DX DY DL Other M TMR CU DM RCU CT s Argument higher ASCII Combination of H00 H20 H30 to H39 and ie to 46 rae hee Function Constant Hexadecimal ASCII data 16 bit binary data s 2 HO to HFFFF 15 8 7 0 16 ASCII code in the 16 place The 4 digit hexadecimal ASCII data specified by arguments s and s 1 is converted to binary data and the result is stored in s 2 Higher digit s H00 and H20 NULL and space are processed as H30 0 Leading zero suppressed digit Arguments will be combinations of H30 to H39 and H41 to H46 0 to 9 and A to F If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used If the 4 digit ASCII code stored in s to s 1 is other than H30 to H39 H41 to H46 0 to 9 and A to F DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed However this does not apply to HOO and H20 NULL and space of leading zero suppres
204. 4 System Equipment Specification table analog input module Type EH AX44 Input Current input Approximately 100 Q impedance 0 to 3 channels Voltage input Approximately 100 k Q 4 to 7 channels Insulation Photocoupler insulation Between channels No insulation Number of 4 channels module 0 to 3 channels 4 channels module 4 to 7 channels Approximately 0 18 kg 0 4 lb 24 V DC 20 15 Approx 0 15 A Approx 0 4 A at power On Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit Signal name i Support for analog data and digital data A HOFFF Internal circuit 12 20 Input current EEEE igidi r y4 4 4 5 10 Input voltage Re flee fete fete tlRedRe 4 32 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table analog voltage input module Type EH AX8V EH AX8H Input impedance Approx 100 k Q Insulation Photocoupler insulation No insulation Approximately 0 18 kg 0 4 lb 24 V DC 20 15 Approx 0 15 A Approx 0 4 A at power On Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit i Support for analog data and digital data EH AX8V 5 10 Input voltage EH AX8H Internal circuit tip 10V Input voltage H0800 2 A complement of 2 m ee ee ey 4 33 Chapter 4 System Equipment Spec
205. 448 EH CPU3 left Upper See Function column ERR SD V C Ave Ave Max Ave Max case W e e e 0 5 Lower 51 1 91 9 76 7 185 6 DW Command format Number of steps 7 5 o ears ele Steps 15 8118 4 indicates AND sl s2 See Cautionary notes 71 3 the case 22 8 25 4 OR sl s2 Double word See Cautionary notes of OR Bit Word Double word TD SS WR DR Usable I O WDT MS WY WL DX DY DL TMR CU WM Yo aql cS S Zs 1S GNV Zs S Constant O Relational number 1 O O Relational number 2 Function Ladder format s e Compares sl and s2 as unsigned numbers and JA if s1 is equals to s2 it enters the continuity status on and if s1 is not equal to s2 enters the noncontinuity status off e When s1 and s2 are words 0 to 65 535 decimal or H0000 to HFFFF hexadecimal When s1 and s2 are double words 0 to 4 294 967 295 decimal or H00000000 to HFFFFFFFF hexadecimal Cautionary notes Number of steps re Program example WR0000 ROO LD WR0000 WR0002 o OUT R001 WR0002 Program description e When WRO000 WR0002 ROO turns on 5 52 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 34 Name Signed Relational box SIGNED RELATIONAL BOX Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark
206. 45 e 86 a d sl S lt s2 s is a double word 6 R n D Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT d Substitution destination OIO sl Comparand O O0 O01 0 s2 Relational number ololol lo Function e Substitutes 1 when s1 is less than s2 and otherwise 0 into d assuming s1 and s2 as signed binary data e sl and s2 are both signed binary data When the most significant bit is 0 the value is positive when the most significant bit is 1 the value is negative sl s2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal b31 b16 b15 bO Sign bit 0 Positive 1 Negative Program example R100 DM000 S lt DM002 R100 DM000 S lt DM002 Program description e When the value in DMO000 is less than the value in DMO002 1 is set in R100 Otherwise R100 is reset to 0 5 80 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 21 Name lt Relational expression lt RELATIONAL EXPRESSION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpuss Other than d sl lt s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e Upper 0 4 36 76 J case W Comm
207. 4E WM020 H4E48 WM022 H5249 WM021 H534E WM023 H4E53 WM022 H5249 WM024 H0000 WM023 H4E53 WM024 H0000 NULL LD X00404 AND DIF44 ADRIO WRO000 WM010 ADRIOQ WRO001 WM020 ADRIOQ WR0002 WMO030 FUN 44 WRO0000 X00404 DIF44 ADRIQ WRO000 WMO10 ADRIO WRO001 WM020 ADRIO WR0002 WM030 FUN 44 WR0000 Program description 1 Sets the first character string from WMO10 and the second character string from WM020 using special internal output R7E3 single scan ON after RUN start 2 At a rising edge of X00404 character strings are merged and output to WM030 and succeeding areas Execution results WM010 H4849 WM020 H4E48 WMO030 H4849 WM011 H5441 WM021 H534E WM031 H5441 WM012 H4348 WM022 H5249 WM032 H4348 WM013 H4900 WM023 H4E53 WM033 H494E WM024 H0000 WM034 H4853 W W W M035 H4E52 M036 H494E M037 H5300 5 212 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 26 Name Compare character strings Ladder format Condition code Processing time us FUN 45 s DER erR sp v c SCMP s ec eee oo oiar FUN 45 s 3 10 char SCMP s Wwa Double word word E TD SS Usable I O L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU DM RCU CT String 1 head I O No Actual addresses are set in s to s 1 s uses up to s 2 Function s String 1 head I O No al s 1 String 2 head I O No
208. 6 H3132 5 167 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program description R7E3 1 scan ON after RUN R7E3 1 scan ON after RUN R7E3 1 scan ON after RUN TRNS 0 WY0 WMO LO TRNS 8 WYO WR6O R40 TRNS 8 WYO WR40 R20 TRNS 8 WYO WR20 R10 RNS 8 WY0 WRSO R30 TRNS 8 WYO WRO RO 5 168 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Ladder format Condition code Processing time us FUN 0 s Der erR sp v c PIDIT s wie ne ae Command format Number of steps FUN 0 s 3 PIDIT s Word Double word word a TD SS Usable I O L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU DM RCU CT PID control table e The FUN 0 s initializes the area in which the initialization set data required for PID operation is stored e The s in the FUN 0 s is used to specify the head number of WR of the PID management table Constant e If there is an error in the contents specified in the PID control table an error code will be set in error code 0 of the PID control table and initialization will not be performed e Once initialization is successfully completed FUN 0 normal completion 1 in the PID management table re executing the FUN 0 will generate an error indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e If difficulty arises when the area used by the PID operation
209. 7CC Memory size over 0 Normal Indicates whether he capacity set by the R7CD I O verify mismatch 0 Abnormal Normal parameter exceeds loaded memory capacity Indicates whether I O assignment and loading Turned off by the user or Unmatched turned off even when power failure memory is cleared are matched Mismatched information output to WRFO002 Indicates whether I O assignment and loading assignment verify are matched Mismatched information output mismatch to WRF003 RICF Undefined Dontwe SSS S SSCS R7D0 Remote abnormal 0 Normal Indicates whether the remote module is normal 1 Abnormal Abnormal slot number display to WRF006 detailed information output to WRF080 to WRFODF Overload error 0 Normal Indicates whether the scan execution time has R7D2 Overload error 0 Normal Indicates whether the periodic scan was RIDA R7D4 Grammar assemble error Indicates whether there is a grammar error in the user program Detailed information output to WRFO01 Indicates whether T O module Abnormal slot number output to WRFO0S Turned on by the system Normal Unmatched R7CE Communication module 0 Turned off by Tumed on by toed off even R7D1 the system when power failure Turned off by the user or Turned on by a turned off even the system R7DS5 1 O module abnormal 0 when power failure Normal here is an abnormal in the Abnormal 13 1 Chapter
210. 7F4 will be 0 5 101 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example e The data in the first link area WL020 to WLOSF is transferred to the second link area WL1000 to WL103F R001 MOV WL1000 WL020 64 R7F4 Y00100 O LD R001 AND DIFO MOV WL1000 WL020 64 LD R7F4 SET Y00100 Program description e 64 words of data are transferred from link system 1 of the first link to link system 2 of the second link WL020 to WLOSF and WL1000 to WL103F are used as the respective transfer areas n Link system 1 m Link system 2 First link area Second link area WL1000 WL103F fo 5 102 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 17 Name Copy COPY Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU44s EH cPU3 aa COPY d s n DER ERR SD V C Ave Ave Ave t e e e o 97 64a 137 95a 124 95a Upper Command format Number of steps a Quotient a Quotient a Quotient case B of n 32 of n 32 of n 32 Lower Condition Steps 128 41b 174 46b 173 46b 7 W COPY d s n b Quotient b Quotient b Quotient of n 64 of n 64 of n 64 Double word DR Usable I O DX DY DL DM Constant Copy destination head I O Copy source head I O Number of bits words The constant is set in to be copied dec
211. 8 Chapter 4 System Equipment EH CU Terminal Layout Meaning of signal VinA VinA Connect to a 12 24 V DC power supply when using voltage input Connect to polarity when using differential Phase A input 18 AC 3 AC Connect to the open collector signal when COUNTER Connect to polarity when using differential m input using voltage input il ea EA Phase B mput Connect to the open collector signal when using voltage input Connect to polarity when using differential input using voltage input E A Input 24 M M gt Markei Connect to the open collector signal when using voltage input Connect to polarity when using differential input 25t027N C 10to12NC Do not connect anything Coincidence output Connect to the other input Output Coincidence output Connect to the other input 30 Com2 15 Coml common for coincidence output Commons 1 and 2 are independent Note The pin number defined in the EH CU does not correspond to the pin number defined by the connector manufacturer HEADE A il oo00000000000000 oooooo0o000000000 Meaning of signal using voltage input Connect to polarity when using differential input Connect to the open collector signal when cCounTERIS A0 using voltage input Connect to polarity when using differential input Connect to a 12 24 V DC power supply when using voltage in
212. 871 H FUN 14 WR0024 Program description e Set data in DR0024 WR0024 WR0025 e COS operation is performs at the leading edge of X00104 and the result is set in WR0026 as a binary value Execution results WR0026 HO06E WRO025 HFFFF WR0024 HA871 5 192 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Fun commands 10 ARC TAN function ARC TAN FUNCTION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than FUN 15 s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max ATAN s t e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 41 91 4194 FUN 15 s 3 ATAN s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR E Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 6 RCU CT s Argument O s uses up to s 2 fractional portion s 1 Argument O integer portion Function s 2 s 1 s 15 0 15 0 15 0 Integer portion Fractional portion Oto 180 TAN e Calculates the TAN value using the unsigned binary value designated by s fractional portion and s 1 integer portion as the argument and outputs s 2 e The TAN value is described in degrees in the range of 0 to 90 and 180 to 270 e If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 e The fractional data is the value obtained by multiplying the actual value by 65 535 indi
213. AN N 113 Flow decimal point operation ARC SIN IN N 114 Flow decimal point operation ARC COS FACOS N 115 Flow decimal point operation ARC TAN FATAN QR N 117 Flow decimal point operation characteristic EXP LOG logarithm 3 N 120 Index setting argument d DXD N 121 Index setting argument s DXS N 122 Index cancel DXC N 123 Increment INC C Double word increment DINC CD N 126 Double word decrement DECD ECD N 127 Expansion of bit data to word data FUN 128 Expansion of word data to bit data WTOBIT FUN133 File memory block transfer N134 File memory block exchange File memory word unit write O N200 X Y area read write command XYR W N201 Status control area read write command SCR W LOGIT s 0 FUN 211 s Log data write LOGWRT s FUN 212 s Log data clear LOGCLR s O Supported x Not supported The EH CPU448 is supported The EH CPU308 316 and 448 are supported FUN 210 s Initial setting for data logging x x x x x ee ee Peels eae ee te a el a ae aa eal a a a Ea E ee ee a a a Be ee ee ie ee E iat a a Ea E el Be Ee Ree ee eee ia a a es ea a cc i ee ical Fea Wa Ve RA iced Pa ad ia ed ale eee x x x x x x x e x x x x x x e x x x x x x Rae ea Bea es i i a EAEI ia a a Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart FUN commands 5 5 No Command Command name EH 150 H 64 H 200 H 250 H
214. After conversion bu bo bg b7 be bs b4 b3 NS We Copy by to by and bys Move bo through b o to b through b H0004 Do not convert 22 H0001 16 bit 8 bit Before conversion bis bia biz biz After conversion 0 bio bo bs b7 be bs v Move bj through bo to b7 through bo If values are HOFFF through H7FFF before conversion the values are converted to HOOFF If values are H8000 through HFFFF before conversion the values are converted to H0000 Set 0 H0002 16 bit 12 bit Before conversion bis 3 br bs b7 be bs b4 After conversion 0 bs b7 be bs b4 lt b through by are left as they are If values are HOFFF through H7FFF before conversion the values are converted to HOOFF If values are H8000 through HFFFF before conversion the values are converted to H0000 H0003 16 bit signed 12 bit signed Before conversion bis 3 bi2 bu bio bs b7 be bs b4 b3 After conversion bi2 bu bo bg b7 be bs ba lt Move b through bj to bo through b If values are HOFFF through H7FFF before conversion the values are converted to HO7FF If values are H8000 through HF000 before conversion the values are converted to H0800 H0004 Do not convert 5 174 Chapter 5 Com
215. B Normal completion One o e oo ON OFF Flashing 1 s ON 1 s OFF Q Flashing 500 ms ON 500 ms OFF Flashing 250 ms ON 250 ms OFF O 3 s OFF after ON RUN and LED of ERR flash at the same time 2 Erase error and write error of FLASH G0O 11 4 Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function 1 2 2 Logging Function The EH CPU 308 316 448 provides the function for log data using the EH MEMD This function cannot be used with the EH MEMP 1 Log commands There are four types of log commands as shown below FUN 210 s Initial setting for data logging LOGIT s FUN 211 s Log data write LOGWRT s FUN 212 s Log data clear GCLR s IN 213 s Log data read x E s indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used 2 Overview of logging function The logging function is used to transfer a group of specified data groups word internal output external input to the log data area memory board as a single log or read a group of data stored in the log data area Use example 1 FUN 210 Initial setting for data logging Sets a total of 8 words from three groups of the log data including WR0000 through WRO0002 3 words WX0000 and WX0001 2 words and WM0000 through WM0002 3 words as a data for a single log 2 FUN 211 log data write Writes to the log data area memory board the log data for a single log specified in t
216. C a Ce Function If the jump condition s of CJMP n s switches on the control jumps the program from this command to the LBL n of the same code number Always use CJMP n s and LBL n in pairs If the startup or jump condition is not met the next command will be executed If setting this command in conjunction with other commands in the same arithmetic operation box caution must be used because the jump takes place without performing the operations specified after the command The CJMP n s command is valid only within the same program A jump to a subroutine or interrupt scan cannot be performed from a normal scan nor vice versa Nesting of CJMP n s commands is possible but caution must be exercised so that an overload error does not occur Cautionary notes e This command is checked prior to the execution and if there is an error the following error codes are set in the special internal outputs R7F3 and WRFO15 In this case jump is not performed and the next command will be executed Special internal output internal output Error description R7F3 1 WRFO15 H0015 There is no LBL n H0040 A jump is attempted to a different program area Instruction for use ARL Fomr Ro Whenithe startup condition and the ROOO jump condition bit I O are both on it jumps to LBL n oa If there is a timer within the program it jumped to the progress value is updated but since commands are not executed output w
217. CPU error code Special internal output Error description WRFO01 H0002 Duplicate definition of FOR e Ifan error is generated during the execution of the command an error code will be set in the special internal outputs R7F3 and WRFO15 and the following program will be executed H0045 FOR to NEXT nesting error H0046 FOR nesting overflow Instruction for use For the command to use this refer to NEXT n 5 134 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Other than left EH CPU448 EH CPU3 NEXT n Command format Number of steps R TD SS WR DR Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU WM DM RCU CT miee PP Pt 1 1 Pt ttt eles maim e Subtracts 1 from the number of times repeated s for the FORn s command of the same code number then jumps to FORn s Cautionary notes e This command is checked prior to execution and when there is an error the following error code is set in the special internal output WRFOO1 Also the CPU error code 34 is set to special internal output WRFO0O CPU error code Special internal output Error description WRFOO1 H0003 Duplicate definition of NEXT e Ifan error is generated during the execution of the command an error code will be set in the special internal outputs R7F3 and WRFO15 and the following program will be executed Special internal output Error description R7F3 1
218. CPU448 EH CPU3 ues SET eas c me ac i ORES RRES e G e Upper case SET Command format Number of steps 2 07 SET n Lower case RES Condition Steps RES n Usable I O Constant T O number Function n o SET Switches on the device when the operation result obtained up to that point is 1 SET n The device that is switched on will not be switched off even if the operation result is 0 n O RES Switches off the device when the operation result obtained up to that point is 1 RES n indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When a set reset coil is used on a multi layer coil it must be set to the highest level or an arbitrary coil must be entered immediately before the set reset coil Example of OK Example of NG Program example X00000 X00000 R100 X00001 R100 Program description e When input X00000 turns on output R100 turns on Even if X00000 turns off R100 remains on e When input X00001 turns on output R100 turns off e When input X00000 and X00001 both turn on the one executed later than the other in the program takes priority 5 27 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 13 14 Name Set start reset cancel master control MCS MCR Ladder format Condition
219. Connecting between CPU and Programmer etc Name and function of each part EH RS05 Weight Approx 0 07 kg 0 154 Ib Length 0 5 m 1 64 ft 2 Cable connector for CPU module No Name Function Remarks 1 Cable connector for peripheral To be connected to the cable leading to a peripheral device device Cable connector for CPU module To be connected to CPU module port 1 or port 2 When EH RSOS is used as the cable connection to peripheral devices may be made similarly to the connector of the H series CPU for peripheral devices For connection to peripheral units it is necessary to set the mode switches For details see Chapter 10 Communication Specifications If the settings differ communication cannot be performed 4 26 Cable for Connecting between CPU and PC IBM PC AT Compatible Personal Computer Weight Approx 0 13 kg 0 29 1b 1 PC IBM PC AT compatible PC side connector Connector for peripheral device To be connected to PC IBM PC AT compatible PC Po Cable connector for CPU module To be connected to CPU module port 1 or port 2 Po If the EH VCB02 cable is used the CPU and PC IBM PC AT compatible PC can directly be connected without a conversion cable For connection to peripheral units it is necessary to set the mode switches For details see Chapter 10 Communication Specifications If the settings differ communication cannot be per
220. Constant Character string 1 Character string 2 s String 1 head I O No al s 1 String 2 head I O No a2 s 2 Merged character string s head I O d22 d2m NULL e The string that begins from the head I O specified by argument s is merged with the string that begins from the head I O specified by argument s 1 and the result is stored in the head I O area specified by s 2 e The character strings to be merged end before a NULL H00 e A NULL will be set after the merged character string e Use the ADRIO command to store the actual addresses of the head I Os at s and s 2 e If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 211 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Cautionary notes e The ADRIO command should be used to set the actual addresses in s to s 2 If not DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by them overlap DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by s 1 and s 2 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD R7E3 WMO010 H4849 WMO011 H5441 WMO010 H4849 WMO012 H4348 WM011 H5441 WM013 H4900 WM012 H4348 WM020 H4E48 WM013 H4900 WM021 H53
221. EH YT16 EH YTP8 EH YTP16 EH YTP16S EH YS4 EH YR12 EH YT32 EH YTP32 EH YT64 EH YTP64 EH AY22 EH AY2H EH AY4V EH AY4H EH POS EH CU EH CUE EH UNW NIDA BR OJo v gt 4 53 AINIA oo w gt Chapter 4 System Equipment Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 23 PROFIBUS Master Module Name and function of each part EH RMP Weight Approx 0 13 kg 0 286 Ib Dimensions mm in 1 Lock button 2 LED cover 3 Configuration connector 30 95 gt 4 Reset switch 5 Dip switch 6 Terminal end switch 7 Network connector Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the attachment can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws O 1 2 LED cover Displays the communication and other statuses of the module 4 5 when connected Exercise caution when handling the connector Configuration connector Used to transfer the configuration data D sub 9 pin The temperature gets high male Reset switch Resets the unit when the module is malfunctioning Dip switch 1 Specifies the data transfer mode for the slave when the CPU is in the stop state Terminal end switch Turns on when this module is at the end of a network o 7 Network connector A connector for connecting to a network D su
222. Exclusive OR Q ajayayayjayasla a ajayjayayaya Relational expression Signed Relational expression Relational expression Signed Relational expression lt Relational expression Signed lt Relational expression 21 22 lt Relational expression N elele S ol eo XQ Signed lt Relational expression Supported x Not supported Application commands 1 2 Command Command name EH 150 H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 H4010 H 700 H 1002 H 300 H 702 format oO pen e BSET d n Bit set BRES d n Bit reset 1 2 3 Bit test 4 Shift right 5 Shift left Rotate right 7 Rotate left Logical shift right Logical shift left 1C BCD shift right BCD shift left Batch shift right Batch shift left Batch BCD shift right Batch BCD shift left Block transfer O Supported x Not supported alfefsl lleellteh E 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 A 6 Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart Application commands 2 2 EH 150 H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 H4010 H 700 H 1002 H 300 H 702 Command Command name format oO EA e 18 Block exchange 19 INOT d Reverse Two s complement Absolute value Sign addition Sign expansion Binary gt BCD conversion BCD gt Binary conversion Decode ENCO d s n Encode SEG d s 7 segment decode N N N N Zz elo 2 2 N 6 7 3 25 2 S 28 29 S
223. Floating Point Operation ARC COS Ladder format Condition code Processing time us enap org OSTA FUN 114 s per err sp v c FACOS s EOT Lacie Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 114 s FACOS s Word Double word word e l TEE PTE DM ae CEE ly Function s 3 s 2 s 1 15 015 0 15 0 15 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FACOS Real number portion Real number portion Calculates the COS value of the real number value in radian units specified in s and s 1 as the arguments the sets the result in s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the operation result is not within the range of le 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifs to s 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed FUN 114 s e When the value of s s 1 is greater than 1 DER is set to 1 Program example X00200 DIFO m m LD X00200 DR0100 H3F800000 AND DIFO FUN114 WRO100 DR0100 H3F800000 FUN 114 WRO100 Program description e At a rising edge of X0200 the COS value of the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is calculated and the result is set in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal output setting
224. H ETH Using the following program example the data to be set in the transfer source data area that will be passed from the CPU to the EH ETH is described For more details see the EH ETH manual VO NO Data Description Remark WM100 HC000 Higher IP address 192 000 Wwatioi fd eae nooo T tan ana en WM103 HFFOO Lower subnet mask address 255 000 i WM106 HOFAO Port number for sending and receiving tests 4000 WM108 H0000 Lower gateway address 1 000 000 _ WM10B H0000 Higher gateway address 3 000 000 i WM10D H0000 Higher gateway address 4 000 000 i WM112 H0001 Task code 2 communication protocol TCP IP WMII7 H0000 Task code timeout No timeout check _ O Q oO N z 5 LL 5 261 mn Cc zZ De e Program example WR0003 H0003 WR0004 H0000 ADRIO WR0005 M0000 ADRIO WR0006 WM100 WR0007 H0018 WR0013 H0001 WR0014 H0000 ADRIO WR0015 M0010 ADRIO WRO016 WM120 WRO017 H0018 FUN 200 WRO000 FUN 200 WROO10 R101 0 R101 0 5 262 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Perform parameter area initialization settings with 1 scan execution on Write request to the Y area Set M0000 in the read control bit I O number from unit number 0 slot number 0 word location word 0 Set WM100 in the transfer source header I O number Set the read size to 24 words Read request from the X area Set M0010 i
225. H XD16 Figure 9 5 Input wiring Chapter 9 PLC Installation Loading Wiring a DC input module 1 When all input terminals X0 X1 and the common terminal C are loaded with 24 V DC inputs change to ON and approximately 6 9 mA of current in the case of the EH XD8 and approximately 4mA in the case of the EH XD16 flow to the external input contacts 2 For sensors such as a proximity switch or photoelectric switch current output type transistor open collector can be directly connected For voltage output type sensors connect them to the input terminal after first going through the transistor 3 Measures to prevent faulty contact in a strong electric contact Sirong elechiic The current that flows to a contact when external contacts are closed is approximately 6 9 mA for the EH XD8 and a approximately 4 mA for the EH XD16 If the use of a strong Approx 50 De E electric contact cannot be avoided add resistance as shown r4vpc 560 2 in the diagram at left and supply sufficient current to the contact to prevent a faulty contact DC input module 4 Limit the wiring length within 30 m 98 43 ft b Wiring for the 32 point 64 point input module EH XD32 EH X64 Based on CE marking EH XD32 Shield cable Signal line EH XD64 Common terminal lt Common line R External power supply Cautionary notes 1 Wire only the signal line through the shielded cable and provide class D gro
226. H01 Monday H02 Tuesday H03 Wednesday H04 Thursday H05 Friday H06 Saturday f Time H00 to H23 in BDC g Minutes H00 to H59 in BDC h Seconds H00 to H59 in BDC Response T a 1 Added as response data only when the function selection is HOO a Response task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter 1 The contents of b to h are the same as the request task code 1 Read calendar clock subcommand H00 Reads the calendar time data in the CPU module 2 Set calendar clock subcommand H01 Sets the calendar time data in the CPU module 30 second adjustment subcommand H02 Performs second adjustment of the calendar time in the CPU module 0 to 29 seconds gt 00 second 30 to 59 seconds 1 minute and 00 second A 28 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Function selection subcommand HOO Request Sek We Se Ee Ses 1991 March 21 Thursday 8 o clock 5 minutes 30 seconds Normal execution Function selection subcommand H01 Request April 20 Saturday 16 o clock 50 minutes 30 seconds Response Vw Normal execution A 29 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Function Clear the designated area in the user memory Execution condition CPU status READ occupancy Occupancy WRITE occupancy status a Function selection
227. H2020 WR0091 H3031 FUN 40 WR0090 Program description e The ASCI data u u 0 1 stored in WR0090 and WR0091 is converted to 16 bit BCD data e The conversion result is stored in WR0092 u H20 Execution results WR0090 H2020 WR0091 H3031 WR0092 H0001 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 205 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from 8 digit decimal ASCII to 32 bit BCD data Item number Fun commands 22 Name DOUBLE DECIMAL ASCII TO BCD Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee FUN 41 s DDABCD s Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 41 s DDABCD s Wa O Double word word TD O Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU RCU CT Argument ASCicode Lot __ Combination of Hoo Heemse jH E ao t 5 maa e Function Decimal ASCII data 32 bit BCD data 8 7 0 12 11 10 BCD code in the 10 place 10 ASCII code in the 10 place The 8 digit decimal ASCII data specified by arguments s to s 1 is converted to 32 bit BCD data and the result is stored in s 4 lower s 5 higher Higher digit s HOO and H20 NULL and space are processed as H30 0 Leading zero suppressed digit Arguments will be combinations of H30 to H39 0 to 9 If the operation is performed normally DER is s
228. H3F 1 to 60 b T O code Refer to the task code H40 c TO number Response Monitor data 1st point 1st word Monitor data Nth point Nth word T b l a Response task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter b Monitor data refer to below for details Bit data Oo lt 4 1 point Word data H0000 to HFFFF A 54 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications A When the I O code is bit Request T T T A4 N points I O code Data memory Response TT Nth point gt Nth point The CPU detects the head of the monitor data according to the requested I O code and I O number the in response returns the monitor data for the number of bits requested Request Data memory Response TT Nth word 1st word Nth word The CPU detects the head of the monitor data according to the requested I O code and I O number then in response returns the monitor data for the number of words requested A 55 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Task code HA5 Forced set reset with I O number designation Classification I O control N random poi
229. I O number Sets the actual addresses of WR WL and WM in the transfer source destination header I O number using the ADRIO command 7 Size Sets the size to be read or written from 1 in word units 1 1 Execution flag Set to 1 using a user program when performing read or write operation using the FUN 200 command When the read or write operation is complete the FUN 200 command resets this to 0 2 Normal end flag Set to 1 when read or write operation by the FUN 200 command is normally completed When read or write operation is started the FUN 200 command resets this to 0 3 Abnormal end flag Set to 1 when read or write operation by the FUN 200 command is abnormally completed When read or write operation is started the FUN 200 command resets this to 0 UNFAIR 1 The ranges in which the word location and size can be specified will differ depending on assignment The equation for calculating the ranges of the word location and size is as follows Size 3Fh Number of input points Number of output points Example If assignment is 4W 4W 3Fh 4 4 37h The word location range is 00h through 36h The size range is 0001h through 0037h 5 259 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Cautionary notes e When an error is generated an error code is set DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed e Ifthe specified size is 0 the process will end normally wi
230. I code in the 10 place e The 32 bit BCD data specified by arguments s lower and s 1 higher is converted to an 8 digit decimal ASCII code and the result is stored in s 2 tos 6 e Leading zeros of the conversion result are suppressed and these digits are replaced by H20 space e NULL after ASCII data indicates the end of a string e If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used If s s 1 is other than BCD data DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Ifs 1 to s 6 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00305 X00305 DIF35 AND DIF35 DRO0040 H00120567 FUN 35 WR0040 DR0040 H00120567 FUN 35 WR0040 Program description e The BCD data H00120567 stored in DR0040 WRO0040 WRO0041 is converted to ASCII data e The conversion result is stored in WRO042 to WR0046 Execution results DR0O040 H00120567 WR0042 H2020 WR0043 H3132 WRO044 H3035 WRO0045 H3637 WRO046 HO0000 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 199 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from 5 digit unsigned decimal ASCII to 16 bit binary data Item number Fun commands 17 Name DECIMAL ASCII TO BINARY Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 eee DABIN s DABIN s Word O Double wor
231. ID management table 1 Sets the header number of the WR used as the PID control table in s of FUN 0 s The PID control table is comprised of 2 3 4 and 5 and the size of the table increases by the number of loops 3 Make sure that the maximum number of the WR is not exceeded Otherwise error code H0004 will be written in error code 0 2 Contents Details Remarks Error code 0 1 Read Sets the error code generated by FUN 0 processing or some part of FUN 1 processing If no error is present the prior status is maintained Error code 1 Read Sets the error code generated by FUN 1 processing If no error is present the prior status is maintained Error code 2 1 Read Sets the error code generated by FUN 2 processing If no error is present the prior status is maintained 2 FUN 0 Normal completion 1 Read Sets H0001 when FUN 0 PID initialization is executed normally If an error is generated the value will be H0000 and an error code will be set in error code 0 Number of loops Write 2 Sets the number of loops used in a range between 1 and 64 If the value is 0 H0002 is written in error code 0 and the PID will not be processed Even if the FUN 1 and FUN 2 are programmed PID will not be processed Head address of the WR of the word table for loop 1 Write 2 Head address of the WR of the word table for loop 2 Write 2 48 words are used per loop for PID
232. II data Item number Fun commands 13 Name BINARY TO HEXA ASCII Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 eee FUN 32 s BINHA s Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 32 s BINHA s Word O Double word word TD a Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Argument conversion s uses up to s 3 See Function 16 bit unsigned binary data Hexadecimal ASCII data 15 87 0 s HO to HFFFF e f 163 162 st2 16 16 16 ASCII code in the 16 place s 3 NULL e The 16 bit unsigned binary data specified by argument s is converted to 4 digit hexadecimal ASCII code and the result is stored ins 1 to s 3 e Leading zeros of the conversion result are not suppressed e NULL after ASCH data indicates the end of a string e Ifthe operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e Ifs 1tos 3 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00302 X00302 DIF32 AND DIF32 H WR0020 H1234 FUN 32 WR0020 WR0020 H1234 FUN 32 WR0020 Program description e The binary data H1234 stored in WR0020 is converted to ASCII data e The conversion result is stored in WR0021 to WR0023 Execution results WR0020 H1234 WR0021 H3132 W
233. Item number Basic commands 36 Name BOX Ladder format Condition code Processing time 1s Remark TITT nnn R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpus Other than Aad eft NDD See Function column DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max vuv Qa 925 Command format Number of steps LD sl S lt gt s2 Condition Steps 18 4 25 4 72 3 124 3 78 7 1133 9 AND sl S lt gt s2 Double word See Cautionary notes OR sl S lt gt s2 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY I WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 8 RCU CT sl Relational number 1 O O0 0 0 s2 Relational number 2 O O0 0 0 Function Ladder format sl sl soo l S lt gt S lt gt S lt gt s2 L s2 s2 _ e Compares sl and s2 as signed double word numbers and b31 bo if s1 is equals to s2 it enters the noncontinuity status off and ae if s1 is not equal to s2 enters the continuity status on Sign bit 0 Positive 1 Negative e sl s2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal Cautionary notes Number of steps Double word LD AND s1S lt gt s2 OR s1S lt gt s2 Program example DR0000 R004 LD DR0000 S lt gt DR0002 H s lt gt o OUT R004 DR0002 Program description e When DR0000 DR0002 R004 turns on signed 5 55 Chapter 5 Command Specifications
234. LATIONAL EXPRESSION Condition code Ladder format Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH cpu3 Other than left d sl lt s2 ERR SD Ave Max J J Command format Number of s Condition s is a word s is a double word s1 lt s2 Double word d TD SS 3 DR Usable I O WDT MS DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Constant ld Substitution destination Relational number Function Substitutes 1 when s1 is less than s2 and otherwise 0 into d assuming s1 and s2 as binary data Cautionary notes e The combinations of d s1 and s2 are as follows Program example L10000 TC100 lt TC101 H L10000 TC100 lt TC101 Program description e When TC100 lt TC101 1 is set in L10000 Otherwise L10000 is reset to 0 TC n is the progress value of the no n timer or counter 5 79 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Signed lt Relational expression SIGNED lt RELATIONAL Item number Arithmeticcommands 20 EXPRESSION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpus Other than d sl S lt s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e Command format Number of steps F Condition Steps 19 e
235. Log write parameter word table 1 Set the actual address WR WL WM of the word head I O number that is used as the table into the data log management table 6 using the ADRIO command 2 The table consists of 2 through 4 and the size increases depending on the log groups quantity 3 Make sure the maximum value for the word head I O number is not exceeded If the maximum value is exceeded H0005 will be set to the error code in the data logging management table Log write control bit I O number Set the bit I O number used in FUN 211 control See d Explanation of log write control bit table Log groups quantity Set the number of logging groups in the range between 1 and 128 If the specified value exceeds the allowable range H0004 will be set to the error code in the data logging management table If this error occurs data logging will not be performed Log selection Select the elements that comprise a single logging 1 Head I O number 1 ton Set each number using the ADRIO command by making sure the maximum value for the word head I O number WR WL WM WX from which the data will be logged is not exceeded 2 Size vrrererreesrereee Set the range for the number of words logged from the word head I O number 3 If the maximum I O number is exceeded Hxx08 will be set to the error code in the data logging management table If this error occurs data logging will not be performed 4 Ifthe specified size
236. Max Ave Max Command format Number of steps Usable I O FIFO head I O Size of FIFO Constant Function FIFO is an abbreviation for First In First Out meaning that the data stored in the buffer first is taken out first This command initializes the FIFO Sets the FIFO head I O number P and the FIFO size n If0 lt n lt 256 Sets n in P If257 lt n Sets 256 in P Sets the initial setting value of 0 as the number of used FIFO to P 1 The FIFO sets n 2 words from P to P n 1 T O number Set value n 0 1 2 Size of FIFO Cautionary notes e Use this command so that P n 1 does not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the maximum value of the range last value P 1 is set in P For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table e Set nin the range between 0 and 256 Ifn is greater than 256 DER R7F4 is equal to 1 and n is set to 256 5 119 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 33 Name FIFO write FIFO WRITE Condition code Ladder format Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cpu44s EH cpu3 Other than left FIFWR P s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max t e e e J Command format Number of steps Condition Steps FIFWR
237. N amp RCU CT DM s Word I O No O Specify with actual address Note s 1 No of bits O 0 to 16 s 2 Bit header I O No O Specify with actual address Note Function e Sets the specified number of bits s 1 from the lowest bit of the T O s specified by the word I O number in the area starting with the specified header I O number s 2 s s 1 s 2 Cautionary notes e Set the actual I O addresses using the ADRIO command for the s and s 2 parameters If the actual addresses are not specified DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed e Ifs through s 2 or the areas specified by them overlap DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed e Ifs through s 2 exceed the maximum value of the I O number DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed e Ifthe areas specified by s through s 2 exceed the maximum I O number the data will be expanded within the specified area range but DER will be equal to 1 e Ifthe number of bits s 1 exceeds 16 DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed e Ifthe number of bits s 1 is 0 no processing will be performed DER will be equal to 1 Program example X00200 ADRIO WRO100 WR0200 Expands the lower four bits of WR0200 WROI101 H0004 to the range from M0000 through ADRIO WR0102 M0000 M0003 FUN 128 WR0100 Only the EH CPU448 is supporte
238. O number designation Classification I O control N continuous points Forcibly sets and resets the designated data in N continuous points words of data area starting with the designated I O Execution condition CPU status Request o o o o warapa T O code T O number d Set reset data Bit data Number of points 8 Binary image H00 to HFF Word data Word number value Ist word Response a H42 Number of bits H01 to HC8 1 to 200 Number of words HO1 to H64 1 to 100 Refer to the task code H40 Set reset data When the number of set reset points is less than 8 points set 0 to the open bits Nth word Binary image H0000 to HFFFF a Response task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter The EH 150 returns H00 normal execution even for I Os that are out of range A 47 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Task code H44 Monitoring with I O number designation Classification I O control N random points Reads the monitor data by designating N random points words of I O numbers This task code can also be executed when the CPU is not occupied However the response task code will be H02 local station is not occupying the CPU The I O data of EH 150 outside the range returns all off
239. O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table e Ifnis equal to 0 the block shift is not performed and DER R7F4 will be 0 Program example 1H WBSR WR0100 3 AND DIFI x00001 DIF1 LD X00001 tk WBSR WRO100 3 l Program description e When X00001 rises the contents of WR0100 WR0101 and WR0102 are regarded as BCD code and shifted to the right by four bits WR0102 WR0101 WR0100 H1234 H5678 H123 Before the shift HQI23 H4567 es Set to 0 Deleted After the shift 5 99 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 15 Name Batch shift left BCD SHIFT LEFT BLOCK Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee WBSL d n ERR SD V C Ave Ave Ave J J e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 23 8 1 4n 64 6 1 4n 57 5 1 4n Bit TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Constant Head I O to be shifted Number of words to be The constant is set in shifted decimal Function Shifts n words between d and d n 1 to the left toward greater I O number by one digit 1 digit is equivalent to 4 bits as BCD data 0 is set to the least significant digit of d n 1 The content of the most significant digit of d is discarded n words Before executi
240. OA ARAIRE Condition 3 FUN 100 s INTW s Bit Word Double word word R SS Usable I O X YE Wx WL TC DX DY DL M DM ff et oe Function st 15 0 st 2 15 0 15 0 lt INTW Real number portion Real number portion Converts the real number specified by arguments s and s 1 to integer word data then sets the result in s 2 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the resulting integer value of the conversion of the real number specified in s and s 1 falls outside the range of 32 768 to 32 767 DER is set to 1 and s 2 does not change e Ifstos 2 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example X00200 J FUN 100 s LD X00200 DR0100 H46FFFE00 i f FUN100 WR0100 DR0100 H46FFFE00 FUN 100 WR0100 Program description e At arising edge of X0200 the real number specified in DR0100 WR0100 WR0101 is converted to an integer and the result is set in WRO102 Internal output setting WR0101 H46FF WR0100 HFE00 Operation result WRO102 H7FFF t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 229 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Floating Point Operation Real to Integer Double Word Conversi
241. Operation prohibited status Battery error R7D9 will turn off when the error factor is gone by exchanging the batteries etc 13 2 Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs No Name Meaning Description Setting Resetting condition condition R7EA Executing an online 0 Not being executed Indicates whether operation is temporarily change in RUN 1 Being executed stopped output hold due to online change in RUN R7EB Undefined __ Donotuse o S o internal output CWRFO000 to FOOA R7C8 to 7DE the user he system Undefined PE SS bt eel R7EE Battery error display 0 Upon error ERR lamp Indicates whether or not the ERR lamp is used Turned off by flashes to notify battery errors he user or 1 Upon error ERR lamp turns Turned on by urned off even off the user when power failure memory is cleared Turned on by Turned off by the system he system R7EF Backup memory writing Write complete Indicates whether or not data is being written execution flag Write in progress to the backup memory EH CPU448 only R7FO Indicates whether there is a carryover from the Lumedonby Tumed off by p the system the system Carry operation result R7F1 Indicates whether there is overflow in the Overflow operation result R7F2 0 Shift data 0 Designates the shift data used in shift Shift data 1 commands etc the user the user R7F3 Indicates whether there is an operation error Error when operation is execut
242. P s 3 Usable I O Constant Head I O of FIFO Data to be written to FIFO Function e Writes data to the FIFO buffer whose head I O number is P If the used number CNT is less than the size of n Writes the contents of s to P CNT 2 and adds 1 to the used number CNT If the used number CNT is greater than the size of n DER R7F4 is set to 1 and write will not be performed 1 O number Set value Size of FIFO n Set with FIFIT FIFO usage number CNT CNT 1 Data already stored P CNT 1 P CNT 2 Cautionary notes e Use this command so that P n 1 does not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and write will not be performed For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table 5 120 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 34 Name FIFO read FIFO READ Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU44s EH cPU3 Sme Man FIFRD P d DER ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max t o e Command format Number of s Condition FIFRD P d Usable I O Constant FIFO head I O Ld I O that stores the read data Function Reads the data in the FIFO buffer whose head I O number is P Wh
243. PU that the parameter area data has been modified Execution condition CPU status READ occupancy Occupancy WRITE occupancy status a Response task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter Description Conducts I O assignment based on the parameter information stored in parameter area A of the user memory so that the T O and communication actions are performed according to the new I O assignment When the initialization of all user memory areas zero clear change in parameter area A or the writing of memory assignment is performed always execute this task code when the memory write processing is completed If the I O assignment of each communication module is erased or if the slots are changed after this task code has been executed communication between the CPU and the connected host cannot be performed In such cases connect the programming device to the CPU and perform the necessary operations such as I O assignment to recover A 35 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Timer counter set value modification Classification Function Modifies the set value for the HI LADDER program timer or counter Execution condition 1 CPU status CPU status ee bereal Occupancy WRITE occupancy status 2 The special internal output R7C7 which allows modifies while running is on 3 Norma
244. Processing time us ria encruer OeTRan FUN 108 s per err sp v c_ EEO rite a Ee Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 108 s FRAD s Wa Double word word e l TEE PTE DM mi SG EE OE Function s 3 s 2 s 1 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FRAD Real number portion Real number portion T degrees x radian 180 e Converts the angle units of the real number value specified in s and s 1 as the arguments to radian units the sets the result the result in s 2 and s 3 e Ifthe calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 e The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes FUN 108 s e When the operation result is not within the range of 1e 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifs to s 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00200 DRO100 H42C80000 FUN108 WRO100 DRO100 H42C80000 FUN 108 WRO100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is converted to a radian and the result is set in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal output setting WR0101 H42C8 WRO100 H0000 Operation result WRO103 H3FDF WRO102 H66F3 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 237 Chapt
245. R0022 H3334 WR0023 H0000 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 196 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from 32 bit binary to hexadecimal ASCII data Item number Fun commands 14 Name DOUBLE BINARY TO HEXA ASCII Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee FUN 33 s DBINHA s Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 33 s DBINHA s Wa O Double word word TD ON Usable I O Y gt WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU CT s Argument lower 100000000 to A Argument higher Se ee eee s uses up to s 6 Function 32 bit unsigned binary data Hexadecimal ASCII data 15 87 0 s Lower 16 bit 542 TA 16 s 1 Higher 16 bit SEa 16 164 s 4 16 16 s 5 161 16 16 ASCII code in the 16 place s 6 NULL e The 32 bit signed binary data specified by arguments s lower and s 1 higher is converted to an 8 digit hexadecimal ASCII code and the result is stored ins 2 tos 6 e Leading zeros of the conversion result are not suppressed e NULL after ASCII data indicates the end of a string e If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used AINEI Ifs 1 to s 6 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD
246. RO100 0001001000110100 en WRO101 H5678 P WR0101 0101011001111000 WR0102 H444C WR0102 0100010001001100 5 74 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 15 Name Relational expression RELATIONAL EXPRESSION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpuss Oter than d sl s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e e J Upper 0 4 36 82 85 case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW d sl s2 s is a word 4 18 44 e 84 85 s is a double word 6 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT d Substitution destination OJO sl Comparand O 1 O O O O0 0 0 747 0 s2 Relational number O O0 O0 O0 0 0 0 0 Function e Substitutes 1 when s1 is equal to s2 and otherwise 0 into d assuming s1 and s2 as binary data Cautionary notes e The combinations of d sl and s2 are as follows Program example __ M0000 WX0000 WX0001 H M0000 WX0000 WX0001 Program description e When WX0000 WX0001 1 is set in M0000 Otherwise M0000 is reset to 0 5 75 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Signed Relati
247. ROL DR0002 1 E R7F0 0 ROL DR0000 1 ROL DR0002 1 Program description e When X00001 rises the 64 bit data is shifted one bit at a time The open area after the shift is filled with 0 Overall movement C b31 DR0002 DR0000 b0 C R7F0 o lt Ho DR0000 b31 5 92 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 8 Name Logical shift right LOGICAL SHIFT RIGHT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPusas EH cpus Other than LSR d n DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max o e e Upper 16 e 53 e 89 case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW LSR d n 3 18 e 70 e 7 je Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O Y IL WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT d TO to be shifted olojo OJO n Number of bits to be O O0 0 0 O The constant is set in shifted decimal Function e Shifts the contents of d to the right toward the lower digits by n bits e 0 is set from the most significant bit to the nth bit e The content of the nth bit from the least significant bit is set in C R7FO Before execution d J j n bits B LJ C R7F0 After execution o ofo ojo gt B ero
248. RR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max J e d s1 S s2 Command format Number of s Condition d s1 S s2 Double word s1 S s2 Bit d Usable I O Constant Substitution destination Dividend Divisor Function Divides s1 by s2 as signed binary data and substitutes the quotient into d in signed binary data The remainder is set in the special internal output DRF016 signed binary data The DER flag is 1 if s2 is 0 and the operation is not performed As long as s2 is not 0 it is 0 and the operation is performed The V flag is 1 when the quotient is a positive value and exceeds H7FFFFFFF Otherwise it is 0 Eexample DRO060 DR0056 S DR0058 WwR0061 WRo060 WRFOI7 DR0060 DRFO16 WR0059 WRO0S8 WR0057 WR0056 DR0056 DR0058 WRFO16 e sl s2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal Program example X00000 1H LD X00000 DR0060 DR0056 S DR0058 DR0060 DR0056 S DR0058 Program description e When input X00000 turns on the value of DR0056 is divided by the value in DR0058 then substituted into DRO060 as signed binary data The remainder is substituted into special internal output DRFO16 as signed binary data 5 71 Chapter 5 Command Specifications
249. Remarks assignment slot number i EH PT4 Signed 15 bits temperature measuring register input WX4 1 4 channels platinum Pt 100 Q Pt 1 000 Q I O controller EH IOC T O control module Fixed 2 1 unit 1 extension extension is not available with the EH CPU104 Dummy module EH DUM Module for open slots Empty 16 EH CU High speed counter input maximum frequency of FUNO 1 100 kHz 2 channels 1 2 phase switchable 4 point open collector output EH CUE High speed counter input maximum frequency of FUNO 1 100 kHz 1 channel 1 2 phase switchable 2 point open collector output EH POS Positioning module 4aw4w ol EH ETH Ethernet module IEEE802 3 standard 1OBASE T COMM 1 Only 0 2 slots are effective EH RMD DeviceNet master module 256 word input 256 word LINK 1 Only 0 2 slots output up to 2 units per CPU can be installed are effective EH IOCD DeviceNet slave module 256 word input 256 word Fixed 2 output EH RMP PROFIBUS DP master module LINK 1 Only 0 2 slots 256 word input 256 word output up to 2 units per are effective CPU can be installed EH IOCP PROFIBUS DP slave controller Fixed 2 209 word input and output 2 The CPU module power module and I O controller can only be installed at the designated locations They cannot be installed in areas other than the designated locations Always assign 16 points as open when assigning an T O to an open slot 2 Peripheral devices Table 4 2 List of peripheral devices Form Specificat
250. SIT 2H x x x POSITA2H 11 QTRNS 4 d s t High data communication command for POSIT 2H POSITA2H i NSS Da onmenesion commie mal e e e e a cler e ese 15 JRECV a1 ID reader reception command e x x x ie NSS Gin ea a nee el we O Sapa x Not supported The EH CPU448 is supported The EH CPU308 316 and 448 are supported FUN commands 1 5 Command Command name EH 150 H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 format to H 20 i N 0 s PIDIT s N 1 s PIDOP s N2 s PIDCL s N4 s IFR s FUN 10 1 ies S Bs om is C is GS Z D x FUN 11 s COS s FUN 12 s TAN s FUN 13 s ASIN s N 14 s ACOS s N 15 s TAN s N 20 s SRCH s N 21 s TSRCH s O Supported x Not supported The EH CPU448 is supported The EH CPU308 316 and 448 are supported ies S Es G A 8 Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart FUN commands 2 5 Command Command name EH 150 H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 H4010 format to H 700 H 1002 H 20 H 300 H 702 UN 30 s Binary decimal ASCII conversion 16 bit BINDA s FUN 31 s Binary decimal ASCII conversion 32 bit DBINDA s 5 FUN 32 s Binary hexadecimal ASCII conversion BINHA s __ 16 bit e P 1 30 6 FUN 33 s Binary hexadecimal ASCH conversion DBINHA s 32 bit
251. Status dialogue box Enter the I O assignment set in the Slot Setting Status into the I O Assignment List 6 Click the Execute button to write the assigned information to the PC memory 7 Click the OK button in the confirmation dialogue box to close the I O Assignment List dialogue box Confirmation dialogue box 1 0 Assignment Table x Type s standard z Msie seunaconation Type fBtendard Unit O 0 z Slot Setting 1 2 BICS Di LETER 3 p 4 Cc o 4 im 6 Wy R i E 9 U R Chapter 15 Operation Examples Sloi Mounted VOR Slot Edit c Execute Cancel A 1 0 Assignment Table x Type s standard z v Slot Setting Condition x Slot Setting Type Standard Unit O Wt a SR tn a rE tas al Assignment Setting Assignment Data by Empty 0 Empty 0 Empty 16 Empty 32 Empty 48 Empty 64 Empty 128 BitX 16 Cancel Bit X 32 Closet BitX 64 Slot L Mounted VOR Slot Edit c Executec Cancel Bity 16 1 0 Assignment Table x Type s Ils z z Slot Setting Slot Setting Condition x Type Btencara Unit O Standard bd FEREFRERHE a Closet H Slot L en Slot Edit C Executec Cancel Type s standard z VO Assignment Table Unit 5 Unit 6 HLadder Wrote 1 0 assig
252. Stopping EH 150 8 5 Test Operation 1 Verification of interlock Verify the performance of the interlock in preparation for unexpected accidents Create ladders such as an emergency stop ladder protective ladder and interlock ladder outside the program controller With regard to the relay output module however do not control the relay drive power supply to interlock with external loads Operation without load Before actually operating the loads in the system test the program only and verify its operation Always perform this if there is any possibility of damaging the other party s equipment due to unexpected occurrences caused by program errors or other problems Operation using actual loads Supply power to the external input and external output to verify the actions 8 12 Chapter 9 PLC Installation Loading Wiring Chapter9 PLC Installation Loading Wiring 9 1 Installation 1 Installation location and environment a When installing the EH 150 use the module within the 3 3 general specification environment b Mount the PLC onto a metal plate c Install the PLC in a suitable enclosure such as a cabinet that opens with a key tool etc 2 Installing the base unit a Precautions when installing the base unit 1 When installing the base unit fix it securely with screws in 4 places M4 length 20 mm 0 79 in or more or DIN rail 2 To keep the unit within the ambient temperature range when using a Allo
253. The cursor moves to the far right portion of the screen automatically The dialogue box for the processing box symbol is displayed 3 Input arithmetic expressions in the Expression Processing Box Property x in Processing Box text field Multiple lines a maximum of 19 can be input by Symbol Position Row 1 Column 10 including line breaks Expression of Processing Box P Processing Box properties of The comment for the T O No written to the Tenia ileliltwee Processing Box is displayed by clicking the Comment column Comment C If there are no comments only the I O No is displayed STi eee Always enter a space before and after The Comment Input dialogue box is displayed by double clicking the I O No displayed in the Comment column e Input a comment and click the OK button Comment Input x wmo P aed Comment C I Cancel Comment Input dialogue box 4 Click the OK button in the Processing Box 15 8 Chapter 15 Operation Examples The input of the horizontal line symbol which connects between symbols may be omitted Symbols are connected by horizontal lines by the automatic wiring function at ladder write Example of entering a timer 1 Specify the input position or omit the specification if entering it in the same ladder 2 Click the symbol for coil When the specification of the input position is omitted the cursor automatically moves to
254. UN Ee Operation status Stop status e Operation definition input OFF or switch STOP Switch RUN or cancel REMOTE y Stop command task code Operation status Cancel operation definition input Operation definition input ON and operation command task code Operation definition input OFF or stop command task code Switch STOP and designate REMOTE Designate operation definition input Stop status Caution REMOTE designation is done with the mode setting switch Switch STOP when operating REMOTE The operation command task code is valid when R7C3 is on The stop command task code is valid when R7C4 is on Cannot change to the operation status during WRITE occupied Figure 8 1 Diagram of status transition between operation and stop The EH 150 can be operated or stopped under the conditions as shown in Figure 8 1 If an error is detected during operation or stop output is shut off an error is displayed and the EH 150 stops Error includes serious failure medium failure minor failure and warning The operation status for each failure is shown in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Description of each failure and operation status Serious failure This indicates there is a serious unrecoverable error such as power failure Stop microcomputer error system ROM error system RAM error system bus error etc Medium failure This indicates ther
255. UN 212 s LOGCLR s Word Oef Double word word TD ea Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT t Function e This command is used to forcibly erase clear the logged data in the memory board indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used For the data logging management table see Management table details For the error codes to be set see Error code details Cautionary notes If an error occurs an error code is set and DER becomes equal to 1 If this happens the log data clear will not be performed If this command is executed when the initialization result in the data logging management table corresponding to the FUN 210 initial setting for data logging is execution not allowed an error will occur An error will occur if the argument S exceeds the maximum value for the I O number Do not set a startup condition for this command Execute it during normal scans only An error will occur if the dip switch setting on the memory board specifies write prohibited or any mode other than the data logging mode If the memory board is currently in use for other processing DER becomes equal to 0 and R7F7 becomes equal to 1 If this happens the processing will not be performed The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 282 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example The following shows a sample program
256. Upper 16 e 53 e 89 case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW LSL d n 3 18 lt lt 70 7 e Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT d 1 O to be shifted O O 0 OJO n Number of bits to be O O0 0 0 O The constant is set in shifted decimal Function e Shifts the contents of d to the left toward the upper digits by n bits e O is set from the least significant bit to the nth bit e The content of the nth bit from the most significant bit is set in C R7FO Before execution d mm nbits gt f a HAE C R7F0 After execution Eps io oo E nbit gt Most significant bit MSB Least significant bit LSB Ifd is a word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 15 of the lower 4 bits b3 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 15 decimal Ifd is a double word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 31 of the lower 5 bits b4 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 31 decimal Cautionary notes e Ifnis equal to 0 the shift is not performed The previous state is retained in C Program example X00001 DIFI LD X00001 f 1H LSL WR0000
257. VI2 32 PV12 33 E The pin numbers 1 to 8 of the EH CPU port have been changed beginning with this manual NJI 281B X For the correspondence between pin numbers and connectors see the figure in Chapter 10 Communication Specifications of this manual Appendix 1 Cable Connection Diagram EH 150 port and cable connection when using GPCLO1H lt Cable EH RS05 GPCBO2H gt Meaning EH CPU port EH RSOS series CPU GPCB02H GPCLO1H 21 Notifies that reception is possible RS 8 1 20 Sneed eae lt SD lt 23 Reception data 4 RD 3 RxD P 24 Transmission data aR RS haK RTS PHL level monitoring CS 5 CTS 6 DSR DR 7 GND PHL 8 DCD 10 PGS 12 PV5 14 PV12 3 NV12 PV12 18 PHL 15 20 DTR Port No Meaning we EH CPU port 21 Notifies that reception is possible Do gt RS 8 22 e DR 7 23 Reception data RD 6 P 24 Transmission data Do gt SD 5 o 25 PHL level monitoring lt 4 lt PHL 4 26 PN12 3 R 27 PV5 2 T 28 PG5 1 29 PV12 2 30 t 47 31 32 33 EH 150 port and cable connection when using the host lt Cable EH RS05 Self made cable g
258. WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU DM RCU CT Function i X00001 Y00110 X00001 H it i R010 i R011 M0020 M0021 M0022 Y00110 This command is used to perform AND operation with respect to the logical operation blocks dotted line areas 5 30 Item number Basic commands 19 Name Chapter 5 Command Specifications Logical block parallel connection ORB Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark See Function column R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Other than ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Command format Number of s Condition Usable I O Constant Function X00000 Y00115 X00001 LD X00000 LD R010 LD R0I1 AND R012 ORB OR X00001 ANB OUT Y00115 This command is used to perform OR operation with respect to the logical operation blocks dotted line areas 5 31 ORB Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 20 Name Processing box start and end PROCESSING BOX Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPusas EH cpu3 Other tha
259. WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 3 decimal Ifd is a double word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 7 of the lower 3 bits b2 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 7 decimal Cautionary notes e Ifnis equal to 0 the shift is not performed Program example X00001 DIFI LD X00001 1H i BSR WR0000 1 AND DIFI BSR WR0000 1 Program description e When X00001 rises the content of WR0000 is regarded as BCD code and shifted to the right by four bits At this time the values in the lower 4 bits b3 to b0 are deleted and 0000 is set in the upper four bits b15 to b12 H 1l 2 3 GL Before the shift H 1 2 3 After the shift 0001 0010 0011 0100 gt 0000 0001 0010 0011 Deleted Set to 0 5 95 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 1 1 Name BCD shift left BCD SHIFT LEFT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu44s EH cpus Other than BSL d n ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max J o 15 52 88 Command format Number of s Condition BSL d n Usable I O Constant a VO to be shifted n Number of digits to be The constant is set in shifted decimal
260. WM200 as destination area Setting size 128 words log Execution of log data read first log item Calculation of last log data address 5 Setting of WM300 as destination area Setting size 128 words log Execution of log data read last log item Execution of log clear NAET Chapter 5 Command Specifications Fun commands 70 BOX comment BOX COMMENT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us FUN 254 s per ERR sp v c BOXC s ae ie ee Condition 3 FUN 254 s BOXC s Word Oef Double word word TD a Usable I O Y i WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Argument al constant Function e This command does not perform any operations Itis used to print comments on the right side of the calculation box in conjunction with the LADDER EDITOR e A comment can contain a maximum of 32 characters indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Fun commands 71 Memo comment MEMO COMMENT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us FUN 255 s DER ERR sp v c MEMC er elec ee Condition 3 FUN 255 s MEMC s Woa Oef Double word word TD Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Argument ee constant Function e This command does not perform any operations Itis used to print comments on the right side of t
261. WR0101 H3F80 WRO100 H0000 Operation result WR0103 H0000 WRO102 H0000 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 243 z Z E m o g Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Floating Point Operation ARC TAN Ladder format Condition code Processing time us EH CPU448 EH CPUs Other than FUN 115 s Der ERR sp v c FATAN 3 Sarna gee Condition 3 FUN 115 s FATAN s Word Double word word e l TEE PTE i DM emn i PE PT TT LT LoL LL LT ees Function s 3 s 2 s 1 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FATAN Real number portion Real number portion Calculates the TAN value of the real number value in radian units specified in s and s 1 as the arguments the sets the result in s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the operation result is not within the range of le 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifs to s 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example X00200 DIFO LD X00200 DR0100 HC0000000 AND DIFO FUN115 WRO100 DR0100 HC0000000 FUN 115 WRO100 Program description e Ata rising edge of X0200 the TAN value o
262. WRF015 H0016 FOR undefined H0046 FOR nesting overflow Instruction for use When R000 is turned on the progress value TC n of the timer or counter is R000 DIFO m e WROD cleared with 0 for 512 points WR0001 0 pouts When Once the FOR to NEXT is begun the command keeps executing until s is 0 WR0000 gt 0 FOR 0 WRO000 TCO WR0001 0 FORO WR0000 performs commands after TCO WR0001 0 while WROD SARE WR0000 gt 0 subtracts 1 from WR0000 at NEXTO then jumps to FORO WRO000 FORO WRO000 jumps to the next command within the current box upon WR0000 0 When WRO0000 0 To the next program 5 135 Syntax of FOR to NEXT 1 A NEXT command with the same code number as the code number n of the FOR command is required after the FOR command FOR 1 WR00 10 NEXT undefined error The NEXT command with respect to the FOR command does not exist within the user program FOR undefined error The FOR command does not exist before the NEXT command Program NEXT 2 Program Program NEXT 5 Program NEXT to FOR error The NEXT command exists before the FOR command FORS WMO4F Program An overlap of FOR and NEXT commands with the same code number n is not allowed FOR 3 WR10 Program NEXT 3 FOR 3 3 FOR duplicate definition error A FOR command with the same code number n is programmed NEXT duplicate definition error A NEXT command with the same code number n is programmed Program
263. WROO15 WRO0016 WR0014 B WROO15 Program description e When input X00000 turns on the product of the values in WR0014 and WRO015 is substituted into WR0016 as BCD data 5 67 s1 Bx s2 d Chapter 5 Command Specifications Signed binary multiplication SIGNED BINARY Item number Arithmeti ds Name Ithmeticcommands g MULTIPLICATION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpu3 Other than d s1 Sx s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max t e e e e Commandformat format Number of eae T Condition Steps 42 e 92 e 143 n fa sl Sx s2 Double word A N Double word R TD SS WR DR i Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT d Substitution destination OJO s1 Multiplicand olololloO s2 Multiplier O O O0 1 0 Function e Multiplies s1 and s2 as signed binary data and substitutes the result into d 1 upper digit and d lower digit as signed binary e The DER flag is 1 if d 1 exceeds the usable I O range in this case only the lower digit word is substituted and 0 when it does not 31 0 Example DR0031 DR0026 S DR0028 Sign s1 WR0027 WRO026 s1 a 2 DRO026 WR0029 WR0028 s2 63 3
264. Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wWL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT n Timer number O 0 to 255 Decimal t Time base O1s 1s 1s sl Set value 1 Olojo O 1 to 65 535 Decimal s2 Set value 2 Olojo O 1 to 65 535 Decimal Function e Updates the progress value while the startup condition is switched on The coil will not turn on if the clear input CL n is accessed while set value 1 lt progress value lt set value 2 The coil switches on if the clear input CL n is accessed while the progress value is less than set value 1 or if set value 2 is less than or equal to the progress value If the startup condition switches off everything is cleared e The progress value is set in TC n and does not exceed 65 535 decimal e Ifthe progress value is updated while the system is running the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point e Ifan I O is set for the set value the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I O value since the set values are updated during each scan Cautionary notes e The 01s time base can only be used for timer numbers 0 to 63 64 points e The 1ls and 1s time bases can be used for all timer numbers 0 to 255 e A maximum of 256 points can be used for the timers TD SS MS TMR and WDT in total However the same area as the counter is
265. X00200 DIFO FUN 110 s LD X00200 DR0100 H3F060A92 AND DIFO FUN110 WR0100 DR0100 H3F060A92 FUN 110 WR0100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the SIN of the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is calculated and the result is set in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal output setting WR0101 H3F06 WRO100 HOA92 Operation result WRO103 H3F00 WRO102 H0000 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 239 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 47 Floating Point Operation COS Ladder format Condition code Processing time us aria ere C FUN 111 s per err sp v c ae pa Desiree oe ee Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 111 s FCOS s Word Double word word e l TEE PTE i DM s Argument CEE E eE e E i eens Function s 3 s 2 s 1 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion lt FCOS Real number portion Real number portion Calculates the cosine value of the real number value in radian units specified in s and s 1 as the arguments the sets the result in s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used When the operation result is not within the range of 1e 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 If s to s
266. Y DL TMR CU DM RCU CT No of converted s uses up to s 2 characters Binary data head I O No Actual address is set_ address is set s 2 ASCII head I O No Nef Actual address is set conversion Function Binary data table s No of conversions n 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 s 1 Binary data head al s 2 ASCII data head a2 ASCII data table lis 87 o e The number of hexadecimal data characters specified by argument s is converted to hexadecimal ASCII codes beginning from the head I O specified by argument s 1 and the results are stored in addresses beginning from the head I O specified bys 2 e If the number of characters is odd the lower 8 bits of the data at the output destination will be H20 space e Use the ADRIO command to set the actual addresses in the head I Os of s 1 and s 2 e Ifthe operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 207 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Cautionary notes e The ADRIO command should be used to set the actual addresses in s 1 and s 2 If not DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by them overlap DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by s 1 and s 2 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation
267. Y100 T O monitor The I O monitor can display up to 64 I O points up to 64 including words double words Click the I O No being I O monitored and click Edit Delete to delete it from the monitor The display size of the I O Monitor dialogue box can be changed by clicking al Both the ladder monitor in the Read Edit screen MTAA and the I O Monitor can be displayed by making their display sizes smaller to check the operation Display of ladder and I O monitor 15 16 Chapter 16 Daily and Periodic Inspection Chapter 16 Daily and Periodic Inspection In order to use the EH 150 functions in the most desirable condition and maintain the system to operate normally it is essential to conduct daily and periodic inspections 1 Daily inspection Verify the following items while the system is running Table 16 1 Items for daily inspection Item Inspection Normal status Main cause of error T method Power module display Visual check Power supply error etc Visual check i When lit Microcomputer malfunction memory error etc When flashing Battery error 2 zm CPU module display Visual check Lit running When unlit Microcomputer malfunction memory error etc When flashing Grammar error watchdog error etc The EH 150 indicates the error contents using the combination of lit flashing unlit status of ERR and RUN lamps For details refer to the Ch
268. a t to t 11 EA 1000 to 10FF Receiving data area 256 word 0000 Communication request flag Seal 0 executed a Transmission Transmission parameter setting 1 se 1 ee Transfer receiving data 1100 Processing area for receiving data The contents of the receiving data area are transferred to this area WL1100 stores the number of bytes of the receiving data converted to number of words 5 155 Program example M0002 M0003 WL003 H0000 WL004 H000C WL005 H0100 WL006 32 WL007 H000B WL008 H1000 WLO009 256 WLOOA 16 WLOOB H8030 WLOOC H0000 WLOOD H0004 WLOOE H0002 L0105 1 M0001 0 WLOOA 0 WLOOB H8030 WLOOC H8031 WLOOD H0004 WLOOE H0002 LO105 1 M0002 0 WL1100 WL1000 WL1100 WL1100 2 MOV WL1101 WL1001 WL1100 M0003 0 L0100 C4 M0000 ORE Riis L0101 a RECV 0 WX0000 WL0000 L0100 J M0000 0 L0102 M000 0 5 156 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 00001 0002 00003 00004 00005 SET 00006 00007 00008 No time out Transmission area head designati Transmission area size Receiving area head designation Receivingarea size Receivingdata length Start code designation End code designation Transmission speed 4 800 bits s Transmission code 7 bit even parity 1 stop bit Receivingdata length Start code designation End code designation Transmi
269. a2 Result 15 i eda F2 Fi Unmatched number of characters 1 0 0 Unmatched character string 0 1 0 Matched character string 0 0 1 e The character string that begins from the head T O specified by argument s and the character string that begins from the head TO specified by argument s 1 are compared and the result is stored in s 2 e The character strings to be compared end before a NULL H00 e The numbers of characters in the strings are compared first If the numbers do not match bit 2 is set to 1 If the numbers of characters match the strings themselves are compared If they do not match bit 1 is set to 1 If both the numbers of characters and strings match bit 0 is set to 1 e Use the ADRIO command to set the actual addresses in the head I Os of s and s 1 e If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 213 Cautionary notes Chapter 5 Command Specifications e The ADRIO command should be used to set the actual addresses in s and s 1 If not DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by them overlap DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by s and s 1 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example
270. address R L M of the bit head I O number that is used as the table into the data log management table 7 using the ADRIO command 2 The table consists of 2 through 4 and the size is 3 bits Make sure the maximum value for the bit I O number is not exceeded If the maximum value is exceeded HOOOA will be set to the error code in the data logging management table 2 EXECUTE flag 1 When the EXECUTE flag rises 0 1 the system waits for the start of log data clear 2 Tf the execution ready state is achieved normally the RUN flag 3 becomes 1 If there is an error the RUN flag 3 becomes 0 3 RUN flag 1 When the FUN 212 detects the rise of the EXECUTE flag 2 it checks if execution is allowed and sets the result 1 Check result is normal Log data clear is started 0 Check result is abnormal Log data clear is not performed The EXECUTE flag 2 becomes 0 and the cause of error is set to the FUN 212 log data clear error code 2 When the clear is completed both the RUN flag and EXECUTE flag 2 become 0 If the FUN 212 detects the fall of the EXECUTE flag 2 while the RUN flag is 1 data is being cleared the RUN flag will become 0 when the clear is completed and the log data clear will end Gal i zZ N o on 4 ABNORMAL COMPLETION flag This flag indicates whether or not the FUN 212 log data clear has been executed normally 1 Abnormal completion The cause of error is set to the FUN 2
271. address of the header number using of the bit internal output the ADRIO command so the last suffix of the bit internal output is not exceeded yyyy 1 Sampling time TZ When 1 to 200 x 20 ms e Set a multiple of the minimum 12 analog T O is installed in a set value basic base or extended base e The minimum set value is the value set to the number of loops 3 yyyy 2 Proportional gain KP 1 000 to 1 000 Corresponds to 10 00 to 10 00 13 yyyy 3 Integral content Ti TZ 1 to 32 767 Value is set to Ti Sampling time x 14 20 ms yyyy 4 Derivative constant TD TZ 1 to 32 767 Value is set to Ti Sampling time x 15 20 ms yyyy 5 Derivative delay constant 1 to 32 767 Value is set to Ti Sampling time x 16 Tn TZ 20 ms yyyy 6 Output upper limit value 32 767 to 32 767 The following condition must be 17 UL met yyyy 7 Output low limit value LL 32 767 to 32 767 LL lt INIT lt UL 18 yyyy 8 Initial value INIT 32 767 to 32 767 19 yyyy 9 Set value I O number Set the actual address of the 20 Write word number of the I O for which the set value is set yyyy A Measured Value I O Set the actual address of the 21 number Write word number of the T O for which the measured value is set yyyy B Output value I O Number Set the actual address of the 22 Write word number of the I O that outputs the PID calculation results yyyy C Set value bit pattern Determine the method that is 23 Write used to convert the set v
272. adjustment request Changes the digit for seconds in RTC to 0 R7FB Calendar clock set data error This turns on when the set data has an error e Current value display area Current time of the clock is always displayed all in BCD data e Read value set value area Value read from the clock is displayed or set value is stored all in BCD data TO number WRFOIB Displays or stores 4 digit year WRFOIC Month day Displays or stores month and day data WRFOID _ Day of the week Displays or stores day of the week data WRFOIE Displays or stores hour 24 hour format data WRFOIF Displays or stores seconds data Note 1 Day of the week data is as follows 3 upper digits are always 000 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday Note 2 Upper 2 digits of seconds data is always 00 11 1 Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function 11 2 Operation using task codes The following can be performed with the clock setting and reading task codes e Read clock data e Set clock data e Clock data 30 seconds adjustment Refer to the task code list Appendix 3 for more detail on task codes Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function 11 2 Memory Board Function The EH CPU308 3 16 448 have the program transfer function for transferring and comparing programs between the CPU and either the EH MEMP or EH MEMD memory board and the data logging function via
273. ail fixing brackets lc al from both sides The product may go out of place if not secured with the fixing brackets Removing the unit from the DIN rail 1 While lowering the DIN rail fixing mounting lever toward the bottom raise the base upward to remove 2 2 Loading the Module 1 Installing 1 Hook the claw at the lower section of the module to the hole in the base 2 Press in the upper side of the module until it clicks Note 1 After loading the module check to make sure it does not come out Note 2 Load the power module at the leftmost side of the base unit Note 3 Load the CPU module and I O controller to the left of the power module 2 Removing 3 1 1 Push in the lock button N 2 With the lock button pushed in pull the top of the module toward the front 3 Raise it toward the top and pull it out Note For the power module pull it out while pushing down the two lock buttons 9 3 Wiring 1 Separation of the power system Chapter 9 PLC Installation Loading Wiring For the power supply there is power for the EH 150 PLC unit power for the I O signals power for general equipment These power supplies should be wired from separate systems as much as possible When these power supplies are supplied from one main power source separate the wiring with a transformer or similar
274. al voltage e Input power supply type e Terminal block connector connection e Cable disconnection e Replace the module Input LED is lit Input is not read NO Check the input module e Check input monitor e Connection between input module and base e T O assignment e Program e Input signal voltage Input LED is not lit Input is read NO LED failure LED replace may not be performed by the user so a repair request must be submitted False input e Check input signal source e Replace input module e Check input program e Check connection between input module and base e Malfunction due to noise 14 10 Data can not be input Is there a wiring error disconnection or loose screw on the terminal block Is input detected during the voltage check between the common of the input module and the bit Are there any errors in the connector on the basic or extension base side Is there any damages to the base connector YES Are there any abnormals in the internal connector of the terminal block YES Replace the corresponding module T O assignment error is generated but data is read we Are the program and T O assignment correct Are there any errors in the connector on the basic or extension base side Replace the module 14 11 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting J Perform
275. als Described in the area after the END of 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms or 40 ms command INTO every 10 ms every 5 ms INT1 every 20 ms every 10 ms INT2 every 40 ms every 20 ms INT3 every 40 ms Periodic scan Intervals shown in are for the EH CPU448 program Each execution cycle time becomes the overload error monitoring time If it is specified to continue during overload the operation is terminated in the middle 3 Subroutine This is a program called out by the CALL Described in the area after the END command command Subroutine program n O0to 99 fe 1 Scan operation Each program is executed in the order of the priority shown in Figure 8 2 Each program is executed while monitoring the execution time of each program area If the monitored time exceeds the prescribed time this causes an overload error and operation stops When continued operation has been specified operation continues The timing for scan execution is shown in Figure 8 2 System processing is performed at set periods every 5 ms followed by communication system processing The maximum execution time of communication system processing 1 equals the duration of time until the next periodic system processing is started If the communication system processing ends before the maximum execution time is up execution of scan processing is started upon completion of the communication system processing When the next periodic processing is pe
276. alue is not updated j red while the counter clear is on kK md k e The clear is performed under the conditions set Stine PE pocen mme immediately prior to the execution of the counter coil command Progress value of RCU16 TC16 e Example using word I O as the set value When RUN is commenced the set value is set to word I O Or designate the word I O for the set value to store in the power failure memory beforehand 5 48 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Up CTU n and down CTD n of up down counter UP DOWN COUNTER Item number Basic commands 30 31 Name Ladder format Condition code Processing time 1s Remark CTU ns R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpus Other than CTD n O DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Upper e e e e e case 13 4 19 35 12 5 13 1 CTU Command format Number of steps OUT CTU n s Condition OUT CTD n Usable I O xX Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL Constant Counter number O 0to 511 Decimal Set value 1 to 65 535 Decimal Function For the UP counter increments the progress value by 1 each time the rising edge of the startup condition is detected while it decrements the progress value by 1 for the DOWN counter The coil switches on when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set valu
277. alue to the 16 bit data in which the PID operation is performed See 1 below and use a value between H0001 and H0004 yyyy D_ Measured value bit pattern Determine the method that is 24 Write used to convert the data read from the measured value I O number 21 to the 16 bit data See the set value bit pattern 23 yyyy E Output value bit pattern e Write to the output value I O 25 Write number 22 after converting the results of the FUN 2 process or PID calculation according to the output value bit pattern 25 e Use a value between H0001 and H0004 in 2 depending on the type of output I O yyyy F PID calculation area Do not use this in user 26 JL Cannot be used by the programs because this is used yyyy 2F user by FUN 0 FUN 1 and FUN 2 processing 5 173 Chapter 5 Command Specifications m1 H0001 8 bit 16 bit Before conversion bis bia bi3 After conversion 0 be bs ba b3 b2 b I Move b through by to bj through b4 H0002 12 bit unsigned 16 bit Before conversion bis 3 bi bs b7 be bs b4 b3 After conversion 0 bs b7 be bs b4 b3 lt a bo through b are left as they are H0003 12 bit signed expand the sign to 16 bit Before conversion bis 3 bio bo bs b7 be bs b4
278. am is created using the following assignments In actual cases change the I O numbers and other items according to the application WM 100 to 10E TRNS 0 command Parameter area s to s 14 000 to 00B TRNS 0 command Communication control bit area t to t 11 WR 0000 to OOOF Transmission data area 16 word 0100 to O1FF Receiving data area 256 word M 0000 Communication request flag TRNS 0 executed 0001 Transmission parameter setting 1 0002 Transmission parameter setting 2 0003 Transfer receiving data WR 0200 to Processing area for receiving data The contents of the receiving data area are transferred to this area WRO0200 stores the number of bytes of the receiving data converted to number of words 5 148 Program example 00001 M0001 mH M0002 H WM103 H0000 WM104 H000A WM105 H0000 WM106 16 WM107 H000A WM108 H0100 WM109 256 WM10A H0000 WM10B H0000 WM10C H8046 WM10D H0004 WM10E H0000 R005 1 M0001 0 WM10A H0000 WM10B H8041 WM10C H8046 WM10D H0004 WM10E H0000 R005 1 M0002 0 M0000 a WR0200 WR0100 l WR0200 WR0200 2 MOV WR0201 WR0101 WR0200 M0003 0 00005 SET 00006 TRNS 0 WY0010 WM100 R000 00007 R002 M0000 0 00008 m Jv 5 149 00002 00003 00004 Chapter 5 Command Specifications No time out Transmission area head designati Transmission area size R
279. ample when grounding must be performed is shown 1 About installation CAUTION e Use this product in an environment as described in the catalog and this document If this product is used in an environment subject to high temperature high humidity excessive dust corrosive gases vibration or shock it may result in electric shock fire or malfunction e Perform installation according to this manual If installation is not performed adequately it may result in dropping malfunction or an operational error in the unit e Do not allow foreign objects such as wire chips to enter the unit They may become the cause of fire malfunction or failure 2 About wiring e Always perform grounding FE terminal If grounding is not performed there is a risk of electric shocks and malfunctions CAUTION e Connect power supply that meets rating If a power supply that does not meet rating is connected fire may be caused e The wiring operation should be performed by a qualified personnel If wiring is performed incorrectly it may result in fire damage or electric shock 3 Precautions when using the unit lt gt DANGER e Do not touch the terminals while the power is on There is risk of electric shock e Structure the emergency stop circuit interlock circuit etc outside the programmable controller hereinafter referred to as PLC Damage to the equipment or accidents may occur due to failure of
280. anagement table see Management table details For the error codes to be set see Error code details Cautionary notes If an error occurs an error code is set and DER becomes equal to 1 If this happens the log data write will not be Fi performed If this command is executed when the initialization result in the data logging management table corresponding to the FUN 210 initial setting for data logging is execution not allowed an error will occur An error will occur if the argument S exceeds the maximum value for the I O number Do not set a startup condition for this command Execute it during normal scans only An error will occur if the dip switch setting on the memory board specifies write prohibited or any mode other than the data logging mode If the memory board is currently in use for other processing DER becomes equal to 0 and R7F7 becomes equal to 1 If this happens the processing will not be performed The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 279 Program example Chapter 5 Command Specifications The following shows a sample program that writes into the logging area a total of 128 words including WR200 through WR23F 64 words and WR300 through WR33F 64 words at intervals of 10 minutes after ON of X00000 the start bit together with date data year month day hour minute second and sequence number 1 Assigning internal outputs The sample program is
281. and 1 second timers can be specified when the timer counter number is H0000 to HOOFF 0 to 255 e Address H0000 must be fixed to H0000 f1 Set value number 1 I O code I O code 1 O number f2 Set value number 1 I O number Constant H000000 to HOOFFFF g1 Set value number 2 I O code WX H000000 to H004FF9 g2 Set value number 2 I O number WY H000000 to H004FF9 WR H000000 to H001FFF 1 Response WL H000000 to H0003FF H001000 to H0013FF a H28 H000000 to H0003FF a Response task code HOO when executed normally 1 The WR area will vary depending on the CPU type EH CPU104 to WRFFF EH CPU308 to WR43FF EH CPU448 to WRC3FF EH CPU208 to WR1FFF EH CPU3 16 to WR57FF Modifies the timer counter set value within the ladder program While the CPU is running the set values are modified without stopping the scan when the normal scan END command is executed Note When an address other than H0000 is designated the settings will be modified if an error with the return code H04 address error or HOF program not logical occurs or if the timer is written to the designated address in the user program area so take caution A 37 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Program read with address designation Classification Function Reads the designated number of program steps starting with the designated address Execution condition CPU status Request H31 a Dummy must be fixed to H00
282. and I O cables separated e Are there any foreign substances in the connector of each module a Be sure to replace the modules with the power supply turned off b When returning the module for repair please notify us of the malfunctioning effects in as much detail as possible including error codes malfunctioning output bit number will not turn on or off etc c The tools and devices necessary for troubleshooting are roughly as follows Phillips flathead drivers digital MultiMate tester oscilloscope necessary depending on the case etc 14 5 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting 14 3 Procedures to Solve Abnormals The processing flow when a malfunction has occurred is as follows Malfunction generation e Bring the system to a safe condition Record the status a Problem Analysis Presumption Major problems Verification points Typical causes of the problem PLC will not start Power LED Power supply abnormal power shut off power CPU error code supply capacity shortage module connector error serious CPU failure Will not operate CPU error code T O assignment abnormal incorrect parameter will not RUN CPU LED settings incorrect user program syntax error drive Internal output of error conditions not met write occupied status Operation stopped er LED CPU LED Power supply abnormal expansion power supply RUN stopped CPU error code abnormal shut off CPU abnormal memory abnor
283. and format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW N d sl lt s2 s is a word 4 19 e 45 e 86 amp K s is a double word 6 x Bit Word Double word a R TD SS WR DR F Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 8 RCU CT d Substitution destination OJO s1 Comparand oljojolololololloO s2 Relational number oOololoiliololojlolo Function e Substitutes 1 when s1 is less than or equal to s2 and otherwise 0 into d assuming s1 and s2 as binary data Cautionary notes e The combinations of d sl and s2 are as follows Program example Y00001 WL3FF lt WL13FF H Y00001 WL3FF lt WL13FF Program description e When WL3FF lt WL13FF 1 is set in Y00001 Otherwise Y00001 is reset to 0 5 81 p 2 nN A I n N Chapter 5 Command Specifications Signed lt Relational expression SIGNED lt RELATIONAL EXPRESSION Item number Arithmeticcommands 22 Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH CPU3 N d sl S lt s2 ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e Command format Number of steps d sl S lt s2 Usable I O Constant d Substitution destination Function Substitutes 1 when s1 is less than or equal
284. ange the system sets the following system set values in special internal outputs and switches the interface If user set values other than specified below are set the system will not accept those settings Be sure to verify the safety of the unit to be connected before the setting is changed 10 1 Mode SW Chapter 10 Communication Specifications Table 10 2 General port settings of port 1 WRF036 Contents of setting 2 5 User set value System set value Interface Control procedure H0003 H0002 RS 232C H0005 H0004 RS 422 H0009 2 Dedicated port mode setup H0008 When a modem is used perform the following setup RS 485 Table 10 3 Modem settings of port 1 Non procedure use TRNS 0 and RECV 0 commands Mode SW WRF037 Contents of setting 2 5 User set System set value Value displayed Interface Control procedure value after power restart OFF OFF H8000 H0000 H0000 RS 232C_ Transmission control procedure 1 HC000 H4000 H4000 Transmission control procedure 2 3 Dedicated port setup If the port 1 is used as a dedicated port perform the following setup By performing this setup communication via RS 232C RS 422 and RS 485 interfaces as well as communication via transmission control procedures 1 and 2 1 1 and 1 N dedicated port communication with station number can be performed Any change to the setting of the de
285. ange flag are turned on 4 No process will be performed even if FUN 1 is executed because there was an error in the PID related table during FUN 0 processing 5 6 FUN 1 processing will be started because the FUN 0 processing ended normally 7 FUN2 will not perform PID calculations because the execution flag is off 8 9 FUN 1 will detect turning on of the execution flag and will check the PID constant Since it is normal the PID constant will be calculated and the PIDRUN flag will be turned on The PID calculation of FUN 2 will not be performed on the first scan so it will start with 11 FUN 2 FUN 2 will turn the PID calculation in progress flag before calculating the PID 12 FUN 1 will turn off the PID calculation in progress flag 14 FUN 1 checks the PID constant when the PID constant change flag is turned on Since it is normal the PID constant OK flag is turned on and the PID constant will be changed Since PID calculations are not performed in FUN 2 PID calculations will be performed from 16 FUN 2 according to the PID constant after it has been changed When the PID constant change flag was turned on 18 FUN 1 checked the PID constant An error was detected so the PID constant OK flag is turned off The PID constant flag will not be changed FUN 0 will be ignored when re executed during PID operation Since 21 FUN 1 detected turning off of the execution flag the PIDRUN flag will be turned off and the output will be set to 0 Since 2
286. apter 13 that shows the error code list 2 If the power supply for the basic module is left turned off without replacing the battery over one week after the ERR lamp has flashed the memory contents may be destroyed Exercise caution when the system power is turned off for a long period of time since this error might not be detected and the memory contents may have already been destroyed 2 Periodic inspection Turn off the power for the external I O ladder and check the following items once every six months Table 16 2 Items for periodic inspection Programming to Check operation of All switches and display lamps work CPU programming device normally Power supply Check for voltage fluctuations 85 to 264 V AC TO module Output relay life Electrical life 200 000 times Refer to the relay contact Mechanical life 10 million times life curve Chapter 9 External power voltage Within the specification for each TO Refer to the I O module module specifications Chapter 4 Battery Check voltage life ERR lamp flashes Lithium battery Within 2 years after replacement Installation and All modules are securely No defects connecting areas fixed Tighten All connectors fit snugly Check insertion All screws are tight Tighten All cables are normal Visual check Ambient environment Temperature 0 to 55 C Visual check Humidity 20 to 90 RH no condensation Other No dust foreign matter vibration Spare parts Check number of parts sto
287. apter 5 Command Specifications Management table details a Explanation of data logging management table 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 Data logging management table si el S 1 Initialization result 3 s 2 4 S 3 Initialization specifications 5 s 4 6 S 5 Log clear parameter I O number 7 Data logging management table Set in the FUN 210 S the word head I O number used as the data logging management table 2 The data logging management table consists of 2 through 7 and the size is 6 words Make sure the maximum value for the word head I O number is not exceeded If the maximum value is exceeded H0002 will be set to the error code Error code Read Sets the error code generated in the FUN 210 process Initialization result Read Common area Sets the initialization result and whether or not execution is allowed 15 8 7 0 a b0 to b3 Whether or not re initialization is allowed is set 0 Allowed Other than 0 Not allowed b b4 to b7 Whether or not execution of the FUN 211 Log Data Write is allowed is set 0 Not allowed Other than 0 Allowed c b8 to b11 Whether or not execution of the FUN 212 Log Data Clear is allowed is set 0 Not allowed Other than 0 Allowed d b12 to b15 Whether or not execution of the FUN 213 Log Data Read is allowed is set 0 Not allowed Other than 0 Allowed If recovery is not possible by use of commands bO to b3 will become other than 0 and b4 to b15 will
288. ation by changing the I O value since the set values are updated during each scan Cautionary notes The counter can be used up to 512 points No 0 to 511 However the first 256 points No 0 to 255 will use the same area as the timer The timer numbers and counter numbers can not overlap While the counter clear CL n is on the rise of startup condition is ignored Since the startup condition of the counter is edge detection the condition can not be detected during the first scan after the operation is started If the set value is set to 0 it is regarded as a coil that is always on and controlled by the CL n Program example X00006 RCU16 3 LD X00006 eRe OUT RCU16 3 a LD X00007 I O OUT CL16 RCU16 LD RCU16 OUT R106 An example of a word T O being used as the set value for the ladder shown above Soga LD R7E3 WR0016 3 X00006 m WR0016 E x00006 X00007 OUT RCU16 WR0016 LD X00007 RCU OUT CLI16 LD RCU16 OUT R106 5 47 7 c oO co H Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program description O Time chart 1 The progress value count is updated at the X00006 Z a 3 ignora rising edge oH ps 2 When set value progress value the counter coil 2 G X00006 RCU16 turns on for one scan and the progress value is 5 cleared s CLI6 3 When counter clear CL16 is turned on the progress isin value is cleared The progress v
289. ation by controlling handshaking when the control type is H001 or H003 The ranges that can be specified for the word location and size are different for each module Refer to the applicable module manual e When performing forced read or forced write operation The word location range will be 00h to 3Dh The size range will be 0001h to 003Eh 5 264 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Cautionary notes When an error is generated an error code is set DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed If the specified size is 0 the process will end normally with performing anything Execute using only normal scan without entering any startup conditions For more information on the error codes that can be set see the Error Code Details Program example The following is an example of a program that sets the transmission information of the Ethernet module EH ETH by writing to the control area Another example of a program that reads the communication status and error information of the Ethernet module EH ETH by reading the status area is also shown 1 EH ETH installation The EH ETH is installed in the 0 slot of the basic base CPU module i Therefore the I O assignment of the EH ETH will be WxX0000 WY0001 2 Internal output assignments A sample program will be created using the assignments shown below Change the I O number etc according to the application in an actual usage Usage FUN 2
290. ations Forced cancel of occupancy Classification CPU control Function Forces the cancel of CPU occupancy This command is used in situations such as when another programming device has gone down due to an error while occupying the user memory of the CPU function selection H00 When connecting the host to the CPU and occupying it for the first time use function selection H01 so the local occupancy status is canceled forcibly This task code can also be executed when the CPU is not occupied Execution condition CPU status READ occupancy Occupancy WRITE occupancy Not occupied Request a Function selection subcommand H17 a 1 H00 Forced cancel of all occupancy 2 HO1 Forced cancel of local station occupancy Response Response task code H00 when executed normally a For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter With forced cancel if there are modification in the parameter area the same processing as parameter modification completion processing is performed refer to the task code H27 as well as the canceling of memory occupancy 1 Forced cancel of all occupancy subcommand H00 All occupancy is canceled unconditionally so when this command has been executed the peripheral that is reading the user memory for example will not be able to perform reading Therefore verify the registered peripherals by m
291. atus flag is set to 1 when one of the k 1 and m errors is generated in Error detail information k 1 and m generate error when an error is detected while the peripheral device is communicating with the CPU of other station 2 Number of times transmission errors is a cumulative total of the number of k or error occurrences 13 9 Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs 13 10 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Chapter 14 Troubleshooting 14 1 Error Indication and Countermeasure Procedures The indication locations of errors detected by individual equipment in the EH 150 system are shown in Figure 14 1 When errors occur remedy the errors using the error code list oo f 1 O RUN Q ERR Error lamp Instruction language programmer Portable diagramming programmer LADDER EDITOR m L E error indication Programmer error indication Figure 14 1 Error indication of EH 150 Error indication a CPU module error indication The CPU module will perform self diagnostic tests using the microcomputer and when there is an error the contents are indicated in the combination of the ERR and RUN lamps located in the front of the CPU module being lit flashing unlit For Chapter 12 error codes and countermeasures refer to the self diagnosis error code list b Programmer error indication Error codes encountered during program device operation such as duplicate definition error
292. ays segregate power line I O signal and power supply cable Expansion unit When a ground bar is used Use a cable of about 14 mnt 0 021 in Class D grounding J EH CPU104 cannot be used T O signal cable Use cable 0 75 mn 0 0011 in or less Leave a distance of 200 mm 7 87 in or more from the power line and do not have it running next to the power cable Metal plate Implement class D grounding Outer hull cabinet Implement class D grounding Figure 9 7 Example of wiring 9 8 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 10 1 Features The EH 150 has two communication ports Port 1 can be used as a dedicated port or it can be switched to a general purpose port to perform communication using the user program Also it comes with a modem control function not supported by the EH CPU104 which allows communication from a distant location by setting up a modem in Port 1 With the EH CPU448 1 N communication using a task code with station number and communication by the transmission control procedure 2 can be performed at the dedicated port of the port 1 Port 2 can be used as a dedicated port 10 1 1 Communication port functions Table 10 1 Communication port specifications P nnection T or Interface annen Communication protocol Connected device specification mode Transmission control procedur
293. b 9 pin The temperature gets high female when connected Exercise caution when handling the connector 1 Prior to setting the DIP switches remove the module When the setting of the DIP switches is complete paste the attached protective sheet Explanation of LED display Front diagram Display Description of display RDY Indicates the hardware abnormality of this module Indicates the communicating status with the slave RDY RUN STATUS Indicates an error on the network ERR TOKEN TOKEN Always lit STATUS Indicates a hardware abnormality parameter abnormality and other status of this module 4 54 General specifications Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Storage ambient temperature 10 to 75 C Operating ambient humidity 20 to 90 RH no condensation storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation Chapter 4 System Equipment 5 V DC 600 mA Cooling method Natural air cooling Functional specifications Item Specification No of installed units 2 units CPU can only be installed in slots 0 to 2 No of supported slave units Maximum of 124 units However a repeater is required to connect 32 or more units No of output words 256 words No of input words 256 words I O assignment LINK N Band rate Segment length Self diagnostics 9 6 kbps 19 2 kbps 45 45 kbps 93 75 kbps 187 5 kbps 500 kbps 1 500 kbps 3 Mbps 6 Mbps 12 Mbps System ROM RAM check
294. be set except for the end code ODH The slave station number is set in this sample program 4 Reception result on the master station side When the transmissions between slave stations 1 to 3 have completed successfully the corresponding data are set in the WL area of the master station as shown below In this sample program the slave stations set their own station number as part of the data WLO0001 0001H The data received from slave station 1 WL0002 0002H The data received from slave station 2 WL0003 0003H The data received from slave station 3 10 9 5 Program Chapter 10 Communication Specifications a Program on the master station side with three slave stations R7E3 WRF036 H9 WR4001 3 R7E3 03 HO 04 HA 05 HO 06 32 07 HA 08 H100 09 32 0A HO 0B H8002 0C H800D 0D H6 0E H6 TRANS 0 WY10 WM100 RO WLO WR4000 WR102 WR4001 lt WR4000 0 WR4000 WR4000 WR4000 1 WRO 3 WRI H200 OR WR4000 WR2 HD00 R100 1 R100 TD63 DIFI RO 1 4 R5 1 R100 0 WY10 WY10 1 10 10 00001 General purpose port Set for RS 485 The number of slave stations is set as 3 00002 Time out None Transmission area head specification WRO Transmission area size 32 word Reception area head specification WR100 Reception area size 32 word Reception data length Not specified Starts code 02H End code 0DH Transmission speed 19
295. bit 0 Positive 1 Negative e sl s2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal Cautionary notes Number of steps Double word LD AND s1S lt s2 OR s1S lt s2 Program example DR0000 R008 LD DR0000 S lt DR0002 H S lt o OUT R008 DR0002 Program description e When DR0000 lt DR0002 R008 turns on signed 5 59 Item number Arithmeticcommands 1 Name Chapter 5 Command Specifications Substitution statement ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Other than EH CPU448 EH CPU3 left ERR SD Vv Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Number of steps See following table Double word Usable I O DR DX DY Constant Substitution destination Substitution source Index value Function Substitutes the content of s into d It is possible to use array variables for d and s When d is a word the constant is 0 to 65 535 or 32 768 to 32 767 decimal H0000 to HFFFF or H8000 to H7FFF hexadecimal When d is a double word the constant is 0 to 4 294 967 295 or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H00000000 to HFFFFFFFF or H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF Cautionary notes e When using an array variable DER is set to 1 if the
296. ble I O WDT MS WY WL TMR CU RCU CT P cs g LS Constant Substitution destination Dividend Divisor Function Divides s1 by s2 as BCD data and substitutes the quotient into d in BCD The remainder is set in the special internal output WRFO16 DRFO16 in the case of double word The DER flag is 1 if s1 or s2 is an invalid BCD data or when s2 is 0 In this case the operation is not performed If both sl and s2 are valid BCD data and s2 is not 0 the operation is performed Example WR0051 WRO0049 B WRO050 WROOSI WRFO16 WR0050 WR0049 e When sl s2 are words 0000 to 9999 BCD e When sl s2 are double words 00000000 to 99999999 BCD Cautionary notes e The combinations of d sl and s2 are as follows ee Double word Double word Double word Program example LD X00000 X00000 WR0051 WRO0049 B WRO050 WR0051 WRO0049 B WRO050 Program description e When input X00000 turns on the value in WR0049 is divided by the value in WR0050 then substituted into WR0051 as BCD data The remainder is substituted into WRFO16 as BCD data 5 70 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 11 Name Signed binary division SIGNED BINARY DIVISION Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Ladder format Processing time us Remark EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than left E
297. cates that the AC power is supplied E Lock button This is used when removing the power module from the base a unit 31 Frontcover cover This is used when wiring 0 SsiY is used when wiring Front cover set screw This is used to fix the front cover When fixing is necessary use M3 x 6 mm 0 24 in set screws Power terminal block This is used when power is supplied externally for 24 V output wiring and for the grounding wiring 4 7 Operation explanation POWER lamp Lock button Front cover Front cover set screws Power terminal block Chapter 4 System Equipment Detailed explanation Remarks Converts power supplied externally into the power 5 V DC that can be used inside the EH 150 Also it prepares power 24 V DC for driving relays etc 100 V to 240 V AC can be used for the external supply voltage When using the 24 V DC after conversion connect it externally The operating status can be confirmed with the POWER lamp on the front of the module Refer to the specification table for the types of protective functions When lit Indicates that AC power is on supply The lamp is green When unlit Indicates that AC power is not turned on or the DC power output is shorted When flashing Indicates that the power has exceeded the rated output It is used to remove the power module from the base unit Hold this button down while releasing the module from the unit The module loaded to t
298. cates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When s 1 and s 2 exceed the maximum value for the I O number DER is equal to 1 and operation will not be performed Program example X00105 DIF5 LD X00105 DR0030 H00010000 AND DIF5 e FUN 15 WR0030 DR0030 H00010000 FUN 15 WR0030 Program description e Set data in DR0030 WR0030 WR0031 e TAN operation is performs at the leading edge of X00105 and the result is set in WR0032 as a binary value Execution results WR0032 H002D WR0031 H0001 WR0030 H0000 5 193 Chapter 5 Command Specifications iem n mber Baneeninande tt Name Conversion from 16 bit unsigned binary to decimal ASCII data BINARY TO DECIMAL ASCII Ladder format Condition code Processing time us EH CPU448 EH CPU3 x ene FUN 30 s DER ERR sp v c BINDA 9 ise tee dices clever eee 3 FUN 30 s BINDA s Wwa O Double word word TD Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Argument conversion s uses up to s 3 o Function 16 bit unsigned binary data Decimal ASCII data s 0 to 65535 10 ASCH code in the 10 place 15 87 The 16 bit unsigned binary data specified by argument s is converted to 5 digit decimal ASCII code and the result is stored ins 1tos 3 Leading zeros of the conversion result are suppressed and these
299. ceceecessseesseseeseescesceeceecsecsesseseeeseecaeeeeesseseeseeaeeaes 14 1 14 2 Checklist when Abnorinal Occur siin Ae ee ae HE ee eee 14 5 14 3 Proc dures to Solve Abnormal iiic c cccsseseasicaasatesseeceececescecians cicssetepescvaves EAE E E A A EEE E a 14 6 Chapter 15 Operation Examples 15 1 to 15 16 Chapter 1 Features Chapter 1 Features 1 Compact and space saving The EH 150 has realized a compact size 372 5 mm W x 100 mm H x 109 mm D with 1 024 I Os The standard I O module accommodates both a terminal block and LED display as standard the same as our previous series of programmable controllers It can also be installed on a DIN rail Each module is enclosed in a capsule type case for easier handling By introducing a curved line on the front cover the system can be neatly consolidated into an ultra high tech image 2 communication ports provided as standard The EH 150 comes standard with 2 communication ports serial port 1 and serial port 2 supported by the same type communication method as that for connecting a programming device personal computer The display and programming device sold in the market that have been developed for the H series can both be used simultaneously to seamlessly construct a system The setting for the port 1 can be changed which allows it to function as a general purpose port that can be controlled by the user program A communication program can be created for the specific device connect
300. cess omman air i Ladder symbol ae Process descriptions I O types used time u s Remarks bealenn so v o EH 150 BSET d n Bit set 13 I ts 1 to bit n n 0 15 WX BRES d n Bit reset WY WR WL 7 WM TC 0 Constant Sets 0 to bit n Double word BTS d n Bit test DM n 0 31 WX WY WR WL WM TC Constant SHR d n Shift right Upper case W y Lower gt case DW SHL d n Shift left Constant Double word Classification Command Bit operations Shift rotate ROR d n Rotate right Upper case W Lower case DW ROL d n Rotate left Constant 7 C R7FO SD R7F2 LSR d n Logical shift right ifts right by n bits LSL d n Logical shift left Shifts left by n bits 3 Q E 3 Z E g2 5 9 Ladder symbol tem number Command Shift rotate 10 BSR d n BCD shift right 11 BSL d n BCD shift left 12 WSHR d n right WBSR d n shift right s n i s n d2 n Processing time when n 1 1 14 15 1 1 5 a DB f S Negation Two s complement Sign 3 Command name Batch shift Batch BCD 3 WSHL d n Batch shift left WBSL d n Batch BCD shift left Chapter 5 Command Specifications Process descriptions I O types used 0 gt
301. ch channel A B during 2 phase counting input points 3 45 to 125 when up 45 to 125 when down channels Output specifications Minimum load current 1 mA Output delay ON gt OFF 1 ms or less time OFF gt ON 1 ms or less Voltage drop when ON Number of external output points 4 points module 2 points module External terminal of output destination may be specified for each channel Polarity common within the module 4 40 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 18 Single Axis Pulse Positioning Module Name and function of each part EH POS 1 Lock button Weight Approx 0 18 kg 0 4 Ib Dimensions mm in 2 Reset switch 95 3 74 lt 3 Positioner connector 4 T O connector 5 Dip switches Name Function Remarks 1 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the fixation can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws re 100 3 94 Resets the unit when the module is malfunctioning Used to connect the positioner Pulse output external control input connector Connector on cable Sumitomo 3M 20 pin Solder type 10120 3000VE Case 10320 52F0 008 or equivalent Perform initialization settings for the pulse Note f output method CW CWW CK Direction Setting dip switches 5 and 6 to ON itchi d t loei itive nevati causes the external RUN input to swite ing and outp
302. code Processing time us Remark MONE ig SMES R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu44s EH cpus Other than MCRn MCR n ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Upper O H e e case MCS Command format Number of s 0 3 lt 3 05 lt Lower MCS n Condition case MCR n MCS n MCR n TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Constant O 0 to 49 Decimal Function e Controls the input to the ladder sandwiched by the master control set MCS n and reset MCR n An AND operation is performed with respect to each input and MCS e The master control can be used up to eight layers indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e Always use the master control MCS and MCR in pairs Program example X00000 LD MCS1 X00001 Y00100 LD X00001 OUT Y00100 MCR1 X00000 lt Up to eight layers are allowed Program description xon I LI ee X00001 ET U 001007 lt F e r When input X00000 is on the ladders surrounded by MCS and MCR obeys input X00001 and output Y00100 turns on off When input X00000 is off the ladders surrounded by MCS and MCR are independent of input X00001 and output Y00100 turns off 5 28 Chapter 5 Command Specifications
303. content of the nth bit from the least significant bit is set in C R7FO Before execution J B2 B1 C R7F0 After execution F Most significant bit MSB Least significant bit LSB Ifd is a word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 15 of the lower 4 bits b3 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 15 decimal If d is a double word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 31 of the lower 5 bits b4 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 31 decimal Cautionary notes e Ifnis equal to 0 the rotation is not performed The previous state is retained in C Program example R000 DIFO LD R000 1 ROR WR0000 1 AND DIFO ROR WR0000 1 Program description e When R000 rises WR0000 is shifted to the right by one bit At this time the value of the least significant bit b0 is set in R7FO and the value of R7FO immediately prior to the is set in the most significant bit b15 5 90 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 7 Name Rotate left ROTATE LEFT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 la ROL d n DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max
304. cuit number H0000 c Head address H0000 d Number of steps H0000 A 40 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications User memory H33 R R Head address the final circuit steps Final circuit Number of steps Assume the final circuit number as 100 H64 the head address as H1C80 and the number of steps as 10 HOA gt Circuit number 1 i Circuit number of Number of Request pa Response Circuit number Head address Number of steps A 41 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Function Reads the assigned memory capacity data Execution condition CPU status READ occupancy Occupancy WRITE occupancy status Response a H Response task code H00 when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter Parameter area memory capacity HO0000280 fixed HI FLOW user program memory capacity 8 digit hexadecimal HI LADDER use program memory capacity 8 digit hexadecimal EH 150 does not support HI FLOW A 42 Response Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Parameter area memory capacity HI FLOW user HI LADDER user memory capacity memory capacity Memory assignment table Parameter area memory capacity HI FLOW user memory capacity HI LADDER user
305. d 5 257 FUN 128 s Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 64 Name Extended X Y area read write command XY AREA READ WRITE COMMAND Ladder format Condition code Processing time us EH CPU448 EH CPU3 at one FUN 200 s DER ERR sp v c XYRIW 9 ee OO 3 FUN 200 s XYR W s Word Double word word TD SS Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT Header of parameter s uses up to s 7 M al Function This command reads and writes data between the CPU and a module using the extended X and Y areas The maximum read and write data sizes are determined by the number of module s I O assignment points For details on using this command refer to the applicable module manual By specifying the control type the read write method by performing or not performing handshaking with the module can be selected However in order to use the read write method by performing handshaking the module side must support handshaking For more details refer to the applicable module manual s sets the head I O number of the parameter area that sets various data read write parameters The values displayed inside parenthesis show the display when LADDER EDITOR is used Extended X area WR WL and WM areas on Z N So Oo O Extended Y area Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 258 Description of S parameter area
306. d word TD O Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL Other TMR CU RCU CT ee eee fim sea of HOO Constant gt Argument middle middle loo and H 30 to s 2 Argument lower H39 s uses up to s 3 Function Unsigned decimal ASCII data 16 bit binary data s 3 0 to 65535 10 ASCH code in the 10 place The 5 digit unsigned decimal ASCII data specified by arguments s upper s 1 middle and s 2 lower is converted to 16 bit binary data and the result is stored in s 3 Higher digit s H00 and H20 NULL and space are processed as H30 0 Leading zero suppressed digit If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used If the 5 digit ASCII code stored in s to s 2 is other than H30 to H39 0 to 9 DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed However this does not apply to HOO and H20 NULL and space of leading zero suppressed digits Ifs 1 tos 3 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If a data value is 65 536 or higher DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example X00306 DIF36 LD X00306 WR0050 H3132 AND DIF36 WR0051 H3334 WR0052 H3500 WR0050 H3132 FUN 36 WR0050 WR0051 H3334 WR0052 H3500 FUN 36 WR0050 Program description e The ASCII data 1 2 3
307. d the same numbers can be used for the timer and counter numbers e This timer is updated when the timer command is executed Therefore note that if a program that does not scan the timer command execution section using the JMP command or master control MCS after the timer is activated the time may not turn on correctly The timer does not turn on correctly when the time that does not scan the timer command execution section exceeds the time calculated by multiplying the time base by 65 535 Note that the previous progress value is also retained until the timer command is executed Program example X00000 TM10 LD X00000 O 0 01s 12345 OUT TM10 0 01s 12345 LD TM10 TM10 R100 OUT R100 LD R7E3 WR0010 12345 LD X00000 OUT TM10 0 01s WR0010 LD TM10 OUT R100 Program example Fa 1 When input X00000 turns on TM progress value is updated 2 When input X00000 turns off the TM10 also turns off and the progress value is cleared 3 TM10 turns on when progress value 2 set value 4 While X00000 is on the progress value increases but will not increase exceeding 65 535 e Example using word I O as the set value When RUN is commenced the set value is set to word I O Or designate the word I O for the set value to store in the ower failure memory beforehand Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 36 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item n
308. d but JMP 1 will not be executed Therefore the content of WR0000 will decrement by one during each scan e When R100 is off JMP 0 will not be executed but JMP 1 will be executed Therefore the content of WR0000 will increment by one during each scan 5 133 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Other than left EH CPU448 EH CPU3 FOR n s Command format Number of steps m i l R TD SS WR DR Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU WM DM RCU CT same e E E 0 oes aim a o ce ee Function Jumps from the NEXT n of the same code number to this command If the number of times repeated s is greater than 0 the command following the FOR n s is executed If the number of times repeated s is equal to 0 it jumps to the command following the NEXT n Use FOR n s and NEXT n in pairs Also place the NEXT n after FOR n The FOR n s may not be used multiple times Use the FOR n s and NEXT n in the same program area It is not allowed to include FOR n s in the normal scan and NEXT n in the subroutine area The FOR n s to NEXT n nesting can be made up to 5 levels Cautionary notes e This command is checked prior to execution and when there is an error the following error code is set in the special internal output WRFOO1 Also the CPU error code 34 is set to special internal output WRFO00
309. d by the user and the results are output as an output signal Also operation results and information during the process can be retained in the internal output area After power is supplied to the main module and system begins to run the operation described above is performed continuously until the power is shut off or the system stops running The information retained internally can be extracted by a device connected externally or can be set in other information Also this information is initialized at the time the system begins running but it can also be retained according to user settings Operating status can be confirmed with the LED display of the CPU module or I O module or with an external device that is connected Setting and display The following have been provided for the user to set or confirm various types of operation status Setting switch CPU module This sets the CPU communication function setting and operation mode etc It can also instruct run and stop LED display Power module CPU module I O module Indicates the power system status operating status and I O operation status Connector CPU module basic base I O controller This can connect external devices using RS 232C etc It can also add I O modules Terminal block Power module I O module This performs the connections for supplying power and for exchanging signals with the control object Number of I O points The number of points that can be controlled with re
310. d is started 5 160 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 7 Description of the transmission data area This area stores the data to be transmitted to the modem with the TRNS 8 command and is used for the initialization command and call origination Set the data to be transmitted according to the following format 1 When even number of bytes are transmitted 2 When odd number of bytes are transmitted Number of bytes to be transmitted N Number of bytes to be transmitted N Ist byte 2nd byte Ist byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 3rd byte 4th byte Transmission data area size Sth byte 6th byte Sth byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 7th byte 8th byte N 2th byte N 1th byte N 1th byte Nth byte Nth byte Invalid data i When the initialization command is required during dedicated general switch request Specify the initialization command excluding the head AT Example Initialization command To send ATEOQOVO amp CI amp SI to the modem HO00C Set the following values when the modem is initialized Result code Output Display format of result code Numeric format Echo back None DR signal Always on CD signal control Follows the carrier of the opposite modem ER signal control Disconnects the line by switching from on to off H53 S H31 1 The model may not operate normally if it is used with settings other than above Be sure to set the model correctly by referring
311. d resets this bit to 0 when communication is started Being connected 2 bits Sets the line status When an originating call is being connected 01 is set When a incoming call is being connected 10 is set If nothing is connected 00 is set The TRNS 8 command resets this bit to 00 when communication is starts This bit is set when communication is completed normally Dial busy This bit is set to 1 when dial busy is detected after call origination Line busy This bit is set to 1 when line busy is detected after call origination Received This bit is set to 1 when a call is received when a switch request or originating request is made No response This bit is set to 1 when there is no response after dedicated general switching Parity error This bit is set to 1 when a party error occurs Framing error This bit is set to 1 when a framing error occurs Overrun error This bit is set to 1 when an overrun error occurs Dedicated port being connected This bit is set to 1 when the dedicated port is being connected after a switch request is made Contension error This bit is set to 1 when multiple TRANS 8 commands are started simultaneously by the user program or when the TRANS 0 and RECV 0 commands are started simultaneously This forces the communication to terminate The TRNS 8 command resets 5 through 13 to 0 when the TRNS 8 comman
312. d s 1 using the natural logarithm e as the base then sets the result in s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the operation result is not within the range of le 37 to le 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifstost 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed e Calculation cannot be performed when the value of s s 1 is lower than or equal to 0 In this case DER is set to 1 Program example 7 LD X00200 X00200 DIFO DR0100 H3F000000 AND DIFO FUN118 WRO100 DR0100 H3F000000 FUN 118 WRO100 l Program description e At arising edge of X0200 the logarithm operation of the real number specified in DR0100 WR0100 WR0101 is performed and the result is set in DR0102 WR0102 WR0103 Internal output setting WR0101 H3F00 WR0100 H0000 Operation result WR0103 HBF31 WR0102 H7218 The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 247 NELEIO Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 55 Index setting argument d Ladder format Condition code Processing time us r T Osean FUN 120 s per err sp v c_ INDXD s ee i eee eae Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 120 s INDXD s Bit Word Double word wo
313. de E station is READ occupying CPU mismatch Not occupied Ho7 Localstationis not occupyingcPU Local station is not occupying CPU CPU is running HOB CPU is running Undefined H04 to Abnormal task code H01 Undefined subcommand H02 Undefined subcommand is set HFF area A Abnormal task code H01 Transfer address is outside the specified range of parameter area A Abnormal number of Number of transfer steps are outside the steps words specified range Memory over Address number of steps exceeds the parameter area Not executable Occupancy code mismatch Local station is not occupying CPU CPU is running Abnormal task code H01 Abnormal address Transfer address is outside the designated range of HI FLOW area Abnormal number of Number of transfer steps are outside the steps words designated range Memory over H09 Address number of steps exceeds the flow area Not executable H03 Occupancy code H03 Local station is READ occupying CPU mismatch Local station is not occupying CPU CPU is running oa CPU is running area Abnormal task code H01 Abnormal address address is outside the designated range of HI LADDER area Abnormal number of Number of transfer steps are outside the steps words designated range Memory over H09 Address number of steps exceeds the ladder area A 58 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Subcommand Response task code H03 ROM memory Occupancy code mismatch
314. dedicated procedure with station number is used in the EH CPU448 the maximum message length will be 505 bytes including control character 10 3 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 1 SG1 2 CDI 3 ERI ji 2 Do 4 ER2 3 gt 5 SD1 Micro processor 6 RDI nN 5 6 7 DRI 7 8 8 RSI Figure 10 1 Ladder diagram and pin numbers for port 1 Table 10 6 List of port 1 signals Signal Direction Meaning abbreviation Ground for signal Notification signal during carrier received Peripheral units connected signal When this signal is high level indicates that dedicated peripherals are connected 511 GND PVs lt 2 PV5 NV12 4 3 NV12 1 5 2 A 4 PHL2 PV12 3 3 5 SD2 4 g 3 5 3 6 RD2 A 7 DR2 N 7 8 RS2 8 PV12 A Figure 10 2 Ladder diagram and pin numbers for port 2 Table 10 7 List of port 2 signals Pin No Signal Direction Meaning abbreviation Signal ground 5 V DC is supplied 12 V DC is supplied 4 Peripheral units connected signal 12 V DC output Indicates that a dedicated peripheral is connected when the switching switch is off he 12 V DC is supplied when the switching switch is on SD2 PG R2 e Datarreceivedbythe CPU DR2 Receive enabled signal When this signal is high level indicates that connected devices can receive data 10 4 Chapter 10 Communication Sp
315. der format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 yas ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e Upper case OR Command format Number of s 1 15 Lower OR n Condition case ORI Usable I O Constant T O number Function n Obtains OR of the previous operation result and the a contact operation ORn n 7 Obtains OR of the previous operation result and the b contact operation ORI n Cautionary notes e Land WL become the internal output when link modules are not used Program example X00000 Y00105 X00000 X00001 X00002 Y00105 Program description e When X00000 is on X00001 is on or X00002 is off the operation is 1 and Y00105 turns on 5 22 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 7 Name Negation NOT Condition code Ladder format Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 vee Zz A ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max NOT Command format Number of s Condition Usable I O Constant Function e Reverses the operation result obtained up to that point Program example LD X00010 X00010 X00011 AND X00011 ml 7 NOT OUT R1
316. designated range Abnormal I O code H06 The requested I O type code is undefined Abnormal I O No H07 The requested I O No is outside the designated range H07 Local station is not occupying CPU Abnormal task code H01 Abnormal number of H05 The requested number of points is outside steps words the designated range Abnormal I O code eN n D Not occupied Normal execution H00 D H06 The requested I O type code is undefined or is an T O that cannot be forced to be set The requested I O type code is undefined Local station is not occupying CPU Abnormal task code H01 Abnormal number of H05 The requested number of points is outside steps words the designated range Abnormal I O code H06 The requested I O type code is undefined or is an T O that cannot be forced to be set Abnormal I O No H07 The requested I O No is outside the designated range H03 H07 Local station is not occupying CPU Abnormal I O No Warning O e H02 Normal execution H00 A 60 Subcommand Code Abnormal task code Response task code Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Return code Abnormal number of steps words Abnorma Abnormal number of H05 steps words Abnormal I O code Ed Abnormal number of steps words Abnormal I O code The req Error cause uested number of points is outside the designated range Abnormal I O code Ho The requested I O type code is undefined The
317. dex c Z Z N N O T Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 250 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Increment INC EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than FUN 123 s per ERR sp v c INC S ce lee dae ec Condition 3 FUN 123 s INC s Word Double word word Usable I O xX Y L Wx WL TC DX DY DL DM rs Awumer tel frttl Function e Increments the word I O specified in WR WL WM by 1 1 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When FFFFH is increased by 1 1 the result will be 0000H Program example LD X00200 AND DIFO X00200 DIFO WRO0100 H0000 WR0100 H0000 FUN 123 WR0100 n m AND DIF1 X00200 DIFI LD X00200 FUN 123 s FUN 123 WR0100 Program description e At arising edge of X0200 the WR0100 is incremented by 1 1 Internal output setting WR0100 H0000 Operation result WR0100 H0001 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 251 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Double Word Increment INCD EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Other than FUN 124 s Der ERR sp v c NCD s ee aie eerie Condition 3 FUN 124 s INCD s Word Double word word Usable I O xX Y L WX WL TC DX DY DL DM Ps Awumee st fol LL susesupost Function e Replaces the specif
318. dicated port 1 becomes valid when the power is turned on next time Table 10 4 shows the set values to change the setting at the time of delivery WRF037 H0000 Mode SW Table 10 4 Dedicated port settings of port 1 User set value System set value WRF037 Value displayed after power restart Interface Contents of setting Control procedure bala be H8000 H0000 RS 232C HC000 H4000 Transmission control procedure 1 Transmission control procedure 2 H8100 H0500 HC100 H4500 HA1 H25 HE1 H65 Transmission control procedure 1 Transmission control procedure 2 Transmission control procedure 1 with station No Transmission control procedure 2 with station No H8200 H0A00 HC200 H4A00 HA2 H2A HE2 H6A Transmission control procedure 1 Transmission control procedure 2 Transmission control procedure 1 with station No Transmission control procedure 2 with station No Denotes a station number in 1 N communication Set 2 a 2 digit BCD value from 00 to 31 Ifa value outside this range is specified as a station number the specified value will be displayed but the system will operate using a BCD value of 31 The current interface status is displayed by b11 and b10 of WRF037 Because of this different values may be displayed as system set values depending on the setting of the
319. digit hexadecimal value Upper Lower A J yY yY The last 2 digits show the cause of the error Shows the loop number In the case of H0O it is an error that has no relation to loop numbers In the case of HO1 through H04 there is an error in the loop shown in the loop number a Error code 0 The error codes generated in FUN 0 processing and some parts of FUN 1 processing are set in error code 0 If there is no error the previous status will be maintained 0001 The FUN 0 was executed again Do not execute the FUN 0 after it FUN 0 normal completion 5 after the FUN 0 had been has been executed successfully maintains the previous value successfully completed 0002 The number of loops 3 is 0 Set the number of loops 3 to a value between the range of 1 to 64 The number of loops 3 exceeds Set the number of loops 3 to a 65 value between the range of 1 to 64 0004 The PID control table exceeds the Change the head of PID The size of the PID management maximum number of WR management table or the number table will change If the number of loops 3 so that the maximum of loops 3 exceeds the suffix of number of WR is not exceeded the I O FUN 0 normal completion 5 will maintain the previous value the maximum number of WR loop 4 again per loop the maximum number of R per loop xx07 The output upper limit value 17 Set the output upper limit value in loop xx is outside of range 17 to a
320. dition is used for SB n it will be ignored Always use SB n and RTS in pairs Code the SB n to RTS subroutine program after the END command Cautionary notes e This command is checked prior to execution and when there is an error the following error code is set in the special internal output WRFOO1 Also the CPU error code 34 is set to special internal output WRFO0O CPU error code Special internal output Error description 34 WREO01 H0004 Duplicate definition of SB H0013 SB undefined Instruction for use When CAL 0 is executed SB 0 to RTS is executed as a subroutine e When CAL 1 is executed SB 1 to RTS is executed as a subroutine Subroutine 0 program Subroutine 0 1 program 5 138 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Control commands 10 End of subroutine program RETURN SUBROUTINE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us ee i a ee R TD SS WR DR Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU WM DM RCU CT Function e This command declares the end of a subroutine program e When this command is executed the program is resumed starting from the line following the CAL n command that called the subroutine e Do not set a startup condition for this command Cautionary notes e This command is checked prior to execution and when there is an error the following error code is set in the special internal output WRFOO1 Also the CPU error
321. ditor for Windows Ladder1 Sia Hae k carne er cas aa the Menu bar Pull down menu The Environment Setting dialogue box is displayed ZPAF Specify the CPU type from the Ladder tag e Click the W of the Offline CPU field to show the available CPU types in the pull down display Select the CPU type e Click the OK button Pull down display of CPU types Specify the transmission speed from the Communication tag e Select the transmission speed set with the DIP switches of the EH 150 main unit in case of 10 point type CPU the transmission speed is fixed at 4800bps e Specify the communication port e Click the OK button Pull down display of CPU types For the CPU type select EH 150 However if LADDER EDITOR for Windows of earlier than Ver 2 0 HL PC3 or GPCLO1H is used select H 302 If the EH CPU448 is used select H 302 If EH 150 is selected 48K steps cannot be specified for the memory type 15 3 2 Setting the memory type Click Utility gt CPU Setting CPU Information in the Menu bar Pull down menu The CPU Information dialogue box is displayed Click the Memory Cassette Ladder Assign button and select the memory cassette size e Click Execute or the Memory Execute button CPU Information dialogue box e Click the OK button in the confirmation dialogue box Select the memory cassette
322. e X00000 Y00100 X00000 Y00100 X00001 Y00101 X00001 O Y00101 Program description e When input X00000 is on output Y00100 is on when off the output is off e When input X00001 is off output Y00101 is on when on the output is off 5 20 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 3 4 Name Contact series connection AND ANI Ladder format Condition code Processing time us n R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 yes ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e J J Comma Number of steps 1 05 Usable I O Constant T O number Function n Obtains AND of the previous operation result and the a contact operation AND n n A Obtains AND of the previous operation result and the b contact operation ANI n Cautionary notes e L and WL become the internal output when link modules are not used Program example X00002 X00002 R010 Y00100 R010 on Q Y00100 Y00101 X00003 Q R011 Y00101 Program description e When input X00002 and R010 are both on output Y00100 is on and all others are off e When input X00003 is on and R011 is off output Y00101 is on and all others are off 5 21 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 5 6 Name Contact parallel connection OR ORI Lad
323. e 0 5 Lower 50 9 91 9 100 3 185 7 case DW LD s1 lt gt s2 Condition Steps 15 8 18 4 indicates AND sl lt gt s2 Word See Cautionary notes 72 3 7 133 9 the case 22 8 25 4 OR sl lt gt s2 Double word See Cautionary notes of OR Word Double word TD SS WR DR Usable I O WDT MS WY WL DX DY DL TMR CU RCU CT Yo aq zs lt gt S GNV zs lt gt s zs lt gt s Command format Number of steps 7 5 Constant Relational number 1 O s2 Relational number 2 Function Ladder format s S s e Compares sl and s2 as unsigned numbers and if s1 is equals to s2 it enters the noncontinuity status off and if s1 is not equal to s2 enters the continuity status on e When s1 and s2 are words 0 to 65 535 decimal or H0000 to HFFFF hexadecimal When s1 and s2 are double words 0 to 4 294 967 295 decimal or H00000000 to HFFFFFFFF hexadecimal Cautionary notes Number of steps wa Program example WRO000 R003 LD WR0000 lt gt WR0002 lt gt o OUT R003 WR0002 Program description e When WR0000 WR0002 R003 turns on 5 54 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Signed lt gt Relational box SIGNED lt gt RELATIONAL
324. e 1 Programming device transmission control procedure 2 monitor RS 232C Modem control AT command transmission control procedure 1 D Sp da transmission control procedure 2 1 1 Transmission control procedure 1 i transmission control procedure 2 Transmission control procedure 1 Programming device Dedicated foe with station No monitor f Transmission control procedure 2 with station No 7 Transmission control procedure 1 transmission control procedure 2 Transmission control procedure 1 Programming device with station No monitor LN Transmission control procedure 2 with station No mean aa ca icati ae TRNS command control Comnitica DDS General equipment such as no procedure 7 gt personal computer P d 1 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 2 Only the EH CPU308 316 and EH CPU448 are supported 10 1 2 Port 1 setup method Set the mode setting switch according to your application then set the special internal output values based on the user setting values listed below For more details on the mode setting switch see page 4 6 For the meaning of the port setting bits see the descriptions of the special internal outputs WRF036 and WRF037 1 General port setup When data is transmitted and received using the TRNS 0 and RECV 0 commands in a user program set the interface according to the method shown below After the set value has been changed by the user when the system receives the set value ch
325. e Positive Negative oo Positive Negative Positve o E ie d ool Los C Nesatve Positive Negative o Cautionary notes V shm s2m dm sim s2m dm e The combinations of d sl and s2 are as follows Double word Double word Double word Program example LD X00000 WR0002 WR0000 WR0001 X00000 f WR0002 WR0000 WR0001 H Program description e When input X00000 is on the difference between the values in WR0000 and WR0001 is substituted into WR0002 5 64 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Arithmeticcommands 5 BCD subtraction BCD SUBTRACTION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Oner han d s1 B s2 ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max e J e 34 79 Command format Number of steps Word Double word s1 B s2 Double word d DR Usable I O DX DY Constant ld Substitution destination Function Subtracts s2 from s1 as BCD data and substitutes the result into d as BCD data The C flag is 1 if there is a digit decrease and 0 if not The DER flag is 1 if s1 or s2 is not a valid BCD data In such cases operation is not performed and the C flag retains the previous state without outputting to d If the s1 and s2 are valid BCD data the DER is set to 0 Cautionary
326. e and switches off when the progress value is less than the set value When the counter clear CL n switches on the progress value is cleared to 0 and the coil switches off The progress value is set in TC n and the value will be in the range of 0 to 65 535 decimal If the progress value is updated while the system is running the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point If an I O is set for the set value the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I O value since the set values are updated during each scan Cautionary notes The counter can be used up to 512 points No 0 to 511 However the first 256 points No 0 to 255 will use the same area as the timer The timer numbers and counter numbers cannot overlap The numbers for the UP coil and DOWN coil must be the same While the counter clear CL n is on the rise of startup condition is ignored Since the startup condition of the counter is edge detection the condition may not be detected during the first scan after the operation is started If the set value is set to 0 it is regarded as a coil that is always on and controlled by the CL n 5 49 wn oc s gt A E E oOo EE Se oe Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example X00007 X00007 CTUI7 4 X00008 CTD17 X00009 CL17 CT17 R107 1NO X00008 Ss u NLO e An example of a word T O being used as the set value for the ladd
327. e connection at the base connector on the memory board When removing first remove whole CPU module from the base and then lift out the memory board Because flash memory is used data is retained in memory even if the power is turned off However note that the write count is approximately 100 000 4 37 Chapter 4 System Equipment f 7 Counter Module Name and function of each part Type EH CU 2ch EH CUE 1ch Weight Approx 0 16 kg 0 352 1b 2 Lock button Dimensions mm in 1 LED cover 5 Reset switch 95 3 74 ae 3 Wiring connector 4 DIP switches 1 LED cover This is the cover for the LED that displays the T O status When the I O signal turns on the LED for the relevant number lights up Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the fixation can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws 100 3 94 O i 3 Wiring connector 15 x 2 lines 30 pin connector used to connect external wiring Note Common to the two channels for the EH CU 4 DIP switches Performs various initialization settings of the EH CU and EH CUE Turn off the power and remove the module to perform settings 5 Reset switch This is used when the module generates a hardware error Note After the power is turned on pressing down the reset switch turns on the ER LED This is normal 4 3
328. e is an error such as data memory abnormal system Stop program abnormal user memory abnormal user memory size error grammatical assemble error etc which will cause a malfunction if operation is continued Minor failure These are errors such as I O information verify error remote abnormal Stop overload error excessively assigned I O points The operation can continue continued operation when there is a continue operation setting in the user program is possible if specified These are abnormal such as a transfer error where it is possible to continue Operation continues the operation 8 1 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 fe RUN Start When the EH 150 switches to operation status the user program is executed in sequence from the head The user program consists of a normal scan program and periodic scan program In addition to these programs there is a subroutine area defined as a subroutine Table 8 2 Program classification Normal scan program This is the program that is normally executed When the program has been executed to the END command execution starts again from the head Normal scan Overload error monitoring is performed according program to the overload check time set by the user Monitoring is from the top of the program until the END command If it is designated to continue during overload the operation continues Periodic scan program This program is executed periodically at interv
329. e load connect a surge killer condenser 0 1 uF resistance of around 100 Q in parallel to the load Also for DC load connect a flywheel diode 3 Fuse A fuse is not built into this module Install a 6 A fuse in the common to prevent the external wiring from burning out 4 Power supply for driving the relays Ifa 24 V DC power supply is connected to drive the relays take care with respect to the polarity when connecting There is a risk that the internal circuit will be damaged if the wiring is done incorrectly Also do not perform an interlock etc to the external load with the power supply for driving the relays b Wiring for the transistor output module 5 Flywheel diode For inductive load connect a flywheel diode in parallel 6 Sand C terminals Always connect an S terminal and C common terminal If the module is used without connecting these terminals the internal flywheel diode does not function and there is a risk that the module will malfunction or breakdown 7 Fuse A fuse is inserted in the common to prevent the external wiring from burning out but this does not protect transistor elements Therefore when the external load is shorted these elements are destroyed so exercise caution If the external load shorts please contact us for repair Also if the fuse blows there will be no output even if the LED lights up The fuse out lamp for the module at this time as well as a CPU module error will not be displa
330. e number of 3 loops 3 The proportional gain 13 of loop xx is Set the proportional gain 13 to a out of range value within the range of 1 000 to 1 000 The integral constant 14 of loop xx is Set the integral constant 14 to a out of range value within the range of to 32 767 The derivative constant 15 of loop xx Set the derivative constant 15 to a is out of range value within the range of to 32 767 The derivative delay constant 16 of Set the derivative delay constant 16 loop xx is out of range to a value within the range of 1 to 32 767 There is an error in the size relationship Set the values so that the output There is a possibility that this error is between the output lower limit value lower limit value 18 lt output upper generated when the S flag 53 is turned 18 and output upper limit value 17 in limit value 17 is satisfied ON while the PID RUN flag 58 is loop xx OFF There is an error in the output value I O Set the output value I O number 22 There is a possibility that these errors number 22 in loop xx using the ADRIO command are generated when the S flag 53 or R The output value bit pattern 25 in loop Set the output value bit pattern 25 to flag 54 is turned on while the PID xx is outside of range a value between 1 and 4 RUN flag 58 is OFF c Error code 2 Error code Contents and cause a ae eee Sere xx41 The set value bit pattern 23 in loop xx Set the set value bi
331. e processing box Delete the startup condition of the that contains an RTS command processing box H0031 RTI start condition error There is a start condition in the processing box Delete the startup condition of the that contains an RTI command processing box H0032 END start condition error There is a start condition in the processing box Delete the startup condition of the that contains an END command processing box 12 4 Chapter 12 Error Code List 12 3 Operation Error Codes If an error occurs when a control command is executed 1 is set in the operation error ERR special internal output R7F3 and an error code indicating the nature of the error is set in WRFO15 To do a zero clear of the operation error execute R7F3 0 using forced setting from the program or peripheral device To do a zero clear of the error code execute WRFO15 0 using forced setting from the program or peripheral device Error code Error name Description of error Originating command H0013 SB undefined SBn command corresponding to the command number n in the CALn command is not programmed LBL undefined LBLn command corresponding to the command number n in the JMPn CJMPn commands is not programmed FOR undefined FORn command corresponding to the command number n in the NEXTn command is not programmed NEXT undefined NEXTn command corresponding to the command number n in the FORn command is not programmed LBL area error LBLn command
332. e task code is input Memory assignment total has exceeded the physical memory capacity READ occupied by local station Local station is not occupying CPU CPU is running and modify during RUN mode is not set Undefined subcommand is set Task code input parameter length is too short READ occupying by local station Local station is not occupying CPU CPU is running and modify during RUN mode is not set Subcommand is other than 02H Modification code is 08H or above Address is abnormal Task code input parameter length is too short T O code is abnormal Time base is H04 or above T O number is abnormal Timer counter number is 512 or above The Ist set value of watchdog constant is greater than or equal to the 2nd set value constant 0 01 second 0 1 second or 1 0 second was set as the time base when timer counter number was 256 or above 0 01 second was set as the time base when timer counter number was 64 or above The timer of the timer counter number is used by HI FLOW READ occupying by local station Not occupied by local station Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Subcommand Response task code Return code Error cause Change set value of Not executable H07 Local station is not occupying CPU timer counter Operation error R7C7 is off CPU severe error Scan time is more than 3 seconds Inconsistent program 0 01 second 0 1 second or 1 0 second was
333. e the reference table below to determine the remaining life of battery As a guideline replace the battery every two years even when the total power failure time is less than the guaranteed value shown in the table Battery life Total power failure time Hr Guaranteed value MIN 1 Actual value MAX 2 2 000 32 000 The guaranteed value indicates the total power failure time at the ambient temperature of 55 C The actual value indicates the total power failure time at the ambient temperature of 25 C 4 5 Chapter 4 System Equipment tem O Detailed explanation Remarks Mode setting The following operating modes are designated by setting this switch Even if switch the switch setting is changed while the module is energizing the operating mode will not change To switch operating modes turn the power off then do the settings correctly When DR signal turns on modifying the baud rate Switch Supplementary explanation a REMOTE Normal mode In REMOTE mode RUN STOP is executed via communication Modem control TRNSO operation Port 1 operation When switch number 5 is turned off it is valid Dedicated port General purpose port Port 1 operation PHL signal Port 2 connector 5 pin HOFF tow os Port switching This is used when a LADDER EDITOR for Windows or programmer is At the time the port switch connected to serial port 2 switching switch is set to programmer connection When LADDER EDITOR When LADDER EDITOR s
334. e three areas bit dedicated area R word dedicated area WR and bit word common area M WM Data type Bit dedicated type Word dedicated type lt Word gt lt Double word gt Bit word common type lt Double word gt Table 6 4 List of 1 O number rules for external I O Numbering rule pann Se paas wMOOO poa M120F Normal area H000 to H7BF Special area H7C0 to H7FF Both are expressed by hexadecimal Normal area H0000 to Special area HF000 to Both are expressed by hexadecimal Normal area H0000 to Special area HF000 to Both are expressed by hexadecimals Example Expresses WR for 2 words in continuatio H0000 to H000 to pbMOOOO H0000 to Expressed by hexadecimals Expresses DM for 2 words in continuatio Example Relationship between R100 and WR10 DR10 Internal output R and WR DR are completely separate areas Bit based operations cannot be performed in WR R area R100 WR DR area Separate area WRI WR10 je pit gt B DR1O gt DR11 gt Example Relationship between M100 and WM10 DM10 MI0A MIIR attests M110
335. eceiving area head designation Receivingarea size Receivingdata length Start code designation End code designation Transmission speed 4 800 bits s Transmission code 7 bit even parity 2 stop bits Receivingdata length Start code designation End code designation Transmission speed 4 800 bits s Transmission code 7 bit even parity 2 stop bits Transfers the receiving data Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program description The TRNS 0 command parameters are set using special internal output R7E3 turned on for one scan after RUN is commenced When M0001 is turned on the following parameters are set for the TRNS 0 command Receiving condition No start code designated End code is designated as F Transmission speed 4 800 bits s Transmission code 7 bits even parity 2 stop bits Continuation flag ON Receiving processing is commenced after transmission is complete When M002 is turned on the following parameters are set for the TRNS 0 command Receiving condition Start code is designated as A End code is designated as F Transmission speed 4 800 bits s Transmission code 7 bits even parity 2 stop bits Continuation flag ON Receiving processing is commenced after transmission is complete When M0003 is turned on the receiving data that is set in the receiving data area is transferred to a location beyond WRO0201 and the number of words in the receiving data is set in WRO200 When the com
336. ecial internal output Also this information is always recorded in the power failure memory so the information can be referenced even after the power is cut off However a battery is required The clearing of the error information can be conducted by turning on R7EC 3 4 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 18 Task code By combining individual task codes the following functions can be realized by the program in the host computer 1 CPU control RUN STOP control of CPU occupy release CPU status read etc 2 TO control various types of monitoring 3 Memory write all clear batch transfer etc Memory read reading of programs etc Response various responses from CPU Command Programming can be performed for various purposes and uses by combining ladders and the command language Note The EH 150 does not support some functions that are supported by the rest of the H series debugging tracing forcing and simulation functions Don t select the tracing function among them because an occupy error will occur when peripheral devices are used and the trace function is selected If an occupy error should occur recover by first going off line and then going back on line and reconnecting 3 5 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3 3 Performance Specifications Model Type EH CPU104 EH CPU208 Number of I O At the time 64 points I O module is 512 points maximum 1 024 points maximum
337. ecifications 10 3 General Purpose Port Port 1 can be used as a general purpose port When Port 1 is designated as a general purpose port the send and receive operations are controlled by the user program The specifications for a general purpose port are given in Table 10 8 below When the settings are made for a dedicated port or modem connection refer to their specifications respectively When a general purpose port is designated communication operations are controlled from the user program use the TRNSO RECVO commands In this case communication procedures can be created as desired according to the devices that are connected Also by connecting a modem and setting up original communication commands communication can be performed via the modem In this case since ER signals cannot be controlled it is necessary to perform line disconnection using a command or use other I O and connect a cable for control Adjust the connecting cables setup and setting switches to the purpose for which they are to be used and check these carefully beforehand Refer to P4 6 for setting switch Table 10 8 Specifications for a general purpose port 300 600 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600 19 200 bps Synchronization system Transmission code User setting 1 start 7 or 8 bit data NON or EVEN or ODD parity 1 or 2 stop configuration outgoing sequence 256 bytes including control characters connected units Connector used CPU side TM5RJ3 88 8 pin m
338. ection is made for 1 N stations at the port 1 Note that for the connection for communication in 1 1 mode only the first EH 150 in these figures is connected 1 Incase of RS 422 EH 150 _ EH 150 EH 150 1st CPU 2nd CPU 32nd CPU Relay terminal Relay terminal Relay terminal Relay terminal block block block block Figure 10 9 Connection for 1 n station communication by RS 422 2 Incase of RS 485 Twisted pair cable EH 150 EH 150 EH 150 1st CPU 2nd CPU 32nd CPU EH 150 f EH 150 2 EH 150 _ f Omaa Ol Omaa O Orar ii O o o A b T p Relay terminal Relay terminal Relay terminal Relay terminal block block block block Figure 10 10 Connection for 1 n station communication by RS 485 10 19 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 10 20 Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function 11 1 Real Time Clock Function The EH CPU208 308 3 16 448 includes a function that manages the time and date of PLC data The clock functio
339. ectly set 5 As a result the initialization result indicates that execution of the FUN 211 is allowed 6 The FUN 211 detects 8 the rise of the EXECUTE flag 7 and checks if the execution is allowed Since the check result is normal the RUN flag is turned on 9 and the log data is stored temporarily When all data has been stored the WRITE flag is turned on 10 and the log data is written to the memory board starting of write When the writing of data for the first log is completed 11 the RUN flag and WRITE flag are turned off 12 Since the EXECUTE flag is still on writing of the second log is started 13 The FUN 211 detects 14 the fall of the EXECUTE flag 15 However the processing continues since the writing of data for the second log is not completed yet When the writing of data for the second log is completed 16 the RUN flag and WRITE flag are turned off 17 6 Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function Log clear FUN 212 time chart The diagram below shows the relationship between the log clear parameter bit table EXECUTE flag RUN flag ABNORMAL COMPLETION flag and the execution of the FUN 211 log clear 1 7 12 14 EXECUTE flag RUN flag ABNORMAL COMPLETION flag Initialization result State in which execution of the FUN 211 is allowed FUN210 FUN212 The log clear parameters are correctly set The EXECUTE flag rises 1 However since the initialization result ind
340. ecuted and the CPU is in RUN prohibited state Undefined H02 to Abnormal task code H01 Undefined subcommand H02 Undefined subcommand is set HFF None Abnormal task code H01 Abnormal number of H05 Only the task code is input steps words READ occupancy Normal execution Not executable Occupancy code Local station is WRITE occupying CPU mismatch READ occupancy H06 Already READ occupied by the other four maximum exceeded stations H08 Occupied by another Another station is WRITE occupying station CPU Not executable H03 Occupancy code H03 Local station is READ occupying CPU mismatch Occupied by another H08 CPU is occupied by another station station Occupancy mode Normal execution H00 a modification Not executable H03 Not occupied H07 Local station is not occupying the CPU WRITE READ modification Not executable H03 H07 READ gt WRITE Occupied by another H08 station Undefined H03 Abnormal task code H01 Undefined subcommand H02 Undefined subcommand is set H04 H07 to HFF Abnormal task code H01 Abnormal number of H05 Only the task code is input teps words H00 Normal completion H00 peripherals Forced cancel of local H01 Normal completion H00 station Undefined Abnormal task code H01 Undefined subcommand H02 Undefined subcommand is set HFF Local station is not occupying the CPU CPU is occupying by another station Abnormal task code H01 Abnormal number of H05 Only the task code is input steps
341. ed printer bar code reader etc Built in modem connection interface function The EH CPU208 308 3 16 448 with a modem connected to the port 1 can communicate with a distant location via commercial phone lines A system located some distance away can be monitored from an office or a monitor room Built in RS 422 485 interface By setting the special internal output serial port 1 can perform communication as an RS 422 485 interface By using the RS 422 485 interface a small data link system can be formed between CPU modules or with personal computers via 1 N connection Only with the EH CPU308 3 16 448 State of art technology and functions have been packed in a compact size The EH 150 contains 32 bit RISC processor Super H series made by Hitachi Ltd that allows high speed operations The user program is stored in FLASH memory so that the user program can be retained in case the battery goes dead However batteries are necessary when backing up the data memory Compatibility with H series protects software properties The EH 150 was developed as part of the H series family Those who are currently using the H series can create and debug programs using the same concepts as they are now Those who use the EH 150 for the first time will find that using the H series programmable controller will greatly broaden the applications of the software properties when they seek to expand their system in the future Memory board function is s
342. ed lt gt Relational expression SIGNED lt gt RELATIONAL EXPRESSION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpuss Other than d sl S lt gt s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e Command format Number of steps T Condition Steps 1S Neal Ae ORS e d sl S lt gt s2 s is a double word 6 n me Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 7 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY IDL 2 M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT d Substitution destination OJO Comparand Relational number Function Substitutes 1 when s1 is not equal to s2 and otherwise 0 into d assuming s1 and s2 as signed binary data sl and s2 are both signed binary data When the most significant bit is 0 the value is positive when the most significant bit is 1 the value is negative sl s2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal b31 b16 b15 bO Sign bit 0 Positive 1 Negative Program example Y00100 DR0000 S lt gt DR0002 Y00100 DR0000 S lt gt DR0002 Program description e When the values of DR0000 and DR0002 are not equal Y00100 is turned on Otherwise Y00100 is turned off 5 78 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 19 lt Relational expression lt RE
343. ed Turned on by Turned off by R7F4 Indicates whether there is a data error when the system the system l Error operation is executed R7F5_ Undefined R7F6 Scan time base value 0 10 ms Specifies the time base of the scan time display specification EH 1 lms WRFO10 WRFO12 CPU448 Undefined EH Do not use CPU104 208 308 316 Memory board busy 0 Standby Indicates whether the memory board that was Busy accessed during the execution of the FUN Turned on by Turned off by command FUN 211 through FUN 213 is the system the system currently in use for other processing Calendar clock read Read present value of calendar clock and set request in WRFO1B to WRFOIF ndefined for the EH 104 ndar clock setting Set the data set in WRFOIB to WRFO1F in the request calendar clock Turned on by ndefined for the EH the user 104 Turned off by Clock 30 second Request adjustment When second data is 0 to 29 it becomes 0 the system adjustment request seconds and when it is 30 to 59 1 minute is ndefined for the EH added and second data becomes 0 104 ndar clock set data 0 Indicates whether there is an error in calendar error 3 clock set data Turned on by Undefined for the EH the system CPU104 Undefined Do not use Turned on by Turned off by the user the user a ow wn z Data logging error 0 Normal Indicates whether or not there is an error in the Turned off by 1 Error memory board or l
344. ed data 1 Assigning int ernal outputs The sample program is created using the following assignments In actual cases change the I O numbers and other items according to the application No Usage Remarks 0100 to 0105 FUN 210 command Data logging management table s to S 5 See the data logging management table 0400 to 0404 Data logging information table See the log information table 0405 Save area for initialization result Only the result of the FUN 213 is set 000 Save bit for initialization result 00002 Read start bit If ON it indicates normal completion execution allowed Logging read start bit 0300 to 0304 S 4 FUN 213 command parameter area s to X00002 DIFO R000 R100 l 0100 to 0104 Log data transfer area ADRIO WRO102 WRO0400 WRO103 H0000 WRO104 H0000 WRO105 H0000 FUN 210 WRO100 WR0405 WRO101 AND HF000 R000 WR0405 lt gt H0000 WR0301 H000A WR0302 H0000 ADRIO WR0303 WM100 WR0304 H0005 FUN 213 WR0300 Program description The data that has been read is set Setting of actual address for log information table Initialization specification for log clear No specification for logging write parameter table No specification for log clear parameter bit table Execution of initial setting for data logging Acquisition of initialization result Creation of initialization result bit Setting of source
345. eds 16 slots EH CPU208 308 316 448 Number of CPU assignment slots exceeds 8 slots EH CPU104 e High function module communication module faults out e Error occurs during high function module transmission e TRNS RECV command parameter error Mismatch between communication module assignment information and module loading Communication module hardware error Link module hardware abnormal Link parameter abnormal 12 2 ERR Ope LED LED ratio R7D2 s R7D5 WRF005 WRFO80 WRFO07 WRFOEO to WRFI9F Error name detection timing gt Port 1 transmission error protocol error when transmitting Port 1 transmission error BCC error when transmitting Battery error always checking Port 1 modem is connected nn Port 1 connected Port 1 CS ON time out when modem is connected No modem response when Dial busy when modem is Classifi Nature of error cation Warning Protocol transmission procedure error detected during transmission Sum error detected during transmission Warning e Battery voltage dropped below specified value e Battery not installed Warning There is no response from the modem connected to the port Warning The modem of the opposite party is communicating with another terminal or not ready for communication Warning The CS signal of the modem connected to the port does not turn on within the designated time
346. eed the I O range Ifthe I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the shift is performed at the maximum range from d For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table e Ifnis equal to 0 the block shift is not performed and DER R7F4 will be 0 Program example LD X00001 X00001 DIFI Ta WSHR WR0100 3 AND DIFI WSHR WR0100 3 Program description e When X00001 rises the contents of WRO100 WRO101 and WRO102 are shifted to the right by one word WRO0102 WRO101 WRO100 Hl H2 Before the shift A H1 H2 After the shift Set to 0 Deleted 5 97 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 13 Name Batch shift left SHIFT LEFT BLOCK Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpus Other than WSHL d n DER ERR SD V Ave Ave Ave t Upper 30 7 0 11n 55 0 0 1 1n 43 3 0 11n case B Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case W WSHL d n 3 24 1 0 75n 64 6 0 75n 58 0 75n Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WwDT MS WX WY wWL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT d Head I O to be shifted O O n Number of bits words oOololoj jo O The constant is set in to be shifted decimal Function
347. emove the CPU module from the base unit Hold this button down while releasing the module from the unit After it is installed to the base unit the fixation can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws 8 RUN switch To designate run status push this switch lever to the RUN side The following conditions are necessary for the module to run correctly 1 A user program must be written to the module 2 When arun definition input has been set the designated input must be on 3 There should be no sources of errors 4 The mode setting switch is set to the normal run status 5 When the mode setting switch is set to REMOTE there should be a Also to stop operation set this switch lever to the STOP side Battery holder The module is shipped with the battery connector disconnected so as to Battery prevent unnecessary consumption of battery during distribution or storage When using the CPU module check the battery and connect the lead Battery connector A aed connector on the battery to the mating connector on the circuit board 1 Clock data is retained by battery power and thus has not been written to run start command from the personal computer etc that is connected the clock element initially When using the clock function first write the clock data to the clock element The EH CPU104 does not provide clock function See Chapter 11 for procedures for setting the clock data Us
348. en 1 lt used number CNT lt size of n The contents of P 2 is read to d Moves each of the contents of P 3 to P CNT 2 to its previous I O Writes 0 to P CNT 2 Subtracts 1 from the content of CNT When CNT is greater than size of n or CNT is 0 DER R7F4 is set to 1 and read will not be performed 1 O number Set value Size of FIFO n Set with FIFIT FIFO usage number CNT CNT 1 1 d P CNT 1 P CNT 2 Cautionary notes e Use this command so that p n 1 does not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and read is not performed For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table 5 121 Program example R7E3 1 X00000 DIFO k l FIFWR WR0000 HFF H X00001 DIFI m Program description FIFIT WR0000 10 jH A FIFRD WR0000 WL000 H Chapter 5 Command Specifications R7E3 WR0000 10 X00000 DIFO FIFWR WRO0000 HFF LD X00001 AND DIFI FIFRD WR0000 WL000 The FIFO buffer is set at WR0002 through WROOOB during the first scan after RUN execution HFF is stored when X00000 rises HFF is read to WL000 when X00001 rises X00000 X00001 R7E3 WRO0000 WR0001 WR0002 WR0004 WR000B WL000 5 122 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 35 Name Unit UNIT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us
349. end of the command However A is excluded The command that follows after the AT can have multiple inputs in a single line 1 Format 1 AT command format A T command parameter command parameter gt gt CR LF 2 Result code format CR LF result code word CR LF Result code number CR LF 2 List of commands extract 1 AT commands ATHn Line ON OFF 0 On hook disconnect 1 Offhook ATPn Pulse setting 0 1 10 pps ATPO ATP1 2 20 pps ATP2 ATSn X_ Sets S register value ATSO 0 ATVn Result code display format 0 Number ATVO 1 Word ATVI Always on AT amp C0 Depends on the carrier of counter AT amp Cl party modem Always on Turning from on to off during communication disconnects line Turning from on to off resets the software DR signal Always on Depends on sequence Depends on CD signal RI CD signal control 0 Turns on from calling start until communication begins 1 Turns on from calling start until communication ends 2 Turns on off in synchronization with the call signal 2 S register 0 no automatic Setting for automatic reception reception ring count reception 1 to 255 0 to 127 CR code setting 13 CR 0 to 127 LF code setting 10 LF 0 to 127 Escape code setting 43 10 15 3 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications Result codes format joe Nomalerconton 1 Connection complete e NODIAL TONE Cam
350. ent Maximum load current 1 circuit Number of output points 32 points module Number of common points 32 points 1 common Surge removal circuit i Photocoupler insulation LED green 2 Connector Approximately 250 mA External power supply 3 12 24 V DC 10 15 For supplying power to the S terminal maximum 100 mA 1 The module needs to be repaired in case a load short causes a blown fuse Furthermore the fuse cannot be replaced by the user 2 There are 16 points for each LED display The displaying of the upper lower 16 points is toggled using a switch 3 It is necessary to supply 12 24 V DC from outside to the S terminal Diagram of internal circuit Internal circuit Internal 4 27 Chapter 4 System Equipment f 1 64 point Output Module Name and function of each part 2 Lock button 3 LED display switch 1 LED cover 4 External wiring connector Type EH YT64 EH YTP64 Weight Approx 0 13 kg 0 29 Ib Dimensions mm in 30 1 18 95 3 74 k lt _ gt 100 3 94 1 LED cover This is the cover for the LED that displays the output status and displayed group When the output signal turns on the LED for the relevant number lights up The LED only works when the module is energized 2 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the attach
351. ent so that the maximum I O points of the CPU module are not exceeded 14 3 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Error Error name Corrective action code T O module abnormal Check for errors in I O modules and replace the malfunctioning module T O transmission error Reset the power supply for the high function module bd ell Communication module Perform error recovery procedures according to the error code of the malfunctioning rome communication module 55 Communication module ae Communication module Perform assignment so that the maximum number of communication module assignments is not B ee Communication module Change the parameters or properly install the communication function module T O information verify error Check the connection of the connector cable parity Check the settings such as the transmission speed 62 Port 2 transmission error Check to see if there are any sources of noise near the cable E en 63 Port 2 transmission error Check the connection of the connector cable een Check to see if there are any sources of noise near the cable 64 Port 2 transmission error Verify the protocol designations evaluate the host computer processing and correct any errors ka dl 65 Port 2 transmission error E ecam e Check the connection of the connector cable parity Check the settings such as the transmission speed Port 1 transmission error Check to see if there are any sources of noise near the cable en ala
352. eo 6 Mounting lever for fixing to DIN rail x 2 3 Connector for I O module 4 Expansion cable connector 7 Cover for expansion cable connector L1 Outer L2 Mounted dimensions dimensions No 1 Connector for power This is the connector for loading the power module module 2 Connector for CPU module This is the connector for loading the CPU module When the unit is used as an expansion base this becomes the connector for loading the I O controller Connector for I O module Number of I O modules that can be loaded Expansion cable connector This is the connector for connecting the expansion cable Expansion is possible only when It can only be used in a base unit in which a CPU is EH CPU208 308 3 16 448 is loaded Expansion is not possible when the unit is used as_ used an expansion base 5 Mounting holes These are used when the base unit is attached to a panel 4 locations etc Use M4 x 20 mm 0 79 in screws 6 Mounting lever for fixing to This is used when attaching the unit to a DIN rail DIN rail 7 Cover for expansion cable This cover is used for protecting the expansion cable connector connector when it is not used Operation explanation This is the basic unit for loading all the modules Using the base unit power is supplied from the power module to each of the other modules Also signals are sent to each module from the CPU module or the I O controller Select the
353. er 4 bits b3 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 15 decimal Ifd is a double word Designates the bit location depending on the contents 0 to 31 of the lower 5 bits b4 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 31 decimal 5 84 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 3 Name Bit test BIT TEST Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPus4s EH cpus Other than BTS d n DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e e t Upper 13 50 amp 86 lt case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW BTS d n 3 5 el6g7lel sl e Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT d I O to be tested olojo O O n Bit location to be tested O O0 0 0 O The constant is set in decimal Function e Checks the contents of the nth bit of the I O word or double word specified by d and if the result is 1 1 is set to C R7FO Ifthe result is 0 C R7FO is reset to 0 e The contents of d remains unaltered
354. er 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 45 Floating Point Operation Radian to Angle Conversion Ladder format Condition code Processing time us rtu ene Omran FUN 109 s r m sp v c EE aie a Ee Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 109 s FDEG s Wa Double word word e l TEE PTE DM mi CEE el O E a Function s 3 s 2 s 1 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FDEG Real number portion Real number portion s 180 radian x degrees T Converts the radian units of the real number value specified in s and s 1 as the arguments to angle units then sets the result in s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes S D e When the operation result is not within the range of le 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifs to s 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00200 X00200 DIFO DR0100 H3FDF66F3 f mcl m FUN109 WR0100 a DIR DR0100 H3FDF66F3 FUN 109 WR0100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is converted to an angle and the result is set in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal ou
355. er shown above R7E3 LD R7E3 a WR0017 4 WR0017 4 X00007 CTU17 J o eS oA wR O7 X00008 CTD17 CTU17 WR0017 O X00008 X00009 CL17 CTD17 poop e o X00009 CT17 R107 ele aS CTI7 a R107 Program description Time chart The progress value is up counted at the rising edge of Ignored Ignored m X00007 Ignored X00007 uuu L_ _f L Lf Let Lt The counter coil CT17 is X00008 turned on when set value gt i progress value cLI7 f i When the up coil and down CT17 Pye p Li EE ae i Eoo Be oe coil startup conditions turn on nS H A Po i 65534 simultaneously the progress Set val et val S value does not change The progress value is down Progress value counted at the rising edge of Tan X00008 1 3 4 5 The counter coil turns off when set value gt progress value 6 The progress value will never exceed 65 535 decimal Also it will not be below 0 7 When counter clear CL17 turns on the progress value and the counter coil are cleared The progress value is not updated while the counter clear is on e The clear is performed under the conditions set immediately prior to the execution of the counter coil command e Example using word I O as the set value When RUN is commenced the set value is set to word I O Or designate the word I O for the set value to store in the power failure memory beforehand 5 50 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item n
356. eration failure to execute a user program command that cannot be decoded undefined command Data memory error Medium Data memory cannot be read written Stops when power ON at failure properly initialization User memory abnormal Medium A sum error is detected in user memory or Stops R7CA when power turns on when failure RUNNING memory RUN starts when parameters are changed at initialization User memory size error Medium User program capacity set by the parameter Stops R7CC when RUN starts failure is larger than actual user memory capacity Grammar assemble error Medium There is a grammar error in the user Stops R7D4 WRFO01 change in RUN VO information verify error Minor I O assignment information and actual Stops R7CD WRFO002 always checking failure loading of module do not match 2 Remote abnormal Minor e TO assignment verify mismatch occurs Stops R7DO0O WRF006 always checking failure in the remote slave station module WRFO080 e Communication error occurs between the to remote master station module and CPU WRFODF e There is an error in the remote master R7D1 2 w w W when RUN starts online failure program w station module and transmission to the slave station has stopped Overload error Normal scan Minor Execution time for normal scan during operation failure exceeded the overload check time set by the parameter 12 1 Chapter 12 Error Code List Classifi Nature of
357. erify erroneous module using special internal output e Replace base unit e Replace I O module e Replace CPU e Replace I O controller e Malfunction due to noise 14 8 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting c Operation stopped RUN stopped During normal operation the CPU suddenly stops the RUN LED turns off UY POW LED of the power module is unlit Power supply abnormal YES Check the power supply module e Instantaneous power failure extension of unit side power supply shut off e Insufficient power supply module capacity e Replace the power supply module elf diagnostic error code to CPU hardware abnormal YES Check individual modules e Connection between the CPU module and base unit e Replace the CPU e Check for erroneous connector on I O modules Check the program Check parameters Check I O assignment e Parameter settings e Program overload Shorten the program e Check I O assignment e Check for duplicate use of timer counter e Retransfer of program e Check for erroneous connector on I O modules e Replace the I O module e Replace the I O controller 14 9 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting d Wrong input at input module or input module will not input abnormal operation The CPU runs but the input data is not correct ws Input LED is not lit Input is not read NO Check input signals e Input sign
358. et screws Upper side 24 V DC input Connect input power supply 24 V DC gt input FE functional earth Connect to a class D ground In order to comply with the CE marking connect to 24 V DC 1 Lower side The recommended crimp terminal is indicated below EXO 6 0 24 Unit mm in Recommended Care must be exercised when handling the terminal since it may fall off if the screw is loose 4 11 The lamp is green 1 When performing insulation resistance measurements or dielectric withstand voltage measurements always remove the connection between the FE and 24 VDC Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table 50 A or less Ta 25 C 100 A or less Ta 55 C Output short circuit protection 1 ms or more 21 6 to 26 4 V DC 0 to 55 C with rated load 20 to 90 RH Non condensing 10 to 75 C 10 to 90 RH Non condensing 1 minute at 1 500 V AC between DC input and FE 20 M Q or more 500 V DC Between DC input and FE Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit Terminal AC DC converter 2 The POWER lamp will not be lit when the fuse is blown The module must be repaired The fuse may not be replaced by the end user 4 12 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 5 Base Unit Name and function of each part 1 Connector for power module 2 Connector for CPU module 5 Mounting holes x 4 Dimensions mm in
359. et to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes If the 8 digit ASCII code stored in s to s 3 is other than H30 to H39 0 to 9 DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed However this does not apply to HOO and H20 NULL and space of leading zero suppressed digits e Ifs 1tos 5 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example X00401 DIF41 LD X00401 WROOAO H3938 AND DIF41 WROOAIL H3736 WROOA2 H3534 WROOAO H3938 WROOA3 H3332 WROODAI H3736 FUN 41 WROOAO WROOA2 H3534 WROOA3 H3332 FUN 41 WROOAO Program description e The ASCII data 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 stored in WROOAO to WROOA3 is converted to 32 bit BCD data e The conversion result is stored in WROOA4 WROOAS Execution results WROOAO H3938 WROOA1 H3736 WROOA2 H3534 WROOA3 H3332 DROOA4 H98765432 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 206 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from hexadecimal binary to hexadecimal ASCII data ltem number Fun commands 23 Name BINARY TO ASCII Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee FUN 42 s ASC s Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 42 s ASC s Wa O Double word word TD ON Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX D
360. et to ON side the PHL For PC98 series PC AT foe Windows isaised signal is set to HIGH compatible personal computer Simultaneously 412 Vis GPCL is used When a programmer is output from the When a programmer is f Pos connected connector pin 5 so not connected exercise caution Optional slot The optional memory board is inserted in this slot Can only be used with Binding screw Install the memory board in the slot by sliding it in along the guide the EH CPU308 3 16 448 hole When installing the memory board First install the CPU module in the base unit then insert the memory board in the optional slot After installing the memory board be sure to fix it securely using the binding screws supplied with the memory board When removing the memory board With the memory board still attached to the CPU module remove the entire CPU module from the base unit Note on installing the memory board Do not install the CPU module in the base unit with the memory board still attached to the CPU module Doing so may cause inappropriate connection at the base connector on the memory board 4 6 Chapter 4 System Equipment AC Power Module Weight Approx 0 36 kg 0 79 Ib Dimensions mm in 2 Lock button 95 3 74 60 2 36 o E 3 Front cover 100 3 94 4 Front cover set screw 1 POWER lamp 2 Lock button 3 Front cover 5 Power terminal block ep e ee e on POWER lamp This indi
361. example LD X00101 xootot Di WR0110 110 AND DIFI FUN 11 WRO110 WRO110 110 FUN 11 WRO110 Program description An angle of 110 is set in WRO110 COS operation is performed at the leading edge of X00101 and the fractional portion of the result is set in WRO111 and the whole number portion is set in WRO112 as binary values Execution results WRO112 HFFFF WRO111 HA871 WRO110 HO06E 5 189 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than FUN 12 s DER ERR SD v C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max TAN s t e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 40 88 109 FUN 12 s 3 TAN s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR F Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm S RCU CT s Argument O s uses up to s 2 Function s 2 st s 15 015 0 15 0 Integer portion Fractional portion TAN 0 to 360 e Calculates the TAN value using the unsigned binary value designated by s as the argument and sets the integer and fractional portions of the result in s 2 and s 1 respectively e The TAN value is indicated in a binary value and negative values are indicated in two s complements e If the calculation is performed normally DER is equal to 0
362. execution result of the TRNS 0 command as follows Normal completion 0 Return code Abnormal completion gt 0 System area 4 Head I O of transmitting data area 5 Size of transmitting data area 6 Head I O of receiving data area 7 Size of receiving data area 8 Receiving data length 9 Start code 10 End code 11 Transmission speed 12 Transmission format eal User write prohibited area User setting area 5 143 Timeout time Used by the system processing of the TRNS 0 command when the command is executed This area may not be used by the user Designates the timeout time from the start of TRNS 0 command execution to completion as follows 0 Timeout check is not performed 0 x 10ms timeout check is performed The maximum possible set value is HFFFF Chapter 5 Command Specifications 4 Head T O of transmitting data area When transmitted by the TRNS 0 command designates the type and number of the head I O of the area in which transmitting data is stored s 4 Type WR gt H000A s 5 WL HO000B WM H000C T O No H0000 to HFFFF Size of transmitting data area The size of the transmitting data area is designated in word units Head I O of receiving data area Designates the type and number of the head I O of the area in which the response data with respect to the command or data transmitted is stored the area composit
363. expression arithmetic expression in the dialogue box for the symbol displayed 4 Click the OK button in the dialogue box Example of entering a contact 1 Begin from the cursor position at the top 2 Click the symbol for contact A The dialogue box for contacts is displayed Symbol selection 4 contact point Offline H 300 3 Enter R7E3 as the VO No in the Input field I O No half width alpha numeric input can be entered by the keyboard only or by Symbol Position Row 1 Column1 A contact lecting the initial lett from the pull d selecting the initial letter s from the pull down Input RIE3 menu of W and by typing the rest Enter a proper comment Comment A Contact Point Contact Point HF f aj l Contact property 4 Click the OK button The dialogue closes 15 7 Chapter 15 Operation Examples When the dialogue box closes the symbol is Ladder editor for Windows Ladder1 displayed in the Read Edit screen and the cursor g File F EditfE View Build B Mode G Utilty U Windowtw Help _ sjal eeki Sle ala elal 214 Display of symbol The comment is displayed under the symbol Example of entering a Processing Box 1 The specification of the input position can be omitted when entering symbols into the same ladder as the contact above 4 2 Click the symbol for Processing Box Symbol selection Processing box Offline H 300
364. f of oO liz urs __ swveopenionewte siz ofofofolololol lo spo oes oo o eeo oo Clear t operation result aie eel ieee no vo ao on o won ror 21 ors Logical backparatetcomeston o o o o fo o o o aa Processing borsan oO o l o o l olol o o 250 fmanan o j o j o l e l e ooe O Supported x Not supported Basic commands and timer counter Command Command name EH 150 H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 H4010 format to H 20 eea e gee Ps fourss fees y fo of otoj oe loeo a fourms fronsen of x xfofofofolo s fourm fme fo gt e o eo lo oe oe Co Jourwor fwans O x ofofolfo nera tame elele elele eio Pe fourrcu Ringcomer o x foftofofolo o Jourcty upmasnnefwpconer o o o ooo o o i0 OUTCTD Upanddomnofdownewne o o o o o oloo ufourct feomra dP OPO fopotoftoltolo O Supported x Not supported The EH CPU448 is supported The EH CPU 308 316 and 448 are supported A 4 Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart Basic commands and relational box Command Command name EH 150 H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 H4010 format H 700 H 1002 H 300 H 702 O EA e 1 D s1 s2 Relational box Relational box i ND s1 s2 O R sl s2 Relational box D s1 S s2 Signed Relational box AND s1 S s2 Signed Relational box i OR s1 S s2 Signed Relational box LD s1 lt
365. f the mounted modules If the status accords with actual I O configuration in the user program the CPU outputs digital signals according to the user program Terminal block The screws for the terminal block are M3 screws Use a crimp terminal that fits the screw diameter The maximum thickness of the cable should be only up to 0 75 mm If you attach two crimp terminals to the same terminal use a cable with the thickness of 0 5 mm The recommended crimp terminal is indicated below EXO 610 24 Recommended Care must be exercised when TEC oon handling the terminal since it may fall off if the screw is loose Unit mm in 4 21 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table relay output module EH YR12 Number of output points 12 points module LED geen External connection f Removable type screw terminal block MS Externally supplied power 2 24 V DC 10 5 For driving relays maximum 70 mA T O assignment Y16 1 The common terminals are connected internally 2 24 V DC must be supplied externally to drive the relays The 24 V output of the power module can be used Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit 24 V DC NC a Internal circuit Z E D ee AAEE AAAA er 4 22 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table transistor output module EH YT16 Number of output points 8 points module 16 points module Number of common
366. f the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is calculated and the result is set in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal output setting WR0101 HC000 WR0100 H0000 Operation result WR0103 HBF8D WR0102 HB70D t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 244 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Floating Point Operation Square Root Ladder format Processing time us EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Other than FUN 116 s Der ERR sp v c FSQR 6 eae relay ae ee Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 116 s FSQR s Word Double word word e l TEE PTE i DM ae CEE el E a Function s 3 s 2 s 1 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FSQR Real number portion Real number portion Calculates the square root using the real number value specified in s and s 1 as the arguments the sets the result in s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the operation result is not within the range of le 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifs to s 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed FUN 116 s e When the value of s s 1 is lower than 0 the value cannot be calculated and DER is set to 1 Progra
367. fication Item number iw Command symbol Logical operation start Logical negation operation start Logica AND Logica NAND OR Logica NOR Logica NOT Sequence command Rising edge detection Falling edge detection OUT Coil output Set coil output Reset coil output Set master control MCR Reset master control Process descriptions Indicates the commencement of a contact operation Indicates the commencement of b contact operation Indicates a contact series connection Indicates b contact series connection Indicates a contact parallel connection Indicates b contact parallel connection Reverses all operation results up to that point Indicates detection of the input rise Indicates detection of the input fall Indicates an output coil Indicates a set output Indicates a reset output Indicates a master control set operation Indicates a master control reset operation Process I O types used time u s X Y R000 to R7FF L0000 to L3FFF L10000 to L13FFF M0000 to M3FFF Timer 0 to 255 Counter 0 to 511 DIFO to DIF511 DFNO to DFN511 DIFO to DIF511 Decimal 0 3 Number overlap not allowed DENO to DFNS511 Decimal L0000 to L3FFF L10000 to LI3FFF M0000 to M3FFF TD SS WDT MS TMR CU RCU CTU CTD CL Timer 0 to 255 Counter 0 to 511 L10000 to L13FFF
368. for Windows File E Offline Q Online N On Direct C Help H BIE Bla SIA E zoom ico Harare of eloo1 ol mlx gt 4 1 SS Press F1 to display Help menu a S a a ic a Ladder editor for Windows Ladder2 Zoom fioo 7 File Edit E View Y Build B Mode G Utilty Windowtw Help H Printer Set B Print Title Set H Print Layout Set M ae seje lt 1 g oun ot OHO Program Name 0 Data Memory Edit D IC CardjF PC Initislize G Flow Initialize E i Occupation Release Q 15 13 Chapter 15 Operation Examples The Confirmation dialogue box is displayed click the Yes button and start the CPU initialization The Exit dialogue box is displayed click the OK button to close the dialogue Transferring to the CPU Click File CPU write in the Menu bar EEN Dena Y101i 1 Y102 0 Y103 1 Pull down menu Program transfer CPU Read PC personal computer CPU CPU Write PC personal computer CPU The CPU Write dialogue box is displayed SEU eriting Click the Execute button CPU write dialogue box When the writing is completed the result is a displayed A itil ia Click the Close button to close the dialogue box __ tonpietea writing progran Display of write result 15 14 Chapter 15 Operation Examples STEP 7 Monitoring verifying the operation Monitor the program execution status
369. formed 4 58 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Chapter5 Command Specifications 5 1 Command Classifications The commands used with the EH 150 are classified as shown in the following table Table 5 1 Command classification table Command classification Description Basic commands Sequence Timer counter 11 Relational box 8 2 Arithmetic commands Substitution array variable 1 Mathematical operations 10 Logical operations Relational expression 3 Application commands Bit operation Shift rotate Transfer Negation Two s complement Sign Conversion OlrnI ND DN CO WwW CO W Application Square root bit count swap FIFO unit distribute I O conversion 4 Control commands END JMP CAL FOR NEXT RTS RTI LBL SB INT CEND CJMP 5 High function module transfer commands TRNSO RECV0 TRNS7 RECV7 TRNS8 6 FUN commands Process stepping trigonometry comment PID and N Ur N others x The number of commands that can be used is different depending on the CPU module type Caution For the EH 150 the WR internal output area differs depending on the type of CPU module EH CPU104 WR000 to WRFFF EH CPU208 WR000 to WR1FFF EH CPU308 WR000 to WR43FF EH CPU316 WR000 to WR57FF EH CPU448 WR000 to WRC3FF Exercise caution when programming 5 1 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 5 2 List of Co
370. formed Program example X00403 DIF43 WM000 H3031 WMO001 H3233 WM002 H3435 WM003 H3637 WM004 H3839 WM005 H4142 WM006 H4344 WM007 H4546 WRO000 15 ADRIOQ WR0001 WM000 ADRIO WR0002 WRO100 FUN 43 WR0000 Program description 1 The result is stored in the data table from WRO100 by special internal output R7E3 single scan ON after RUN start 2 Ata rising edge of X00403 the hexadecimal ASCII data is converted to hexadecimal binary data and the converted data is stored from WMO100 Execution results WMO000 H3031 WM001 H3233 WM002 H3435 WM003 H3637 WM004 H3839 WM005 H4142 WM006 H4344 WM007 H4546 5 210 LD R7E3 WM000 H3031 WMO001 H3233 WM002 H3435 WM003 H3637 WM004 H3839 WM005 H4142 WM006 H4344 WM007 H4546 LD X00403 AND DIF43 WRO000 15 ADRIOQ WR0001 WM000 ADRIOQ WR0002 WRO100 FUN 43 WR0000 WRO100 H0123 WRO101 H4567 WRO102 H89AB WRO103 HCDEO Chapter 5 Command Specifications Ladder format Condition code Processing time us FUN 44 s DER ERR sp v c 10 char SADD s ate EEC gece FUN 44 s 3 SADD s Wa e Double word word a TD SS Usable I O L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU DM RCU CT Bee 1 head I O No rae addresses are PETE Jt s 2 Merged character string s head B No Function
371. ftware are indicated below It is necessary to take note that cables etc differ depending on the personal computer and the software used Table 7 3 System configuration when using a personal computer Personal computer DOS V PC PC9800 series personal computer software used LADDER EDITOR Windows version er im LADDER EDITOR for pour ie LADDER EDITOR for DOS V PC Windows system disk SEIOS Windows system disk f personal computer Windows 95 NT Windows 95 NT CPU setting Specify H 302 Specify EH 150 after version 2 0 Memory EH CPU104 Specify RAM 04H 4 k memory setting EH CPU208 Specify RAM 08H 8 k memory EH CPU308 Specify RAM 08H 8 k memory EH CPU316 Specify RAM 16H 16 k memory Specify RAM 48H 48 k pe Cable EH 150 side EH RSO5 EH Ro O Cable WVCB02H EH VCB02 WPCB02H personal computer side Mode setting switch se for or _ se for fo _ Lon os E pon fox T Serial port 1 setting Mode setting switch Soar ee 6 fa a or Sale fe ole oo Ser EEEE ETE E ET LADDER EDITOR DOS version LADDER EDITOR for DOS f LADDER EDITOR for DOS DOS V PC HL AT3E system disk English PC9800 series HL PC3 system disk MS DOS personal computer
372. g area is cleared when X00001 the clear start bit is turned ON after the initial setting for log area clear has been executed upon turning ON of single scan execution R7E3 and completed normally 5 283 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Fun commands 69 Log data read t LOG READ Ladder format Condition code Processing time us EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Oher than FUN 213 s LOGRED s pt e o o o Condition Steps 268 357 547 633 560 645 3 FUN 213 s LOGRED s R TD SS WR DR Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU WM DM RCU CT s Argument CCU CE dod T Function The logged data in the memory board is transferred to the specified I O number area by the amount of data corresponding to the number of words being specified by the source log data address word position from the head of log data Log data memory board Size 1 to 128 words The range of log data address is shown below Lower address 0 to FFFFH Upper address 0 to 0005H a 2 N O The valid maximum log data address is calculated by the formula shown below Log size in the log information table x Number of logs 1 When the log data read is completed normally DER becomes equal to 0 If the specified size is 0 nothing will be done and the process will complete normally For the S 3 parameter set the actual address WR WL WM us
373. g groups quantity c 3 exceeds the range between 1 and 128 Set the log groups quantity c 3 in the range between 1 and 128 The log write parameter table a 6 exceeds the maximum value for the word I O number Change the head word I O number a 6 log groups quantity c 3 The log write control bit table c 2 exceeds the maximum value for the bit I O number Change the head bit I O number c 2 Groups size c 4 number xx exceeds the range between 1 and 128 Set the groups size c 4 corresponding to xx in the range between 1 and 128 Logging groups c 4 number XX exceeds the maximum value for the world I O number Change the head word I O number c 4 groups size c 4 corresponding to XX The total size of the log groups exceeds the range between 1 and 128 Set the total size of the log groups so it falls in the range between 1 and 128 The log clear parameter table a 7 exceeds the maximum value for the bit I O number Change the head bit I O number a 7 A FUN was executed although its execution was not allowed 3 initialization result was execution not allowed Execute the FUN after confirming that the initialization result has become execution allowed The specified file address does not exist Set the file address between H0000 and HFFFF lower or H0000 and H0005 upper The acquisition source area exceeds the maximum value for t
374. g peripheral units contin A 7 8 oO i i DOS LADDER EDITOR Programmer For GPCL PGM GPH HILDRL PGM CHh Cannot connect Cannot connect Software type HLW PC3 HLW PC3 HL PC3 i AT3E HL C o in programmer Cable type WVCB02H WPCB02H PCCB02H EH VCB02 GPCB02H PGCB02H EH Oo EH RS05 EH RS05 EH RS05 EH RS05 EH VCB02 VCB02 10 17 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications Table 10 13 Peripheral unit connection configuration Peripheral unit GPCLO1H LADDER EDITOR HI EH RS05 _ Ladder GPCB02H EH RS05 PCCB02H m WPCB02H EH RS05 a jip LADDER EDITOR for i Windows WVCB02H EH VCB02 r EH RS05 WVCB02H 10 18 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 10 6 Connection method for RS 422 485 communication Communication can be performed with an interface of RS 422 485 at the port 1 of the EH 150 Using the H series dedicated control procedure high protocol or general port commands TRNS 0 and RECV 0 communication of 1 N stations can be performed Figures 10 8 and 10 9 show examples when a conn
375. g time becomes variable and the value that can be monitored in WRF038 is H0300 This setting becomes valid immediately after setting 8 4 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 fe 4 Normal Scan 1 Definition and operation The normal scan refers to the calculations and execution of the ladder instruction language program excluding interrupt programs until the END scan processing caused by the END instruction or the execution of programs written in Pro H The time required for one scan from the beginning of a normal scan program to the END scan processing is called the normal scan time END scan processing system self diagnosis Ladder or instruction language program excluding interrupt program END scan processing Ladder or instruction language program END END END END instruction instruction instruction instruction Figure 8 8 Operation of normal scan 2 Causes of congestion errors at normal scan Congestion errors may occur at normal scan because of the following two possible reasons In particular when using a periodical scan program together care must be taken to create the program in such a way that the total scan time does not exceed the congestion check time a When only a normal scan program is used The scan time exceeded the eee check time because the time required for one scan was too long Periodical system processing 10 ms Normal ee scan processing E ee e scan Program execution
376. ges to 1 ms when R7F6 is turned on 13 4 Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs No Name Storage data Description Setting Resetting condition condition WRFO14 Word internal output Number of words for word EH CPU104 H1000 EH CPU208 H2000 capacity internal output WR EH CPU308 H4400 EH CPU316 H5800 EH CPU448 HC400 WRFO15 Operation error code Operation error code Operation error code is stored Cleared by the 4 digit hexadecimal user WRFO16 Division remainder Remainder data when division For a double word operation WRFO17 upper register lower command executed WRFO16 lower Set by the WRFO17 Division remainder For a word operation WRF016 only system acl upper Cleared by the WRFO18 Communication module 15 system 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O surup tag Pome PPE PEERED Bit number corresponds to the slot number 1 startup complete 0 startup incomplete 15 WRFOIA Baud rate set value 4 2o between CPU and modem Unused alb a S S s Cleared by th a 57 600 bps b 38 400 bps c 19 200 bps Set by the user eared by the d 9 600 bps e 4 800 bps f 2 400 bps user The corresponding bit is set to 1 The lower bit takes priority Tf all bits are 0 it is 2 400 bps Year Stores the 4 digit year value that is read or sets WRFOIC Read and set values for Month day Stores the read month day value or sets the set WRFOID 4 digit BCD Day of the week data Sunday Stores the read day of the week data or se
377. gher the interrupt priority Always use INT n and RTI in pairs Even if a startup condition is used for INT n it will be ignored Code the INT n to RTI subroutine program after the END command The n in INT n cannot be used multiple times within the same program Cautionary notes e This command is checked prior to execution and when there is an error the following error code is set in the special internal output WRFOO1 Also the CPU error code 34 is set to special internal output WRFO00 CPU error code Special internal output Error description 34 WREFO01 H0005 Duplicate definition of INT H0014 INT undefined The progress value is updated when the timer command is expected in the EH CPU448 Therefore if a program that does not scan the timer command execution section after the timer is activated is created using the interrupt scan the timer may not turn on correctly The timer does not turn on correctly when the time that does not scan the timer command execution section exceeds the time calculated by multiplying the time base by 65 535 Note that the previous progress value is also retained until the timer command is executed Instruction for use END e The program between INTO and RTI is started and executed every 10 ms LINT 0 J INT 0 scar 10 ms interrupt scan program RTI 5 140 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Control commands 12 End interrupt scan program RETURN INTERRUPT Ladder f
378. gram A jump to a subroutine or interrupt scan cannot be performed from a normal scan nor vice versa Nesting of JMP n commands is possible but caution must be exercised so that an overload error does not occur Cautionary notes e This command is checked prior to the execution and if there is an error the following error codes are set in the special internal outputs R7F3 and WRFO15 In this case jump is not performed and the next command will be executed Special internal output internal output Error description R7F3 1 WRFO15 H0015 There is no LBL n H0040 A jump is attempted to a different program area Instruction for use When the startup condition turns on it jumps to LBL n If there is a timer within the program it jumped to the progress value is Program updated but since commands are not executed output will not turn on even if the ON conditions are met Program 5 130 Chapter 5 Command Specifications DERN N commands 4 Conditional jump CONDITIONAL JUMP Ladderformat format Condition code Processing time us Other than R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 left Upper CJMP n s case Conditions do not Commandformat format Number of steps meet Li case CJMP n s 22 46 Conditions meet Woa Oef Double word word TD SS Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT m a ow255 becima Bo
379. haking HASSA Software reset 4 Header of target area b15 bil Unit No Slot No Word location Sets the unit number 0 to 7 Sets the slot number 0 to 7 Sets the word location from 0 1 5 Read write control bit I O number Sets the actual addresses of R L and M in the read write control bit I O number using the ADRIO command 6 Transfer source destination header I O number Sets the actual addresses of WR WL and WM in the transfer source destination header I O number using the ADRIO command 7 Size Sets the size to be read or written from 1 in word units 1 Description of read write control bit table 1 Execution flag Set to 1 using a user program when performing read or write 1 Execute flag operation using the FUN 201 command When the read or write 2 Normal end flag operation is complete the FUN 201 command resets this to 0 3 Abnormal end flag 2 Normal end flag Set to 1 when read or write operation by the FUN 201 command is normally completed When read or write operation is started the FUN 201 command resets this to 0 3 Abnormal end flag Description of borders Set to 1 when read or write operation by the FUN 201 User setting area command is abnormally completed When read or write operation E is started the FUN 201 command resets this to 0 User write prohibited area e When performing read or write oper
380. hat H00000000 lt s lt HSFSEOFF 0 to 99999999 Before execution s 1 B 4 F l Binary o ofofr ifef ofifofo 1 1jf1jil H1B4F 6991 After execution d 6 i 9 9 i 0 1 fos foo 1 fifo fo 1 0 0 0 1 BCD Combinations of d and s Double word Double word Cautionary notes e Ifdata is error the previous contents of d are retained Program example LD X00000 X00000 BCD WY0010 WL000 BCD WY0010 WL000 Program description e When X00000 turns on the content of WL000 is converted from binary to BCD and output to WY0010 WL000 HIB4F After conversion WY0010 H6991 5 111 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 25 Name BCD Binary conversion BINARY Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu44s EH cpus Other than BIN d s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max t e e e Upper 19 57 92 93 case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW BIN d s Word 3 27 83 amp 83 201 Double word 4 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT d TO
381. he I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the distribution data for s will be set in the lower 4 bits within the range between d and the I O For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table Upper digits Lower digits TIT B2 B1 Cautionary notes e When n 0 DER 0 and nothing will be executed 5 125 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example X00001 DIFO H DIST wR0000 WX0010 4 LD X00001 AND DIFO DIST WRO000 WX0010 4 Program description A 4 bit 4 digit Digit switch is connected to the WX0010 and the data for each digit is stored in WRO000 to WRO0003 as independent data Power supply X115 to X112 X111 to X108 X107 to X104 X103 to X100 WRO0003 4 H0009 WR0002 H0007 WR0001 H0004 WR0000 H0006 5 126 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 37 Name T O address conversion I O ADDRESS CONVERSION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Sme han ADRIO d s ERR SD e e Command format Number of s Condition ADRIO d s 84 202 Double word DR Usable I O DX DY DL Constant DM Conversion address etl I O to be converted The EH CPU448 can not be used
382. he base unit can be further tightened with screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws Open and close the cover when performing cable wiring During operation keep the front cover closed When opening the cover shut the power off first to avoid getting an electric shock When fixing is necessary use M3 x 6 mm 0 24 in screws for the set screws Upper side Connect these when using 24 V DC Peps NS AC input Connect input power supply Lower side The recommended crimp terminal is indicated below EXO 610 24 Recommended Care must be exercised when IEC few handling the terminal since it may fall off if the screw is loose Unit mm in 4 8 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table pte PS peciticatioms S k Rated output voltase J SCT Maximum DC output current BAT A Efficiency 65 or more Load of 5 V 3 8 A 24 V 0 4 A after energizing for per a Input voltage range 850 2HAVACwiderange i O HInputeurrent tress 85t0264V AC o 50 A or less Ta 25 C 100 A or less Ta 55 C Output short circuit protection Input leak current 8S mA ress 60Hz 264VAC i O Operating ambient temperature 055 C with rated toad O Operating ambient humidity 20 to 90 RH Non condensing Storage ambient temperature ooe Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH Non condensing 1 minute at 750 V AC between DC output and FE 20 M Q or more 500 V DC 1 Between AC inpu
383. he calculation box in conjunction with the LADDER EDITOR e A comment can contain a maximum of one screen 66 characters x 16 lines indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used 5 288 Chapter 6 I O Specifications Chapter6 I O Specifications External I O Classification of I O that can be used with the EH 150 as well as the I O points are indicated in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Usable I O classification and points Function i EH EH EH EH CPU104 CPU208 CPU308 CPU316 CPU448 Number Number Number Number Number of points of points of points of points of points External I O BD a Bit Bit external input input 512 bits 1024 bits At the time 64 points I O module is used At the time 64 Bit external output points I O module is used Pw w Wordexematinpat words is wow Fwy w Word extemal ouput Dx B Porte voeren n Y D Double word external output Double word external output Tc al 28 bis Cy 8 Eirene external utp Wx W Word remote external input Word remote external input 128 words Fwy w Word remot extemal ouput Dx D Double word remote extemal input Dy D Double word remote extemal ouput CPU link area L B Bitlinkareal sd Bit Bitlinkareal o area 1 16 384 bits a o 5 le E D Fard S Cwi w Word inkarest 1 024 words LDL D Double word inkara ee Birinu CDL D Double word nkaea gt CR e Bie special intemal oup
384. he initial setting in 1 Log data area memory board WR word internal output 1 WR0000 2 es WROOOL WRO002 WRO0003 Data for a single log 2 WX word external input WX0000 2 Wx0001 WxX0002 WM word internal output WMO0000 WMO0001 WMO0002 WMO0003 3 FUN 213 log data read Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function Reads to the specified destination after WR0003 the contents of the log data area written in 2 by the amount of data for a single log 8 words starting from the head of the log data area Log data area memory board 0000000 0000001 0000002 0000003 0000004 0000005 0000006 0000007 4 FUN 212 log data clear Data for a 3 single log mem 8 words Clears the contents of the log data area in the memory board Applicable log area WR word internal output WR0003 WR0004 WR0005 WR0006 WR0007 WR0008 WR0009 WROO0A WRO00D The table below shows the I O areas that can be used for logging and their allowable ranges ma Symbol Word external input owe WL1000 to WL13FF WRO to WR43FF WRO to WRS7FF WRO to WRC3FF WMO to WM3FFF CPU link area 2 Word internal output WL 16 words Allowable range EH CPU308 EH CPU316 EH CPU448 Cannot be used WLO to WL3FF Tf an area outside the corresponding range is specified the DER R7F4 bit is turned ON and the processing will not be performed Log data size and write
385. he next section explains the assignment of external I O The external I O numbers for the EH 150 system are expressed with the following rules Table 6 2 List of external I O classification and data type 16 bit synchronicity guaranteed za Double word type 32 bit Two word data are batch expressed WY X X DX DY 32 bit synchronicity is not guaranteed External output e 16 bit synchronicity guaranteed 32 bit synchronicity is not guaranteed Table 6 3 List of I O number rules for external I O Data type Numbering rule Bit type External input basic expansion External output Wes Bit number 00 to 95 in the module Slot number 0 to 7 Unit number 0 to 1 Remote number 0 to 4 Word type Word number 0 to 7 in the module Slot number 0 to 7 Unit number 0 to 1 Remote number 0 to 4 Double word type Word number 0 to 6 in the module Slot number 0 to 7 Unit number 0 to 1 Remote number 0 to 4 The external I O word type is a collection of 16 points and double word type is a collection of 32 points of the relevant bit type Example Relationship between DX10 WX10 and X100 to X115 is ae a oe elroy XUS o e aN 6 2 Internal Output Chapter 6 I O Specifications Memory in the CPU module is available as the area for internal outputs There ar
386. he next user program is executed scanned This series of operations is continually repeated until operation is stopped or until something occurs where operation can no longer continue When operation is stopped or if something occurs so that operation can no longer continue the CPU performs an output refresh with all output data as off data and stops operation regardless of the execution status for the user program Diagram outlining this series of operations is indicated in Figure 6 1 below Input refresh processing Input refresh processing Output refresh processing Time Execute scan user program System processing Output refresh processing off data Execute scan user program Figure 6 1 Overview of user program execution and refresh processing The user programs are executed in order usually from the program at the beginning of the scan area to the end of the program or until the END command After that I O data is refreshed prior to the execution of the next user program As shown above external I O data is updated in group in the refresh processing after the user program is executed If it is necessary to update refresh the I O data while the user program is being executed use the refresh command When designing the system take into account the above refresh operation from when the input data is received and operated on until output data is obtained 6 2 Chapter 6 I O Specifications T
387. he same No n when s is not WM 0 executes the next command 7 NEXT n NEXT Subtracts 1 from the s value n Constant 0 49 of the FOR n of the same No and jumps to FOR n CAL n Call Executes the SB n subroutine n Constant 0 99 1 19 2 subroutine of the same No n SB n Start Indicates the start ofNo n fn aa Sa 99 subroutine subroutine O RTS RETURN Returns from subroutine Bia SUBROUTIN 11 INTn Indicates the start ofNo n n Constant 0 2 i interrupt scan 12 RTI RETURN Returns from interrupt scan None INTERRUPT When conditions are not met When conditions are met 5 13 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 7 High function module transfer commands Process Process descriptions I O types used time u s Ladder symbol Classification Item number Command 1 TRNS 0 d s t General Transmits data from the t R L M purpose port CPU s general purpose port d WY Dummy I O transmission s WR WL WM command 2 RECV 0 d s t General Receives data at the CPU s purpose port general purpose port d WX Dummy I O receiving command High function module transfer commands High function module transfer commands additional commands for the EH CPU448 Process Process descriptions I O types used time u s 3 TRNS 7 d s t ID reader Sends data to the ID reader transmission module with the CPU s d WY Dummy I O command _ ladder program S Ladder symbol Classifica
388. he time calculated by multiplying the time base by 65 535 Note that the previous progress value is also retained until the timer command is executed Program example X00002 x00002 7 0 1s 5425 MS12 0 1s 5425 MS12 R102 An example of a word I O being used as the set value for the ladder shown above R7E3 LD R7E3 WRO0012 5425 WRO012 5425 X00002 MS12 Hoo 1s wR0012 LD X00002 MS12 R102 MS12 0 1s WR0012 Vv MS12 R102 7 c io e Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program description Time chart The progress value is updated and MS12 turns on at the rising edge of X00002 This rise is ignored MS 12 turns off when set value gt progress value X00002 is on at this time but it is ignored since the X00002 f Lt eS i startup condition for a mono stable timer is edge trigger Mst p ge trigg S u SW LNO R102 MS12 is turned on at the rising edge of X00002 again Set value 5425 i i and progress value is updated Even if the rising edge of X00002 is detected while the progress value does not reach the set value the mono MS12 progress value TC12 stable timer ignores the rise e Example using word I O as the set value When RUN is commenced the set value is set to word I O Or designate the word I O for the set value to store in the power failure memory beforehand 5 40 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item numbe
389. he word I O number Change the head I O number or size of the acquisition source The area of the argument S and the area specified by the argument S are overlapping Set the area of the argument S so it does not overlap with the area specified by the argument S There is no log data in the specified file address Calculate the value of file address again by referring to the log information table a 4 The size of the single log that was previously written to the memory board is different from the total size of the log groups Modify the program according to the previous log size Or execute the FUN 212 command to clear the data then execute again The read size exceeds 128 5 277 Set the read size in the range between 1 and 128 D jo N Zz D U n Cc Zz N jo O Error code details Error code Check point output destination Initial Write Clear Read Description and cause Chapter 5 Command Specifications Corrective action x O x x The log data area became full and no new log data could be added To recover this error read the current data using the FUN 213 command then clear the data using the FUN 212 command When the data has been cleared execute again No memory board is installed or the memory board does not support the logging function Set a memory board that supports the logging function Operat
390. head data is lost by the shift operation e Use the ADRIO command to set the actual addresses in the head I Os of s 1 e If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used The ADRIO command should be used to set the actual addresses in s 1 If not DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s and s 1 and the areas specified by them overlap DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Ifs 1 and the areas specified by s and s 1 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed t Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 219 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example X00409 DIF49 LD X00409 WRO100 5 AND DIF49 ADRIQ WRO101 WM100 FUN 49 WRO100 WRO100 5 ADRIOQ WRO101 WM100 FUN 49 WR0100 Program description Five bytes of data with control code is stored in WM100 and succeeding areas The control code is deleted from this data so that it becomes a data string containing only data Execution results 5 220 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Fun commands 3 1 Binary square root BINARY SQUAREROOT Ladder format Condition code R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 Processing time us EH CPU448 EH cpug Other than R7F4 left R7FO FUN 60 s DER ERR SD y C Ave max Ave Max Ave Max BSQR s DALARAN Command format N
391. heck for duplicate index numbers Program example X00200 FUN 120 WR0100 Sets WRO100 as an index in respect to argument d and sets FUN 121 WRO101 WRO101 as an index in respect to argument s Adds an index WRO0100 in respect to argument d WR0200 of COPY WR0200 WM100 255 the COPY command Then adds an index WRO0101 in respect to FUN 123 WRO100 argument s WM100 After the COPY command is executed the FUN 123 WRO101 index will be updated 1 FUN 123 t Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 249 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 57 Index cancel Ladder format Condition code Processing time us crccpusad eieo OFS Fan FUN 122 s per err sp v c_ INDXC s aeons Lacie Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 122 s INDXC s Wa Double word word Usable I O xX Y L WX WL TC DX DY DL DM Ps inexvow te fi fttl e Cancels the index specification that is set for argument d or s of the MOV and COPY commands e Sets the I O number specified by FUN 120 or FUN 121 tos Cautionary notes e Cancels the index specification for argument d or s in respect to both the MOV and COPY commands e Ifthe I O number set in s is not specified as an index DER will be equal to 1 and no processing will be performed Program example X00200 FUN 122 WRO0100 Cancels the index specification with which WRO100 is set as an in
392. icates that execution of the FUN 211 is not allowed the FUN 211 turns on 2 the ABNROMAL COMPLETION flag 3 A log clear parameter error is found during the processing of the FUN 210 4 As a result the initialization result does not indicate that execution of the FUN 211 is allowed The log clear parameters are correctly set 5 As a result the initialization result indicates that execution of the FUN 211 is allowed 6 The FUN 212 detects 8 the rise of the EXECUTE flag 7 and checks if the execution is allowed Since the check result is normal the RUN flag is turned on 9 and the log data is cleared When the log data clear is completed 11 the EXECUTE flag 12 and the RUN flag 13 are turned off The FUN 212 detects 15 the rise of the EXECUTE flag 14 and starts the second data clear The FUN 212 detects 16 the fall of the EXECUTE flag 17 However since the second data clear is not completed yet the processing continues When the second data clear is completed the FUN 212 turns off 18 the RUN flag 19 7 Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function Log error details When started in the logging mode the system checks the log data upon power ON If the system detects an error during the check it sets to the special internal output R7FE or WRFO7F an applicable error code from among the following error codes and then executes the program shown below At the same time the CPU error code AO is set
393. ied I O in WR WL or WM with the double word I O in DR DL or DM and increments the double word I O by 1 1 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the area specified by s exceeds the maximum value of I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed e When FFFFFFFFH is increased by 1 1 the result will be 00000000H Program example LD X00200 prno sostore AND DIFO DR0100 H00000000 LD X00200 a A AND DIFI s pz NNA FUN 124 WR0100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the DRO100 is incremented by 1 1 Internal output setting DR0100 H00000000 Operation result DRO100 H00000001 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 252 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Decrement DEC EH CPU448 EH cpus Other than FUN 125 s per ERR sp v c DEC s fe ele dae ee Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 125 s DEC s Word Double word word e TEE PTE DM s Argument D S S S E E CA S T T a S Function e Decrements the word I O specified in WR WL or WM by 1 1 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When 0000H is decreased by 1 1 the result will be FFFFH Program example LD X00200 2002005 DIPO WR0100 HFFFF I 4 AND DIFO WRO100 HFFFF X00200 DIFI LD X00200
394. ification table analog output module Type EH AY22 EH AY2H F Ouputeurentrnge 203 chanel 4020ma External 10 k Q or more 2 I a Insulation Between channels No insulation Number of Output voltage range 3 2 channels module 0 to 1 channel channels Output current range 3 2 channels module 2 to 3 channels Weight Approximately 0 18 kg 0 4 lb Internal current consumption 5 V DC Approximately 100 mA External power supply 24 V DC 20 15 Approx 0 15 A Approx 0 5 A at power On External wiring 2 core shield wire 20 m 65 62 ft or less Bupport for analog data and digital data mA 74 EH AY22 20 EH AY22 EH AY2H V0 Output current Internal circuit Output voltage 0 i i H0000 HO7FF HOFFF EH AY2H vV 10 Output voltage H0800 H0000 0 HO7E A complement of 2 10 4 Only for the EH AY22 NC for the EH AY2H 4 34 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table analog voltage output module EH AY4V EH AY4H Type Input voltage range 0 to 10 V DC 10 to 10 VDC Overall accuracy 1 or less of full scale value External load resister 10 k Q or more Insulation Channel Internal Photocoupler insulation circuit Between channels No insulation 4 channels module 0 to 3 channel Approx 0 18 kg 0 4 Ib External connection Removable type screw terminal block M3 In
395. ill be checked for logical validity and the result will be set in the PID Constant OK Flag 60 Upper limit over flag Read If the PID output value calculated by the FUN 2 is greater than the output upper limit UL 17 the Upper Limit Over flag 61 will be set to ym Lower limit over flag Read If the PID output value calculated by the FUN 2 is greater than the output lower limit LL 18 the Lower Limit Over flag 62 will be set to q FUN 2 error flag Read When there is an error in the output upper limit value 17 output lower limit value 18 or in any of the bit patterns 23 through 25 during FUN 2 processing the FUN 2 Error 63 will be set to 1 The cause of the error is set in error code 2 2 PID calculation will still be executed even if an error is generated If there is no error the FUN 2 Error flag 63 0 Nothing will be set to error code 2 2 Unused Unused 5 175 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 2 PID operation execution format Example 1 Using two loops with both loops set as TZ 2 x 20 ms 20 ms Note The system interrupt processing that occurs every 10 ms is shown with 2 cycles combined into 1 for ease of viewing System cyclic processing 20 ms cyclic Loop 1 processing Loop 2 Normal scan processing END processing Legend a FUNO processing b FUNI processing c FUN2 processing d Other cyclic interrupt proces
396. ill not turn on even if the ON conditions are met Program 5 131 Syntax of JMP CUMP 1 LBL n with the same code number as the code number n of the JMP command is required If JMP 1 is executed when there is no LBL 1 an LBL undefined error occurs JMP 1 will do nothing and execute the next processing of program A JMP 1 LBL 2 Program B 2 Jump is not permitted to outside the area in which the JMP command resides e When the JMP 1 command is executed since LBL 1 is not in the normal scan area a jump outside the area error will be generated The JMP 1 command will i X B do nothing and execute the LBL 2 next processing of program JMP 4 nae JMP 2 to JMP 7 perform similar processing Program head JMP 1 LBL7 JMP 2 LBL 3 Normal scan area END Subroutine area Subroutine area Interrupt scan area 3 Code number n of the JMP command and the LBL n with the same code number may not be overlapped JMP 5 LBL J LBL 5 e In the pre operation process the label commands and 8 have 5 as the code numbers so a duplicate definition error will occur 4 Nesting of JMP commands is allowed JMP 0 JMP 1 JMP 2 LBL 1 LBL 0 JMP 3 LBL 2 JMP 4 LBL 3 LBL 4 5 The JMP command can jump to a location before the command itself e JMP 0 will jump to LBL 0 which is a location before the JMP command LBLO CIMP1 X00000 JMP 0 LBL 1 e
397. imal Function The value of s bit word is copied to the range d tod n 1 The value of s is retained A bit is copied to bits and a word is copied to words n bits words Ifn is a word The contents 0 to 255 of the lower 8 bits b7 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC are set to the number of bits words to be copied Ifn is a constant 0 to 255 decimal can be designated for the number of bits words to be copied Cautionary notes e Use this command so that d n 1 does not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the transfer is performed to the maximum range For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table e Ifnis equal to 0 the block copy will not occur and DER R7F4 will be 0 5 103 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example The default value H2020 is set in the range of WRO100 to WROIFE Program description COPY WR0100 H2020 255 LD R7E3 COPY WR0100 H2020 255 WR0100 to WROIFE is considered as the communication data area and is filled with space codes H20 as the default value during the first scan after RUN commencement R7E3 The first scan ON after RUN WRO100 Not fixed Not fixed After RUN Not fixed Not fixed WROIFE WRO100 WROIFE 255 words 510 bytes
398. imately 120 mA External power supply 3 12 24 V DC 10 15 For supplying power to the S terminal maximum 100 mA 64 1 The module needs to be repaired in case a load short causes a blown fuse Furthermore the fuse cannot be replaced by the user 2 There are 16 points for each LED display The display group is switched using a switch The LED display is updated by refresh processing 3 Itis necessary to supply 12 24 V DC from outside to the S terminal Terminal Pin number and signal name Di 7 i contiguraton __ of external wing connector _ Diagram ot intemal creuit _ Left CN2 Right CN1 No hame No frame NO name No ame alsoe lol lal ala oloo ofis mem f HEHAOLNAEI fas a7 foo ss fo s leofa fan 38 oo sm 6 an 2 T fae 39 ow ss 7 few 23 dem so 7 a fos 1s an at 4 29 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 12 Input Output Controller Name and function of each part EH IOC Weight Approx 0 14 kg 0 31 Ib 1 Lock button Current Approx 100 mA consumption Dimensions mm in 450 77 95 3 74 4 k gt 2 Expansion cable connector 1 Lock button Used when removing the controller from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the fixation can be reinforced using screws In this case use
399. in a torque range of 0 49 to 0 78 N m d Use the same power supply system for the basic and expansion units Chapter 9 PLC Installation Loading Wiring 4 Wiring cable for I O signals Screws for all terminals are M3 Tighten within a torque range of 0 49 to 0 78 N m When using a crimp terminal use one with an outer diameter of 6 mm 0 24 in or less Use only up to two crimp terminals in the same terminal Avoid clamping down more than three at the same time Use a cable thickness of maximum 0 75 mm 0 0011 in Use a 0 5 mm 0 00075 in cable when adding two crimp terminals in the same terminal Note When corresponding to CE marking EMC command is necessary use shielded cable for the relay output module 1 Align the tip of the terminal block mounting screws to the screw section of the I O cover insertion fittings 2 Push in the top of the terminal block until the T O cover claw section locks with a click 3 While holding down the upper part of the terminal block tighten the terminal block mounting screws 4 Pull on the top of the terminal block to make sure that it is locked and cannot come out Note If the terminal block is removed always reinstall it following the instructions above 5 Input wiring for thep input module DC input EH XD16 EH XD8 ae O 38 C Current output type 24 VDC proximity switch Example of E
400. inating telephone number is stored s 4 Type WR HOO0A s 5 WL H000B WM HO000C T O No H0000 to HFFFF Transmission data area size Specify the size of the transmission data area in units of words Dial interval Set the dial wait time for the second and subsequent dialing 0 5 sec 0 Waits until the next dial with a time of xls Non response monitor time Specify the timeout time after a command is issued to the modem 0 10 sec 0 Times out with a time of 1s Modem PLC transmission speed Specify the transmission speed between the modem and PLC Setting value 9600 bps Transmission format Specify the transmission format 5 159 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Function 6 Description of area t t 13 t hakahua 91 81 aalas art ar 31 20 C Bit set by the user 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Communication execution This bit is set to 1 when the communication is performed using the TRNS 8 command After communication is completed the TRNS 8 command resets the area to 0 Normal completion This bit is set to 1 when communication started by the TRNS 8 command ends normally Also the TRNS 8 command resets this bit to 0 when communication is commenced Abnormal completion This bit is set to 1 when communication started by the TRNS 8 command ends abnormally Also the TRNS 8 comman
401. ined 0B Jndefined 0C o e w e A nt Jndefined 10 Jndefined 11 Slave station No 3 detail information Slave station No 4 detail information Slave station No 5 detail information Slave station No 6 detail information Slave station No 7 detail information Cc Slave station No 8 detail information Slave station No 9 detail information G Slave station No 10 detail information Slave station No 11 detail information Slave station No 12 detail information Slave station No 13 detail information Slave station No 14 detail information Slave station No 15 detail information en EN 5 a 12 VO vif mma sot No Oooo o i o fas 15 Refresh time maximum E eee ed Refresh time minimum Refresh time present A E E 16 17 a Bit number corresponds to the slave station number 1 participating 0 non participating b Bit number corresponds to the slave station number 1 error 0 no error c Time out error 1 error 0 no error k Same asc d Frame error 1 error 0 no error 1 Same as d e System bus error 1 error 0 no error m Undefined f Slave station I O error 1 error 0 no error n Same asf g Duplicate station number 1 error 0 no error o Same as g h Slave station connection mismatch 1 error 0 no error p Sameash i I O information mismatch 1 error 0 no error q Same asi j Remote p
402. ing the ADRIO command indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used For the data logging management table see Management table details For the error codes to be set see Error code details t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 284 Cautionary notes If an error occurs an error code is set and DER becomes equal to 1 If this happens the log data read will not be performed Chapter 5 Command Specifications If this command is executed when the initialization result in the data logging management table corresponding to the FUN 210 initial setting for data logging is execution not allowed an error will occur An error will occur if the specified log data address does not exist If the specified log data does not exist an error will occur after the read An error will occur if the area specified by the argument S or S 3 exceeds the maximum value for the I O number An error will occur if the area specified by the argument S and the one specified by S 3 overlap An error will occur if the dip switch setting on the memory board specifies any mode other than the data logging mode If the memory board is currently in use for other processing DER becomes equal to 0 and R7F7 becomes equal to 1 If this happens the processing will not be performed Program example The following shows a sample program that performs initial setting for log data read and then reads the logg
403. ing with the previous elapsed value when the timer coil command is executed The execution of a user program halts temporarily when it is changed in RUN Therefore the timer elapsed value will not be updated when the CPU is in the HALT state Reference The timer elapsed values of EH CPU104 208 308 316 are updated periodically Therefore these timer elapsed values are updated even in the HALT state 2 Transferring changed programs to the FLASH memory EH CPU448 loads the programs that have been changed in RUN to the FLASH memory after the change in RUN display on the peripheral unit goes off If the CPU power is turned off while a changed program is being transferred to the FLASH memory that program may be damaged To prevent this the special internal output R7EF which indicates that programs are being transferred to the FLASH memory turns on while programs are being transferred to the FLASH memory has been added Before turning off the CPU power be sure that this special internal output R7FF is off or wait for about two minutes after the change in RUN operation The EH 150 operation when the user program is changed in RUN is shown below Online change in RUN Program modification Displays that online change in RUN is being performed programming device Displays that online change in EH CPU448 RUN is being performed programming device EH CPU104 208 308 316 Assemble check Error stop
404. ints 24 V DCine xej o o T6 points 24V DCi xep o o XAHIG Output module EF 16 points transistor output 12 24 V DC sink type 16 points transistor output 12 24 V DC source type 16 points transistor output 12 24 V DC source type Y16 protection function 32 points transistor output 12 24 V DC sink type 32 points transistor output 12 24 V DC source type 64 points transistor output 12 24 V DC sink type 64 points transistor output 12 24 V DC source type protection function 1 Base unit w Gd Go od od od od jan fani pe es fani fani fani pes an aila ladlad Eal P lt OSI Eal PS Fy 2S 12 212 S 2 alol Z alQBlo tH ae lt E a EH YTP16S EH YT32 EH YTP32 EH YT64 les jan lt grl a p m jan lt n K Analog module EH AX44 Current input channels 0 to 3 4 to 20 mA WX8W Voltage input channels 4 to 7 0 to 10 VDC z 7 AXBV AX8H Current output channels 2 to 3 4 to 20 mA 1 When 64 points I O module is used 2 The CPU module power supply module I O controller and other devices may only be installed at the designated locations They cannot be installed in any other locations Always assign open 16 points when assigning an I O to an open slot 4 1 lesi fesi fes tO TE Ea gt gt gt gt Hkk AJAN N TL 8 Chapter 4 System Equipment Table 4 1 List of system equipment 2 2 Product Model name Specification Occupied
405. ion Contact FCN 363J AU space accordingly Cover FCN 360C040 E Use a shielded cable and always use a Class D Pressure displacement type grounding FCN 367J040 AU F 4 17 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table EH XD32 Approximately 4 3 mA po Smsortess OE OFF ON 5 ms or less ON OFF 5 ms or less 32 points module 32 points 1 common common terminal is 4 1 None Photocoupler insulation LED green 2 Connector Internal current consumption 5 V DC Approximately 100 mA T O assignment X32 1 Commons are connected internally 2 There are 16 points for each LED display The displaying of the upper lower 16 points is toggled using a switch Terminal configuration Diagram of internal circuit EH XD32 Internal circuit 4 18 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 8 64 point Input Module Name and function of each part EH XD64 2 Lock button Weight Approx 0 14 kg 0 31 Ib Dimensions 3 LED display switch l py mm in 1 LED cover 4 External wiring connector 100 3 94 LED cover This is the cover for the LED that displays the input status and displayed group When the input signal turns on the LED for the relevant number lights up The LED only lights when the module is energized 3 LED display switch This is a switch used to toggle the group to be displayed on the input disp
406. ion Remarks Portable graphic PGM GPH Portable graphic programmer with a 2 m 6 56 ft connection cable PGCBO02H 3 programmer Command PGM CHH Command language programmer language programmer Graphic input HL GPCL Ladder diagram Command language editor LADDER EDITOR for GPCLO1H device support HL PC3 Ladder diagram Command language editor LADDER EDITOR software for PC98 series with CPU connection cable HL AT3E _ Ladder diagram Command language editor LADDER EDITOR for PC AT compatible personal computer HLW PC3__ Ladder diagram Command language editor LADDER EDITOR for Windows 95 NT 4 0 HLW PC3E Ladder diagram Command language editor English version LADDER EDITOR for Windows 95 98 NT Note MS DOS Windows 95 and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States HI LADDER attached to GPCLO1H can also be used 3 Don t use the option box model name PGMIF1H for the portable graphic programmer Its high current may cause the EH 150 system to break down 4 2 Chapter 4 System Equipment 3 Connection cable Table 4 3 List of connection cables Cable for connecting basic base EH CB10 Length 1 m 3 28 ft Basic base I O controller to I O controller Conversion cable for connecting EH RS05 Length 0 5 m 19 69 in 4 peripheral devices For portable graphic PGCB02H Length 2 m 6 56 ft between CPU and programmer programmer command language progra
407. ion and Performance Specifications Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3 1 General Specifications Power AC receiving power 100 110 120 V AC 50 60 Hz 200 220 240 V AC 50 60 Hz ee ee failure 100 to 264 V AC for a momentary power failure of less than 20 ms operation continues 0 to 55 C Storage ambient temperature 10 to 75 C Operating ambient humidity 20 to 90 RH no condensation Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation Conforms to JIS C 0911 16 7 Hz double amplitude 3 mm X Y and Z each direction Noise resistance O Noise voltage 1 500 Vpp Noise pulse width 100 ns 1 us Noise created by the noise simulator is applied across the power supply module s input terminals This is determined by this company s measuring methods O Based on NEMA ICS 3 304 with the exception of input module O Static noise 3 000 V at metal exposed area Insulation resistance 20 M Q or more between the AC external terminal and case ground FE terminal based on 500 V DC mega Natural air cooling 3 1 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications 3 2 Function Specifications The functions available in the EH 150 are described in the table below Description of function Basic functions The following functions can be achieved when constructing a system using the EH 150 An input signal is received from the control object operations are performed according to the contents of the program create
408. ion is the same as the transmitting data area Size of receiving data area The size of the receiving data area is designated in word units Receiving data length Receiving data length is designated in byte units However do not exceed the maximum value 256 bytes or the receiving data area If either is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and ends abnormally Start code Designates the receiving start code b15 Start code designate in H00 to HFF 0 Do not perform receiving by start code designation b0 through b7 are ignored 1 Perform receiving by start code designation 10 End code Designates the receiving end code b15 End code designate in H00 to HFF 0 Do not perform receiving by end code designation b0 through b7 are ignored 1 Perform receiving by end code designation 11 Transmission speed Designates the transmission speed 5 144 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 12 Transmission format Designates the transmission format The following four types of data communication methods can be designated depending on the settings of 8 through 10 a Designation by the start code and receiving data length i Receiving data structure _ Receiving data length _ Start code ii Parameter settings 8 Receiving data length gt 1 lt n lt 256 within the receiving data area size 9 Start code ara ie bl5 bl4 b8 _b7
409. ion was attempted in the write prohibited mode Change the dip switch setting to the write enable mode Hardware error was detected in the memory board The memory board may be damaged Replace the memory board The previous logging has failed To recover this error execute the FUN 212 command to clear the data then execute again Initial Write Clear Read Operation was attempted in a mode other than the data logging mode FUN 210 initial setting FUN 211 write FUN 212 clear FUN 213 read 1 When the initialization of log write is specified 2 When the initialization of log clear is specified 3 Cannot be output 5 278 Change the dip switch setting to the data logging mode Chapter 5 Command Specifications Fun commands 67 Log data write t LOG WRITE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us FUN 211 9 per ERR sb v c LOGWRT s eae ae EC Command format Number of steps Condition 1 188 1 025 1 587 973 3 Other than left FUN 211 s LOGWRT s Word Oef Double word word TD ea Usable I O Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU RCU CT Function e This command is used to log i e write to the memory board the items specified by the FUN 210 initial setting for data logging indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used For the data logging m
410. is cleared upon operation start or recovering from a power failure please specify the power failure memory The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 169 Chapter 5 Command Specifications PID operation control PID OPERATION CONTROL Ladder format Condition code R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 Processing time us EH CPU448 EH cpug Other than R7FO left FUN 1 s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max PIDOP s e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 83 140 197 429 131 216 FUN 1 s 3 PIDOP s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR F Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM M S RCU CT s PID control table O WR only Function e The FUN 1 s determines the loop in which the operation is performed after reading the PID Execution flag from the bit table area of the loop and the PID Constant Change flag e Set s in the FUN 1 s as the head number of the PID control table If set differently an error will be generated and an error code will be set to error codes 0 and 1 of the PID control table resulting in the FUN 1 not being executed e Program the FUN 1 s so that it is executed once during the 20 ms periodic scanning indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 170 Ja Chapter 5 Command Specifications Ladder fo
411. is minor However 4 Operation parameters O Operation control Set according to the user s Perform these settings when controlling the operation and operation purposes stopping using a specific I O If this is not set operation will commence automatically when the RUN switch is set to RUN Overload check time Set this when you wish to stop the CPU operation when the set maximum processing time for a normal scan is exceeded When the setting is not made this is automatically set to initial value 100 ms do not use this when not debugging 5 T O assignment This sets the I O assignment information of the CPU Always perform these settings It is recommended to use the EH 150 s convenient I O when programming assignment copy function Program name Set the program name using a maximum of 16 kana or Set this when easy program alphanumeric characters The set program names can be verification and maintenance are written into the CPU along with the program which will make desired the program verification and maintenance works easier 7 Power failure This sets the range in which the data in a specified area in the Set this when there is data you memory CPU is to be stored upon CPU power off or when commencing wish to maintain when operation RUN Settings for R WR WM TD DIF DFN are possible is stopped The special internal output data is unconditionally saved for power failure by I O number 8 11 Chapter 8 Operating and
412. it pattern WRO020E Output value bit pattern A R7E3 s I For loop 2 _ Sets the PID constant for loop 2 a R7E3 x II For loop 3 Sets the PID constant for loop 3 A Teen WR0404 3 ADRIO WR0405 WR0200 Sets the table for management Refer to the description of the ADRIO WR0406 WR0250 maintenance table ADRIO WR0407 WR0300 t FUNO WR0400 Checks to see if the PID constants for loops 1 2 and 3 are correct Please set the PID constant before FUN 0 executes 5 181 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example _ example User program R100 jO4jU09 doo7 User program 2 R101 User program O R102 Change R102 from off to on when the values for TZ Kp Ti TZ To TZ Tn TZ are changed for loop 1 Otherwise the changes will not be reflected in the PID calculations User program es a R103 User program Sy R104 User program CN Yy R100 CN Execution flag 1 Executes loop 1 PID calculations 0 Ends loop 1 PID calculations Non bumpless flag 1 Non bumpless 0 Bumpless PID constant change flag PID constant changes will be calculated when turned on S flag 1 Outputs 19 Initial Value The S flag takes priority over the R flag R flag 1 Outputs 0 D FREI flag 1 Performs PID calculations 0 Performed PI calculations 5 182 Chapter 5 Command Specifications P
413. itions according to the product specifications given in this document we will exchange or repair the defective part free of charge However the following conditions are not be covered under this warranty 1 Damage due to negligent handling or misuse by the user 2 When the cause of the malfunction is due to components other than the product delivered 3 When the cause of the error is due to a modification or repair performed by an entity other than the supplier 4 When the cause of the error is due to weather or accidents that are out of the supplier s control Further the warranty here refers to that of the product itself and does not include any damage caused by the malfunction of the product O General repair Investigations and repairs outside the warranty period 1 year will be charged Also we will repair damaged products caused by any reason not covered by the warranty and investigate the cause of malfunctions for a charge even within the warranty period Please contact the place of purchase Research may not be possible depending on the area of malfunction O Ordering parts or asking questions When contacting us for repair ordering parts or inquiring about other items please have the following details ready before contacting the place of purchase 1 Model 2 Manufacturing number MFG no 3 Details of the malfunction Warning 1 This manual may not be reproduced in its entirety or any portion thereof
414. ization setting Initializes the data logging function FUN 211 s LOGWRT s Log data write Writes the data to the memory board FUN 212 s LOGCLR s Log data clear Clears the log data in the memory board FUN 213 s LOGRED s Log data read Reads the log data to the specified I O area s WR WL WM 119 63 FUN 254 s BOXC s BOX comment Nothing is processed in the CPU FUN 255 s MEMC s Memo comment Nothing is processed in the CPU 8 These commands are supported by the EH CPU308 316 and 448 5 16 FUN commands additional commands for the EH CPU448 1 2 Classification Item number Ladder symbol Command symbol Command name Process descriptions I O types used Chapter 5 Command Specifications Process time us EH 150 Remarks FUN commands FUN 30 s BINDA s BIN gt ASCII conversion 16 bits Converts 16 bit unsigned binary data to a decimal ASCII code then stores it s WR WL WM 140 FUN 31 s DBINDA s FUN 32 s BINHA s BIN gt ASCII conversion 32 bits BIN gt ASCII conversion 16 bits Converts 32 bit unsigned binary data to a decimal ASCII code then stores it Converts 16 bit unsigned binary data to an ASCII code then st
415. k module abnormal When all of the special internal output data cannot be cleared for program execution reasons refer to the self diagnostic error code list and clear only the respective error flags by using forced set of the programmer or peripheral device If the internal output for a self diagnostic error R7DB WRFO00 is used as a system error for the stop condition of CPU RUN the R7DB may be turned on even with an error of the warning level battery error etc causing the CPU to stop Therefore do not use the internal output of the self diagnostic error as a condition for stopping the CPU 14 2 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting 2 Corrective actions when errors are generated The process flow when an error is generated is shown below Error generation Error is detected by the CPU module and displayed by lighting flashing unlit of RUN and ERR LEDs v Verify the self diagnostic error code WRFO000 with the RUNand ERR LED statuses or using a peripheral device and refer to error code list 13 1 v v Reference the word specialinternal output 14 4 Reference the bit special internal output 14 1 Reference the grammet assemble error WRFO001 detailed data 13 4 and remove the error cause Reference the operation error WRFO15 detailed data 13 5 and remove the error cause Remove the error cause according to the corrective action for each error
416. k module abnormal Slot number of the module present value 4 digit Day of the week Day of the week data always displayed BCD Sunday 0000 to Saturday 0006 Set by the i i ata q A N is p S st Undefined for the EH tas data always displayed system CPU104 24 hour system RFOOF Seconds Seconds data always displayed Lower 2 digits upper 2 digits are 00 RFO10 Scan time Maximum execution time for Maximum execution time for a normal scan is maximum value anormal scan stored in 10 ms units 2 F011 Scan time Present value of execution Present value of execution time for a normal Cleared by the a Unit number 0 to 1 b Slot number 0 to 7 WRFOOE EE a present value time for a normal scan scan is stored in 10 ms units 2 system when RFO12 Scan time Minimum execution time for a Minimum execution time for a normal scan is RUN starts minimum value normal scan stored in 10 ms units the first scan after RUN is HFFFF Set by the RFO13 CPU status 15 1110 Unused a system a CPU type 011 b Battery error 1 error 0 no error c Unused d Unused e Unused f Error 1 error 0 no error g Unused h Halt 1 executing 0 not executing I CPU operation 1 RUN 0 STOP 1 When checking to see which slot is currently in error turn off the respective bit special internal output the number within of the number column once or turn on R7EC once 2 For the EH CPU448 the unit chan
417. l in the same way as in the Knot symbol Press F1 to display Help menu Offline H 300 Writing to the program memory Perform a ladder write operation by either of the Ladder editor for Windows Ladder following methods in order to write the ladder E a ae Viewl Build B Mode G Utiity U WindowQw Help H to the program memory g Circuit write Ctl E 1 Click Build Ladder write in the Menu bar 2 Click the ladder write icon wl in the tool bar Ladder write operation 15 10 Chapter 15 Operation Examples STEP 4 Checking program errors Check to see if the program in the memory is correct Click Utility Check in the Menu bar The Check dialogue box is displayed Pull down menu e Click the All items or the individual check column to specify the items to be checked e Click the Execute button The Check Result dialogue box is displayed Check dialogue box The checking of the CPU can be specified at online mode fs CRUlError Check Ts Remote Error CHECKE fa Link Error Ghreck ky Ja CPU Procram CHECKE e Click the OK button The Check Result dialogue box closes Label check Check OK Check Result dialogue box Master control error check Check OK Timer Counter duplication check Check OK Note DIF No duplication check Check OK For example if the I O assignment of bit Y32 is DFN No duplicaiton check missing
418. l scan time is less than 3 seconds while running 4 Inthe case of ERROR it is not in the severe error status While a modification is performed in a status other than STOP or ERROR the special internal output R7EA modify in progress while running will turn on a Subcommand H02 fixed b Timer counter number H0000 to HOIFF 0 to 511 c Change code HOO Modify not performed HO1 Modify time base only H02 Modify set value number 1 only H03 Modify time base and set value number 1 H04 Modify set value number 2 only WDT command HOS Modify time base and set value number 2 WDT command H06 Modify set values number 1 and number2 WDT command H07 Modify time base set value number and set value number 2 WDT command Note When not making modification set 0 in all digits A 36 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Example When H05 change time base and set value number 2 is set as the modification code set 0 for the I O code E and the I O number f2 of the set value number1 which is not to be modified c d e f1 f2 g1 82 TEE TE 1 A Eira to H02 lea to jong e 0 because it is not to be modified Time base H00 Counter H01 0 01 second timer H02 0 1 second timer H03 1 second timer The counter can be specified when the timer counter number is H0000 to HO1FF 0 to 511 The 0 01 second timer can be specified when the timer counter number is H0000 to H003F 0 to 63 The 0 1
419. lay It switches as follows SW1 SW2 LED16 LED32 Display group OFF OFF Not lit Not lit 0 to 15 ON OFF Lit Not lit 16 to 31 OFF ON _ Not lit Lit 32 to 47 ON JON _ Lit Lit 48 to 63 4 External wiring connector A connector for input signals Applicable connectors Caution Please refer to the Remarks column and purchase the appropriate Manufacturer Fujitsu e Approximately 120 mm connector separately Takamizawa 4 72 in of space will be e Solder type required in the front of Socket FCN 361J040 AU O 1 2 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the attachment can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws the module for the Cover FCN 360C040 E connector and cable Crimp type Please choose the Housing FCN 363J040 installation location Contact FCN 363J AU space accordingly Cover FCN 360C040 E Use a shielded cable and Pressure displacement always use a Class D type grounding FCN 367J040 AU F 4 19 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table Input lag Lesa gt ON 1 ms or less T O assignment 1 Commons are connected internally 2 There are 16 points for each LED display The displayed group is toggled using a switch The LED display is updated by refresh processing Terminal Pin number and signal name oa F Fl fal Fs g name name name name an 32 3
420. lays whether or not the CPU backup battery is normal 1 Battery is not installed or voltage is low 0 Battery normal Memory status response to the subcommand H01 Memory type H00 H02 User memory capacity 208 308 EH CPU316 Data memory capacity EH CPU EH CPU EH CPU A 21 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications System software version response to the subcommand H02 The software version of the system software installed in the EH 150 Error code response to the subcommand H03 The same code as the error code output in special internal output WRFO000 self diagnostic error code can be read CPU name response to the subcommand H04 EH CPU104 208 308 3 16 448 H 302 Function selection subcommand HOO Request CPU status User program EH CPU104 208 308 316 448 running version H01 Function selection subcommand H01 Request RAM memory User memory Data memory capacity 8 k Steps capacity 4 kW A 22 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications CPU run stop designation Classification CPU control Function Controls the run stop of the CPU from the host It will end normally even if a run designation while running and stop designation while stopped are made Execution condition The following conditions must be met 1 The RUN switch is set to STOP and the number 1 DIP switch is on 2 The CPU status is not ERROR 3 In the case of function selection and st
421. lication commands 2 1 Name Absolute value ABSOLUTE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU448 EH cPU3 ee ABS d s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e o e t Upper 13 50 85 amp case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW ABS d s Word 3 16 amp 70 e 7 e Double word 4 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR E Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT d T O after absolute value is OJO OJO taken s T O before absolute value ololoiliolololjlolo is taken Function e Given s is signed set the absolute value of s in d e Ifs is positive or 0 The content of s is set to d C R7F0 is set to 0 e Ifs is negative Two s complements of the contents of s are set in d C R7F0 is set to 1 e Perform with d and s as both words or both double words Example R000 DIFO H e ABS WR0000 WX0000 When the value of WX is positive or 0 When the value of WX is negative WxX0000 H4C1A WxX0000 HCCIA d 5 d R7FO R7FO WX0000 oj Jofofi 1 fofofo ojofi 1 fo WX0000 ififofofififofofofofofififofifo 0 oloa ooa fil folol loli 1 ii 0 WR0000 fo 1 0 0 1 1 o ofofofof1 1 o 1 Jo 0
422. log data address lower H000A Setting of source log data address upper H0000 Setting of WM100 as destination area Setting size 5 words log Execution of log data read Of the three logs of data that have been written with each log consisting of 5 words the content of the third log in the memory board is transferred to the destination WM100 by the amount of data specified for a single log 5 words with X00002 the read start bit ON 5 285 FUN 213 s n Cc zZ N o v Program example Chapter 5 Command Specifications The following shows an example of a program that starts logging at every 10 minutes after XO turns ON reads the first and last log data when XO is OFF and then clears the log data ADRIO WMO0100 R100 WMO0101 2 ADRIO WM0102 WR0200 WM0103 64 ADRIO WM0104 WR0300 WM0105 64 DR204 H00000000 ADRIO WRO102 WR0400 WRO103 H0110 ADRIO WR0104 WM0100 ADRIO WRO105 R200 FUN210 WRO100 WR405 WR101 AND HOOFO R1 WR405 lt gt H0000 R103 R102 TD10 Harara R100 DIFO 4h WR0200 WRFOOB WR0201 WRFOOC WR0202 WRFOOE WR0203 WRFOOF DRO0204 DR0204 1 Writing of log data 5 286 Setting of actual address for logging information table Initializes the log write parameter table and log clear parameter table Log write parameter table not specified Log clear parameter bit table not specified Data logging initialization
423. lso use a cable of 2 m 6 56 ft in length model PGCBO02H on the programmer side to connect a programmer If a5 m 16 4 ft cable model PGCBO5H is used the programmer operation may become unstable 2 The programmer can only be connected to serial port 2 For more information on setting modes see Table 10 6 7 3 Chapter 7 User Program With the EH 150 the user program is controlled in ladder units and as shown with Figure 7 1 1 ladder can describe 9 contacts a type contact or b type contact and 7 coils I Figure 7 1 Size of one ladder Or one relational box can be described using the width of 3 contacts The relational box can be thought of as an a type contact that turns on when the conditions in the box are satisfied Figure 7 2 HHA Life O OS 4 l l Figure 7 2 Using a relational box O Chapter 7 User Program In addition if return symbols are used a ladder containing up to 57 contacts and one coil can be input within seven lines Figure 7 3 mmmH HHHH Ha HHHH H mjii Hmm m H l i Figure 7 3 Example of using return symbols A processing box can be placed in the coil position Processing commands application commands control com
424. lt is not within the range of le 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifs to s 5 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00200 X00200 DIFO DR0100 H43488000 AND DIFO DE0102 H42C90000 FUN105 WRO100 DRO100 H43488000 DR0102 H42C90000 FUN 105 WR0100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the real number specified in DRO102 WR0102 WRO103 is subtracted from the real number specified in DRO100 WR0100 WRO0101 and the result is set in DRO104 WRO0104 WRO105 Internal output setting WRO0101 H4348 WRO100 H8000 WRO103 H42C9 WR0102 H0000 Operation result WRO105 H42C8 WRO104 H0000 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 234 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Floating Point Operation Multiplication EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Other than FUN 106 s per ERR sp v c EMUL 9 Eee eee dives Ieee Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 106 s FMUL s Word Double word word e l TEE PTE DM Ps awe i PE PT TT LT LoL LL LT ees _ Function 15 stl 015 s 0 s 5 s 4 Real number portion Real number portion 15 0 15 0 x pen PEs Real number portion Real number portion FMUL 33 312 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion Multiplies the real number s s 1 with the real number s 2 s 3
425. lue 18 gt Output Upper Limit Value17 No output Output Lower Limit Value 18 lt Initial Value 19 lt Output Upper Limit Value 17 Outputs Initial Values 19 Output Lower Limit Value 18 lt Output Upper Limit Value 17 lt Initial Values 19 lt Outputs Output Upper Limit Value 17 Initial Values 19 lt Output Lower Limit Value 18 lt Output Upper Limit Value 17 Outputs Output Lower Limit Value 18 The S flag takes priority over the R Flag When the R flag is set to 1 it clears the output value to 0 D FREI flag Write Q Calculate PID without performing integrals or derivatives 1 Calculate PID using integrals or derivatives Unused Unused PID RUN flag Read When the FUN 1 detects the startup of the Execution flag 50 12 through 16 and 20 through 22 will be checked for logical validity and the result will be set to the PID RUN flag 58 Valid Invalid If the Execution flag 50 startup is detected by the FUN 1 when the PID RUN flag 58 1 PID RUN 58 becomes 0 and the PID process will end PID calculation in progress flag Read Sets the PID Calculation in Progress flag 59 in the loop in which the FUN 2 calculates the PID to 1 and sets all PID Calculation in Progress flags in other loops to 0 PID constant OK flag Read When the FUN 1 detects the startup of the PID Constant Change flag 52 the PID constants 12 through 16 w
426. lue is set to INIT Stag H H H H H H because the S flag takes priority l i i The output value will be 0 DR flag i 1 i wince the R flag is on when the S flag turns off j H H i H H The output value will be INTT per a Rae tip The output value will H A i H i H i continuously move toward the l l l l l i target value since the execution flag is on and bumpless The output value will be 0 i Initial value INIT 0 Output lower limit value gt FUN 0 has ended the execution normally c Timing chart example 3 Bumpless and non bumpless To set to bumpless set the non bumpless flag to 0 Non bumpless To set to non bumpless set the non when the a S flag and R flag is turned from on to off bumpless flag to 1 when the c S flag and R flag are turned from on to off 1 Execution flag 2 Non bumpless flag 3 S flag 4 R flag 5 Output value Output value upper limit UL Set value Initial value INIT Output value lower 0 limit LL e b b When the S flag and R flag turn from on to off the e When the S flag and R flag turn from on to off the output value will continuously change to move output value will abruptly change to move toward toward the set value the set value 5 178 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 4 PID command error code details e Error codes are shown using a 4
427. m example X00200 DIFO LD X00200 DR0100 H40000000 AND DIFO FUNI16 WRO100 DR0100 H40000000 FUN 116 WRO100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the square root of the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is calculated and the result is set in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal output setting WR0101 H4000 WRO100 H0000 Operation result WRO103 H3FB5 WRO102 H04F3 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 245 s ZLL NMA Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 53 Floating Point Operation Exponent Ladder format Condition code Processing time us rju ere OeTRan FUN 117 5 DER r m sp v c OD ae IRARS Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 117 s FEXP s Word Double word word e l TEE DM Ps awe PT TT LT Lol LL LT fremont Function st 3 s 2 s 1 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FEXP Real number portion Real number portion Performs an exponent operation using the real number value specified in s and s 1 as the arguments the sets the result in s 2 and s 3 An exponent operation is performed using 2 71828 as the base e If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes 7 e Whe
428. mal communication module abnormal base abnormal Wrong input at input CPU LED I O LED User program timings input power supply bad module or input module Monitoring by peripheral connection input module abnormal I O inductive will not input devices noise abnormal operation Wrong output from output CPU LED I O LED User programming bad connection output module module or output module Monitoring by peripheral abnormal I O inductive noise will not output devices abnormal operation Forced set Peripheral device CPU error code CPU Serious CPU failure peripheral device abnormal abnormal peripheral devices peripheral drive setting error cable abnormal S Correct or replace the faulty area Perform verification according to the item corresponding to the problem Verify the system operation 3 Operation J 14 6 a PLC will not start Chapter 14 Troubleshooting The CPU ERR LED does not turn off even when power is started nor peripheral devices cannot be connected line a POW LED of the power module is lit YES Self diagnostic error cod 11 12 3 14 serious failure in CPU NO v NO e e Capacity of power supply module DC power supply voltage at the output terminal e e unit YES Check the power supply module AC power supply voltage at the input terminal Supply power only for the power supply
429. mand Specifications c Details of word tables used for each loop PID management table Details Remarks Execution flag Write When the Execution flag starts up 0 1 the PID constant at that time is checked and the PID calculation value is initialized If successful the PID RUN flag 58 is set to 1 If there is an error the PID RUN flag 58 is set to 0 and PID calculation will not be performed PID calculation is performed while the Execution flag 1 When the Execution flag 0 the PID calculation will end and the output will become 0 50 Non bumpless flag Write Perform Bumpless processing Perform non bumpless processing PID constant change flag Write When the PID Constant Change flag is turned from OFF ON the PID constant that is used for the PID calculation is read again and this value is used to perform calculations After the PID constant change is complete this flag must be turned OFF by the user If there is an error in the PID constant PID Constant OK 0 the PID calculation value based on the previous PID constant will be used and the operation will continue S flag Write R flag Write When the S flag is set to 1 it reverts the output value to its initial value It performs the following output depending on the relationship between Output Upper Limit Value 17 Output Lower Limit Value 18 and Initial Values 19 Output Lower Limit Va
430. mands transfer command and FUN commands can be described in a processing box A maximum of 19 commands can be described in one processing box The processing box is executed when the condition in the contact section that is connected directly before it is satisfied and not executed if the condition is unsatisfied Refer to Chapter 5 Command Specifications for details on each command o o i WRO WRO WRI WRI WRI 3 WR2 WR2 4 WRO WX0 AND HFF00 Up to a maximum of 19 lines A maximum of 4 contacts can be described in one line Figure 7 4 Using a processing box Note For the LADDER EDITOR for Windows the processing box can be displayed in 1 contact point width so a ladder of 9 contact and 1 processing box can be input For details refer to the user s manual for the LADDER EDITOR for Windows 7 5 7 6 Chapter 7 User Program Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 The EH 150 can switch its operation status and stop status through various types of operations This feature is shown in Figure 8 1 Switch STOP and designate REMOTE Designate operation definition input Switch RUN Switch Cancel operation STOP definition input Switch RUN or cancel REMOTE Operation status Operation command task code oS Operation definition input ON and switch R
431. ment can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in Screws 3 LED display switch This is a switch used to toggle the group to be displayed on the output display It switches as follows SW1 SW2 LED16 LED32 Display group 0 to 15 OFF OFF Not lit Not lit ON OFF Lit Not lit 16 to 31 OFF ON _ Not lit Lit 32 to 47 ON JON _ Lit Lit 48 to 63 External wiring connector A connector for output signals Applicable connectors Caution Please refer to the Remarks column and purchase the appropriate Manufacturer Fujitsu e Approximately 120 mm connector separately 4 72 in of space will be required in the front of the module for the connector and cable Please choose the installation location space accordingly Use a shielded cable and always use a class D grounding 4 28 Takamizawa Solder type Socket FCN 361J040 AU Cover FCN 360C040 E Crimp type Housing FCN 363J040 Contact FCN 363J AU Cover FCN 360C040 E Pressure displacement type FCN 367J040 AU F Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table transistor output module Output specification Transistor output sink type Transistor output source type Rated load voltage 12 24 V DC 410 15 Minimum switching current 1 mA Maximum load current 0 1 A Output response time 0 3 ms or less Insulation system Photocoupler insulation Approx
432. mitting area and receiving area Timeout 1 The communication processing did not Increase the set value or review the complete within the set time frame processing contents H40 Receiving area full 3 Receiving data has been stored to the Increase the receiving area maximum capacity of the receiving area and there is no more open space i communication processing Verify the transmission path data format communication processing etc of the general purpose port Parity error Overrun error Overrun error has occurred during the communication processing Conflict error TRNS 0 RECV 0 has been started at two or Change the setting so that it does not more locations simultaneously startup at two or more locations simultaneously Port designation error TRNS 0 or RECV 0 was started when a Check port settings general purpose port was not designated mo Module specific error The high function module detected an error Refer to the user s manual of each module Since the I F designations of various high function modules are identical from the stand point of the TRNS or RECV command it is not possible to determine if the intended type is used Therefore no error indicating that the command and the module are mismatched is returned However when communication cannot be established due to discrepancy in the register configuration or the handshake bit location a timeout error if timeout has been designated or a module error is
433. mmands Legend Condition code DER Data error special internal output R7F4 ERR SD Set to 1 as an error when the I O number is exceeded or when the BCD was abnormally etc When there is no data error it is set to 0 Error special internal output R7F3 Set to 1 when an error is generated when a control command and a special command are executed The error code is set in WRF015 When there are no errors the prior condition is maintained Shift data special internal output R7F2 Performs shift in of the contents of SD by SHR or SHL command Over flow special internal output R7F1 Indicates that a digit overflow has occurred and the signed data range is exceeded as a result of signed data operations Carry special internal output R7FO Indicates the contents of digit increase due to addition digit decrease due to subtraction and shift out due to shifting Maintains the prior status Set to 1 when there is an error in operation results Prior status is maintained if there is no error Changes according to the operation result Processing time This indicates the command processing time average value of the EH CPU448 Since the processing time of some commands changes depending on the parameter setting and the number of data refer to the details of the command specifications 5 2 Chapter 5 Command Specifications j i Basic commands sequence commands l Ladder symbol Classi
434. mmer Peripheral devices GPCB02H Length 2 m 6 56 ft between CPU and graphic input device GPCB05H Length 5 m 16 40 ft between CPU and graphic input device GPCB15H Length 15 m 49 22 ft between CPU and graphic input device eS CBPGB Length 2 m 6 56 ft between graphic input device and printer an LP100 Length 2 m 6 56 ft between graphic input device and kanji printer KBADPTH Length 15 m 49 22 ft between graphic input device and JIS keyboard PCCB02H Length 2 m 6 56 ft between CPU and PC98 series WPCB02H _ Length 2 m 6 56 ft between CPU and PC98 series 25 pin WVCBO02H _ Length 2 m 6 56 ft between CPU and DOS V 9 pin EH VCB02 Length 2 m 6 56 ft between CPU modular jack type and 5 DOS V 9 pin 4 Required when connecting to programmer peripheral device including PC98 DOS V and PC AT compatibles 5 EH VCB02 WPCBO2H and WVCBO02H are cables for LADDER EDITOR for Windows 4 Others LIBAT H _ Lithium battery The battery is used in common with the H series 4 3 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 2 CPU Module Name and function of each part 7 Lock button 1 RUN lamp 2 ERR lamp i Approx 0 18 kg 0 4 1b EH CPU448 weights approx 0 20 kg 0 44 1b 3 Reset switch for the power failure memory protection Dimensions 4 Serial port 1 mm in 45 1 77 95 3 74 gt 5 Serial port 2 k O 0 6 Front cover
435. module Connection between the power module and base Check the CPU module and replace if necessary Check the base unit and replace if necessary 14 7 Check the CPU module Connection between the CPU module and base unit Check for erroneous connector on the CPU module b Will not operate will not run Chapter 14 Troubleshooting and remains stopped However the peripheral devices go on line Even if the PLC operation conditions are met the CPU does not operate the RUN LED does not turn on If the CPU is WRITE occupied the CPU will not run even if the RUN switch is switched from STOP to RUN The CPU starts running by pressing the GRS key after peripheral devices are connected S Self diagnostic error code YES Medium failure in the memory NO Self diagnostic error code 23 34 44 45 Medium failure in the YES user program NO Check I O assignments Check the memory e Connection between the CPU module and base unit e Perform CPU initialization e Set memory parameters Check the user program e Check programs using peripheral devices e Error special internal output monitor e Verify scan time e Correct program e Replace the CPU e Check for erroneous connector between the I O module and base unit e Check assignment table using peripheral devices e Can I O assignment be corrected e V
436. mor less 78 m or less 125 k bits s 500 m or less 6 mor less 156 m or less The maximum network length shows the value when a thick trunk cable is used The following are recommended communication cables and crimp type terminals for the cables Mfg d by Showa Densen TDN18 G Trunk cable thick cable TDN24 G Drop cable thin cable indicates the number of m s However available lengths are 10 30 50 100 300 500m Mfe d by Nichifu Trunk cable crimp type terminal TME TC 2 11 power supply line TME TC 1 25 11 communication line Drop cable crimp type terminal TME TC 0 5 common power supply line communication line Crimp tool NH 32 Note Node address and communication speed settings Node address NAI NA2 NA4 NA8 NAI6 NA32 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF E 2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 7 62 OFF ON ON ON ON ON E 63 ON ON ON ON ON ON Band rate DRO DRI 125 OFF OFF 250 ON OFF 500 OFF ON 4 52 Support I O module The I O modules that are supported by the EH IOCD are as follows Type Input size word Output size word EH XD8 EH XD16 EH XA16 EH XAH16 EH XD32 EH XD64 EH PT4 EH AX44 EH AX8V EH AX8H EH YT8
437. mple using the module and sample program from step 1 00001 Power supply CPU Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 00002 1S 10 Power supply EH PSA 00 Basic base EH BS3 A ER f 00003 CPU EH CPU448 Y102 1 Slot 0 EH XD64 64 point input Y103 0 Slot 1 EH YT32 32 point output 00004 Slot 2 EH DUM dummy AS 10 Operation of program Y100 0 Turn Y100 and Y 102 on and Y101 1 00005 Y101 and Y103 off and vice Y102 0 versa alternating at one second 103 1 intervals 15 1 Chapter 15 Operation Examples STEP 1 Starting the Ladder Editor for Windows 1 Start the personal computer Start the personal computer 2 Start the Ladder Editor for Windows system GRS screen From the Start menu of Windows Program Hladder Hladder As Ladder Editor for Windows is started the GRS screen is displayed 3 Switching to Offline mode Click Offline in the Menu bar The Read Edit screen is displayed Mode switching Pele oe o om 4 i ER dder editor for Windows Ladder wlalalelelololol lt 24 1 Press F1 to display Help menu Ofine H200 PC Edt 16 485e OZ 15 2 Chapter 15 Operation Examples STEP 2 Initialization Settings for the CPU type memory type and I O assignment are performed 1 Setting the CPU type Click Utility Environment Settings in Ladder e
438. ms a congestion error occurs if the periodical scan at 40 ms is started up again before all the periodical scans are completed i e the periodical system processing at INT2 does not end within 40 ms 8 6 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 3 Continuation of operation after a congestion error If a congestion error occurs when the special internal output bit R7C1 which specifies whether the operation should continue after a congestion error is turned on the execution of the periodical scan is stopped and the periodical scan is executed from the beginning again If the operation continuation specification for the normal scan is Off when this happens the scan stops as a congestion error at a normal scan If the operation continuation specification for the normal scan is On only the periodical scan continues to be executed in the event of a periodical congestion error Care must be taken because the normal scan is not executed under this condition Periodical system processing R7CO On R7C1 On Continue R7CO Off R7C1 On Stop Scan every 10 ms Periodical program Scan every 20 ms Periodical program Scan every 40 ms Periodical program Periodical scan Normal END scan processing Scan Normal scan program periodical interrupt Periodical interrupt 10 ms periodical interrupt restarts p Congestion check time gt Figure 8 14 Operation when operation continuation at congestion error is set 8 1 6 Periodical Scan
439. ms between the CPU and either the EH MEMP or EH MEMD memory board by setting the DIP switches of the memory board in advance and turning on the power Since the CPU starts up in a special mode the CPU will not switch to the RUN mode in this case Table 11 2 shows the operation modes that can be executed between each CPU model and the EH MEMP EH MEMD memory board As shown in Table 11 2 the maximum program size that can be transferred to the EH MEMD memory board is 16 k steps Thus to transfer a program of larger than 16 k steps and a maximum of 48 k steps in the EH CPU448 use the EH MEMP memory board Table 11 2 Sizes of programs that can be transferred to each CPU CPU model Program transfer Memory board CPU Memory board CPU Memory board CPU size EH MEMP EH MEMD EH MEMP EH MEMD EH CPU308 8 k steps or less Over 8 k steps EH CPU316 16 k steps or less Over 16 k steps EH CPU448 16 k steps or less Over 16 k steps and 48 k steps or less O Executable x Not executable because of error This event does not occur Chapter 11 Real Time Clock Function Memory Board Function Table 11 3 shows the LED displays when an error occurs during the execution of the program transfer function Table 11 3 CPU LED indications in the program transfer mode Operation mode Dip switch setting error Sum error in memory board Sum error in CPU memory Memory size error Q 1 Q z Unmatched check result J G
440. munication start condition M0000 is met the communication execution flag R000 is turned on Communication processing is performed between the general purpose serial port and external devices When the TRNS 0 normal command completion flag ROO1 turns on the end processing and clearing of communication start condition M0000 are performed When the TRNS 0 abnormal command completion flag R002 turns on the end processing and clearing of communication start condition M0000 are performed 5 150 Chapter 5 Command Specifications TRNS RECV command return code list eee ree en ee normally power or replace the module EAE ee ee ee ee the I O range E egom o hoamanta eae setting error correctly valid range a error exceeds the I O range range OE a maag ENB amga o anea error correctly valid range Receiving area range The last entry in the receiving area exceeds Set the receiving area in the valid range error the I O range Transmitting data The transmitting data length is set exceeding Perform setting so that the transmitting length setting error the transmitting area length data length is within the transmitting area Receiving data length The receiving data length is set exceeding the Perform setting so that the receiving data setting error receiving area length length is within the receiving area Area overlap error 2 There is an overlapped area for parameters s Set each area so there is no overlap and t trans
441. munication to the general port communication When the switching is completed normally the general port is enabled If an error occurs the switching will not be performed If the initialization command is required for the modem the initialization command can be specified If it is not required set the transmission size to zero This can be executed only when the line is being disconnected General dedicated switch request Switches communication from the general port communication to the dedicated port communication If this switching is done while the line is being connected the transmission speed and transmission format specified for the general port must match those for the dedicated port Call origination request Performs a call origination to the specified telephone number Call disconnection request Performs a call disconnection Both the dedicated port and general port can be disconnected When the disconnection is completed normally the dedicated port is enabled Line connection check Checks the line connection status 5 162 Line status Not connected Dedicated general switch request Call origination request Being connected Line connection check Call disconnection request Not connected Dedicated general switch request Being connected Call origination request Line connection check Dedicated general switch request 5 163 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Dedicated port General port Dedicated port
442. n DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 0 3 amp 2 15 18 lt 3 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM MIS RCU CT Function e Indicates the start and end of the processing box LD X00001 WY0010 WX0000 WY0010 WX0000 In the above example the operation of inside the processing box will be executed when input X00001 is on 5 32 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 21 Name Relational box start and end RELATIONAL BOX Condition code Ladder format Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7FI EH CPU448 EH CPus Other than ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Command format Number of steps 0 Usable I O Constant Function e Indicates the start and end of the relational box 5 33 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 22 Name On delay timer ON DELAY TIMER Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH cPu3 Other than TDn left Hs ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Command format Number of steps Usable I O Ss u aL 1NO Constant O 0
443. n 11 1 to 11 10 11 1 Real Time Clock Function scnecrssrurisr ikiii oin e iE EE EEEE A AE AE EE 11 1 11 1 1 Operation using a special internal output esesssseseseeeseeestesssrersrsrstereretstsrsrstseettnrsrstseserersrerses 11 1 11 1 2 Operation using task COdeS c1 csccsecestseeasecocevensdescvacactenedevedcaseecocacsdeensbstduendsceveavencebcosscnebensevee 11 2 11 2 Memory Board Function cceccccccssesseessceseeeseesececesececesecseceaeeseeeaecsaeeseceseeseceeeeaeceeeseceeeseceaeeaeeeaeeeenaeeaees 11 3 112 1 Programi transfer functions 6 cesces cave seceedesaecat entretan aE ERE AAE AETR EE 11 3 E22 SEO GOIN FUNCTION 5 200 603 ceacs ccastsseteanbicneaceudeoncentebacease EENE raaa SOANE Ea aAa AETS rE S NaO E N OnE SNS 11 5 Chapter 12 Error Code List 12 1 to 12 6 IZIV Error CodeS gena eee Rie hte decked eee este ORR ES ORT RS 12 2 Grammar and Assemble Error Codes 12 3 Operation Error Godeszeriesori iener renan in cedhiekialiaddeiielsaiviabidacincany Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs 13 1 Bit Special Internal Output Areas iece ecescs cries ceaxetesanestaiaiciesetess EER cena A E Ateedeeasanes cars 13 2 Word Special Internal Output Area 13 3 Remote Etrot Flag ATeno icv tite ieee ihe eek KORE Weld eee te ee ete ed eas 13 4 Link Error Flag Areale nanira daha alee hain Was cee deat eee ee Chapter 14 Troubleshooting 14 1 to 14 14 14 1 Error Indication and Countermeasure Procedures
444. n can be operated with either special internal output or a task code Clock data is retained by battery power Note that the battery is not connected when the module is shipped When using the clock function connect the battery and set the clock data However this function is not available for the EH CPU104 EE 1 Operation using a special internal output 1 Reading clock data By turning the read request R7F8 on the clock data at the time of the request is stored in the read value area WRFO1B to WRFOIF 2 Clock data setting The clock data setting is done by first set the data to store in the set value area WRF01B to WRFO1F and then turning on the setting request R7F9 At this time if there is an error in the set value the setting data error R7FB turns on When the setting request R7F9 turns off and the setting data error R7FB is off setting is complete 3 Clock data 30 seconds adjustment By turning on the 30 second adjustment request R7FA the seconds value will be set as follows depending on the value at this time e When the digit for seconds is 00 to 29 the digit becomes 00 e When the digit for seconds is 30 to 59 the time becomes 1 minute and the digit for seconds becomes 00 4 Defining special internal output e Operation bit R7F8 Calendar clock read request Reads the current value R7F9 Calendar clock set request Sets the contents set in the setting area in RTC R7FA Clock 30 second
445. n check Program check i Program check Conduct test operation OK OK oR Change the name and Operation check To End End modifi cation When creating a new When modifying a program When transferring a program When modifying a program program to the CPU for the first time during test operation Circumstance A program can be created When using a program that When performing CPU error Match the personal computer Point without having the actual was used in another H series check make sure the I O and the contents of CPU EH 150 specify H 302 as the CPU assignment matches the memory to enter the on direct type loaded module The match mode Afterwards the can be forced using the modification will be reflected loading read function in both the computer memory and CPU memory 1 For LADDER EDITOR for DOS version and LADDER EDITOR 1 xx for Windows Specify EH 150 after LADDER EDITOR 2 xx for Windows Table 7 5 System configuration when using the programmer Item Portable graphic programmer Ccommand language programmer PGM GPH PGM CHh System configuration a Cable EH 150 side EH RSO5 EH RSO5 Cable programmer side PGCB02H PGCB02H Note 1 Do not use the option box model PGMIF1H for the portable graphic programmer Because of the large current consumption the EH 150 system may go down A
446. n switch position 0 When RUN switch position One of these is on STOP is other than STOP or when RUN switch position is STOP and setting switch position is REMOTE 1 When RUN switch position is STOP and setting switch position is other than REMOTE R7E1 Operation switch position 0 When RUN switch position REMOTE is other than STOP or when RUN switch position Turned off by is STOP and setting switch the system position is REMOTE 1 When RUN switch position is STOP and setting switch position is other than REMOTE R7E2 Operation switch position 0 RUN switch position is Turned on by other than RUN the system 1 RUN switch position is RUN R7E3 1 scan ON after RUN 0 From the second scan after A Starting RUN RUN eee point 1 scan after RUN R7E4 Always ON Non status of 0 Always outputs regardless of CPU status OFF not Always possible R7ES5 0 02 second clock 0 01 seconds ON A 0 01 sec A Starting RUN 0 01 seconds ie Sse 3 point OFF 0 01 sec R7E6 0 1 second clock 0 05 seconds ON A 0 05 sec A Starting RUN 0 05 seconds ef 4 point OFF 0 05 sec 7 F Turned off by R7E7 1 0 second clock 0 5 seconds ON A 05s A Starting RUN 0 5 seconds fe fe 5 point the system OFF 0 5 sec R7E8 Occupied flag 0 Unoccupied Indicates occupancy status from the peripheral Occupied device R7E9 RUN prohibited 0 Operation allowed Indicates whether it is operation prohibited
447. n the operation result is not within the range of le 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 e Ifs to s 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed e Calculation cannot be performed when the value of s s 1 is lower than 7 0839639e 02 In this case DER is set to 1 Program example LD X00200 DRO100 H40000000 AND DIFO FUN117 WRO100 DR0100 H40000000 FUN 117 WRO100 X00200 DIFO Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 an exponent operation of the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is performed and the result is set in DRO102 WRO0102 WRO103 Internal output setting WR0101 H4000 WR0100 H0000 Operation result WR0103 H40EC WRO102 H7326 The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 246 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Floating Point Operation Natural Logarithm Ladder format Condition code Processing time us narju en cruer OeTIRan FUN 118 s per err sp v c_ FLOG s KAA ARAIRE Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 118 s FLOG s Wa Double word word e l TEE Pre DM s Argument PE eT eens Function s 3 s 2 s 1 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FLOG Real number portion Real number portion Performs a logarithm operation for the real number value specified by arguments s an
448. n the read control bit I O number from unit number 0 slot number 0 word location word 0 Set WM120 in the transfer source header I O number Set the read size to 24 words Start reading when the execution flag M0000 turns on Contact point R100 turns off when the normal end flag M0001 turns on Contact point R101 turns on when the normal end flag M0001 turns on Contact point R100 turns off when the abnormal end flag M0002 turns on After writing to the Y area is completed normally start reading from the X area Start reading when the execution flag M0010 turns on Contact point R101 turns on when the normal end flag M0011 turns on Contact point R101 turns off when the abnormal end flag M0012 turns on Chapter 5 Command Specifications Status control read write command Item number Fun commands 65 Name SC AREA READ WRITE COMMAND Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpu3 Other than FUN 201 9 per err sp v c SCRIW 9 E e cer eer Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 201 s SCR W s Usable I O Constant ie RS Function This command reads and writes data between the CPU and a module using the status control area The maximum read and write data sizes are different depending on the module For details on using this command refer to the applicable module manual By specifying the control type the read w
449. nal output WRFOO0 CPU error code Special internal output Error description H0010 There is no END command WRFOO1 H0022 There are two or more END commands H0032 A startup condition is used for the END command Instruction for use Normal scan program END command Subroutine program Interrupt program 5 128 Chapter 5 Command Specifications a NN commands 2 Scan conditional end CONDITIONAL END Ladderformat format Commandformat format Function If the scan end condition s is on the execution of this command returns to the head of the scan program and executes the program Condition code Other than R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 left Upper Processing time us Conditions eee ee do not Number of steps meet ats case CEND s eee 216 306 Conditions meet TD a Usable I O Y L WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT s Semendcondiion jojojo If s is off the next command is executed This command can only be used in normal scan programs and can be used as many times as desired This command can specify a startup condition In this case if the startup condition and s are both on this command is executed Cautionary notes EN Double word word WX WY WL TC DX DY DL DM e The CEND command is checked prior to the execution and if there is an error the following error codes are
450. nation 2 Line busy Line busy during call origination Termination detected When switching or during call origination No response The no response time has reached without the response of the AT command Dedicated port is being connected Being connected to the dedicated port during switch request Line disconnection No carrier is set during call origination Abnormal modem response Response from the modem is abnormal Abnormal port mode The port mode was set to the dedicated port during origination Telephone number setting error The telephone number set in the transmission data area started with a space The number of data to be sent was zero during origination Cannot switch from general to dedicated port Switching to the dedicated port did not complete normally 5 166 Program description 1 scan ON after RUN 1 scan ON after RUN 1 scan ON after RUN 1 scan ON after RUN 1 scan ON after RUN 1 scan ON after RUN WR3 1 WR4 HA WRS H10 WR6 10 WR7 0 WR8 10 WR9 6 WRA 2 WR10 15 WR11 H4530 WR12 H5130 WR13 H5630 WR14 H2643 WR15 H3126 WR16 H5330 WR17 H2644 WR18 H3200 WR23 3 WR24 HA WR25 H30 WR26 20 WR27 10 WR28 0 WR29 0 WR2A 0 WR30 12 WR31 H3220 WR32 H3220 WR33 H2020 WR34 H3120 WR35 H2020 M11 H3132 M12 H3334 M13 H3536 M14 H3738 M15 H3930 M1
451. nd This bit is set to 1 when the initialisation of the RECV 0 command is completed normally At this time 4 initialisation request is reset to 0 Continuation This bit is set to 1 when transmitting after receiving is complete After the communication the RECV 0 command resets this bit to 0 Parity error This bit is set to 1 when a party error occurs during communication Framing error This bit is set to 1 when a framing error occurs during communication Overrun error This bit is set to 1 when an overrun error occurs during communication Timeout This bit is set to 1 when a communication times out Input buffer full This bit is set to 1 when the receiving buffer is full Conflict error This bit is set to 1 when multiple RECV 0 commands are started simultaneously in the user program This forces the communication to terminate The RECV 0 command resets 7 through 12 to 0 during initialisation or when the TRNS 0 command is started Description of the transmission and receiving data area See the TRNS 0 Supplement e Ifthe CPU transmits data from a connected device after reception in your system it is recommended that you set 6 Continuation bit to 1 and specify the transmission mode after reception 5 154 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Cautionary notes e The RECV 0 command initializes the internal work area with one scan ON If
452. nd Specifications Application commands 5 Shift left SHIFT LEFT Ladder format Condition code Processing time 1s Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH cPus Other than SHL d n ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max o 16 54 90 Command format Number of s Condition SHL d n Usable I O Constant T O to be shifted Number of bits to be O shifted Function Shifts the contents of d to the left toward the upper digits by n bits Sets n bits of SD R7F2 contents starting with the least significant bit Sets the content of the nth bit from the most significant bit in C R7F0 Before execution _ n bits C R7F0 S After execution d B sp sp nbits gt Most significant bit MSB Least significant bit LSB Ifd is a word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 15 of the lower 4 bits b3 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 15 decimal Ifd is a double word Designates the shift amount depending on the contents 0 to 31 of the lower 5 bits b4 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 31 decimal Cautionary notes e Ifnis equal to 0
453. ng of communication start condition M0000 are performed When the RECV 0 abnormal command completion flag L0102 turns on the end processing and clearing of communication start condition M0000 are performed 5 157 Chapter 5 Command Specifications item h mber anster commands Name Telecommunication command TELECOMMUNICATION COMMAND Ladder format Condition code R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 TRNS 8 d s t R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 Processing time us Other BETI left Ave Max Ave Max e e o o Command format Number of steps TRNS 8 d s t Woa E TD SS Usable I O L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU DM RCU CT d Module loading location Double word word Hi sips Fe a a Head of communication t uses up to t 13 ees bit Function This is a communication command for controlling the modem that is used by the CPU s ladder program Set the WY to which an arbitrary I O is assigned in d Since this is used as a dummy it is possible to set open n points to a slot that does not actually exist in I O assignments For s set the head I O number of the parameter area in which various communication parameters control type head and size of transmission data area transmission code and transmission parameter are specified For t set the head I O number of the communication control bit area in which the start of communicati
454. nge starting from s For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table e Use to 8 forn Program example LD X00001 X00001 DIFI AND DIFI m ENCO WR0000 R000 4 i ENCO WR0000 R000 4 Program description e Upon the rising of X00001 the most significant bit that is set to 1 is detected within the row of bits R000 to ROOF 24 1 15 bits and a four bit binary number is set in the word I O of d Example Of R000 to ROOF if 1 is set in the 7th and 6th bits WR0000 is set to H0007 5 114 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 28 Name 7 segment decode SEGMENT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU44s EH cpu3 Other than left SEG d s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e o o J e Command format Number of steps Bit TD SS WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Usable I O Constant Decode destination head I O Decode contents Function The result of the content conversion of s as 1 digit 4 bit data into 4 digit 7 segment display code is output to d Output data 4bts ao tte late a a ars Program example X00000 DIFO LD X00000 ie SEG DR0002 WR0000 he DIFO SEG DR0002 WR0000 Program description e Upon the rising of X00000 the conten
455. nit number 0 to 1 and slot number 0 to 7 after s 1 Setting any other value will equal DER to 1 and that slot will not be processed e Ifthere is no I O assignment to the designated slot DER is equal to 1 and that slot will not be processed e Ifthe number of s n points exceeds the maximum I O number DER is equal to 1 and no processing is performed e Ifthe number of points exceeds 64 DER is set to 1 and the points exceeding 64 will not be processed refresh will be performed for up to 64 points Slot location number The slot locations are designated using the unit number and slot number The unit number and slot number are set as follows in one word units b15 b12 b7 b3 b0 0to0 0to0 Unit number Slot number 5 227 8L L NN n Cc zZ 2 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Floating point operation FUN100 to FUN118 cautionary notes The following describes some points of caution related to all the FUN commands FUN100 to FUN 118 for performing floating point operation Data for the floating point commands uses single precision floating points conforming to IEEE754 The internal representation of IEEE754 s single precision floating point numbers is explained below e Internal representation format of floating point Single precision floating point numbers are expressed as 32 bit data in the following format Sign bit S Exponent part E Mantissa part M The 32 bit data in
456. nment to PC memory Slot L ee Slot Edit C Executec Cancel For online mode it is possible to read the I O mounted on the CPU by the Mount button For details refer to the Reading Mounted I O of the programming device 15 6 Chapter 15 Operation Examples STEP 3 Program input 1 Input a program At first the output window displays there is no Ladder editor for Windows Ladder oid program in the bottom left of the Read Edit screen The cursor W which indicates the program input position is placed at the top left of the screen EG Fie Edit E View Build B Mode G Utility U Windowfw Help H laj x 2a Heek Sle s gle Hele Read Edit screen Output window 4t abl 4h 4 oH 0 0 l Program is not foun Press F1 to display Help menu Offine H2000 Pe Edt 16 03455step 0 7 Input procedure of ladder program Repeat steps 1 to 4 to proceed with symbol input The usual operations found in other Windows applications such as cut copy paste and move can be performed on already input symbols 1 Specify the input position Move the cursor by clicking the mouse or the arrow keys 2 Click symbols in the Symbol bar e O E 4t ab 4t 44 ot 0 0 0 l Program is not found Press F1 to display Help menu Offline H 300 3 Input the desired function I O comparison
457. notes e The combinations of d s1 and s2 are as follows Double word Double word Double word Program example x00000 LD X00000 1k WRO0003 WRO004 B WR0005 WRO0003 WRO004 B WRO005 Program description e When input X00000 turns on the difference between the values in WRO004 and WRO005 is substituted into WRO003 as BCD data 5 65 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 6 Name Binary multiplication BINARY MULTIPLICATION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPusas EH cpuss Other than d slxs2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max t Upper 30 76 e 87 case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW d sl x s2 Word 4 39 amp 85 amp 139 e amp Double word 6 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR F Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 8 RCU CT d Substitution destination O 0O 0 OJO s1 Multiplicand oj jojololololollo s2 Multiplier O 1O O oO O0 O0 O0 7 0 Function e Multiplies s1 and s2 as binary data and substitutes the result into d 1 upper digit and d lower digit in binary e The DER flag is 1 if d 1 has exceeded the usable I O range in this case only
458. nput Module 420 Ethernet Modules icias civa deceased See aaevseess a E sina ARE E EAE eaenibaese bdo eau eee 421 DeviceNet Master Module tasr anr a E a chossectscssa cave O Hk A E eaten nine lid age eee ee 4 22 DeviceNet Slave Module ccccscccccsiesetis ascacas chasse cna cases dhvenctucbstacsceadectecssuuiesdesstennthsed AEAEE E 4 23 PROFIBUS Master Module oo aaa aeaaee a eT NETE T A E ELTE OE E Ea AEA NT 4 24 PROFIBUS Slave Module iscccsccccscceccncessescvececanevceacsscsnasscetcsssecatserceseuueseeses EEE E ENEE EEE iT 4 25 Conversion Cable for Connecting between CPU and Programmer ete oo eeeeeseeseeseeeeseeeceeeneenereeeaeens 4 58 4 26 Cable for Connecting between CPU and PC IBM PC AC Compatible Personal Computer 4 58 Command Specifications 5 1 to 5 288 5 1 Command Classifications cccccesccescesseesecseeeseeeccesecseceseesecesecseceaecseceseceaesaeceseesecesecaeceseeseceeeeseceeeeaeeeaeeaees 5 1 5 2 List of Commands asseris esne oiai cb adchecntiuana shed K AEEA EEEE Ea Ai ies 5 2 5 3 Command Specification Details cc cecescescesseeseeseceseeseceseeseceaececesecseeeseceeeesecseeeaeceeeseceeesseceeeeaeensenaees 5 19 T O Specifications 6 1 6 2 External T O o 3 occcccseccis in iateehe css de a cece aaa i dbl i eae cba haus obec E S S E E EES rE ES Internal Output Chapter 7 User Program 7 1 to 7 6 Delt Memory Capacity ses cccchiccen series telstceseastelsccuseonds sands a aa cu
459. ntrol type 0008 Set the unit number within a range of 0 to i 7 set the slot number within a range of 0 to 7 and set the word location within the proper range 000A Target area range error 1 The target area header word location Set the target area within the correct size 1 has exceeded the last word range location 000C Transfer source The transfer source destination header Change the transfer source destination destination header I O I O number has exceeded the maximum _ header word I O number number range error word I O number 000D Transfer source The transfer source destination header Change the transfer source destination destination area range I O size 1 has exceeded the maximum area within the correct range error word I O number 000E Overlap error The area for argument s and the area Perform settings so the area for argument specified by argument s overlap s and the area specified by argument s do not overlap unit and slot not installed operation or forced write operation 0022 Non existent read or There is no area in which read or write Change the control type to forced read write area operation can be performed while operation or forced write operation controlling handshaking 0030 Timeout 2 No response from the module Check the attachment to the CPU basic base and restart Or exchange the module 0040 Conflict error Read or write operation was Do not startup simultaneously or
460. nts Designates N points words of I O numbers randomly and forcibly sets the designated data or resets the data area This task code can also be executed when the CPU is not occupied Execution condition CPU status READ occupancy Occupancy WRITE occupancy status Not occupied Number of bits number of words H01 to H28 1 to 40 T O code T O number Refer to the task code H40 Data I I l a Nth point Nth word gt Bit data Word data lt H0000 to HFFFF Response Response task code For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list a no by task code at the end of this chapter The EH 150 returns H00 normal execution even for I Os that are out of range A 56 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Task code response list Task Subcommand Response task code code Code FF Undefined H05 to Abnormal task code H01 Undefined subcommand H02 Undefined subcommand is set H None Abnormal task code H01 Abnormal number of H05 Only the task code is input steps words Not executable H03 Operation error HOC Setting is not in remote status Remote STOP is not enabled Not executable Operation error HOC Setting is not in remote status CPU is in error status WRITE occupied by other station Remote RUN is not enabled User set run condition is not satisfied Combination error A RUN prohibited task code has already been ex
461. o tear diato fs NOANSWER_ Notonehed OOOO 14 400 bps connection 3 Sequence An example of a communication sequence using the Omron made modem ME3314A is given below a b Note 1 Reception sequence DR on o cr Modem ATEOQOVO amp CI1 amp SO CR LF PLC ER on Initial setting Note 1 Waiting for reception 2 CR 2 CR 2 CR Modem PLC Forced connection when 3 rings are detected Modem Port communication begins from here ATA CR LF PLC Reception complete 1 The PLC generates the AT command that performs the initial setting of the modem 2 Tfinitial setting is OK the modem returns 0 3 When the PLC is in reception wait status and detects the result code 2 three times it connects the modem Disconnect sequence 3 CR Modem Port communication ends PLC Line disconnected The PLC disconnects the line when the result code 3 is returned Since the modem initial setup sets only minimal items from the PLC side connect a personal computer and perform necessary settings before making the connection Set the DR signal to always on 10 16 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 10 5 Port and Peripheral Unit Connection Tables 10 12 and 10 13 show the settings of the mode setting switches and the connecting cables to connect a peripheral unit to ports 1 and 2 of the EH 150 respectively Table 10 12 Settings of the mode setting switches for connectin
462. ode Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ala BCU d s DER ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e Upper 14 51 96 213 case W Lower case DW Command format Number of s Condition BCU d s Word 99 216 Double word TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Constant Number of bits set to 1 T O that counts the bits set to 1 Function e Of the contents of s 16 bits for word and 32 bits for double word the number of bits that are set to 1 are output to d 0 to Number of bits that are set to 1 Program example LD X00002 AND DIF2 BCU WR0000 DR0020 X00002 DIF2 1 1 BCU WR0000 DR0020 Program description e At the rising edge of X00002 the number of bits that are set to 1 among the data input to DR0020 is counted and set to WR0000 Example In the case of m ica 1 a an a 1 aa an ml Sa 1 SB or 3 DR020 1 of 1fofo 1 fofofof fof Jofo 1 1 1 1 ofofo Jo fof o o i gt the number of bits set to 1 is 16 decimal Therefore the result is WRO000 H0010 5 117 Chapter 5 Command Specifications
463. odifies the CPU occupancy mode of the local station to the READ occupancy This command cannot be executed when the local station is not occupying the CPU When modifying from WRITE occupancy to READ occupancy the parameter modification completion processing is performed Occupancy mode modification modification from READ occupancy to WRITE occupancy subcommand H06 Modifies the CPU occupancy mode of the local station to WRITE occupancy This command cannot be executed when the local station is not occupying the CPU This command cannot be executed when another station is occupying the CPU Occupancy cancel subcommand H00 Cancels the local station CPU occupancy When canceling the WRITE occupancy the parameter modification completion processing is performed Execution conditions in the occupancy status CPU occupancy status Function selection subcommand Toxa sid OL of x xo Loca sion is WRIECcauping x o o ofo Another sation is WRITE occupying x x x x 0 nly te cal sition is READocenpymg x o ofo Loveland ter sations are READ oosupying O x x 0 Oniy another vation is READ occupying x x x 0 Four oter sations ae READ occupying x x x x 0 From the viewpoint of host A host A is the local station and host B is the other station From the viewpoint of host B host B is the local station and host A is the other station A 25 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specific
464. odular connector Hirose Partner side Comparable to TM10P 88P Hirose Only RS 232C can be used with the EH CPU 104 208 TRNSO RECVO commands specifications Transmission speed set value For other specification details refer to the item in the list of instructions 10 5 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 10 3 1 RS 232C interface 51 sal 2 CD1 7 gt o 3 ERI 1 j Do 4 ER2 MDo s SD1 4 3 5 3 6 RDI T 7 DRI 7 8 RSI 8 Figure 10 3 Ladder diagram and pin numbers Table 10 9 List of port 1 signals abbreviation ou so O lt Orowdforsigoaal O O S ooa o e E ERI gt Transmission enabled signal a a a a When this signal is high level communication is possible o 5S m 2 Notification signal during carrier received 3 2 Outputs High U 1 lt lt 5 SDI 7 DRI Reception request signal lt When this signal is high level indicates that dedicated the host can send po a data Connect it to RTS signal on the host RSI H Transmission request signal eat When this signal is high level indicates that the CPU can receive data Connect it to CTS on the host 10 3 2 RS 422 485 interface ag SGI 2 CDI 1 3 ERI 2 5 3 A 4 TX 4 8 5 TXN a 5 g 6 2 7 6 RXN a 7 RX 8 RSI Figure 10 4 Ladder diagram and pin numbers Table 10 10 List of port 1 signal PinNo
465. odule will be erased and the communication with the CPU cannot be performed In such a case connect a programming device to the CPU and perform the I O assignment operation Note that the WRITE occupancy release operation is necessary when connecting a programming device 2 Initialization of the HI FLOW area subcommand H01 Only the HI FLOW area is initialized EH 150 does not support HI FLOW Initialization of the HI LADDER area subcommand H02 Only the HI LADDER area is initialized Zero clear of all user memory areas subcommand H03 Writes zero to all areas equivalent to the load capacity of the memory When the subcommand H00 or H03 is executed using task code H20 always execute the task code H27 parameter modification completion when the write processing is completed with respect to each user memory area A 31 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Program transfer with address designation Classification Function Writes the designated number of program steps to the user memory starting with the designated address For EH 150 CPU the operation of HI FLOW programs cannot be performed while the programs can be transferred Execution condition CPU status HALT ERROR STOP Memory area designation subcommand 1 H00 Parameter area A 2 H01 HI FLOW area 1 3 H02 HI LADDER area 4 H03 Parameter area B User memory address absolute address Number of steps to be written H01 to H3C ma
466. of control axes Highest frequency 400 k pulse s Positioning 256 points data Setting procedures 1 Sequence program 2 Positioner Note that the positioner is optional Positioning Method 1 Absolute system 2 Absolute system increment system 3 Increment system Positioning command 1 Pulse specification 2 um specification 3 inch specification 4 degree specification Speed command Automatic manual home position return 6 25 pulse s to 400 k pulse s u m s inch s degree s input function Speed stage Acceleration decel Trapezoid acceleration deceleration eration system S curve acceleration deceleration 3 stage acceleration deceleration Acceleration decel 1 to 65 535 ms eration time Backlash 0 to 255 pulse High low limit setting 2 147 483 647 to 2 147 483 648 pulse Pulse output method 1 Pulse chain CW CCW 2 Clock direction signal CK direction Use dip switches 1 and 2 to select the pulse output method and to switch between positive and negative logic for the selected method Pulse output 1 Open collector output Photocoupler insulation procedures 2 Line driver output Photocoupler insulation Home position return function 1 Arbitrary origin 2 Low speed origin return 3 High speed origin return 1 4 High speed origin return 2 5 Absolute value encoder home position return Absolute value encoder input Supports the X series and XII series by Yasukawa Denki and the P series by Sanyo Denki Notes
467. og data the user or Turned on by turned off even the system when power failure memory is cleared R7FF_ Undefined Donotuse o d S S 13 3 Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs 13 2 Word Special Internal Output Area Definitions of the word special internal output area WRF000 to WRF1FF are given below No Name Storage data Description Setting Resetting condition condition WREFO00 Self diagnosis error code Error code Stores the error number deleted in the CPU as 2 digit hexadecimal upper 2 a binary code digits are 00 WRFOO1 Grammar assemble error Grammar assemble error code Error code for user program grammar assemble R7D4 details 4 digit hexadecimal error is stored WRFO02 I O verify mismatch Mismatched slot number 1 5 1211 87 R7CD 0 a a Unit number 0 to 1 b Slot number 0 to 7 RF003 Communication module Mismatched module slot Mismatched slot number is stored R7CE I O verify mismatch number 1 lower 4 bits 0 to 7 upper bit 0 detail Set by the Cleared by the etails system user WRFO004 Communication module Slot number of the Abnormal slot number R7D7 abnormal slot number communication module with lower 4 bits 0 to 7 upper bit 0 abnormal 1 WRFO05 I O module abnormal slot Slot number of the I O module WRFO006 Remote I O master Slot number of the module R7DO station module abnormal with abnormal 1 slot number RF007 Lin
468. ogress value is f f stopped but the progress value is maintained X00003 i H H A cee no When X00003 is turned on again the progress value is re i i updated TMR13 S u YNL LNO X00004 pes tH CL13 i ze EN Timer coil TMR13 is turned on while the progress value f br Ee set value This state is maintained until the timer clear is Set value i i i i turned on 5 PA When timer clear CL13 is turned on the timer coil and rogress value o 9 TMR13 TC13 3 4 3161 progress value are both cleared While timer clear CL13 is on the startup condition is ignored The progress value is cleared to 0 when the timer is cleared Example using word I O as the set value When RUN is commenced the set value is set to word I O Or designate the word I O for the set value to store in the power failure memory beforehand Timer is cleared by the conditions immediately prior to the execution of the timer coil command 5 42 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 27 Name Watchdog timer WATCH DOG TIMER Ladder format Condition code Processing time 1s Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU448 EH cpu3s Other than WDT n left E o s1 s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max S J e e e J 3 Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 27 6 13 6 amp 14 4 15 1 OUT WDT nt sl s2 fi Bit
469. oints error 1 error 0 no error r Undefined Number of times transmission error is a cumulative total of the number of c or d error occurrences 2 Number of times transmission error is a cumulative total of the number of k or error occurrences 13 8 Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs 13 4 Link Error Flag Area Details of the link error flag area are given below 14 12 11 10 9 8 6 5 4 3 F 2 1 0 Local station error information Link operation status flag h CPU status flag i Error status flag j 1 Station 0 to 63 Error detail information Undefined Number of times transmission errors 2 5C Refresh time minimum 5E Refresh time present SF System bus error 1 error 0 no error b Undefined Area error 1 error 0 no error d Duplicate area error 1 error 0 no error Station number error 1 error 0 no error f Transmission path disconnected 1 error 0 no error Number indicates the station number 1 participation 0 non participation 090 Os Number indicates the station number 1 operating 0 stopped Number indicates the station number of the 4 bits 1 1 CPU error 0 normal 2 Undefined 3 1 HALT status 0 other than HALT status 4 1 running 0 stopped j Number indicates the station number 1 error 0 no error k Time out error 1 error 0 no error 1 Frame error 1 error 0 no error m Abnormal between CPU and link 1 abnormal 0 normal pas Error st
470. ommand execution section exceeds the time calculated by multiplying the time base by 65 535 Note that the previous progress value is also retained until the timer command is executed Program example X00000 TD10 5200000 O 0 01s 12345 TD10 0 01s 12345 TD10 TD10 R100 R100 e Anexample of a word I O being used as the set value for the ladder shown above LD R7E3 WWRO010 12345 WRO0010 12345 0 01s WR0010 X00000 TD10 0 01s WR0010 TD10 R100 5 34 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program description Time chart f f When input X00000 turns on TD progress value is updated x00000 a When input X00000 turns off the TD progress value is cleared TD10 turns on when progress value 2 set value TD10 R100 Set value 12345 a While X00000 is on the progress value increases but will not increase exceeding 65 535 When X00000 turns off TD10 also turns off and the progress Progress value i value is cleared of TD10 TC10 ae 3 4 5 e Example using word I O as the set value When RUN is commenced the set value is set to word I O Or designate the word I O for the set value to store in the power failure memory beforehand 5 35 OUT TD nts ie Cc J 4 z 2 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Expansion on delay timer EXPANSION ON DELAY Item number Basic commands 2
471. on EH CPU448 EH cPUs Other than FUN 101 s per ERR sp v c INTD s EROL le sc Condition 3 FUN 101 s INTD s Word Double word word e l TEE PTE DM Ps awe PT TT LT LoL LL LT fame Function s 2 s 1 15 015 0 15 0 15 0 Integer portion Integer portion lt INTD Real number portion Real number portion Converts the real number specified by arguments s and s 1 to double word data then sets the result in s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 _ indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e When the resulting integer value of the conversion of the real number specified in s and s 1 falls outside the range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 DER is set to 1 and s 2 and s 3 do not change e Ifstost 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00200 DRO100 H4EFFFFFF FUN101 WRO100 DRO100 H4EFFFFFF FUN 101 WRO100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is converted to an integer and the result is set in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal output setting WR0101 H4EFF WRO100 HFFFF Operation result WRO103 H7FFF WR0102 HFF80 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported
472. on N random points Z N occupied gt Or Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Function Indicates that the requested task code has been executed normally a Executed task code b Execution result data Refer to the description of each task code for details Function Indicates that there is an error in the task code requested for execution Task code undefined parameter error etc a Task code requested for execution b Return code Description Return code details are shown below A 16 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Function Indicates that the local terminal does not occupy the CPU during monitoring Task code requested for execution Execution result data Refer to the description of each task code for details Response task code Not executable Classification Indicates that the requested task code cannot be executed Format a Task code requested for execution b Return code Return code details are shown below H H H H H Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Response task code BUSY Classification Function Indicates that the requested task code was not executed because another task code was being executed Note Create a program so that transmission is retried from a request task code when BUSY is returned a Task code that requested the execution a Task code re
473. on control bits for initial settings and the result as to whether or not the communication ended properly are stored Description of area s 1 Return code 1 Return code 2 System area Cannot be used by the user 2 maystem area 3 Control type 4 Head I O of transmission 3 Control type data area 5 Size of transmission data area 6 Dial interval 7 Non response monitor time 8 Modem PLC transmission speed 9 Transmission format User write prohibited area O User setting area i Only the EH CPU448 308T 316T are supported 5 158 The execution result of the TRNS 8 command is set in the lower 8 bits as follows Normal completion 0 Abnormal completion gt 0 Used for system communication of the TRNS 8 command when the TRNS 8 command is executed This area cannot be used by the user Specify the control type of the TRNS 8 command 1 Dedicated general switch request General dedicated switch request TEL origination request TEL disconnection request Line connection check Chapter 5 Command Specifications Function 4 5 6 7 8 9 Head T O of the transmission data area Set the command to be sent to the modem with the TRNS 8 command Specify the initialization command if initialization is required when a dedicated general switch request is made the type and number of the head I O of the area in which the orig
474. on d n 1 gt Shift width Discarded lt J After execution ke dtn 1 gt d Ifnisaword The contents 0 to 255 of the lower 8 bits b7 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC are set to the number of words to be shifted Ifn is a constant 0 to 255 decimal can be designated for the number of words to be shifted Cautionary notes e Use this command so that d n 1 does not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the shift is performed at the maximum range For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table e Ifnis equal to 0 the block shift is not performed and DER R7F4 will be 0 Program example X00001 DIFI LD x00001 it T WBSL WR0100 3 AND DIFI WBSL WR0100 3 Program description e When X00001 rises the contents of WR0100 WRO101 and WRO102 are regarded as BCD code and shifted to the left by four bits WRO0102 WRO101 WRO100 34 H5678 H1234 Before the shift 2345 H6781 mO After the shift Deleted Set to 0 5 100 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 16 Name Block transfer MOVE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee MOV d s n DER ERR SD V C Ave Ave Ave t e e e 172 112a 260 165a 245 164a Upper Command format Number of steps a Quotient a Quotient a Quotien
475. onal expression SIGNED RELATIONAL Item number Arithmeti ds 1 nthmeticcommands 6 EXPRESSION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpuss Other than d sl S s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e e e Command format Number of steps T Condition Steps 18 44 84 202 7 d sl S s2 s is a double word 6 i n Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT d Substitution destination OIO sl Comparand ololol lo s2 Relational number ololol lo Fo Function e Substitutes 1 when s1 is equal to s2 and otherwise 0 into d assuming s1 and s2 as signed binary data e sl and s2 are both signed binary data When the most significant bit is 0 the value is positive when the most significant bit is 1 the value is negative sl s2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal b31 b16 b15 bO Sign bit 0 Positive 1 Negative Program example M0000 DR0000 S DR0002 H M0000 DR0000 S DR0002 Program description e When the values of DR0000 and DR0002 are equal 1 is set in M0000 Otherwise M0000 is reset to 0 5 76 Chapter 5 Command Specifica
476. onitoring the occupancy table WRF040 to WRFO4B when executing this command lt READ oa request Not executable error Member registration area READ occupied by the All peripheral registrations Even if peripheral A or B issues peripherals A and B are canceled a READ request a not executable error is sent because the occupancy is already being forcibly canceled A 26 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Forced cancel of local station occupancy subcommand H01 Cancels the occupancy of the local station The occupancy of other stations are maintained READ occupied by The occupancy by the local peripherals A B and C station B is forcibly canceled Function selection H01 Request Response A 27 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Calendar clock set read Classification CPU control Function Sets data to or reads data from the internal calendar clock of the CPU module Execution condition When EH CPU104 is used the execution not possible H03 response task code will be returned as this task code becomes invalid Request b to h are added when the function selection is H01 Function selection subcommand 1 HO00 Read calendar clock 2 HO1 Set calendar clock 3 H02 30 second adjustment Less than 30 seconds 0 second 30 seconds or more gt 1 minute and 0 second Year 4 digits in BCD c Month H01 to H12 in BCD Day H01 to H31 in BCD e Week H00 Sunday
477. onse task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter Monitor data b Monitor data Bit data Number of points 8 When the number of monitor points is less than 8 points the open bits are set to 0 H00 to HFF Binary image HOO to HFF Number of words Nth word Binary image H0000 to HFFFF A 51 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications A When the I O type code is bit and specified as less than 16 points Response N points The CPU detects the head of the monitor data according to the requested I O code and I O number then in response returns the monitor data for the number of bits requested B When the I O type code is word Data memory Nth word Ist word Response N words Nth word The CPU detects the head of the monitor data according to the requested I O code and I O number then in response returns the monitor data for the number of words requested k Word gt A 52 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Task code HA2 Forced set reset with I O number designation Classification I O control N continuous points Forcibly sets and resets the designated data in N continuous points words of data area starting with the specified I O This task code
478. onversion number to integer 38 FUN 102 s Floating point Integer Word to real number t 43 8 FLOAT s operation Integer to conversion real number 39 FUN 103 s Floating point Integer Double word to real t 47 8 FLOATD s operation Integer to number conversion real number 40 FUN 104 s Floating point The addition of the real t 70 8 FADD s operation addition number 41 FUN 105 s Floating point The subtraction of the real t 70 8 FSUB s operation number subtraction 42 FUN 106 s Floating point The multiplication of the real t 69 8 FMUL s operation number multiplication Ladder symbol Classification Item number Command symbol Command name Process descriptions I O types used Chapter 5 Command Specifications Process time us EH 150 Remarks D FUN 107 s FDIV s oating point eration division The division of the real number FUN 108 s FRAD s FUN commands Floating point operation radian conversion Angle to radian conversion FUN 109 s FDEG s Floating point operation angle conversion Radian to angle conversion FUN 110 s FSIN s Floating point operation calculate the SIN Calculates the SIN of the floating point number FUN 111 s FCOS s Floating point operation calculate the COS Calculates the COS of the floating point number FUN 112 s FTAN s
479. op designation the special internal output R7C4 is on 4 In the case of function selection and run designation the special internal output R7C3 is on and R7E9 is off In addition if the run control input is set using parameters the contact is on Note If the CPU is WRITE occupied by another station a not executable response will be made If the CPU is WRITE occupied by the local station execution is possible a Function selection subcommand 1 HO0 Stop designation 2 HO1 Run designation Response task code H00 when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter STOP subcommand H00 The CPU operation is stopped If a stop designation is sent when the CPU is stopped a normal response task code results If the CPU sends a stop designation during error the error status can be canceled However the error codes H10 to H2F cannot be canceled RUN subcommand H01 Runs the CPU If a run designation is sent when the CPU is already running a normal response task code results Stop designation Run designation Request Response A 23 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Function CPU occupancy cancel Classification CPU control Declares that the user memory will be accessed The user memory cannot be accessed by the host unless the CPU is occupied u
480. or code generated in the FUN 1 process is set in error code 1 If there is no error the previous condition is maintained Error code Contents and cause Corrective action Remarks The FUN 1 is being executed when the Do not run the FUN 1 until the FUN Set to the error code 0 specified by the FUN 0 is not successfully completed O is successfully executed S in the FUN 1 S The S in the FUN 1 S is different Set the same WR number for the S in Set to the error code 0 specified by the from the S in the FUN 0 S of the PID the FUN 1 S and the S in the FUN 0 S in the FUN 1 S management table 1 S xx22 There is an error in the set value I O Set the set value I O number 20 These are errors that may be generated number 20 in loop xx using the ADRIO command when the Execution flag starts up xx23 There is an error in the measured value Set the measured value I O number T O number 21 in loop xx 21 using the ADRIO command xx24 There is an error in the output value I O Set the output value I O number 22 number 22 in loop xx using the ADRIO command The sampling time 12 of loop xx is Set the sampling time 12 toa value These are errors that may be generated out of range within the range of 1 to 200 when the Execution flag starts up or when the PID Constant Change flag The sampling time 12 of loop xx is Set the sampling time 12 so that it starts up not a multiple of the number of loops becomes a multiple of th
481. ored a value of H1003 is displayed This setting becomes valid immediately after setting 3 Precautions The 5 ms periodical scan INTO which is supported only by the EH CPU448 should be used under the following condition Scan time of 5 ms periodical scan system processing time the value set in WRF038 lt 5 ms If this condition is not met the system processing time will become different from the set value because the execution of the 5 ms periodical scan has higher priority hence the system processing time is shortened Moreover if the 5 ms periodical scan is used there will be a periodical scan congestion error when the scan time reaches around 3 ms In this case the system processing time is fixed at approximately 2 ms 8 3 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 8 1 3 Setting System Processing Time EH CPU308 316 The system processing time of the EH CPU308 316 can be fixed at 5 ms By fixing the system processing time the normal scan time will not fluctuate and it is executed for 5 ms in 5 ms cycles The EH CPU308 316 of ROM Version 03 or earlier do not support this function 1 Operation and application Figure 8 6 shows the scan operation when the system processing time is fixed In this figure the system operation time corresponds to periodical system processing communication system processing thus it is possible to set this parameter Conventionally the operation shifts to normal scan proces
482. ores it FUN 33 s DBINHA s BIN gt ASCII conversion 32 bits Converts 32 bit unsigned binary data to an ASCII code then stores it FUN 34 s BCDDA s BIN gt ASCII conversion 16 bits Converts 16 bit BCD BCD 4 digit data to an ASCII code then stores it FUN35 s DBCDDA s BIN gt ASCII conversion 32 bits Converts 32 bit BCD BCD 8 digit data to an ASCII code then stores it FUN 36 s DABIN s ASCII gt BIN conversion 16 bits Converts unsigned BCD 5 digit data to an ASCII code then stores it FUN 37 s DDABIN s ASCII gt BIN conversion 32 bits Converts signed BCD 10 digit data to an ASCII code then stores it FUN 38 s HABIN s ASCII gt BIN conversion 16 bits Converts a 4 digit hexadecimal ASCII code to 16 bit binary data then stores it FUN 39 s DHABIN s FUN 40 s DABCD s ASCII gt BIN conversion 32 bits ASCII gt BIN conversion 16 bits Converts a 8 digit hexadecimal ASCII code to 32 bit binary data then stores it Converts a 4 digit ASCII code to 4 digit BCD data then stores it FUN 41 s DDABCD s ASCII gt BIN conversion 32 bits Converts a 8 digit ASCII code to 8 digit BCD data then stores it FUN 42 s ASC s BIN gt ASCII conversion designated Converts binary data to an ASCII code of the designated n
483. ormat Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7FI R7FO eH cPu44s EH cPUs Other than Command format Number of steps R TD SS WR DR Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU WM DM RCU CT ne ge eae a 20m E a a ne a ee e This command declares the end of an interrupt scan program Constant e When this program is executed the processing is returned to the program that was executing before the interrupt scan was performed e Do not set a startup condition for this command Cautionary notes e This command is checked prior to execution and when there is an error the following error code is set in the special internal output WRFOO1 Also the CPU error code 34 is set to special internal output WRFO00 Instruction for use A 0 01s timer is created using 10 ms interval interrupts WM000 is used for the set value WR0000 for the progress value and X00000 WR0000 0 R000 for the ti il i he or the timer coi When X00000 is off the progress value and timer coil are cleared When X00000 is on the progress value increments by 1 every 10 ms wes The timer coil is turned on upon WM000 lt WRO0000 ie WR0000 X00000 5 141 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Syntax of SB n RTS INT n and RT1 1 A subroutine can be programmed between a normal scan 5 It is also possible to program a subroutine with and interrupt scan
484. ort the input terminals before use e For unused channels of the analog output module unused current output channel 2 to 3 channels short the outputs before use e When wiring the external lines of the analog module route them through the shielded cables while separating them from other power lines or signal lines subject to differential voltage Shielded cables must be grounded on one side However whether it is more effective to ground on one side or leave both sides open depends on the noise environment condition in the actual use Provide appropriate grounding based on the noise environment e Use separate piping for the AC power supply line and the signal data lines e Wire the signal lines and data lines as close as possible to the grounded surface of the cabinet or a metal bar 9 7 Chapter 9 PLC Installation Loading Wiring 8 Shielded insulation AC power supply 3 noise filter Use the same power supply system for basic and expansion bases Leave a distance of 100 mm 3 94 in or more from the signal cable and 200 mm 7 87 in or more from the power line Always connect a Wiring to the module terminal Wiring for the power supply Use a 2 mn 0 0031 ir cable and twist it Expansion cable Ground wiring Use a cable 2 mnt 0 0031 ir or more and wire it within a distance of 20 m 65 62 ft FE relay terminal block Alw
485. ow to determine the remaining life of battery As a guideline replace the battery every two years even when the total power failure time is less than the guaranteed value shown in the table Battery life Total power failure time Hr Guaranteed value MIN 1 Actual value MAX 2 2 000 32 000 The guaranteed value indicates the total power failure time at the ambient temperature of 55 C 2 The actual value indicates the total power failure time at the ambient temperature of 25 C 16 2 Chapter 16 Daily and Periodic Inspection 5 How to replace the battery Battery LIBAT H 1 2 Front cover Space for the NS lead wire storage ay eS GN Connector z 9 Excess lead wire should 9 for battery be folded and inserted into the lead wire storage space Prepare a new battery LIBAT H Confirm that the newest program is saved on floppy disks If it is not saved always save a backup of the program on floppy disks for safety purposes Replace the battery while the power supply to the basic base is turned on Remove the old lithium battery from the battery case and remove the connector on the battery side Insert the connector on the battery side to the CPU module connector Insert it so that the red lead is and the black lead is Fold the excess lead and store it in the lead storage space If excess lead is not dressed properly the wire may be severed by the front cover
486. p condition is ignored Since the startup condition of the counter is edge detection the condition can not be detected during the first scan after the operation is started If the set value is set to 0 it is regarded as a coil that is always on and controlled by the CL n Program example X00005 X00005 CUI5 4 X00006 CL15 CU15 R105 e An example of a word I O being used as the set value for the ladder shown above R7E3 LD R7E3 WRO0015 4 WR0015 4 X00005 WR0015 X00005 X00006 CU15 WR0015 X00006 CL15 CU15 R105 CU15 5 45 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program description Time chart The progress value count is cleared to 0 by the counter clear CL15 While the counter clear is on Ignored Ignored the progress value will not be updated _ X00005 I f f f f 22 The progress value is updated at the rising edge of i booo i X00005 cLis ioi i E ee Counter coil CU15 is turned on since set value 2 und LNO S progress value CU15 The count value will not exceed 65 535 decimal Set value 4 The progress value and counter coil are cleared by t counter clear CL15 Progress value of po i CU15 TC15 i i The clear is performed under the conditions set immediately prior to the execution of the counter coil command e Example using word T O as the
487. points e The 1s and 1s time bases can be used for all timer numbers 0 to 255 e A maximum of 256 points can be used for the timers TD SS MS TMR and WDT in total However the same area as the counter is used Timer number and counter number may not be overlapped e Since the startup condition of a single shot is edge detection the condition cannot be detected during the first scan after the running is started e The progress value is updated when the timer command is expected in the EH CPU448 Therefore if a program that does not scan the timer command execution section after the timer is activated is created using the JMP command or master control MCS the timer may not turn on correctly The timer does not turn on correctly when the time that does not scan the timer command execution section exceeds the time calculated by multiplying the time base by 65 535 Note that the previous progress value is also retained until the timer command is executed Program example X00001 SS11 LD X00001 0 01s 12567 OUT SS11 0 01s 12567 SS11 R101 LD SS11 l O OUT R101 e An example of a word T O being used as the set value for the ladder shown above LD R7E3 WRO0011 12567 0 01s WROO11 LD X00001 OUT SS11 0 01s WROO11 LD SSII OUT R101 5 37 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program description Time chart The progress value is updated and SS11 turns on at the rising edge of X00001 X00001
488. pplication commands extraction etc Basi d asic commands 3 types Gusts Arithmetic command 113 types such as arithmetic x etc jump subroutine division Application commands extraction etc External Refresh processing vO 1 024 points maximum Special 64 points R7CO to R7FF 512 words WRF000 to WRFIFF CPU link 16 384 points 1 024 words x 2 loops LO to L3FFF L10000 to L13FFF WLO to WL3FF WL1000 to WLI13FF MO to M3FFF WMO to WM3FF Timer and counter Timer set value 0 to 65 535 timer base 0 01s 0 1s 1s Pewee E Counter set value 1 to 65 535 times 512 points DFNO to DFN511 decimal Peripheral device Programming software LADDER EDITOR DOS version Windows version Command language programmer Portable graphic programmer Graphic input device Self diagnosis PC abnormal LED display microcomputer error watchdog timer error memory error program error system ROM RAM error scan time monitoring battery under voltage detection and others Commands PID command 3 types data logging command 4 types floating point command 19 types high function module transfer command TRNS7 RECV7 ASCII binary conversion command FUN42 FUN43 dialing command TRNS8 extended timer command 2 048 points time base fixed at 0 01s communication communication communication 1 The same numbers cannot be shared by the timer and the counter TD is 0 to 255 2 Only timers numbered 0 to 63 can use 0 01s fo
489. processing gt i When power supply of 100 V AC is used Power on i 1 3s operation continues for 10 ms or less 2s E amp E a When power supply of 200 V AC is used L 5s operation continues for 20 ms or less 1 Powering on The EH 150 starts operations after a maximum of 3 5 seconds have elapsed after power up If the power for input module is not completely started when the operation is commenced the input that is supposed to be on will be received as OFF and operation proceeds so make sure that the power for I O module is completely started before operation is commenced Note When expanding the unit using the EH CPU208 308 316 448 turn on the power supply of the expansion side or turn on the power for the basic side and expansion side simultaneously If the basic side is powered up first an error will occur 2 Instantaneous power failure actions a When 100 V AC is supplied Operation is continued during instantaneous power failures that last less than 10 ms b When 200 V AC is supplied Operation is continued during instantaneous power failure that last less than 20 ms Note Make arrangements so that the power for input module is supplied while the CPU continues its operation If the power is not supplied the CPU will perform operation assuming the input data as OFF Exercise caution especially when performing operation that changes the contents of the power failure memory using input signals since the contents of the power
490. put Connect to polarity when using differential Phase B mput Connect to the open collector signal when using voltage input Connect to polarity when using differential input N C Vin M Connect to a 12 24 V DC power supply when using voltage input Connect to polarity when using differential Marker input Connect to the open collector signal when using voltage input Connect to polarity when using differential input a 25to27N C 10to12NC Do not connect anything ps we mp w Output Coincidence output Connect to the other input common for coincidence output Note The pin number defined in the EH CUE does not correspond to the pin number defined by the connector manufacturer Phase A CNI ooooo0o0000000000 oooooo0oo000000000 30 15 4 39 Chapter 4 System Equipment General specifications Operating ambient 0 to 55 degrees 20 to 90 RH Non condensing temperature humidity Storage ambient 10 to 75 degrees 10 to 90 RH Non condensing temperature humidity TO assignment Counter specifications Select via dip switch settings Common to both channels for the EH CU 2 phases 1 phase cw ccw ck U D 2 phases multiplication by 4 Differential input current 4 mA or higher Differential input voltage 12 to 24 V DC Minimum ON 10 V DC voltage Maximum OFF voltage Number of Phase difference of ea
491. quare root 30 Bit count FIFO initialization FIFO write FIFO read 36 DIST d s n Distribute 37 ADRIO d s T O address conversion 3 N 3 34 35 O Supported x Not supported Command EH 150 format o H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 H4010 1 Normal scan end CEND s Scan conditional end MP n Unconditional jump CJMP n s Conditional jump RSRV n Reserve FREE Reserve cancel FOR n s FOR NEXT n NEXT CALn Call subroutine 13 START n Start BASIC task 14 INTn Start interrupt scan program 15 RETURN INTERRUPT O Supported x Not supported E Ea 8 a 3 15 ee eE E Ee RE tell amp E R a le eteltetel betel M A 7 Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart High function module transfer commands Command Command name EH 150 H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 H4010 format to H 700 H 1002 H 20 H 300 H 702 x x x x XxX x TRNS 0 d s t General purpose port transmission command RECV 0 d s t General purpose port receiving command xf x 3 TRNS 1 d s t Data communication command for SIO CLOCK 4 QTRNSI d s t High data communication command for SIO CLOCK aaa TRNS 3 as S gt Data transmission command for POSIT H x x elg TRNS3 d s t High data transmission command for POSIT H See 9 RECV 3 d s t Data receiving command for POSIT H x 10 TRNS 4 d s t Data communication command for PO
492. quested for execution b The network address that detected the error Indicates that there was a communication error or the designated destination address does not exist A 18 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications CPU status read Classification CPU control Function Reads the CPU status memory load status and software version This task code can also be executed when the CPU is not occupied Execution condition Occupancy a Function selection subcommand 1 H00 Reads CPU status 2 H01 Reads memory status 3 H02 Reads system software version 4 H03 Reads error code 5 H04 Reads CPU name Response 1 Read CPU status subcommand H00 Response task code H00 when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter The read CPU status User program version H00 to HFF This value is counted up only when memory writing has occurred and the WRITE occupancy is canceled indicating the number of times WRITE occupancy has occurred This value is HOO upon power up 2 Read memory status subcommand H01 a c Response task code H00 when executed normally Memory type User memory capacity number of steps Data memory capacity number of words A 19 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Read system software version subcommand H02 T 10 b
493. r Basic commands 26 Name Integral timer INTEGRAL TIMER Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 Other than EH CPU448 EH CPU3 left ERR SD Vv Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max TMRn oO Command format Number of steps Condition Steps OUT TMR nt Usable I O Constant Timer number O 0 to 255 Decimal Time base Ols 1s 1s Set value Function Olojo O 1 to 65 535 Decimal Updates the progress value while the startup condition is on The progress value is not cleared even if the startup condition switches off and the update resumes when the condition switches on again The coil switches on when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set value and will not turn off until the clear input CL n switches on The progress value is set in TC n and does not exceed 65 535 decimal If the progress value is updated while the system is running the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point If an T O is set for the set value the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I O value since the set values are updated during each scan Cautionary notes e The 0ls time base can only be used for timer numbers 0 to 63 64 points The 1s and 1s time bases can be used for all timer
494. r more details see Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 EH CPU104 208 13 6 Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs No Name Meaning Description Setting Resetting condition condition WRFO39 Undefined Do not use Fe a ES a a E H80 Time out monitoring is performed for seconds port 1 The timer is set again upon reception of STX ENQ or NAK user WRFO040 Occupied member Occupied port number 1 F043 Occupied member Fixed to 0 z g oO gsi to F045 registration area 2 c E wn Set by the Cleared by the system system WRE046 Occupied member to F048 registration area 3 a 0 Not occupied 1 Read occupied 2 Write occupied er z X o 8 g pied memb b Loop number c Unit number to F04B registration area 4 d Module number e Port number When dedicated port Port 1 is H02 and port 2 is H01 04C Undefined Do not use to F04F RFO7E Link area clear mode selection EH CPU308 316 of ROM Ver 04 or later Wh6n a mode to clear a link area is selected the specified link area will t EH CPU448 kogo P oiko foshosfionbe fan 6 FTF 0 b a a 1 Link area 1 mode switch request this is set to 0 by the system when mode switch is complete Link area 1 0 Do not clear 1 Clear Sec byih el e 1 Link area 2 mode switch request this is set to 0 by the system when 7 SAA system or by the mode switch is complete Link area
495. r their time base 3 8 Chapter 4 System Equipment Chapter4 System Equipment 4 1 List of System Equipment 1 Basic devices Table 4 1 List of system equipment 1 2 Product Model name Specification assignment slot number symbol CPU module EH CPU104 512 T O points maximum 1 4 k steps Fixed 2 Cannot be expanded EH CPU208 1 024 I O points maximum 1 8 k steps Fixed 2 clock function modem control function EH CPU308 1 024 I O points maximum 1 8 k steps Fixed 2 clock function modem control function memory board function RS 422 RS 485 communication support PID command floating point operation support EH CPU316 1 024 I O points maximum 1 16 k steps Fixed 2 clock function modem control function memory board function RS 422 RS 485 communication support PID command floating point operation support EH CPU448 1 024 I O points maximum 1 48 k steps Fixed 2 clock function modem control function memory board function RS 422 RS 485 dedicated general port communication support PID command floating point operation support Memory board EF MEMP Program capacity 48 ksteps Frea Loaded in optional Data capacity 384 k words Output 5 V DC 3 8 A 24 V DCO0 4A BERD fawitigeravbe a a Output 5VDC3 8A EH BS3 3 T O modules installed Cd Basicbaseand EH BS5 5 I O modules installed expansion base are IEH BS8 8 O modules installed the same product Input module BH XDS 8 po
496. r to change the program while it is running The standard I O module uses a removable terminal block greatly reducing the trouble involved when having to replace the module LEDs are provided as standard to confirm operation status and wiring Further the battery can be replaced without having to remove the CPU module from the base unit The battery is replaced from the front simply by opening the cover of the CPU module 1 2 Chapter 2 System Configuration Chapter 2 System Configuration The system configuration of the EH 150 is shown below The EH 150 is a module type programmable controller with the configuration shown in Figure 2 1 1 Power module 2 CPU module 3 O module 4 Basic base 6 Expansion cable 7 V O controller 3 T O module 5 Expansion base Figure 2 1 EH 150 System configuration diagram Description of function Converts power supply to the power to be used within the EH 150 Performs operations based on the contents of the user program receives input and controls output Input module output module analog module etc Base in which the power module CPU module I O module etc are loaded Base in which the power module I O controller I O module etc are loaded Expansion is possible only when using the EH CPU208 308 316 448 as CPU module 2 The basic base 4 and expansion base 5 are the same product 2 1 2 2 Chapter 2 System Configuration Chapter 3 Funct
497. rage No defects Visual check condition Program Check program contents Compare the contents of the latest Check both master and program saved and CPU contents backup and make sure they are the same 3 Life of the power module Numbers of electrolytic condensers are used in the power module Electrolytic condensers have a lifetime and it is believed that the life is reduced by half when the ambient temperature rise 10 C When stocking spare parts the standard for consideration is that the power module has a life of approximately 5 years when used at the rated ambient temperature 30 C Also to lengthen the life of the module consider the air circulation around the module and ambient temperature when installing it 16 1 4 Chapter 16 Daily and Periodic Inspection Life of the battery e The length of the battery life is expressed as the total time during which the power supply for the basic unit is off e The battery life can be determined by checking for the flashing of the ERR lamp e The battery life is also displayed in the bit special internal output R7D9 An example of a ladder using R7D9 is shown below R7D9 Y00100 The battery error can be output to external output Y00100 Y00100 by using the ladder shown to the left Figure 16 1 Battery error detection ladder e The self diagnostic error code 71 indicates that the battery is not loaded or that it has reached its life Use the reference table bel
498. ral purpose port Set for RS 485 Set the own station number as 2 WLO own station number lt Set the own station number 00002 Time out None Transmission area head specification WM200 Transmission area size 32 word Reception area head specification WM300 Reception area size 32 word Reception data length Not specified Starts code 02H End code 0DH Transmission speed 19 2 kbps Transmission format 8 bit even parity 1 stop bit 00003 00004 Time out None Transmission area head specification WR200 Transmission area size 32 word Reception area head specification WR300 Reception area size 32 word Reception data length Not specified Starts code 02H End code 0DH Transmission speed 19 2kbps Transmission format 8 bit even parity 1 stop bit 00005 00006 Start the RECV 0 instruction when the TRNS 0 instruction has been completed successfully or during the first scan after RUN 00007 Store the target station number of the transmission from the master station Call subroutine 0 if the station number does not match the own station number 00008 Set the transmission data Number of bytes transmitted 5 bytes Set the start code and own station number Set the value of WLO station number in the transmission data Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 00009 Ols 2 00010 TD63 DIF2 NN R300 1 Start the TRNS 0 instruction after 20 ms has elapsed R400 0
499. range with respect to the smaller number of bits words specified in d1 and d2 For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table e Ifnis equal to 0 the block exchange is not performed and DER R7F4 will be 0 Program example LD X00001 X00001 DIFI E XCG WL000 WL1000 255 AND DIF1 XCG WL000 WL1000 255 l Program description e When X00001 rises the contents of WL000 to WLOFE are exchanged with the contents of WL1000 to WL10FE WL000 H0000 HFFFF WL1000 Before execution H0000 HFFFF WL10FE HFFFF H0000 WL000 After execution HFFFF H0000 WL10FE 5 105 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 19 Name Reverse NOT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPU44s EH cPU3 la NOT d DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e o o J e 11 45 80 Command format Number of steps Bit TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Constant T O to be reversed Function e Reverses the contents of d Before execution SES mocna SSII ofofofofififififofofofofifilifa Cautionary notes e Use edge trigger as the startup condition for this command Program example LD R000
500. rd D THE a s indexroNo Eet Se LEE e Sets the argument used as an index in respect to argument d of the MOV and COPY commands Cautionary notes e The I O value specified in the Index Area will be initialized to 0 e Index qualification will be performed to both the MOV and COPY commands e This does not check for duplicate index numbers Program example X00200 FUN 120 WRO0100 Sets the WRO0100 as an index in respect to argument d X00200 Performs copy processing after the index WR0100 is added in respect to argument d of the COPY command WR0200 After the COPY command is executed the index will be updated 1 FUN 123 COPY WR0200 H2020 255 FUN 123 WRO100 a c Z R DS oO t Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 248 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 56 Index setting argument s Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Enpi arcos Omer FUN 121 s r m sp v c INDXS s EIO eae Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 121 s INDXS s Bit Word Double word word D THE a s indexroNo Eek See LEE e Sets the argument used as an index in respect to argument s of the MOV and COPY commands Cautionary notes e The I O value specified in the Index Area will be initialized to 0 e Index qualification will be performed to both the MOV and COPY commands e This does not c
501. re operation resumes correctly have the power remain off for 1 minute or longer Operation parameters Each type of condition for operating the EH 150 can be set The possible settings for operation when an error occurs are given below 1 Operation can be continued when I O information does not match 2 Overload check time can be set The initial value is 100 ms and operation stops when the time for one scan takes longer than the set overload check time overload error Operation can be made to continue when an overload error occurs When a power failure power shutoff occurs the internal output area for retaining information and the timer and the counter range can be designated And the setting below is possible 1 The name of the user program can be registered 2 A password can be set up so that a third party cannot reference the program 3 Itis necessary to register the type of I O module used as an I O assignment table In order to create this I O assignment table the type of I O module that is connected can be read Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications Description of function Online change in A section of a program can be revised while it is running 1 If revision is done with a programming device and the online change is performed in RUN the user program in the CPU is changed and the altered program is switched internally at the end of scanning and operation continues with the new program 2 When
502. reated programs to a floppy disk etc just in case something unexpected occurs 2 When a user program is transferred from a peripheral device or the contents of a user program are changed in the RUN state the EH CPU448 writes the user program to the back up memory without disturbing CPU running It takes approximately two minutes to write the user program to the back up memory To protect a user program while writing it to the back up memory while the special internal output R7EF stays 1 do not turn off the power of the system Control method With the EH 150 the user programs are batch converted when operation begins and the programs after conversion will be executed in order as they are read one by one The method used for I O data is that after the I O data information is scanned execution from the head of the program to the end it is updated in group refresh method If refresh of external I O is required in the middle of scanning use the refresh command Apart from the program that will be normally executed a periodic scan program which interrupts the normal program at set time intervals and is executed can be created The time intervals are 10 ms 20 ms and 40 ms The EH CPU448 also supports 5 ms The user program is executed from the head of the program to the end and is once again repeated after the system processing that updates the lapsed timer value refreshes I O and performs communication with peripheral de
503. req ested I O No is outside the Abnormal task code designated range The req ested number of points is outside the designated range The req or is an The req uested I O type code is undefined T O that cannot be forced to be set ested I O No is outside the designated range The req uested number of points is outside the designated range The requested I O type code is undefined The req ested I O No is outside the Abnormal task code HOS H01 Abnormal I O No H07 Abnormal number of steps words Abnormal I O code H06 designated range The req uested number of points is outside the designated range The req or is an The req uested I O type code is undefined T O that cannot be forced to be set ested I O No is outside the Abnormal task code A 61 Abnormal I O No ka designated range MEMO HITACHI
504. rformed scanning is performed until the next periodic processing is performed 1 Communication system processing is executed every 10 ms 5 ms eaa o Periodic system processing Communication system processing Scan processing 0 1 E Figure 8 2 Relationship between system processing and scanning Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 As shown in Figure 8 3 scan processing is done while periodic scanning is performed Periodic scanning is processed at the point when switching to normal scan Periodic scans are performed at intervals of every 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms or 40 ms 5 ms periodic scan is supported only for the EH CPU448 In terms of priority of execution 5 ms scans have the highest priority Use the refresh command when you wish to perform data processing for the external I O X Y during the periodic scan Update of timer progress value is performed as part of system processing For the EH CPU448 it is performed when each timer command is executed 5 ms System processing Periodic scan 5 ms Periodic scan 10 ms Periodic scan 20 ms Periodic scan 40 ms Normal scan Figure 8 3 Scan execution timing 8 1 2 Setting System Processing Time EH CPU448 The EH CPU448 can set any system processing time in the range from 3 to 9 ms It is thus possible to select the optimal system processing time according to the purpose of control 1 Operation and application Figure 8 4 shows
505. rite method by performing or not performing handshaking with the module can be selected However in order to use the read write method by performing handshaking the module side must support handshaking For more details refer to the applicable module manual s sets the head I O number of the parameter area that sets various data read write parameters The values displayed inside parenthesis show the display when LADDER EDITOR is used Status area WR WL and WM areas Control area Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 263 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 1 Error code The result of FUN 201 command execution is set Normalend 0 Description of S parameter area s 0 1 Error code Abnormal end gt 0 s 1 2 System area 2 System area s 2 not available to user This is used by the system processes of the FUN 201 command s 3 3 Control type when the FUN 201 command is executed This area cannot be used by the user s 4 4 Header of target area 3 Control type s 5 5 Read write control bit I O No Specifies the control type s 6 6 Transfer source destination header J H0001 Read request from the status area with handshaking H0002 Read request from the status area without handshaking 347 H0003 Write request to the control area with handshaking i H0004 Forced write request to the control area without handshaking H0005 Forced read request from the control area without hands
506. rites and reads the user program Memory is installed inside the CPU module in which the user program and internal output information are stored The internal output data and clock information can be backed up with the battery The clock function is not available with the EH CPU104 RUN lamp This indicates the CPU is running and lights up during normal operation The lamp is green 2 ERR lamp The error contents can be determined by the combination of lighting and The lamp is red flashing of the ERR and RUN lamps For details refer to Chapter 12 The Error Code List 3 Reset switch for Pressing this switch when the operation is stopped clears data from the area the power failure designated for power failure memory The program information is retained memory as is protection 4 Serial port 1 Can be switched to use as a dedicated port or general purpose port using the mode setting switch It is also equipped with modem control functions The modem control function is not available with the EH CPU104 5 Serial port 2 Can be used as a dedicated port A programming device can be connected and tasks such as CPU programming or monitoring can be performed 6 Front cover Open and close the front cover when operating the RUN switch or replacing the battery Keep the cover closed while the module is running Also when the cover is open do not touch the printed wiring board with your hands 7 Lock button It is used to r
507. rmat Condition code Processing time us EH CPU448 EH cpu3 Other than FUN 2 s DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max PIDCL s e e Command format Number of steps Condition Steps 87 183 183 lt FUN 2 s 3 PIDCL s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR F Usable I O X Y L WDT Ms WX WY wL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 8 RCU CT s Word table O WR only Function e The sampling time set in the word table for each loop determines whether or not PID calculation is performed e The FUN2 s turns ON the PID Calculation In Progress flag of the loop that is being calculated e Set all of the head number of WR of the word table for each PID loop of the FUN 2 s e The FUN 2 s will check for the output upper limit and low limit values set value bit pattern and range of the output value bit pattern for each loop If an error is generated the FUN 2 Error flag of the loop bit table will turn ON and an error code is set to error code 2 of the PID control table The FUN 2 will be executed even if an error is generated e Program the FUN 2 s so that it is executed during the 20 ms periodic scanning indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 171 1 Chapter 5 Command Specifications PID control table In the case of FUN 0 WRxxxx a Structure of P
508. rocessing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH cpug Other than FUN 48 3 Pee eee sp v ESRO Ee RERA 10 char by 1 byte Command format Number of steps FUN 48 s 3 BSHR s Wwa Double word word a E TD SS Usable I O L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU DM RCU CT No of shifted bytes Address is set in s 1 s uses up tos 1 Function s No n of shifted bytes dki Shift data head T O No a For even bytes For odd bytes e The data given by the number of bytes specified by argument s is shifted one byte to the right beginning from the head I O specified by argument s 1 e An HOO is inserted in an area that became empty after the shift Note that the data after the specified number of bytes is lost by the shift operation e Use the ADRIO command to set the actual addresses in the head I Os of s 1 e Ifthe operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used The ADRIO command should be used to set the actual addresses in s 1 If not DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s and s 1 and the areas specified by them overlap DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Ifs 1 and the areas specified by s and s 1 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed t
509. rogram error system ROM RAM error scan time monitoring battery under voltage detection and others 1 The same numbers cannot be shared by the time and the counter TD is 0 to 255 2 Only timers numbered 0 to 63 can use 0 01s for their time base 3 6 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications EH CPU308 EH CPU316 Number of I O At the time 64 points I O module is 1 024 points maximum 1 024 points maximum points used specifications Processing method Stored program cyclic method Processing Basic commands 1 0 us command User program memory 8 k steps maximum RAM 8 k steps FLASH MEMORY 16 k steps FLASH MEMORY Operation 39 types such as LD LDI AND ANI OR ORI ANB ORB OUT MPS processing MRD MPP specifications 59 types such as arithmetic x etc jump subroutine division Application commands extraction etc Ladder 39 types such as z 3 Ae 4 7 4 F L j L L Arithmetic command 59 types such as arithmetic X etc jump subroutine division Application commands extraction etc I O processing External T O processing method Refresh processing specifications I O 16 points I O module 256 points maximum 256 points maximum Internal 1 984 points RO to R7BF Be ORB WRO to WR43FF WRO to WRS7FF Special 64 points R7C0 to R7FF 512 words WRF000 to WRFIFF 16 384 points 1 024 words x 2 loops LO to L3FFF L10000 to L13FFF WLO to WL3FF WL1000 to WL13FF 512 points x
510. rogram example _ example ji a ay Sets the result of the PID constant check performed by FUN 1 when the execution flag R100 turns on 1 OK 5 0 Error a me 2 R109 S iI CN A a Sets 1 when the FUN 2 performs loop 1 PID calculations Sets 0 when it does not AA FS lt Sets the result of the PID constant chenge processing performed by FUN 1 when the execution flag R102 turns on 1 PID constant OK 0 PID constant NG R10B AN 7 Turns on when the output value calculated by the PID is not between the Output Value R10C Upper Limit and Output Value Lower Limit FUN 2 sets these M e An error code is set in 2 Error Code 2 A if the R10D turns on FUN 2 sets this to 1 when an error is detected Same as loop 1 Same as loop 2 gt favo 1014 u09 doo7 Ea 101 U09 Z 2001 5 183 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example _ example E INT1 WR0403 za FUN1 WR0400 0 N re 3 n 2 Q a 3 FUN2 WR0200 j f x Do not enter a startup condition Monitor R109 to determine whether or not to calculate loop 1 FUN2 WR0250 FUN2 WRO0300 RTI The program on this page can also be as shown below INT1 WR0403 JMP n 0 FUN1 WR0400 FUN2 WR0200 ueos o119A0 SW OZ
511. ror is set However note that this setting does not stop the execution of the scan when a congestion error occurred even when an infinite loop is formed within the normal scan by the JMP instruction 8 5 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 8 1 5 Periodical Scan Other than the EH CPU448 1 Definition and operation This scan executes operations of interrupt programs periodical scan programs while the CPU is operating with a cycle time specified by the user 10 ms 20 ms or 40 ms For the EH CPU448 a 5 ms periodical scan has newly been added The details about the periodical scan of the EH CPU448 are explained in Section 8 1 6 This section explains about CPUs other than the EH CPU448 Enter the periodical scan program to be executed between instructions INTO and RT1 if it should be started up with a 10 ms cycle time and between INT1 and RT1 if it should be started up with a 20 ms cycle time The periodical system processing is executed every 10 ms regardless of whether or not there is a periodical scan program hai Periodical system Normal scan Periodical scan processing Y Scan every 10 ms Periodical program Scan every 20 ms Periodical program Periodical system processing including interrupt analysis rocessing A p z 8 Scan every 40 ms ITE OEE A LEER POA LEETE Lae Periodi al scan Periodical program Program execution Normal scan Interrupt INTI Figure 8
512. rs Also when more than one error is generated the one that is classified with the greatest severity is stored Note LED example ON OFF Flashing 1 s ON 1 s OFF Flashing 500 ms ON 500 ms OFF Flashing 250 ms ON 250 ms OFF 8 8 8 Error Error name Classifi Nature of error RUN ERR Ope Related special code detection timing cation LED LED ration a EFA System ROM error Serious The system ROM has a sum error or cannot Stops ea when power turns on failure be read System RAM error Serious System RAM cannot be read and written Stops R7DB when power turns on failure properly Micro computer error Serious Address error interrupt undefined Stops R7C8 always checking failure command interrupt occurred in the micro computer System bus time out error Serious Micro computer detects a system bus time when bus is accessed failure out System program abnormal Serious System program in FLASH memory has a Stops R7C8 always checking failure sum error Power off Serious No power supply from the power module Stops Power error failure always checking Microcomputer overload error Serious The watchdog timer detected a Stops Constantly checked failure microcomputer overload because the microcomputer did not operate according to 1 program the microcomputer is not functioning correctly Undefined command Medium Error is detected when an attempt is made Stops R7C9 check during op
513. s generated an error code will be set to the error code in the data logging management table and DER will be set to 1 In this case initialization setting will not be performed An error will be generated if initialization is performed again after the initialization setting has already been performed once initialization of the data logging management table has been successfully completed An error will be generated if the argument S data logging management table exceeds the maximum value for the I O as a Z N Y oO O number An error will be generated if there is an error in the verification process of items that have been specified for initialization in S 3 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 268 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example The following shows a sample program that performs initial settings for data logging This program initializes the log write parameter table and log clear parameter bit table 1 Assigning internal outputs This sample program is created using the following assignments In actual cases change the I O numbers and other items according to the application WR 0100 to 0105 FUN 210 command See the data logging management table Data logging management table s to s 5 0400 to 0404 Log information table See the log information table FR 0100100105 og write control bit table See the Tog write control bit table FR 020000202 og clear parameter bi
514. s of the cable should be only up to 0 75 mm If you attach two crimp terminals to the same terminal use a cable with the thickness of 0 5 mm The recommended crimp terminal is indicated below EXO 6 0 24 Recommended Care must be exercised when TEC for handling the terminal since it may fall off if the screw is loose Unit mm in 4 14 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table Type EH XD8 EH XD16 OFF gt ON 5 ms or less 4 ms TYP ON OFF 5 ms or less 4 ms TYP Internal circuit Internal circuit GO e oe eee OeOeegaeee 4 15 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table EH XA16 EH XAH16 Jinputvoltage to VAC 200t0 4OVAC O Input impedance Approx 16 k Q 50 Hz Approx 13 k Q 60 Hz Approx 27 k Q 60 Hz Operating voltage ON voltage 79 V AC 164 V AC OFF voltage 20 V AC 40 V AC OFF gt ON 15 ms or less ON gt OFF 25 ms or less 16 points module 16 points 1 common common terminal is 2 None Photocoupler insulation LED green Removable type screw terminal block M3 PX Diagram of internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit OO Gee eee OOO eee eee 4 16 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 7 32 point Input Module Name and function of each part EH XD32 Weight Approx 0 15 kg 0 33 Ib Dimensions 3 LED display switch mm in 2 Lock button 1 LED cover 95 3
515. s set_ address is set s 2 Binary conversion data Actual address is set head I O No Function ASCII data table s No of conversions n s 1 ASCII data head al s 2 Binary data head a2 Binary data table 12 11 8 7 e The number of hexadecimal ASCII code characters specified by argument s is converted to binary data beginning from the head of the hexadecimal ASCII code specified by argument s 1 and the results are stored in addresses beginning from the head I O specified by s 2 e If the number of characters is odd the lower 4 bits of the data at the output destination will be 0 e Use the ADRIO command to store the actual addresses of the head I Os at s 1 ands 2 e Higher digit s HOO and H20 NULL and space are processed as H30 0 Leading zero suppressed digit e Ifthe operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used t Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 209 Cautionary notes e The ADRIO command should be used to set the actual addresses in s 1 and s 2 If not DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Chapter 5 Command Specifications If s to s 2 and the areas specified by them overlap DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by s 1 and s 2 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is per
516. s1 s2 Continuity DX DY DR DL 18 4 Relational When s1 s2 Noncontinuity DM box sl and s2 are compared as signed 32 bit binary Constant 18 4 18 4 lt gt When s1 s2 Noncontinuity Relational When s1 s2 Continuity box Timer Counter Double word Nn es gt o0 So X in ge P Signed lt gt When s1 s2 Noncontinuity DX DY DR DL 18 4 Relational When s1 s2 Continuity DM box sl and s2 are compared as signed 32 bit binary Constant 5 4 N po P onan OG In the case of word it requires five steps for LD s101s2 and AND s1Os2 and six steps for OR s1Os2 2 In the case of double word for LD s1Os2 and AND s1082 it requires five steps when the combination of s1 and s2 is I O and I O six steps when the combination is either I O and constant or constant and I O and seven steps when the combination is constant and constant For OR s1s2 1 step is added respectively 5 5 Chapter 5 Command Specifications cy 2 8 lola o B E ao i i i Process 2 5 2 Command ere aaa pe S lt Ladder symbol q An Process descriptions I O types used oc x time u s a Remarks Oe oun Sjo oj z enfern sof v EH 150 5137 LD lt Relational When s1 lt s2 Continuity Word 0jo jojoj jo 5 1 sl s1 lt box When s1 2 s2 Noncontinuity WX WY WR
517. sed digits Ifs 1 tos 2 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example X00308 DIF38 LD X00308 WR0070 H3132 AND DIF38 WR0071 H4142 FUN 38 WR0070 WR0070 H3132 WR0071 H4142 FUN 38 WR0070 Program description e The ASCII data 1 2 A B stored in WR0070 WR0071 is converted to binary data e The conversion result is stored in WR0072 Execution results WRO070 H3 132 WRO071 H4142 WRO072 H12AB Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 203 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion of 8 digit hexadecimal ASCII to 32 bit binary data Item number Fun commands 20 Name DOUBLE HEXA ASCII TO BINARY Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 ee FUN 39 s DHABIN s Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 39 s DHABIN s Wa O Double word word TD O E Usable I O Y WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU RCU CT s Argument ascuidaay fo Combination of Hoo i eae Fs amnas fot PP TL loss Function Hexadecimal ASCII data 32 bit binary data 15 8 7 0 Lower 16 bit Higher 16 bit H00000000 to HFFFFFFFF 16 ASCII code in the 16 place e The 8 digit hexadecimal ASCII data specified by arguments s to s 3 is converted to binary data and the re
518. set to 0 H00 to HFF Ist point 2nd point Binary image H00 to HFF Word data Number of words Nth word Binary image H0000 to HFFFF A 44 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications A When the I O type code is bit and specified as less than 16 points Request Data memory Ist to 8th points N points The CPU detects the head of the monitor data according to the requested I O code and I O number then in response returns the monitor data for the number of bits requested B When the I O type code is word Request Data memory Nth words Response N words The CPU detects the head of the monitor data according to the requested I O code and I O number then in response returns the monitor data for the number of words requested A 45 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications I O codes chart Unused O number Decimal partially Hexadecimal hexadecimal In the decimal expression of X and Y the lower two digits are decimal and the upper three digits are hexadecimal Perform conversion from decimal to hexadecimal with respect to the lowest two digits Example 4FF90 gt 4FFSA In the decimal expression of WX WY the lowest digit is decimal and the upper three digits are hexadecimal A 46 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications Task code H42 Forced set reset with I
519. setting executed Specify initial setting so that the specified item WMO0100 is logged cleared in WRO100 upon turning ON of single scan execution Sets the initialization result in ROOO after the initial setting 1S 600 Turns ON when 10 minutes have elapsed The progress value is updated while the start bit is ON but only when both the initial setting and logging have been completed normally Logging is started when the TD10 10 min has elapsed is ON Date data year month day hour minute second and sequence number are appended to the head of log data WR200 to WR205 when the logging execution flag is turned ON R100 OFF gt ON Program example R200 DFN1 WR0405 WRO101 AND HOFOO R1 WRO0405 lt gt H0000 Clear the logging data R2 X0 DFNO id R102 R101 R300 DIF1 H DR0204 00000000 WR0405 WR0101 AND HF000 R2 WR0405 lt gt H0000 DR0701 H00000000 ADRIO WR0703 WM200 WR0704 WR0402 FUN 213 WR0700 DR0010 DR0402 AND HFFFF DR0701 DR0403 1 DR0701 DR0701 DR0010 ADRIO WR0703 WM300 WR0704 WR0402 FUN 213 WR0700 R200 R1 5 287 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Acquisition of initialization result Creation of initialization result bit log clear Clears the sequence number upon completion of log data clear Acquisition of initialization result Creation of initialization result bit log read Setting of head log address H0000 Setting of
520. signal Meaning abbreviation CPU Host SGI ERI gt 10 6 EH CPU port Chapter 10 Communication Specifications EH CPU port Figure 10 5 RS 422 signal connection diagram If used as RS 485 interface connect pin numbers 3 and 4 and 3 and 5 externally 10 3 3 1 EH CPU port SG1l_4 Relay terminal Relay terminal x Twisted pair cable EH CPU port 1 SGl 2 CD1 3 ERI 4 TX 5 TXN 6 RXN 7 RX 8 RSI Figure 10 6 RS 485 signal connection diagram Precautions 1 N communication RS 485 When performing 1 to N communication using RS 485 do so in polling selecting mode When creating a ladder program observe the following precautions 1 Perform communication by making sure the master station and slave station are using the same start code 2 At the master station send a request by specifying the station number of the slave station 3 At the slave station send a response only when the request received from the master station is addressed to the own station Set the station so that it will reset the mode and wait for the next request in the event it received a request addressed to other station 4 At the master station send a new request after at least 20 ms tp in figure below has elapsed from the time it completed receiving the last response from the slave station 5 At the slave station send a response after at leas
521. signment information matches that contained in the user program the input this module cannot be information is received according to the contents of the user program used unless the revision of hardware is EH AX44 Receives an analog output signal voltage or current h EE REV 01 or later EH AX8V EH AY8H Receives an analog input signal voltage Analog Output Module The CPU module verifies the status of the installed module and if the I O assignment information matches with that contained in the user program the output information is output according to the contents of the user program EH AY22 EH AY2H Outputs an analog output signal voltage or current Current is used for the EH AY22 only EH AY4V EH AY4H Outputs an analog output signal voltage Terminal block The screws for the terminal block are M3 screws Use a crimp terminal that fits the screw diameter The maximum thickness of the cable should be only up to 0 75 mm Use 0 5 mm cable when two crimp terminals are attached to the same terminal The recommended crimp terminal is indicated below EXO 60 24 Recommended Care must be exercised when TEC foa handling the terminal since it may fall off if the screw is loose Unit mm in The hardware revision of the CPU module was updated to REV 01 in March of 1998 The revision of the CPU module is noted on the specifications plate attached on the side of the unit 4 31 Chapter
522. sing PID Operation Execution Control 2 loops Example 2 Using three loops set as follows Loop1 TZ 3 x 20 ms Loop2 TZ 6 x 20 ms Loop3 TZ 12 x 20 ms Start of CPU operation Note The system interrupt processing that occurs every 10 ms is 20 ms shown with 2 cycles combined into 1 for ease of viewing System cyclic processing Loop 1 operation Loop 2 operation Loop 3 operation 20ms cyclic processing Normal scan processing Parameter settings performed by FUNO processing PID Operation Execution Control 3 loops 5 176 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 3 PID operation timing chart a Timing chart example 1 The following timing chart shows the operation of the PID RUN flag PID constant OK flag PID calculation in progress flag FUN 0 FUN 1 and FUN 2 when the execution flag and PID constant change flag is turned from ON to OFF in a single loop 28 1 Execution flag Pp a a ro A BV i 201 Pen set 1 H 30 H 31 26 2 PID constant change H H flag 3 PID RUN 4 PID constant OK 5 PID calculation in progress 6 FUN 0 normal end 7 FUN 0 PID initialization 8 FUN 1 PID execution control 9 FUN 2 PID calculation 10 Output Description of timing chart example 1 1 This is ignored since FUN 0 is not executed properly even when the execution flag 2 and 3 of the PID constant ch
523. sing 5 FUN 10 s SIN function Calculates the SIN of the value f 39 SIN s designated by s and stores the result in s 1 s 2 6 FUN 11 s COS function Calculates the COS of the t 40 COS s value designated by s and stores the result in s 1 s 2 7 FUN 12 s TAN function Calculates the TAN of the t 40 TAN s value designated by s and stores the result in s 1 s 2 8 FUN 13 s ARC SIN function Calculates the ARC SIN of the t 62 ASIN s value designated by s fractional portion and s 1 integer portion and stores the result in s 2 9 FUN 14 s ARC COS function Calculates the ARC COS of t 63 ACOS s the value designated by s fractional portion and s 1 integer portion and stores the results in s 2 10 FUN 15 s ARC TAN function Calculates the ARC TAN of t 41 ATAN s the value designated by s fractional portion and s 1 integer portion and stores the results in s 2 33 FUN 80 s T O refresh all Refreshes all external I O f 69 ALREF s points ranges 34 FUN 81 s T O refresh I O link Refreshes only the input range t 44 IOREF s designation output range or link range 35 FUN 82 s T O refresh any slot Refreshes the I O at the aE 80 SLREF s designated slot 36 FUN 100 s Floating point Real number to integer t 57 8 INTW s operation Real Word conversion number to integer 37 FUN 101 s Floating point Real number to integer t 69 8 INTD s operation Real Double word c
524. sing this task code Also depending on the function selection it performs the same processing as the parameter modification completion processing task code H27 Execution condition CPU status selection x status cmd o o o o wiren o o o o warne 1 It cannot be executed while the CPU is READ occupied by another station Function selection subcommand 1 H01 READ occupancy 2 H02 WRITE occupancy 3 H05 Modifies the local station occupancy mode from WRITE occupancy to READ occupancy 4 H06 Modifies the local station occupancy mode from READ occupancy to WRITE occupancy 5 H00 Cancels the local station occupancy Response T Response task code H00 when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter User program version H00 to HFF A 24 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications READ occupancy subcommand H01 This command is used when the local station is not occupying the CPU if performing tasks such as reading the user program monitoring and setting the data memory or the I O WRITE occupancy subcommand H02 This command is used when writing the user program if the local station is not WRITE occupying the CPU This command cannot be used when another station is occupying the CPU Occupancy mode modification modification from WRITE occupancy to READ occupancy subcommand H05 M
525. sing when the system processing is finished If however the system processing time is fixed the normal scan does not start until 5 ms have elapses even if the system processing is finished For variable system processing time 10 ms Periodical system processing Communication system reef ep e eeen processing Scan processing Processing pause System processing time Normal scan time Figure 8 6 System processing time fixed at 5 ms The scan processing time for executing user programs can be fixed Use this function if it is not desirable to allow the normal scan time to fluctuate 2 Setup method Set the system processing time in special internal output WRF038 Bit 15 8 7 0 WRF038 User setting time Current operation status Figure 8 7 Special internal output for setting the system processing time Enter H 5 as the user setting time When the setting is completed H05 is set in the current operation status field If a value other than H 5 is set in the user setting time field the setting value is stored in the user setting time field but HOO is stored in the current operation status field and the system processing time becomes variable as usual Example In order to fix the system processing time enter H0500 in WRFO38 If WRF038 is monitored at this point it can be observed that H0505 is set If a value other than H 5 e g H0300 is set as the system processing time the system processin
526. size according to the CPU model by referring to Section 7 2 If the EH CPU448 is used select H 302 for the CPU type Execute Save to the PC memory Memory Execute Save to the PC memory and Window registry Assigning I O Click Utility CPU Setting I O Assign in the Menu bar Pull down menu The I O Assign List dialogue box is displayed Click the W of the Types field and select Standard from the pull down display T O Assign List dialogue box There are two setting methods for the subsequent procedures e From the I O Assign List From the I O Assign List Slot Setting Status Chapter 15 Operation Examples CL Ladder editor for Windows Ladderl _ 7 as as CPU Information CPU Set U 1 0 Assignment Table mote Mas tation 1 Remote Masiiation 2 Remote Master Btation 3 Remote Master Station 4 15 4 Setting from the I O Assign List 1 Double click the cell for the unit number and slot number to be set The Assignment Setting dialogue box is displayed The Assignment Setting dialogue box 2 Click the YW of the data and select I O type from the pull down display 3 Click the OK button to close the Assignment Setting dialogue box T O type is set to the specified cell Setting of I O type In the same way repeat steps 1 to 3 to assign Y32 and 16 vacant points to Slot 1 and 2 respec
527. spect to the control object is as follows External I O At the time 16 point module is used a total of 128 points is for EH CPU104 and 256 points for EH CPU208 308 316 448 The I O numbers for inputs are indicated by X WX DX and outputs are indicated by Y WY DY Internal outputs These are areas for temporarily storing information The I O numbers are M WM DM R WR DR etc A timer and a counter are provided internally Array only corresponding to substitution statement Array of I O numbers can be indicated by placing parentheses around them The program where the control contents have been described can be stored The memory for this is in the CPU module and the capacity differs for each CPU module The memory has a function whereby its contents are retained even if the battery dies Because of this it is necessary to initialize the memory since it may have uncertainties right after the unit is purchased Programming is performed using the programming software LADDER EDITOR and peripheral device etc for the H series programmable controllers The commands that can be used are those designated by the H series ladder Refer to the list of EH 150 commands for details 3 2 Chapter 3 Function and Performance Specifications Description of function 5 Back up memory The contents of a user program can be maintained without a battery 1 A battery is not required to retain the contents of the user program Always store the c
528. square root Calculates the square root of a 32 byte binary value s WR WL WM 81 FUN 61 s Dynamic scan pulse Repeats on and off operations for the number of the designated scans s WR WL WM s 2 R L M FUN 120 s INDXD s Index setting argument d Sets the argument used as an index in respect to argument d of the MOV and COPY commands FUN 121 s INDXS s Index setting argument s Sets the argument used as an index in respect to argument s of the MOV and COPY commands FUN 122 s INDXC s Index cancel Cancels the index specification that is set for argument d or s of the MOV and COPY commands FUN 127 s BITTOW s Expand bit data to word data Sets the data equivalent to the number of bits starting from the specified I O number in the word I O number FUN 128 s WTOBIT s Compress word data to bit data Sets the data equivalent to the number of bits starting from the specified I O number in the bit I O number FUN 200 s XYR W s X Y area read write command Command for reading and writing data using the X and Y areas FUN 201 s SCR W s Status control read write command Command for reading and writing data in the status control area 5 18 s WR WL WM Chapter 5 Command Specifications 5 3 Command Specification Details
529. ssion command GENERAL Item number Transfer commands 1 Name PURPOSE PORT COMMUNICATION COMMAND Ladderformat format Condition code Processing time us Remark TRNS 0 d s t DER ERR sp v c E es aoe Commandformat format Number of steps Woa Oef Double word word tet 3 Este Usable I O Y L WDT Ms WX WY WL TC DX DY DL TMR CU DM RCU CT aeaea Pf e mna fs uses susesuptos 14 to s 14 Head of communication t uses up to t 11 a bit Function This is a communication command for general purpose serial ports used in the CPU ladder program The WY to which an arbitrary I O is assigned is set in d Since this is used as a dummy it is possible to set open n points to a slot that does not actually exist s is used to set the head I O number of the parameter area in which various communication parameters head and size of communication data area timeout value receiving data length transmission code and transmission parameter are set t is used to set the head I O number of the communication control bit area in which the start of communication control bits for initial settings and the determination as to whether or not the communication ended properly are stored The TRNS 0 command is a command to perform reception after transmission Area description of s 1 Return code Cannot be used by the user 3 Timeout time Set in the lower 8 bits of the
530. ssion speed 4 800 bits s Transmission code 7 bit even parity 1 stop bit Transfers the receiving data Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program description The RECV 0 command parameters are set using special internal output R7E3 turned on for one scan after RUN is commenced When M001 is turned on the following parameters are set for the RECV 0 command Receiving condition Receiving data length 16 bytes End code is designated as 0 Transmission speed 4800 bits s Transmission code 7 bits even parity 1 stop bit Continuation flag ON Transmission processing is commenced after receiving is complete When M002 is turned on the following parameters are set for the RECV 0 command Receiving condition Start code is designated as 0 End code is designated as 1 Transmission speed 4800 bits s Transmission code 7 bits even parity 1 stop bit Continuation flag ON Transmission processing is commenced after receiving is complete When M0003 is turned on the receiving data that is set in the receiving data area is transferred to a location beyond WL1101 and the number of words in the receiving data is set in WL1100 When the communication start condition M0000 is met the communication execution flag L0100 is turned on Communication processing is performed between the general purpose serial port and external devices When the RECV 0 normal command completion flag L0101 turns on the end processing and cleari
531. st be delayed by one scan in relation to the pulse output startup condition Note that if the startup condition changes from ON to OFF then to ON the pulse width of that part may change by one scan Use the ADRIO command to store an actual address in the pulse output I O of s 2 If not an error will occur and no operation will be performed Ifs 1 tos 4 and the areas specified by s 2 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed 5 223 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun B 33 T O refresh All points Ladderformat format Condition code Processing time us Other than left FUN 80 5 Pore ere gt v c raises ees Commandformat format Number of steps Word Double word word e Fe ni DM Eare P a T T TC A T T A T e This command performs I O refresh of all data in the external I Os including link area in the middle of a scan Cautionary notes This command performs I O refresh of all external I Os including link area If refresh of certain area is to be performed use FUN81 or FUN82 If the argument s exceeds the maximum I O number DER is equal to 1 and the command will not be processed Assign argument s as a one word dummy The I O specified by argument s WR WL WM will not be affected Program example FUN 80 WRO __ _ FUN 80 WRO Program description T O refresh
532. sult is stored in s 4 ands 3 e Higher digit s HOO and H20 NULL and space are processed as H30 0 Leading zero suppressed digit e The argument will be a combination of H30 to H30 and H41 to H46 0 to 9 and A to F e If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e If the 8 digit ASCII code stored in s to s 3 is other than H30 to H39 and H41 to H46 0 to 9 and A to F DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed However this does not apply to H00 and H20 NULL and space of leading zero suppressed digits e Ifs 1tos 5 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example X00309 DIF39 LD X00309 WR0080 H4645 AND DIF39 WR0081 H4443 WRO0082 H4241 WR0080 H4645 WR0083 H3938 WR0081 H4443 FUN 39 WR0080 WR0082 H4241 WR0083 H3938 FUN 39 WR0080 Program description e The ASCI data F E D C B A 9 8 stored in WR0080 to WR0083 is converted to binary data e The conversion result is stored in WR0084 and WR0085 Execution results WR0080 H4645 WR0081 H4443 WR0082 H4241 WR0083 H3938 DR0084 HFEDCBA98 t Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 204 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from 4 digit decimal ASCII to 16 bit BCD data Item number Fun commands 21 Name DECIMAL ASCII TO BCD
533. switches on the coil The coil switches off when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set value The rise of the startup condition is ignored while the MS is on The progress value is set in TC n and does not exceed 65 535 decimal If the progress value is updated while the system is running the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point If an I O is set for the set value the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I O value since the set values are updated during each scan Cautionary notes The 01s time base can only be used for timer numbers 0 to 63 64 points The 1s and 1s time bases can be used for all timer numbers 0 to 255 A maximum of 256 points can be used for the timers TD SS MS TMR and WDT in total However the same area as the counter is used Timer number and counter number may not be overlapped Since the startup condition of the mono stable timer is edge detection the condition may not be detected during the first scan after the running is started The progress value is updated when the timer command is expected in the EH CPU448 Therefore if a program that does not scan the timer command execution section after the timer is activated is created using the JMP command or master control MCS the timer may not turn on correctly The timer does not turn on correctly when the time that does not scan the timer command execution section exceeds t
534. t Port No Meaning pires EH CPU port EH RS05 H series CPU Self made cable Host 1 Notifies that reception is possible gt gt gt gt RS 8 1 Status of the item that is Le DR 7 2 SD SD Reception data je RD 6 himn ae aa RD Transmission data gt gt SD 5 gt 4 RS RTS gt ER2 4 5 CS CTS ERI 3 6 E k lt 41 CD 2 7 DR PGS 1 Hs 9 10 PG5 gt PG5 11 12 CD 13 14 15 The pin numbers 1 to 8 of the EH CPU port have been changed beginning with this manual NJI 281B X For the correspondence between pin numbers and connectors see the figure in Chapter 10 Communication Specifications of this manual Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart Basic commands and sequence commands Command Command name EH 150 H 64 H 200 H 250 H 252 H 2000 H 2002 H 4010 format to H 20 a fea OCY OT OT O lolololo aa TO OT fio wissen re Fo re fo fo Fo fo fo Contact series connection S k aaa Jo oo 6 er og er o7 efor Conactparteicomssion o o o o fofolo o apor INewn o oooi ofofo olo a ANDD frisino Jof o olol oloo o oror esee oo re fo fo Fo oo 10 AND DFN ie edge detection OOO 0 o 0 o oo oo mom wou ololo olololo o mper faroa o olo olololo o afes eero o o o ololo o o mes fems ifo fo fofofofol o o ome freemason O o OP OL Of O
535. t case B of n 32 of n 32 of n 32 Lower Condition Steps 148 80b 201 91b 264 91b case W MOV d s n b Quotient b Quotient b Quotient of n 64 of n 64 of n 64 Double word DR Usable I O DX DY DL DM Constant Transfer destination head I O Transfer source head I O Number of bits words The constant is set in to be transferred decimal Function Transfers n bits words between s and s n 1 tod n 1 The values between s and s n 1 are retained However if the transfer source and transfer destination ranges overlap the transferred values will be used After execution Before execution a n bits words e i s n 1 S Eii g Ifnisaword The contents 0 to 255 of the lower 8 bits b7 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC are set to the number of bits words to be transferred Ifn is a constant 0 to 255 decimal can be designated for the number of bits words to be transferred Cautionary notes e Use this command so that d n 1 and s n 1 do not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and the transfer is performed to the maximum range For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table e Ifnis equal to 0 the block transfer is not performed and DER R
536. t 1 and Port 2 Transmission speed etc can be switched using the setting switch communication actual transmit and receive processing are carried out by the user program Port 1 14 General purpose port This is a serial port that can be controlled by the user program The various settings for can be assigned for this function by switching the setting switch Modem control A modem can be connected externally for use It becomes operable when something arrives from only EH CPU 208 outside and after that task code communication can be performed 308 316 448 When transmitting from the EH 150 set the port as a general use port and have it controlled independently with the user program Port 1 can be assigned for this function by switching the setting switch Self diagnosis Self diagnostic tests for the following items are performed Microcomputer check System program area check Memory check User program check Internal output area check Mounted I O check Abnormal handling When an abnormal occurs the error code that shows the error contents are output to special internal output WRFO000 as a hexadecimal value Also the error is indicated to the outside by the ERR lamp etc If the error level is high the CPU stops operation but depending on the error the operation may be continued using user settings If multiple errors occur the error code with higher error severity is set The detailed information is also set to the sp
537. t 20 ms ts in figure below has elapsed from the time it completed receiving the request from the master station Figure 10 7 shows an example of 1 to N transmission sequence This example shows a sequence in which the master station sends a series of requests to slave stations 1 to 3 with each slave station sending a response to the received request In Figure 10 7 a plateau expressed in solid line indicates that the station received a transmission addressed to the own station Similarly a plateau expressed in dotted line indicates that the station received a transmission addressed to other station 10 7 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications Send Master z station Request to slave station 1 Request to slave station 3 Receive Send i Slave l station 1 lt 4 l Receive l i a l lt r te Response to the master station Send Slave l station 2 roots oe 7 eee a TT Reis A FH ye tara i Receive H H H i H i l i lt lt hai a t Response to the par 8 master Send i station Slave Stations est Nelec 0 CS aaa Aee e adad i i i H i i i H i l Receive 2 Figure 10 7 1 N transmission and reception sequence Sample Program The following shows a sample program that performs communication between one master station and three slave stations using RS 485 1 Mounting the module a Master station side Mount the 16 point output mod
538. t abie See the Tog clear parameter bit table Initial setting for data logging ADRIO WMO0100 R100 WMO0101 2 ADRIO WM0102 WR0200 WM0103 64 ADRIO WM0104 WR0300 WM0105 64 Setting of actual address for log information table Initialization of log write parameter table and log clear ADRIO WR0102 WR0400 parameter bit table WR0103 H0110 Setting of actual address for log write parameter table ADRIO WR0104 WM0100 ADRIO WR0105 R200 Execution of initial setting for data logging FUN210 WR0100 Setting of actual address for log clear parameter bit table FUN 210 s Program example This program performs the initial settings of the log information table log write table and log clear parameter bit table when a single scan execution R7E3 is on 5 269 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Management table overview See Management table details for detailed description a Logging management table 6 words b Logging information table 5 words 4 Initialization specification T Exists when initialization specification S 3 for log write is enabled c Log write parameter table 2 MAX 128 2 words EXECUTE flag RUN flag WRITE flag ABNORMAL COMPLETION flag 128 2 words Ss Oke NNA n 2 0 n 2 1 Exists when initialization specification S 3 for log clear is enabled e Log clear parameter bit table 3 bits 5 270 Ch
539. t and FE 2 Between AC input and DC output Vibration resistance Conforms to JISC 0911 16 7 Hz double amplitude 3 mm 0 12 in X Y and Z each direction Conforms to JIS C 0040 10 to 57 Hz single amplitude 0 075 mm 57 to 150 Hz constant acceleration 9 8 m s Shock resistance Conforms to JIS C 0912 10 Gin X Y and Z directions Conforms to JIS C0040 15 Gin X Y and Z directions Diagram of internal circuit No Terminal array 24 V DC N Instantaneous power failure guarantee 10 ms or more 85 to 100 V AC 20 ms Exceed 100 V AC to 264 V AC Terminal configuration io AC DC ae converter 100 240 VAC i AMAN 1 The POWER lamp will not be lit when the fuse is blown The module must be repaired The fuse may not be replaced by the end user 4 9 Chapter 4 System Equipment DC Power Module Weight Approx 0 28 kg 0 62 Ib Dimensions mm in 2 Lock button 95 3 74 60 2 36 o E 3 Front cover l 100 3 94 4 Front cover set screw 1 POWER lamp 2 Lock button 3 Front cover 5 Power terminal block ep e ee e on POWER lamp This indicates that the DC power is supplied E Lock button This is used when removing the power module from the base a unit 31 Frontcover cover This is used when wiring SiS is used when wiring Front cover set screw This is used to fix the front cover When fi
540. t of WR0000 is converted to an 8 bit 4 digit 7 segment LED display data The most significant bit of the eight bits in each digit is always 0 5 115 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 29 Name Square root SQUARE ROOT Ladder format Condition code Processing time 1s R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPu44g EH cpus Omer than ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Command format Number of steps SQR d s TD SS Usable I O WDT MS TMR CU RCU CT Constant Square Root BCD Take square root BCD Function The square root of the contents of s is calculated and output to d Set BCD data to s Ifs has a BCD data error the DER R7F4 is set to 1 and calculation is not performed data other than HO to H9 exists The fractional portion is rounded down 7 jf Program example LD X00000 X00000 DIFO AND DIFO SQR WR0001 DR0020 SQR WR0001 DR0020 Program description e Upon the rising of X00000 the square root of the value in DR0020 is calculated and is substituted into WR0001 Example In the case of DR0020 H00002159 BCD it becomes WR0001 H0046 BCD after the operation 742159 46 465 5 116 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Application commands 30 Name Bit count BIT COUNT Ladder format Condition c
541. t pattern 23 toa When the bit pattern is outside of range is outside of range value between 1 and 4 the process will continue based on 4 Do not convert The measured value bit pattern 24 in Set the set value bit pattern 24 to a loop xx is outside of range value between and 4 The output value bit pattern 25 in loop Set the output value bit pattern 25 to xx is outside of range a value between 1 and 4 There is an error in the size relationship Set the values so that the output If there is a size relationship error the between the output lower limit value lower limit value 18 lt output upper process will continue but there will be 18 and output upper limit value 17 in limit value 17 is satisfied no output loop xx 5 180 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example _ example This program is an example comprised of three loops This program also rewrites the PID constant every time the CPU starts a RUN process ea ADRIO WR0200 R100 D t eo l WR0201 TZ ee 8 Turns on only for the WHD202 Kr gt first scan WR0203 Ti TZ Sets the PID constant for loop 1 Refer to the word table and bit WR0204 TD TZ table for each loot WR0205 Tn TZ a WRO0206 UL WRO0207 LL WRO0208 INIT ADRIO WR0209 WX0500 ADRIO WR020A WX0510 ADRIO WR020B WX0520 WR020C Set value bit pattern WR020D Measured value b
542. tartup condition is off the next program is executed Up to 5 levels of CAL nesting for another subroutine can be performed within a subroutine It is possible to call a subroutine from within an interrupt scan program Cautionary notes e Ifan error is generated during the execution of the command an error code will be set in the special internal outputs R7F3 and WRFO15 and the following program will be executed Special internal output internal output Error description R7F3 1 WRF015 H0013 SB undefined H0041 Nesting error Instruction for use i turns R000 tur e When R000 is on a subroutine program is executed by CAL n OFF After the execution the program is re executed from the code following the CAL n e When R000 is off the subroutine program is not executed and the next program is executed Subroutine program RTS 5 137 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Control commands 9 Start subroutine program SUBROUTINE Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Other than left EH CPU448 EH CPU3 SBn Command format Number of steps R TD SS WR DR Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M TMR CU WM DM RCU CT se P gt 1 1 Pt 1 1 10 osama This command indicates the start of a subroutine program processing is not performed The n in the SB n cannot be used multiple times in the same program Even if a startup con
543. tatement Constant Word d WY WR WL WM Timer Counter 25 4 Array I O cr cea ins WL WM Timer 39 5 Array Bae a Counter Constant Substitution statement Double word tjiejejojo 15 4 fro T O d DY DR DL 29 4 VO Array DM s DX DY DR 27 5 Array I O DL DM Constant Array variables 42 5 Array can be used Array 3 d s1 B s2 sl s f Timer Counter Constant 4 i Double word d DY DR DL DM 5 d sl B s2 sl s2 DX DY subtraction DR DL DM i Binary Mathematical operations Constant multiplication 7 d s1 Bx s2 BCD multiplication d s1 Sx s2 Signed binary Double word multiplication d DY DR DL DM sl s2 DX DY DR DL DM Constant d s1 s2 i WRF016 lt s1 mod s2 10 d s1 B s2 Double word Timer Counter d sl s2 Constant DRF016 lt s1 mod s2 Double word d DY DR DL 11 d s1 S s2 Signed Double word ina d DY DR DL 5 7 Chapter 5 Command Specifications c d Process omman P Process descriptions I O types used time us name Logical OR d lt sl s2 Bit d Y R L M sl s2 X Y R L M Word d WY WR WL WM d s1 AND s2 Logical d amp sl s2 Timer Counter AND sl s2 WX WY WR WL WM Timer Counter Constant Double word Exclusive d lt sl s2 d DY DR DL OR DM sl s2 DX DY DR DL DM Constant When s1 s2 d amp 1 When s1 82 d amp 0 Ladder symbol
544. ted area User setting area 5 152 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 4 Head T O of transmitting data area When transmitted by the RECV 0 command designates the type and number of the head I O of the area in which transmitting data is stored st 4 Type WR gt H000A s 5 WL gt H000B WM gt H000C T O No H0000 to HFFFF Size of transmitting data area The size of the transmitting data area is designated in word units Head T O of receiving data area Designates the type and number of the head I O of the area in which receiving data is stored the area composition is the same as the transmitting data area Size of receiving data area The size of the receiving data area is designated in word units Receiving data length Receiving data length is designated in byte units However do not exceed the maximum value 256 bytes or the receiving data area If either is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and ends abnormally Start code Designates the receiving start code b15 Start code designate in H00 to HFF 0 Do not perform receiving by start code designation b0 through b7 are ignored 1 Perform receiving by start code designation 10 End code Designates the receiving end code b15 End code designate in HOO to HFF 0 Do not perform receiving by end code designation b0 through b7 are ignored 1 Perform receiving by end code designation 1
545. ternal current consumption 5 V Approx 100 mA DC 24 V DC 420 15 Approx 0 15 A Approx 0 5 A at power On 2 core shield wire 20 m 65 62 ft or less No Signal name Support for analog data and digital data EH AY4V eee H i EH AY4H w va output 5 NC ae voltage 5 Q H0000 HO7FF HOFFF Q EH AY4H Output v voltage 10 j H0800 H0000 Internal circuit A gt 0 HO7FF i 24 V DC A complement of 2 aJa Oe eee 6 e 6 2 G2 GG Ge GD e BAAS NA ES li Q Q anaa ELI atili 4 35 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 14 Dummy Module Name and function of each part EH DUM 1 Lock button Weight Approx 0 06 kg 0 132 Ib Dimensions mm in 95 3 74 B Electronic parts are not mounted on the dummy module 100 3 94 Use Open 16 for I O assignment 4 15 Expansion Cable Name and function of each part EH CB10 Weight Approx 0 24 kg 0 53 Ib Length 1 m 3 281 ft 1 Connector for the base unit 2 Connector for the I O controller Connector for the base unit Connect to the connector of the basic base unit Po Connector for the I O controller Connect to the connector of the I O controller Ls The connectors are represented as the base unit side and I O controller side for presentation purposes b
546. th performing anything e Execute using only normal scan without entering any startup conditions For more information on the error codes that can be set see the Error Code Details Program example In this program example a program performs information settings on the Ethernet module EH ETH by writing to the Y area After the information is set normally the program reads the information settings of the Ethernet module EH ETH by reading the X area 1 EH ETH installation ash The EH ETH is installed in the 0 slot of the basic base CPU module a Therefore the I O assignment of the EH ETH will be 2 WX0000 WY0001 2 Internal output assignments A sample program will be created using the assignments shown below Change the I O number etc according to the application in an actual usage T O NO Usage WR FUN 200 command Y area writing to Parameter area S to S 7 FUN 200 command Y area writing Control bit table Transfer source data area 24 words n Cc zZ N 2 D FUN 200 command X area reading Parameter area S to S 7 FUN 200 command X area reading Control bit table Transfer source data area 24 words Execution request FUN 200 execution Y area writing Execution request FUN 200 execution X area reading 5 260 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example _ example 3 Data passed from the CPU to the E
547. the far right portion of the screen Symbol selection 3 Input I O No time base and the first setting value Coil property The following initials of various I O numbers can be selected from the pull down display of the Input field R L M Y TD SS WDT MS TMR CU RCU CTU CTD CL Input values in the necessary items such as the time base the first setting value and second setting value according to the I O No Example Coil It is only necessary to enter values in the Input and Comment items 4 Click the OK button to display the symbol at the cursor at the far right portion of the ladder Symbols whose input positions for coils arithmetic expressions etc are determined are automatically flushed to the right Display of symbols After displaying the coil the cursor moves to the top of the next ladder Example of entering a Comparison Box 1 Specify the input position 2 Click the symbol for Comparison Box Symbol selection Coil Offine H300 Coil Property Ea Symbol Position Row 2 Column 10 Inputil TDO M Input Comment C Jon Delay Trner Time Base B 1st Set Value t 2nd Set Value 2 1st Set Value Comment E 2nd Set Value Comment s Coil al a e of E cancer A Ladder editor for Windows Ladder1 i Fief EdtE View Build B Mode G Utiity U Window Help H Ble Hex Sle lal Sie JP zoom rs
548. the lower word is substituted and 0 when it is not exceeded vsb Example WR0012 WR0010 x WR0011 Example DR0014 DR0010 x DR0012 sl WR0010 WR0011 WR0010 MSB 0 x DROO10 a WR0013 WR0012 x WR0013 WR0012 MSB 0 DROO12 rr F DROO12 x WR0017 WR0016 WR0015 WR0014 DRO016 DROO14 Cautionary notes e The combinations of d s1 and s2 are as follows Double word Double word Double word e Since the operation results are always substituted into d and d 1 exercise caution so that the word or double word at d 1 is not used as the I O of others Program example x00000 LD X00000 f WR0002 WR0000 WR0001 WRO0002 WR0000 WR0001 Program description e When input X00000 turns on the product of the values in WR0000 and WRO001 is substituted into WRO0002 5 66 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Arithmeticcommands 7 Name BCD multiplication BCD MULTIPLICATION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO Eh cpu448 EH cpus Other than d sl Bx s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max t e Upper 63 110 lt 227 lt case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW d s1 Bx s
549. the scan operation when the system processing time is set to 3 ms In this figure the system operation time corresponds to periodical system processing communication system processing thus it is possible to set this parameter 10 ms Periodic system processing Communication system pepper ppe eee processing Scan processing System processing time Normal scan time Figure 8 4 Scan operation when the system processing time is set to 3 ms Because the scan processing time for executing user programs can be made longer the operation processing efficiency per unit time can be improved 2 Setup method Set the system processing time in special internal output WRFO38 Bit 15 8 7 0 WRF038 User setting time Current system processing time Figure 8 5 Special internal output for setting the system processing time Enter a value from 3 to 9 in 1 digit BCD format representing the user setting time If a value outside this range is selected the system sets the system processing time to 3 Furthermore the processing time of the system currently in operation which is set in the lower eight bits of the current system processing time field can be checked by monitoring WRFO038 with a peripheral unit Example In order to set the system processing time to 3 ms enter H0300 in WRFO38 If H10 is set as the user setting time the system operates with a system processing time of 3 ms When WRFO038 is monit
550. the shift is not performed The previous state is retained in C Program example X00000 LD X00000 OUT R7F2 LD X00001 X00001 DIF1 AND DIFI 1H 1H SHL DR0000 1 SHL DR0000 1 R7F0 Y00100 LD R7F0 OUT Y00100 Program description The R7F2 value of the DR0000 after the shift is determined by the on off of X00000 The content of DR0000 is shifted to the left when X00001 rises At this time the value of R7F2 is set in bO and the value of b31 b15 of WR0001 in R7FO The Y00100 turns on off depending on the b31 value of DRO000 b15 of WR0001 prior to the shift 5 89 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Application commands 6 Rotate right ROTATE RIGHT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 EH CPU448 EH cPus Other than ERR SD Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max 21 60 96 Command format Number of s Condition ROR d n Usable I O Constant Ld T O to be rotated Number of bits to be The constant is set in rotated decimal Function Rotates the contents of d to the right toward the lower digits by n bits The content of the least significant bit is input to C R7FO while the content of C R7FO is input to the most significant bit This is repeated n times The content of C R7FO is set in the nth bit from the most significant bit The
551. there are startup conditions before the RECV 0 command the system software may not be able to execute initialization processing normally Therefore do not specify startup conditions Set 1 Communication execution bit of the RECV 0 command at the second scan or later Use this command so that s 14 and t 11 do not exceed the I O range If the I O range is exceeded DER is equal to 1 and communication will not be executed For I O ranges refer to the P3 6 and P3 7 performance specification table When the parameters set for s and after are abnormal there may be cases when 52 is indicated on the CPU module error display Program example The following shows a sample program that performs data input from an external device to the CPU module s general purpose port using the RECV 0 command 1 Mounting the module 0 Mount a 16 point input module in slot 0 of the basic base Therefore the I O CPU module assignment of the input module is WX0000 3 Specify the d parameter of the RECV 0 command as WX0000 z a The WX is used as a dummy in the RECV 0 command so this could by any WX x b 2 Assigning internal outputs The sample program is created using the following assignments In actual cases change the I O numbers and other items according to the application Usage Remarks 000 to OOE RECV 0 command Parameter area s to s 14 0100 to 010B RECV 0 command Communication control bit are
552. tion Item number Command High function module transfer commands 4 RECV 7 d s t ID reader Receives data from the ID i reception reader module with the d WY Dumny I O command CPU s ladder program s WR WL WM 5 TRNS 8 d s t Telecommu Controls the modem with the t R L M nication CPU s ladder program d WY Dummy I O command s WR WL WM 7 Also supported by the EH CPU308T 316T 5 14 Chapter 5 Command Specifications 8 FUN commands These commands are supported by the EH CPU308 316 and 448 5 15 c y 2 8 2 lmla o SIE ae Ja jut ji a Process 5 Ladder E2 pen I O types NININININ i D z bol E Command name Process descriptions OC Oc time u s Remarks B E symbo z gt used bg BI o oS 2 peR eRR so v c EH 150 4 1 FUN 0 s PID operation Initializes the area for PID s WR e e e e e 1 661 3 Number of z PIDIT s initialization operation loops 1 s gt 2 FUN 1 s PID operation Performs control for PID o 83 8 2 PIDOP s execution control operation execution 3 FUN 2 s PID operation Executes PID operation 87 Number of PIDCL s calculation loops 1 8 4 FUN 4 s Process stepping Performs the process stepping s WR WL WM 208 IFR s proces
553. tions lt gt Relational expression lt gt RELATIONAL Item number Arithmeticcommands 17 Name EXPRESSION Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPusas EH cpus Other than d sl lt gt s2 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e e J Upper 0 4 36 75 192 case W Command format Number of steps Lower Condition Steps case DW y A d sl lt gt s2 s is a word 4 18 amp 43 amp 84 202 M s is a double Word 6 i go Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR 5 Usable I O X Y L WDT MSs WX WY wL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM DM 6 RCU CT d Substitution destination OIO s1 Comparand oj jojljolololololloO s2 Relational number O O0O o0 O0 O0 0 0 0 Function e Substitutes 1 when s1 is not equal to s2 and otherwise 0 into d assuming s1 and s2 as binary data Cautionary notes e The combinations of d s1 and s2 are as follows ae Double word Double word Program example Y00000 WR0000 lt gt WRO001 H Y00000 WR0000 lt gt WR0001 Program description e When WRO000 WR0001 1 is set in Y00000 Otherwise Y00000 is reset to 0 5 77 Chapter 5 Command Specifications en HUIBEE ES ae a ae Sign
554. tively Chapter 15 Operation Examples a a If a wrong value has been entered the slot is left blank by assigning Vacant 0 and is treated as though nothing is assigned to it 4 Click the Execute button The information assigned to the PC memory is written 5 Click the OK button in the confirmation dialogue box to close the I O Assignment List dialogue box Confirmation dialogue box 170 Assignment Table 15 5 Mounted ho Setting from the Slot Setting Status Click the Slot button to display the Slot Setting Status dialogue box 1 Click the V of the unit and select the unit number from the pull down display 2 Click the button of the slot number to be set Slot Setting Status dialogue box 3 Click the W of the data and select the I O type from the pull down display 4 Click the OK button and close the Assignment Setting dialogue box T O type is set to the specified slot no Specification of I O type In the same way repeat the steps 1 and 2 to 4 to set other unit and slot numbers in order to perform T O assignment according to the unit to be used In this example Y32 and 16 vacant points are assigned to slots 1 and 2 respectively 5 Click the Close button to close the Slot Setting
555. to 255 Decimal t Ols 1s 1s 1 to 65 535 Decimal Function The progress value is updated when the startup condition is on and the coil switches on when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set value If the startup condition switches off the progress value is cleared and the coil switches off The progress value is set in TC n and does not exceed 65 535 decimal If the progress value is updated while the system is running the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point If an I O is set for the set value the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I O value since the set values are updated during each scan Cautionary notes The 01s time base can only be used for timer numbers 0 to 63 64 points The 1s and 1s time bases can be used for all timer numbers 0 to 255 A maximum of 256 points can be used for the timers TD SS MS TMR and WDT in total However the same area as the counter is used Timer number and counter number may not be overlapped The progress value is updated when the timer command is expected in the EH CPU448 Therefore if a program that does not scan the timer command execution section after the timer is activated is created using the JMP command or master control MCS the timer may not turn on correctly The timer does not turn on correctly when the time that does not scan the timer c
556. to 31 of the lower 5 bits b4 to b0 of n WX WY WR WL WM TC Upper bits are ignored and considered 0 The n constant can be set to 0 to 31 decimal Cautionary notes e Ifnis equal to 0 the shift is not performed The previous state is retained in C 5 87 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Program example LD X00000 X00000 Defective unit input OUT TES To SD LD X00001 X00001 DIF1 AND DIF1 JHI SHR DR0000 1 L X00001 Conveyor movement SHR DR0000 1 Y00100 Defective unit output Carry LD R7F0 OUT Y00100 X00000 Y00100 Program description e There exists a conveyor that has 16 stands and is moving to the right e Each time the conveyor moves one stand to the right a pulse input enters X00001 e There is a sensor on the left end of the conveyor and when a defective unit is placed on the conveyor X00000 turns on X00000 sensor input and X00001 conveyor movement signals are as follows X00000 X00001 As the conveyor moves to the right the data is also shifted one bit at a time and when data exits to the carry on the right end of the conveyor the Y00100 solenoid valve turns on and rejects the defective unit L gt Sensor X00000 Y00100 b15 bO Solenoid valve xio X00000 Conveyor movement Y00000 b15 bO 0 1 0 0 10 Oo 0 0 1 0 SD R7F2 gt C R7F0 Shifts one bit at a time 5 88 Chapter 5 Comma
557. to HFFFFFFFF hexadecimal Cautionary notes Number of steps wes f Dee Double word LD AND s1 lt s2 OR s1 lt s2 AND G1 OR I Program example WR0000 R007 LD WR0000 lt WR0002 lt o OUT R007 WR0002 Program description e When WR0000 lt WR0002 R007 turns on 5 58 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 40 Name Signed lt Relational box SIGNED lt RELATINAL BOX Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPusas EH cpus Other than TTA Vong See Function column DER ERR SD Vv C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max How e e e e e vuv Command format Number of steps o A E Jq LD sl S lt s2 Condition Steps 19 4 26 4 74 0 1126 7 81 3 137 4 AND sl S lt s2 Double word See Cautionary notes OR s1 S lt s2 Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR z Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY wWL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 6 RCU CT sl Relational number 1 O O0 0 0 s2 Relational number 2 olojo Function Ladder format sl sl sl S lt S lt S lt s2 s2 s2 b31 bO e Compares sl and s2 as signed double word numbers and if s1 is less than or equal to s2 it enters the continuity status on and Se if s1 is greater than s2 it enters the noncontinuity status off Sign
558. to s2 and otherwise 0 into d assuming s1 and s2 as signed binary data sl and s2 are both signed binary data When the most significant bit is 0 the value is positive when the most significant bit is 1 the value is negative sl s2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 decimal H80000000 to H7FFFFFFF hexadecimal b31 b16 b15 bO to Sign bit 0 Positive 1 Negative Program example Y00100 DL3FE S lt DL13FE Y00100 DLO3FE S lt DL13FE Program description e When the value in DL3FE is less than or equal the value in DLI3FE Y00100 is turned on Otherwise Y00100 is turned off 5 82 Item number Chapter 5 Command Specifications d n Ladder format BSET d n Command format BSET d n Usable I O T O to be set the bit Bit location to be set Function e Sets the nth bit in the I O word or double word specified by d to 1 e Other bit contents are unaltered If d is a word If d is a double word Application commands 1 Name Bit set BIT SET Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPus4s EH cpus Other than DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e Upper 13 e 50 86 lt case W Number of steps L ower Condition Steps case DW 3 15 e 66 e
559. top running when a error occurs periodic scan overload error occurs Turned off by periodic scan Continue running when the user or overload error occurs turned off even when power failure memory is cleared Turned on by Continue when overload Stop running when overload the user error occurs Designates continue stop running when an error occurs interrupt scan overload error occurs interrupt scan Continue running when overload error occurs R7C3 REMOTE RUN allowed 0 RUN prohibited Designates whether operation based on the task 1 RUN allowed code is allowed R7C4 REMOTE STOP allowed 0 STOP prohibited Designates whether stop based on the task 1 STOP allowed code is allowed RICE Undefined CO A R7C6 Undefined Dons SSS O O O T R7C7 Modification during RUN 0 Modification during RUN Designates whether online change in RUN is prohibited allowed in the user program Modification during RUN allowed R7C8 Serious failure flag 0 one Serious failure R7C9 Microcomputer abnormal 0 Normal R7CA User memory abnormal 0 Normal ee Abnormal user memory RICH Undefined Turned on by the user Turned off by the user or turned off even Indicates whether there is an abnormal in the system No serious failure when power failure memory is cleared Indicates whether there is an abnormal in the microcomputer Turned on by the system Indicates whether there is an abnormal in the R
560. tput setting WR0101 H3FDF WR0100 H66F3 Operation result WRO103 H42C8 WRO102 H0000 t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 238 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 46 Floating Point Operation SIN Ladder format Condition code Processing time us nartu enoruer Oran ae eee ee Command format Number of steps 3 FUN 110 s FSIN s Word Double word word e l TEE DM s Argument CEE EE eE e E i ees Function s 3 s 2 s 1 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FSIN Real number portion Real number portion Calculates the sine value of the real number value in radian units specified in s and s 1 as the arguments then sets the result in s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used When the operation result is not within the range of 1e 37 to le 37 DER is set to 1 If s to s 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed When the value of s s 1 is greater than 1 414847550405688000e 16 the sine value cannot be calculated thus DER is set to 1 When the value of s s 1 is greater than 2 981568260000000000e 08 a result is obtained but the accuracy decreases so DER is set to 1 Program example
561. ts the Set by the system Cleared by the ae Undefined for the EH set value or by the user user Hour minute 24 hour system Stores the read hour minute value or sets the eee oe Stores the read second value or sets the set value WRFO020 Communication module Status data WRFOIF to F021 status slot 0 WRFO022 Communication module Status da Fors maan n r WRF024 Communication module Status da fan RFO26 Communication module Status da RFO28 Communication module Set by the Cleared by the status slot 4 system system ommunication module Status dai status slot 5 ed Refer to communication module specifications mmunication module Status da for details mmunication module Status da WRFO030 Communication module Status da to F031 status slot 8 WRFO32 Undefined Do not use to F035 13 5 Chapter 13 Special Internal Outputs No Name Meaning Description Setting Resetting condition condition 15 WRFO036 Selection of Perera o a pais eben a RS 485 b RS 422 c RS 232C d switching monitoring flag The user turns to 1 the bits corresponding to the port to be selected a to c and the switching monitoring flag d The system resets d when the switching of ports is completed Value set by the user__ Display after port switching WRFO37 Setting of port 1 ss tae wel Ss 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 communication function a Setting bit 1 Set This bit is set to
562. tton This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the fixation can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws 3 LED display switch This is a switch used to toggle between the LED s for the upper level 16 points and the LED s for the lower level 16 points of the output display When the switch is toggled to the left side towards the silk screened L on the surface the lower level 16 points 0 through 15 will be displayed When the switch is toggled to the right side towards the silk screened H on the surface the upper level 16 points 16 through 31 will be displayed External wiring connector A connector for output signals Applicable connectors Caution Please refer to the Remarks column and purchase the appropriate Manufacturer Fujitsu e Approximately 120 mm connector separately Takamizawa 4 72 in of space will be e Solder type required in the front of Socket FCN 361J040 AU the module for the Cover FCN 360C040 E connector and cable Crimp type Please choot the Housing FCN 363J040 installation location Contact FCN 363J AU space accordingly Cover FCN 360C040 E Use a shielded cable and always use a class D Pressure displacement i type grounding FCN 367J040 AU F 4 26 Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification table transistor output module 12 24 V DC 10 15 Minimum switching curr
563. tunaosenuiien cesses neductedessteshtestaeneld EEEE EURAS 7 1 7 2 Programming Method ccccccecceiesccssecetcegeesssceacusesstsctesssecchesacvncudeowesdhlgncesascuadercd ded cuteusnadecondendoucnesadeccsdassates 7 1 Chapter 8 Operating and Stopping EH 150 8 1 to 8 12 St RON Staite cat arte estate tse E E EEE A cae ulene hase eat eo T 8 2 8l SCAN OPSTALLOM 6 sa cvccsecercuececidvecvscssnasacencessveutdvacevasciadensssescacarcugevicedaacctesdhaviceasexcdusacundutesdecessescans 8 2 8 1 2 Setting System Processing Time EH CPU448 ccececccesceseeeseeseceseeeceseeseceseeseeesecseeeaeeeeeseeneens 8 3 8 1 3 Setting System Processing Time EH CPU308 316 oo eee eseeeeseeeesesseceesessceseeeceeseeeseesesseeaeeas 8 4 Ble SSN OPA SCAN Bees eek tat sieht tne E A creat E E E A ea git decussate 8 5 8 1 5 Periodical Scan Other than the EH CPU448 oo eee cececssessesseeseeeceececseesesaesaeeseeeseesseesesaeeaeeas 8 6 8 1 6 Periodical Scan EH CPU448 7 8 2 Online Change mi RUN stvsnceseeheshealn eevee ears Ea e EEEa Ae a eich oie eran ay 8 8 2 1 Cautionary Items for Changing Programs in RUN eceesssesseeseeseneeeeeeeesesseeaeeseeeceesseeseseeeaeeas 8 8 8 2 2 HALT time dv uaa E E sucutovaveccateadabes loses sotauasneroanssevddn co tedduged T 8 9 3 nstanitaneous Power Eate eo rnes reaa E AEE E ENEE cess AE E EAEE E ER 8 10 8 4 Operation Parameter nonesis inico EEOAE EE TENE EENT Ee ONEEN EENE EE aE rE noA NaN 8 11 8 5
564. ule in slot 1 of the basic QO 1 base gt 5 a al 2 5 a CPU gt 8 module fa a Ko b Slave station side 0 4 Mount the 16 point input module in slot 0 of the basic EE base and mount the 16 point output module in slot 1 of gt a the basic base fx Z D gt ta no O 3 2 8 3 ele a 10 8 Chapter 10 Communication Specifications 2 Assigning internal outputs The sample program is created using the following assignments In actual cases change the I O numbers and other items according to the application a Assigning internal outputs on the master station side Co wo ooe S 100 to 10E TRNS 0 instruction Parameter area s to s 14 000 to 00B TRNS 0 instruction Communication control bit area t to t 11 Transmission data setting completion flag WR WL 001 to 003 Reception data storage area b Assigning internal outputs on the slave station side Usage WM RECV 0 instruction Parameter area s to s 14 WR 0000 to 000E TRNS 0 instruction Parameter area s to s 14 0200 to 021F Transmission data area 32 word 3 Transmission format The following shows the formats that are used when transmitting data between the master station and slave station a Request format from the master station to slave station a maximum of 3 bytes Start code Slave station number b Response format from the slave station to master station a maximum of 5 bytes Any data can
565. umber Basic commands 24 Name Single shot SINGLE SHOT Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark po R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu448 EH cpus Other than A 0 DER ERR SD V C Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max e e e A Command format Number of steps 3 Condition Steps 21 4 lt 9 85 12 2 OUT SS nts 5 Bit Word Double word R TD ss WR DR amp Usable I O X Y L WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY IDL 2 Other M TMR CU WM MIS RCU CT n Timer number O 0 to 255 Decimal t Time base Ols 1s 1s s Set value Olojo O 1 to 65 535 Decimal Function e Detects the rising edge of the startup condition starts updating progress values and switches on the coil e The coils switches off when the progress value is greater than or equal to the set If a rising edge is detected while the progress value is less than the set value the progress value is set to 0 and the counter is reset e The progress value is set in TC n and does not exceed 65535 decimal e Ifthe progress value is updated while the system is running the operation will be performed using the new progress value at that point e Ifan I O is set for the set value the set value can be changed during operation by changing the I O value since the set values are updated during each scan Cautionary notes e The 01s time base can only be used for timer numbers 0 to 63 64
566. umber Basic commands 32 Name Counter clear COUNTER CLEAR Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F3 R7F2 R7FI R7FO EH cPu443 EH cpu3 Other than CLn left oH ERR SD V Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max Command format Number of steps Bit Usable I O Y MS WX S OUT CL n Constant Counter number O 0 to 511 Decimal Function Clears the TD SS and MS progress values of the integral timer and switches off the timer coil In the case of WDT a time monitor check is performed see WDT for details In the case of counters the progress value is cleared and the counter coil is switched off The clearing operation is conducted immediately before the counter or timer indicated by the clear coil executes the coil command Example 200990 When X00000 is turned on the CL10 immediately prior to CU10 turns on and CU10 is cleared X00001 Even if X00002 turns on if X00001 is off the CL10 is turned off by X00002 the ladder before CU10 is executed Therefore the CU10 will not be cleared Cautionary notes e The number same as on the timer or counter must be used 5 51 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Basic commands 33 Name Relational box SRELATIONAL BOX Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark Other than R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU
567. umber of characters then stores it FUN 43 s HEX s ASCII gt BIN conversion designated Converts an ASCII code of the designated number of characters to binary data then stores it FUN 44 s SADD s Merge character strings Merges the designated character stings up to NULL then stores it in the I O at the designated position FUN 45 s SCMP s Compare character strings Compares the designated character stings up to NULL then stores the comparison result FUN 46 s WTOB s Word gt byte conversion Divides 16 bit word data converts it to 8 bit byte data then stores it FUN 47 s BTOW s Byte word conversion Divides 8 bit byte data merges it into 16 bit word data then stores it FUN commands additional commands for the EH CPU448 2 2 Classification Item number Ladder symbol Command symbol Command name Process descriptions I O types used Chapter 5 Command Specifications Process time us EH 150 Remarks FUN commands Ke FUN 48 s BSHR s Right shift byte unit Shifts the designated data string to the right for the number of the designated bytes 8 bits n FUN 49 s BSHL s Left shift byte unit Shifts the designated data string to the left for the number of the designated bytes 8 bits n FUN 60 s Binary
568. umber of simultaneous connections Maximum 6 Transmission data Maximum 1 454 bytes try 4 47 Functional specifications Item Chapter 4 System Equipment Specification Setup function e Select the setup mode using a DIP switch and perform initial settings such as the IP address transmission operation specification transmission reception area specification using a general purpose Web browser e The IP address can also be set by programming with a ladder program Auto Sending Receiving function event transmission function e Data can be transmitted and received periodically by specifying an internal output signal in a table format e Data can be transmitted and received by signal variation event in a ladder program Task code communication e Either TCP IP or UDP IP can be specified e H series task code communication can be performed Test function e Internal loop and external loop check functions are supported e One to one transmission reception test function is supported 3 Example of setup function To create Ethernet information and an auto communication table the setup page of the general Web browser is used The following shows the setup tool screen 24 frame Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edt View Favorites Tools Help Ie ODAONOIR SO eee __a ee IP Address Information Setting EH ETH Information IP address Subnet mask Default gateway
569. umber of steps Condition Steps 453 lt FUN 60 s 3 BSQR s Bit Word Double word R TD SS WR DR S Usable I O X Y JL WDT MS WX WY WL TC DX DY DL 2 Other M TMR CU WM pm 6 RCU CT s Argument lower O s 2 Argument higher O s uses up to s 2 Function 15 0 H s 2 e The square root of the 32 bit binary value specified by arguments s lower and s 1 higher is calculated and stored in s pis e Ifthe operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e Ifs 1tos 2 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example LD X00600 AND DIF60 WR0000 H12345678 FUN 60 WR0100 X00600 DIF60 DR0100 H12345678 FUN 60 WR0100 Program description e Stores the 32 bit binary value H12345678 in WR0100 and WR0101 e The conversion result is stored in WR0102 Execution results DR0100 H12345678 WR0102 H4444 17476 Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 221 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 32 Dynamic scan pulse command PULSE GENERATING FUNCTION EH CPU448 EH cPu3s Other than Ns PGEN s a erie oes Le 3 FUN 61 s PGEN s WR DR Usable I O X Y L WX WY WL TC DX DY DL M WM DM No of ON scan pulse No of OFF scan pulse Pulse output I
570. unding on the shielded cable side 2 Do not wire the common line through the shielded cable Be sure to wire it independently and separately from the power line I O lines or power supply line 3 The supply line to the external power supply should be wired as close as possible to the common terminal of the input module 9 5 Chapter 9 PLC Installation Loading Wiring 6 Output wiring for the output module Relay output Transistor output Transistor output EH YR12 sink type source type EH YT16 EH YT8 EH YTP16 EH YTP8 j e Surge killer or diode QDOOOOHD 0000000 00000000 12 24 V DC FUSE 000000000 FUSE 12 24 V DC H 100 240 V AC Example of EH YT16 Example of EH YTP16 Figure 9 6 Output wiring a Wiring for the relay output module 1 Life of relay contacts Life curve of relay contacts 1000 EATE Life of the contact is also in squared reverse 500 proportion to the current so be aware that 24 V DC R load i 5 7 cts gt interrupting rush current or directly driving g A T N 240 V AC R load 100 aR eae the condenser load will drastically reduce the S z life of the relay Ss 240 V AC L load n gt r When switching is done with high frequency o i use a transistor output module 2 z n 1 0 1 0 5 1 2 Shut off current A 2 Surge killer For inductiv
571. unit data s Word unit data head I O No al s 1 Converted byte unit data head s 2 No n of converted bytes e The word character string data of the head I O specified by argument s is divided into byte units for the number of bytes specified by argument s 2 and the result is stored in the head I O area specified by s 1 e Use the ADRIO command to set the actual addresses in the head I Os of s tos 1 e The higher byte of the divided data is set to HOO e If the operation is performed normally DER is set to 0 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used The ADRIO command should be used to set the actual addresses in s and s 1 If not DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by them overlap DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed If s to s 2 and the areas specified by s and s 1 exceed the maximum I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Only the EH CPU448 is supported 5 215 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Conversion from byte units to word units Item number Fun commands 28 Name CONVERSION BYTES TO WORDS Ladder format Condition code Processing time us Remark R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH cPu44s EH CPU3 4 ee FUN 47 s 10 bytes BTOW s word Command format Number of steps B 5 words 3 FUN 47 s BTOW s Wa
572. upported 5 231 FUN 102 s Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Fun commands 39 Name Floating Point Operation Integer Double Word to Real Number Conversion Ladder format Condition code Processing time us R7F4 R7F3 R7F2 R7F1 R7FO EH CPU448 EH CPU3 eee FUN 103 s DER ee Ave Max Ave Max Ave Max FLOATD s Condition FUN 103 s FLOATD s Wwa O Double word word Ps feme e e Function s 3 s 2 s 1 15 0 15 0 15 015 0 Real number portion Real number portion 4 FLOATD Integer portion Integer portion Converts the integer double word data s and s 1 to a real number then sets the result s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used Cautionary notes e An integer value in the range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 can be set for s and s 1 e Ifstost 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed Program example X00200 s S01 NN4 LD X00200 DRO100 H00020001 FUN103 WRO100 DR0100 H00020001 FUN 103 WR0100 Program description e At arising edge of X0200 the integer specified in DRO100 WR0100 WR0101 is converted to a real number and the result is set in
573. upported The EH CPU308 3 16 448 can use the new memory boards EH MEMP MEMD that have been made available The EH MEMP is capable of storing up to 48 k steps of user programs Also by using the program transfer function the programs can be copied without the use of peripheral devices Furthermore the EH MEMD is capable of storing a maximum of 384 k words of data When using a memory board the contents of the memory board are not changed during transfer of programs from peripheral devices or when RUN is in progress Only the program within the CPU will be changed If changes are necessary copy the program within the CPU using the program transfer function of the memory board Can only be used with the EH CPU308 3 16 448 PID operation function is supported PID control can be performed without the use of additional modules A variety of process inputs and outputs can be supported by directly controlling the analog I O module By using this function continuous control targets such as temperature and flow rate can be controlled in a prompt and smooth manner Can only be used with the EH CPU308 3 16 448 1 1 Chapter 1 Features Ease of use to facilitate incorporation into other devices The EH 150 is designed so that it can be installed on easy to use DIN rails The user programs can be retained even if he or she does not wish to use a battery with the system The EH 150 supports a Online change in RUN function that allows the use
574. ut Sti ie O Word 4 096 8 192 17 408 22 528 50 176 Cor o paesone woes wees wens woes wes SIZ words Dr D Donbie word special internal output Common use M B Bit internal output ofbit word DM D_ Double word intemal ouput Edge detection DIF B Riseedee 512 points DAN B Falledge SSCS 512 points Master control MCS B Mastercontrolstt 50 points MCR B Master contor Time TD B Ondeaytimer Lss B Singieshoriner wor B Watchdogtimer PMs B Monosableime TMR B Accumulative timer m 256 points 0 01 s timer has only 9 to 63 Ceu B Upcome i The same No Carino be used to timer counter TM is available with only EH CPU448 Rou B Ring cou na OA Counter 512 points The same area as the timer is used in CTU B Up down counter up input the range up to 256 points CTD B_ Up down counter down input The same No cannot be used to timer counter or B Updown counter down ouput Ler B Progress vate cter 6 1 Chapter 6 I O Specifications 6 1 External I O When operation start is performed for the EH 150 the user program is executed scanned after the input refresh processing receiving external input data is performed Operations are performed according to the contents of the user program and the next input refresh processing and output refresh processing operation results are reflected in the external output are performed After that t
575. ut either one can be connected to either side 4 36 Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 16 Memory Board Name and function of each part Type EH MEMP EH MEMD 2 Base connector Weight Approx 0 05 kg 0 11 1b Dimensions 1 DIP switch mm in 3 Metal clip 74 2 91 DIP switch Sets the switching of the program transfer direction and compare function Metal clip Screw bracket for CPU case Memory board specifications Program capacity 48 k steps 16 k steps Program transfer function Available FLASH With the EH MEMP and EH MEMD the operation upon startup will change depending on the dip switch settings 1 Transfer from CPU to EH MEMP 2 Transfer to CPU from EH MEMP 3 Comparison between CPU and EH MEMP 4 Operation with information stored in the EH MEMP The EH MEMD can delete write and read log data by using commands When using the EH MEMD for the first time the RUN LED will rapidly flash at 250 ms intervals for approximately 3 seconds for initialization of the memory board when power is first supplied Be sure to turn of the power supply of the PLC unit when mounting or removing the memory board from the CPU module When mounting it to the CPU module be sure to fix it to the CPU module case with binding screw M3 x 4 attached Additionally do not install the CPU module in the base unit with the memory board still attached to the CPU module Doing so may cause inappropriat
576. ut logic positive negative become invalid CHO logic Also used to set whether or not external input is used Turn off the power and remove the module to perform settings Additional information CW CCW pulse output Negative logic Clock pulse Directional signal output Positive logic Unused Unused PO COIN not COIN Sets whether or not the positioning complete signal input input COIN is externally input 0 RUN 0 input Sets whether or not the direction over run not input O RUN is externally input 0 RUN 0 input Sets whether or not the direction over run not input O RUN is externally input 4 41 1 3 4 j2 5 Chapter 4 System Equipment General specifications Current consumption 5 V DC 300 mA 600 mA When the positioner is connected Supply power from the power supply module Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Storage ambient temperature 10 to 75 C Operating ambient humidity 20 to 90 RH no condensation Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation No corrosive gases no excessive dirt Cooling method Natural air cooling Approx 0 18 kg 0 4 Ib External dimensions mm 30 1 18 in W x 100 3 94 in H x 95 37 4 in D 170 6 7 in D with I O connector External power supply 5 V DC 5 100 mA For pulse chain output 24 V DC 10 mA point For external control input Function specifications Item Specification Number
577. value in radian units specified in s and s 1 as the arguments the sets the result in s 2 and s 3 If the calculation is completed normally DER is equal to 0 The floating point format conforms to IEEE754 indicates the display when the LADDER EDITOR is used When the operation result is not within the range of 1e 37 to 1e 37 DER is set to 1 If s to s 3 exceeds the maximum value of the I O number DER is set to 1 and no operation is performed When the value of s s 1 is greater than 1 414847550405688000e 16 2 the tangent value cannot be calculated and DER is set to 1 When the value of s s 1 is greater than 2 981568260000000000e 08 2 a result is obtained but the accuracy decreases so DER is set to 1 Program example X00200 DIFO FUN 112 8 LD X00200 DR0100 H3F060A92 AND DIFO FUN112 WRO100 DR0100 H3F060A92 FUN 112 WRO100 Program description e Atarising edge of X0200 the tangent value of the real number specified in DRO100 WRO100 WRO101 is calculated and the result is set in DRO102 WRO102 WRO103 Internal output setting WR0101 H3F06 WRO100 HOA92 Operation result WRO103 H3F13 WRO102 HCD3A t The EH CPU104 208 are not supported 5 241 Chapter 5 Command Specifications Item number Floating Point Operation ARC SIN EH CPU448 EH cPUs Other than FUN 113 s Der ERR sp v c FASIN 9 eerie lee Condition 3
578. ve gases no excessive dirt Cooling method Natural air cooling External power supply 24 V DC 10 supplied from the network 4 49 Performance specifications Chapter 4 System Equipment Item Specification 1 No of installed units 2 units CPU 2 No of slave connected units 63 units 3 I O assignment LINK 4 Output data 256 words Head is fixed at WLO 5 Input data 256 words Head is fixed at WL200 6 Communication protocol DeviceNet 2 0 standard 7 Supported connections 1 Poll I O connection 2 Bit strobe I O connection 3 Cyclic I O connection 4 Change of state COS I O connection 5 Explicit message connection 8 Connection mode 1 Multi drop connection 2 Multi branch connection using T branch 9 Baud rate 500k 250k 125kbps switched by DIP switches 10 Cable Dedicated DeviceNet cable see Note below 11 Communication distance Note Mfe d by Nichifu Mfg d by Showa Densen Communicati Maximum Each sub line Total sub line on speed network length length length 500 k bits s 100 m or less 6 m or less 39 m or less 250 k bits s 250 m or less 6 m or less 78 m or less 125 k bits s 500 m or less 6 m or less 156 m or less TDN24 G Drop cable thin cable indicates the number of m s However available lengths are 10 30 50 100 300 500m TME TC 1 25 11 communication line Drop cable crimp type terminal TME TC 0 5 common power suppl
579. vices has been performed 7 Run stop control Running and stopping of the CPU module is normally performed by the user 1 Turn the RUN switch on to begin operation Turn the switch off to stop operation 2 The start and stop operation can be performed via communication from peripheral devices PC by changing to the REMOTE mode using the setting switch The start and stop operation can be performed with designated external inputs or internal outputs by designating operation control inputs with a programming device Apart from the above described operation if a malfunction is detected in the system while it is running operation stops and the outputs are shut down OFF If the power is shut off and then turned back on while the system is running operation starts When the power shuts off turn off the power to the EH 150 then shut off the external input power When turning the power back on turn on the external input power before turning on the power to the EH 150 When starting operation do so after clearing internal information which is not designated for storage during power failure When stopping operation leave the internal information as is turn off the outputs and then stop When the power has been cut off for longer than the time allowed for instantaneous power failure then depending on the system load status either operation continues or the system perceives that a power shut off has occurred and restarts operation To ensu
580. ving data length G Receiving data structure Receiving data length _ ii Parameter settings S 10 8 Receiving data length gt _ 1 lt n lt 256 within the receiving data area size S 11 9 Start code 4 15_b14 0 S 12 10 End code A 0 Any data 15_b14 0 0 Any data Priority order among start code end code and receiving data length Action Receives according Received according Receives according Receives according to the receiving data to the start code and to the end code to the codes data length receiving data length length is ignored 7 Description of area t t 11 t 2 1 10 9 7 lala lala B J Bit serby ne user Communication execution This bit is set to 1 when the communication is performed using the TRNS 0 command After communication is completed the TRNS 0 command resets the area to 0 Normal completion This bit is set to 1 when communication started by the TRNS 0 command ends normally Also the TRNS 0 command resets this bit to 0 when communication is commenced Abnormal completion This bit is set to 1 when communication started by the TRNS 0 command ends abnormally Also the TRNS 0 command resets this bit to 0 when communication is commenced Initialization request This bit is set to 1 when the TRNS 0 command is initialized
581. w ample space for air circulation 50 mm 1 97 in or more at top and bottom 10 mm 0 39 in or more to the left and right b Avoid installing the unit directly above equipment that generates a lot of heat heater transformer large capacity resistance etc c When the ambient temperature reaches more than 55 C install a fan or cooler to lower the temperature to below 55 C 3 Avoid mounting inside a panel where high voltage equipment is installed 4 Install 200 mm 7 87 in or more away from high voltage lines or power lines 5 Avoid upside down vertical or horizontal mounting 109 4 29 14 0 55 10 mm 0 39 in 10mm 0 39 in z or more or more 3 S 3 Figure 9 2 External dimensions 10 mm 0 39 in 10mm 0 39 in y e ae ee ae Dimensional table Base L1 Outer L2 Mounted dimensions dimensions 50 mm 1 97 in or more 222 5 8 76 207 8 15 282 5 11 12 267 10 51 arme gis 372 5 14 67 357 14 06 Figure 9 1 Amount of installation Uitm Gn b Mounting to a DIN rail Attaching to a DIN rail 1 Hook the claw fixed at the bottom of the base unit to the DIN rail 2 Press the base unit into the DIN rail until it 1 clicks 4 Note After installation check to make sure the base unit is securely fixed 2 9 1 Chapter 9 PLC Installation Loading Wiring Fixing the unit CEH ASO mA gt Jinli HITACI FENERE A Secure the unit by installing DIN r
582. x x x x SLREF FUN 90 Expansion timer initial setting x x x x x x x TDIT i per er no Expansion counter up down counter initial x x x x x x x x setting Expansion counter execution x x x x x x x x 50 FUN 94 Expansion up down counter up execution x x x x x x x x ECTU 51 FUN 95 Expansion up down counter down execution x x x x ECTD 52 FUN 96 Expansion counter clear x x x x Flow decimal point operation real number gt VO refresh Input output designation integral number word conversion Flow decimal point operation real number gt integral number double word conversion Flow decimal point operation integral number word real number conversion Flow decimal point operation integral number FLOATD double word real number conversion N 104 Flow decimal point operation addition FADD N 106 Flow decimal point operation multiplication FMUL N 107 Flow decimal point operation division FDIV N 108 Flow decimal point operation N 105 Flow decimal point operation subtraction UB angle radian conversion radian angle conversion N 110 Flow decimal point operation SIN ea O Supported x Not supported The EH CPU448 is supported The EH CPU308 316 and 448 are supported A 10 Appendix 2 H series Command Support Comparison Chart FUN commands 4 5 he format to H 700 H 1002 H 20 H 300 H 702 N 112 Flow decimal point operation TAN
583. ximum 60 steps Write data 1 step is equivalent to 4 bytes 1 EH 150 does not support HI FLOW Response a a Response task code HOO when executed normally For task codes other than the normal task codes refer to the response list by task code at the end of this chapter A 32 Appendix 3 Task Codes Specifications 1 The configuration of use memory User memory The configuration and address of the user H0003 gt memory are shown in the diagram to the right Parameter area Gat H0160 gt Parameter area Parameter area B HI FLOW area n steps HI LADDER area H0280 gt A H0280 n steps Note Obtain the HI LADDER area head address using the following equation Head address H0280 HI FLOW area capacity Obtain the HI FLOW area capacity using the task code H35 read memory assignment 2 Description of each function 1 Parameter area A subcommand H00 Writes the designated data 1 in parameter area A Note After executing this command always execute the task code H27 parameter change completion when the memory write processing is completed HI FLOW area subcommand H01 Writes the designated program 1 to the HI FLOW area Note EH 150 does not support HI FLOW HI LADDER area subcommand H02 Writes the designated program 1 to the HI LADDER area Parameter area B subcommand H03 Write the designated program 1 to parameter area
584. xing is necessary use M3 x 6 mm 0 24 in set screws Power terminal block This is used when power is supplied externally and for the grounding wiring 4 10 Chapter 4 System Equipment Remarks item O Detailed explanation Operation explanation Converts 24 V DC power supplied externally into the power 5 V DC that can POWER lamp Lock button Front cover Front cover set screws Power terminal block be used inside the EH 150 21 6 V to 26 4 V DC can be used for the external power voltage Connect the power supply 24 V DC to drive relays etc directly with the external power supply The operating status can be confirmed with the POWER lamp on the front of the module When lit When unlit Indicates that DC power is on supply Indicates that the DC power supply is not energized the power supply is shorted or there is a voltage overload When flashing Indicates that the power has exceeded the rated output It is used to remove the power module from the base unit Hold this button down while releasing the module from the unit The module loaded to the base unit can be further tightened with screws In this case use M4 x 10 mm 0 39 in screws Open and close the cover when performing cable wiring During operation keep the front cover closed When opening the cover shut the power off first to avoid getting an electric shock When fixing is necessary use M3 x 6 mm 0 24 in screws for the s
585. y 31 is set If the levels are the same the cause code generated last will be displayed The clearing of error special internal output is performed by setting the special internal output R7EC to 1 The R7EC can be set to 1 either by connecting the programming device or by including a subprogram that sets the R7EC using external input within the program If turning R7EC on by the program always set it on after the error cause has been verified However if R7EC is turned on by a program that would generate a watchdog error the system may clear the error cause and rerun after detecting a watchdog error Note Error codes are set in hexadecimal values Verify error codes by setting the monitor to hexadecimal display 14 1 GDA DPPF CMA DN BR wWW x is es Chapter 14 Troubleshooting The range of the special internal output that is cleared when R7EC is set to 1 is shown below Bit special internal output No Word special internal output Serious failure flag WRFO000 Self diagnostic error code TVO module abnormal slot number Communication module assignment verify mismatch Remote I O master station module abnormal slot number Undefined Remote abnormal Overload error normal scan Link module abnormal slot number Undefined Undefined Undefined Overload error periodical scan Overload error interrupt scan Undefined Self diagnostic error Communication module assignment over Lin
586. y line communication line Crimp tool NH 32 Node address and communication speed settings Lanne The following are recommended communication cables and crimp type terminals for the cables TDN18 G Trunk cable thick cable Trunk cable crimp type terminal TME TC 2 11 power supply line Node address NAI NA2 NA4 NA8 NAI6 NA32 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 62 OFF ON ON ON ON ON 63 ON ON ON ON ON ON Band rate DRO DRI 125 OFF OFF 250 ON OFF 500 OFF ON 4 50 The maximum network length shows the value when a thick trunk cable is used Chapter 4 System Equipment 4 22 DeviceNet Slave Module Name and function of each part Type EH IOCD Approx 0 17 kg 0 37 Ib 6 Lock button 7 Dimensions mm in 5 Dip switch 2 EUT y 2 Dip switch 1 4 Communication connector f 1 Reset switch This is the cover for the LED that displays the network status and error information Dip switch 1 Sets the node address and baud rate 4 Communication Connects to the network connector Dip switch 2 Sets to retain clear output for the output module on the EH 10CD Po 6 Lock button This is used when removing the module from the base unit After it is installed to the base unit the attachment can be reinforced using screws In this case use M4 x 1
587. yed Note Ifthe fuse is melted or blown do not supply power to the module after changing the fuse without eliminating the source of the problem Damage escalation smoke etc may otherwise result 9 6 Chapter 9 PLC Installation Loading Wiring c Wiring for the 32 point 64 point output module EH YT32 YTP32 EH YT64 YTP64 Based on CE marking EH YT32 EH YTP32 EH XD64 EH YTP64 S terminal li ye erminal line Shield cable Signal line Common terminal When EH YTP is used gt i Common line I i I I _ When EH YT is used__ Bo External power supply Cautionary notes 1 Wire only the signal line through the shielded cable and provide class D grounding on the shielded cable side 2 Do not wire the common line or S terminal line through the shielded cable Be sure to wire them independently and separately from the power line I O lines or power supply line 3 The supply line to the external power supply should be wired as close as possible to the common terminal of the output module Analog module I O wiring e Do not apply excess voltage to the analog input module beyond the rated input voltage Similarly do not subject the module to current that exceeds the rated input current Connecting the analog input module to a power supply other than the specified types may cause damage to the product or burning of its internal components e For unused channels of the analog input module sh

HITACHI EH150 APPLICATION MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents